Agrotron - 106-110-115-120-135-150-165 MK3 PDF

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
WORKSHOP MANUAL
AGROTRON 106 MK3

AGROTRON 110 MK3
AGROTRON 115 MK3
AGROTRON 120 MK3
AGROTRON 135 MK3
AGROTRON 150 MK3
AGROTRON 165 MK3
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instruction for repair technicians and
a practical guide to improving the quality of repairs.
This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the ma-
chine, indicating the correct methods for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for
accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections. The instructions also indicate the
products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data.
The technical material contained in this manual is reserved to Authorised Dealers and
Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the machines in
question through the issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and sup-
plements for optional equipment.
All technicians and their colleagues are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part
of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties without
the express written permission of the Manufacturer, who remains the sole owner of this
document with all rights reserved in accordance with applicable laws.
00-1
GENERAL SAFETY RULES
SAFETY NOTES
To ensure that machines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue to function cor-
rectly, it is very important that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner.
The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are safe and effective.
Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment: these tools have been designed for
a specific purpose and may ordered directly from the Manufacturers.
DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not only is there is risk of personal injury, but such tools are rarely suited to the
purpose for which they are used.
To prevent injury to operators, the symbols and are used in this manual to indicate the safety precautions re-
quired. The warnings accompanying these symbols must always be adhered to carefully.
In potentially hazardous situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary actions to eliminate
the danger.

1- Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the ma- 8 - Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting
chine as regards its components, operation and the engine in order to avoid the formation of danger-
controls, always take particular care when carrying ous concentrations of toxic gases; always connect
out the following operations. Remember that the ma- suitable fume extraction equipment to the exhaust
chine you are working on is in need of repair or over- pipe.
haul and consequently may not always behave as
expected. 9 - Under no circumstances start the engine with the
safety guards removed; all repair and adjustment
2 - Before starting work, clean the machine thoroughly operations must be carried out with the engine
to remove all mud, dust and road dirt. stopped.
Also clean the cab to remove all traces of oil, snow
and ice from the access steps and grab rails. 10 - Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the en-
gine is running.
3 - When climbing up to or down from the cab, always
ensure you maintain three points of contact at a time 11 - Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames
(foot or handholds) in order to keep your balance and nearby when topping up fuel or oil.
prevent accidental falls. Always remove the battery from the machine before
recharging.
4 - Always take special care when carrying out fault di-
agnosis operations; these operations often require 12 - Before checking or removing the battery, stop the
two persons, who must never stand in front of the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
wheels when the engine is running. 13 - Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated
5 - When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close- area where the temperature exceeds 0°C.
fitting clothing, safety goggles and protective gloves 14 - When checking or recharging the battery, do not
that are suitable for the task (cleaning, draining flu- smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity as the hy-
ids, repairs). drogen gas given off by the battery is highly explo-
When working near moving parts, long hair should sive.
be gathered up and secured safely under a cap to
prevent the risk of entanglement and sever injury. 15 - The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very
harmful if it comes into contact with the skin and the
6 - Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in eyes; for this reason, always wear gloves and safety
the work to come near the machine; ensure that they
goggles with side shields when checking or topping
remain at a safe distance.
up the battery.
7 - Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is Should any electrolyte accidentally come into con-
running, some moving parts are not easily visible and tact with your skin, wash the affected parts imme-
therefore present a risk of entanglement, even if pro- diately with copious amounts of water. If electrolyte
tected by safety guards. comes into contact with your clothing, this should be
removed as soon as possible.
00-3
In case of accidental ingestion of electrolyte, drink 25 - Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for
copious amounts of water, milk or vegetable oil and the weight of the components to be removed. Ensure
take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbonate, lifting equipment is attached correctly.
etc.. and seek medical attention immediately.
26 - When lifting or supporting an assembly or compo-
16 - Before working on the electrical systems, always nent, manoeuvre the parts slowly and carefully to
disconnect the battery terminals. avoid oscillation or collision with other components.
IMPORTANT!
Always disconnect the negative terminal (--) first and 27 - Never work on components suspended from a hoist
then the positive terminal (+); when re-connecting or crane.
the battery on completion of the work, first connect 28 - When removing the retaining bolts of a component
the positive terminal (+) and then the negative (--). that could fall, always leave two opposing bolts in
17 - Before carrying out any arc welding, on the tractor, place for safety; before removing these last two bol-
always disconnect the battery terminals and unplug ts, attach the component to suitable lifting equip-
all the connectors of the electronic control units and ment or position support blocks.
the alternator. 29 - Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling
18 - When topping up lubricants, always wear suitable operations should be cleaned up as soon as possible
protective gloves. to prevent the risk of slipping and fire.
19 - Do not wear clothing contaminated by engine or hy- 30 - When refitting electrical cables and wires, ensure
draulic oil; prolonged contact with the skin can be that they are secured with their original retaining
harmful and may cause allergic reactions. straps or brackets to prevent the possibility of dam-
age caused by vibration.
20 - Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed
of in a proper manner; recover used lubricants and 31 - Never insert your fingers or hands to check the align-
dispose of them in accordance with the applicable ment between fixing holes in components; always
regulations. use a suitable dowel of soft material.
21 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or 32 - When refitting assemblies or components, always
pneumatic systems, discharge all residual pressure use the specified tightening torques; the tightening
from the circuits. torques indicated in the paragraphs regarding as-
sembly/refitting operations have been determined
22 - Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system through experimentation and must be scrupulously
or engine, allow the oil and engine coolant to cool adhered to.
down.
33 - When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or
23 - When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it that rotate at high speed, take particular care when
will be necessary to support the machine; use carrying final installation checks.
stands, jacks or blocks capable of supporting the
weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to
prevent the machine from overturning.
24 - To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane.
Check that wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not
worn and that hooks are not damaged.
00-4
HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED
HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED
Section 00 Contains the general safety rules, information on how to use and update
the manual, the symbols used, the products required, the standard tight-
ening torques and a conversion table for units of measurement.
Section 10 Contains technical descriptions and information regarding the mechan-

ical and hydraulic operation of machine components, the designations of
the various components, hydraulic diagrams and general technical data.
Section 20 Contains a guide to the use of the necessary software for machine and en-
gine configuration and for diagnostic.
Section 30 Contains the methods, checks and adjustments regarding the external
components; the operations dealt with in this section do not require re-
moval of the various assemblies that form the tractor frame and cab.
Section 40 Contains information and diagrams regarding the machine's electrical

and electronic systems.
ATTENTION!
This manual does not contain the engine and transmision sections.
For these sections refer to the follow manuals:
Italian
English
Engine DEUTZ 1012 - 1013 0297 9771
French
German
0298 6837 German
0298 6838 English
Transmission ZF 7100L
0298 6839 French
0298 6840 Spanish
0298 6871 German
0298 6872 English
Transmission ZF 7100S
0298 6873 French
0298 6874 Spanish
0298 6877 German
0298 6878 English
Rear axle 7100
0298 9879 French
0298 9880 Spanish
0298 6831 German
0298 6832 English
Trasmission/rear axle 7200 L-S-H
0298 6833 French
0298 6834 Spanish
0298 6803 German
0298 6856 English
Front axle ZF 2025-2035-2045 AS
0298 6857 French
0298 6858 Spanish
00-5
HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL
HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL
1. Removal and refitting of assembled units

(1) For the removal or refitting of assembled units, the sequence of operations and the methods to be applied are de-
scribed in the removal procedure; if the refitting sequence of operations is the exact reverse of the removal pro-
cedure, it is not described.
(2) All special techniques that apply only to the refitting procedure are indicated by the symbol 1 ; this same
symbol appears at the end of each major step in the removal procedure to indicate the parts for which special
techniques are to be applied during refitting.
E.g.: REMOVAL OF UNIT : ................................................ Operation heading
: ............................................................................. Safety rules to be observed when carrying out the pro-
cedure described
1 - Remove part (1):...................................................... Step of the procedure
★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the re-
moval operation.
2 - Disconnect (2) ......... 1 : ...................................Indicates the existence of special information regar-
ding refitting of the component in question.
.......... : .............................................................. Recover oil, liquid or fuel and the quantity to be recov-
ered
E.g.: REFITTING UNIT: ...................................................... Operation heading
• Refitting is the reverse of removal
1 :.......................................................................Technique to be applied during refitting

★: ................................................................................. Technique or important information regarding the refit-
ting operation
• .......... : ........................................................... Filling with oil or liquid with quantity
2. During removal and refitting operations, in addition to the general safety rules, you must also apply the specific
«SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS».
Always adhere to these precautions.
3. List of special tools

(1) For details regarding the type, code numbers and quantity of all the tools (T1, T2, etc.) specified in the operating
procedures, see the heading «SPECIAL TOOLS».
4. Tightening torques
1 - In the operating procedures, the symbol denotes a specific tightening torque that has been determined ex-
perimentally and that must be adhered to.
2 - If the symbol does not appear, the torque values to be used are those indicated in the table in Section 00 of this
manual.
00-6
HOW TO UPDATE THE MANUAL
HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL
1. UPDATING THE MANUAL

All additions, corrections or amendments to the manual will be sent to the Authorised Service Centres.
Before starting any repair or overhaul operations, check that you have the most recent updates as these may contain
supplementary data not present in previous issues.
2. INSERTING UPDATES
1- Check the number of the page and insert it in the appropriate section of the manual following the consecutive or-
der of the page numbers. Example:
20 5
Consecutive page number

Section number
2 - Supplementary pages: indicated with a hyphen (-) and consecutive number after the page number. Example:
20-5
20-5-1
Supplementary page
20-5-2
20-6
NOTE. The contents of supplementary pages are structured so that there is no overlap with existing pages.
3 - Updated pages: indicated by a consecutive number in a circle; this symbol appears below the page number.
Example:
20-5
20-5-1 Existing page
20-5-1 Update page
20-5-2 Existing page
NOTE. All supplementary and updated pages are indicated in the manual page list; a revised page list is
sent with each update and supersedes the previous list.
3. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

For greater clarity, important information pertaining to operator safety and to critical stages in the working proce-
dures is highlighted by the symbols shown in the following table.
Symbol Meaning Notes Symbol Meaning Notes

Safety rules to be applied during Parts must be coated with adhesive,
Coating
operation. lubricant, etc.
Safety Points at which oil, water or fuel
Operation requiring special safety
Oil, water must be added and quantity requi-
measures due to internal pressure.
red.
Operations requiring special techni-
★ Warning cal or other precautionsto ensure
compliance with standard values.
Drain
Points from which oil, water or fuel
must be drained with quantity.
Weight of main assemblies.

Tightening Parts requiring special tightening
Weight Choose lifting ropes/slings careful-
torques torque during refitting or assembly.
ly; supports required, etc.
00-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
★ When removing or refitting parts, always take the following safety precautions.
1. Precautions for removal operations

• Unless otherwise indicated, lower the working equipment until it rests on the ground.
• After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the open ends of the pipes to prevent in-
gress of impurities.
• Before removing a cylinder, fully retract the piston and secure it in this position using a retaining strap.
• Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
• Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings indicating the correct assembly po-
sition. If necessary, make new markings to ensure correct assembly.
• When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly to avoid pulling on the wires.
• Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion when reconnecting.
• Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them together in a safe place.
• To lift the machine or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of suitable capacity.
• When using bolts or eye bolts to remove parts, ensure they are screwed home fully.
• Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the part, cover it to prevent the ingress of
dirt and dust.
2. Precautions for refitting operations

• Tighten nuts and bolts to the specified tightening torques.
• When refitting flexible pipes and wires, take care not to twist or tangle them.
• Always fit new seals, O-rings, cotter pins and safety stop rings; ensure that cotter pins are bent over so that they
cannot work loose.
• Ensure that circlips are correctly installed in their seatings.
• When applying threadlocking compound, first clean the part removing all oil and grease, then cover the thread
evenly applying a few drops of the compound.
• When applying sealant, first clean the surface removing all traces of oil and grease and check for dirt or inden-
tations, then apply the sealant evenly making sure that it forms a continuous film around any fixing holes.
• Clean all parts, removing dirt, oxidisation, carbon deposits, burrs and indentations.
• Coat all moving parts with a thin film of engine oil.
• When reconnecting electrical connectors, first remove all traces of oil, dust and water from the inside of the con-
nector and then connect the two halves together firmly.
• When using eyebolts for lifting, check that they are not deformed, screw them fully home and align the eye with
the lifting hook.
• Bolt down flanged fittings evenly, tightening the bolts gradually in a crosswise pattern.
3. Precautions to be taken on completion of removal/refitting operations

• If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and add new coolant to the correct level. Start the
engine to circulate the coolant and then check the level again and top up.
• After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate
the oil in the hydraulic circuits and then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
• After having removed the variable displacement pump, before connecting the discharge pipe, fill the pump cas-
ing with oil.
• Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts thoroughly after assembly.
00-8
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS
Components weighing over 25 kg or of significant size must be supported and removed using suitable lifting equip-
ment with wire rope or polyester slings.
In the paragraphs regarding removal and refitting operations, the weight of the component or assembly to be lifted is
indicated with the symbol
WIRE ROPES - SLINGS

• Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:
WIRE ROPES POLYESTER SLINGS

(standard twisted «S» or «Z» type) (eye-and-eye - simple loop)
Capacity (kg) Capacity (kg)
Ø rope Width
mm 60° 90° (mm) 60° 90°
8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

10 1000 1740 1420 50 1000 800 1730 1410
12 1450 2500 2050 62 1250 1000 2160 1760
14 2000 3460 2820 75 1400 1120 2420 1980
16 2600 4500 3670 100 2000 1600 3460 2820
18 3300 5710 4660 150 2500 2000 4330 3530
NOTE. Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

• The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the
rope/sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
• Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
• Never lift a heavy load when the two branches of the ropes form a wide angle.
The permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse proportion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the
permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension for two Ø 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000 kg.
2000
1900
1700
2000
Load capacity: kg
1400
1000
1000
500
30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

Angle of suspension: ␣
00-9
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NUTS AND BOLTS
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NUTS AND

BOLTS
The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the
relative assembly paragraphs.
★ The tightening torques indicated below refer to bolts and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where ap-
plicable, with anaerobic threadlocking compound.
The values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, copper,
plastic, sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.
BOLT CLASS
BOLT SIZE 8.8 10.9 12.9

Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft.
M6x1 8.0 – 8.8 5.9 – 6.5 11.8 – 13.0 8.7 – 9.6 13.8 – 15.2 10.2 – 11.2
M8x1.25 19.4 – 21.4 14.3 – 15.8 28.5 – 31.5 21.0 – 23.2 33.3 – 36.9 24.5 – 27.2
M10x1.5 38.4 – 42.4 28.3 – 31.2 56.4 – 62.4 41.6 – 46.0 67.4 – 74.4 49.7 – 54.8
M12x1.75 66.5 – 73.5 49.0 – 54.2 96.9 – 107 71.4 – 78.9 115 – 128 84.8 – 94.3
COARSE THREAD
M14x2 106 – 117 78.1 – 86.2 156 – 172 115.0 – 126.8 184 – 204 135.6 – 150.3
M16x2 164 – 182 120.9 – 134.1 241 – 267 117.6 – 196.8 282 – 312 207.8 – 229.9
M18x2.5 228 – 252 168.0 – 185.7 334 – 370 246.2 – 272.7 391 – 432 288.2 – 318.4
M20x2.5 321 – 355 236.6 – 261.6 472 – 522 347.9 – 384.7 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3
M22x2.5 441 – 487 325.0 – 358.9 647 – 715 476.8 – 527.0 751 – 830 553.5 – 611.7
M24x3 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3 812 – 898 598.4 – 661.8 950 – 1050 700.2 – 773.9
M27x3 816 – 902 601.4 – 664.8 1198 – 1324 882.9 – 975.8 1419 – 1569 1045.8 – 1156.4
M8x1 20.8 – 23.0 15.3 – 17.0 30.6 – 33.8 22.6 – 24.9 35.8 – 39.6 26.4 – 29.2
M10x1.25 40.6 – 44.8 29.9 – 33.0 59.7 – 65.9 44.0 – 48.6 71.2 – 78.6 52.5 – 57.9
M12x1.25 72.2 – 79.8 53.2 – 58.8 106 – 118 78.1 – 87.0 126 – 140 92.9 – 103.2
M12x1.5 69.4 – 76.7 51.1 – 56.5 102 – 112 75.2 – 82.5 121 – 134 89.2 – 98.8
FINE THREAD
M14x1.5 114 – 126 84.0 – 92.9 168 – 186 123.8 – 137.1 199 – 220 146.7 – 162.1
M16x1.5 175 – 194 129 – 143 257 – 285 189.4 – 210.0 301 – 333 221.8 – 245.4
M18x1.5 256 – 282 188.7 – 207.8 375 – 415 276.4 – 305.9 439 – 485 323.5 – 357.4
M20x1.5 355 – 393 261.6 – 289.6 523 – 578 385.5 – 426.0 611 – 676 450.3 – 498.2
M22x1.5 482 – 532 355.2 – 392.1 708 – 782 521.8 – 576.3 821 – 908 605.1 – 669.2
M24x2 602 – 666 443.7 – 490.8 884 – 978 651.5 – 720.8 1035 – 1143 762.8 – 842.4
00-10
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND

LUBRICANTS
FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION
Loctite 222
Anaerobic product suitable or low-strength locking of retaining, adjustment and precision
Colour:
fasteners.
opaque fluorescent All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
purple
Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and bolt; used in place of con-
THREADLOCKER
Loctite 242
ventional mechanical locking systems.
Colour:
Used for medium-strength locking.
fluorescent blue All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 243
Alternative product to 242; oil tolerant and so can used on lightly lubricated surfaces without
Colour: opaque
prior use of activator.
fluorescent blue
Loctite 270 Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs that do not normally require
disassembly.
Colour:
Parts must be heated to approximately 80°C for removal.
fluorescent green All traces of lubricant must first be removed using the specific activator.
DEGREASERS AND
Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to application of Loctite anaerobic prod-
Loctite 703
ACTIVATORS
ucts; after drying, promotes uniform curing of threadlockers.
Product used for specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to use of slow-cure anaer-
obic threadlockers(series 5 and 6).
Loctite 747
Can also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in applications where there is
large gaps between the parts.
Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal faces; can eliminate the need
Loctite 510 for conventional gaskets as it can fill gaps up to 0.4 mm.
Colour: red Does not shrink and therefore fasteners do not need re-tightening to specified torque values
after curing.
Loctite 542 Anaerobic product used a liquid sealant for threaded fittings up to 3/4” gas; rapid curing and
Colour: brown parts may be disassembled with ordinary tools.
(for faces and flanges)
Loctite 554 Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cooling and industrial fluid circuits.
SEALANTS
Colour: red Slow curing, also suitable for use on non-ferrous alloys.
Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes and threaded fittings up to 2"
Loctite 572
in diameter.
Colour: white Very slow curing on most metal surfaces.
Loctite 576 Anaerobic product used a liquid thread sealant for large diameter threaded fittings (up to 2").
Colour: brown Very slow curing; also suitable for non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent removal.
Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between metal faces.
Loctite 576 Ensures total contact between surfaces with maximum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling micro-
Colour: green voids caused by flatness errors.
Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires prior application of an activator.
00-11
THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND LUBRICANTS
FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION
Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range of acidic and porous ma-
Loctite 401 terials including, ceramics, wood, rubber and plastic (excluding polyolefin).
ADHESIVES
INSTANT
Colour: colourless Curing takes place in a few seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental conditions.
Loctite 495 Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber, plastics and metal in any com-
Colour: colourless bination.
Silastic 738 One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, ready for use.

(Dow Corning) Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the need for conventional seals
SEALANTS
SILICONE
Colour: milky white on flexible joints, filling gaps greater than 1 mm.
One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.

Dirko Transparent
Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rubbery solid; resistant to high
Colour: transparent temperatures.
POLYURETHANE
SEALANTS
Betaseal HV3 Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity, suitable for permanent,
high-strength flexible bonding.
(Gurit Essex)
Slow curing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates, etc. surfaces must be
Colour: black degreased with primer.
Loctite 601 Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive.

Colour: Suitable for sealing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of up to 0.10 mm;
fluorescent green used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys, bushes etc. on shafts.
RETAINING COMPOUNDS
Loctite 638
Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength; suitable for bonding cylin-
Colour:
drical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
fluorescent green
Loctite 648 Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suitable for bonding cylindrical
parts, permanent retention of threaded parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of
Colour:
bearings, etc.
fluorescent green Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.
Loctite 986/AVX Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.

Colour: Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemical pressure.
fluorescent red Parts must be first treated with an activator.
Grease
Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to prevent oxidization and to fa-
(NLGI 2 EP
cilitate assembly operations.
ASTM D217: 265/295)
LUBRICANTS
Molikote Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, use neat or diluted with engine oil
(Dow Corning) for assembly of main engine bearings.
Vaseline Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against oxidization and corrosion.
Engine oil
Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of main engine bearings.
10W - 30
00-12
SPECIAL TOOLS
SPECIAL TOOLS
SYMBOL CODE DESCRIPTION NOTES
T1 00239496 Tool for removal of steering unit inner gasket
T2 00239497 Tool for removal of steering unit dust seal
T3 00239498 Tool for mounting of steering unit inner gasket
T4 00239499 Tool for mounting of steering unit dust seal
T5 5.9030.743.1 Test lead for checking sensors with multimeter
T6 5.9030.743.0 Test lead for checking sensors with multimeter
T7 5.9030.740.0 SERDIA installation disc
T8 5.9030.741.0 Adapter cable
T9 5.9030.740.2 Interface level III
T10 5.9030.742.0 EDS software pack
00-13
CONVERSION FACTORS
CONVERSION FACTORS
CONVERSION FROM BRITISH TO METRIC UNITS CONVERSION FROM METRIC TO BRITISH UNITS
mm = inch x 25.40 inch = mm x 0.0394
foot x 0.305 foot = m x 3.281
m =
yard x 0.914 yard = m x 1.094
km = Eng.miles x 1.609 Eng.miles = km x 0.622
cm² = Sq.in. x 6.452 Sq.in. = cm² x 0.155
Sq.ft. x 0.093 Sq.ft. = m² x 10.77
m² =
Sq.yard x 0.835 Sq.yard = m² x 1.197
cm³ = Cu.in. x 16.39 Cu.in. = cm³ x 0.061
Cu.ft. x 28.36 Cu.ft = m³ x 0.035
m³ =
Cu.yard x 0.763 Cu.yard = m³ x 1.311
Imp.gall. x 4.547 Imp.gall. = litres x 0.220
US gall. x 3.785 US gall. = litres x 0.264
litres=
pint x 0.568 pint = litres x 1.762
quart x 1.137 quart = litres x 0.880
/min = US.gpm x 3.785 US.gpm = /min x 0.2642
oz. x 0.028 oz. = kg x 35.25
kg =
lb. x 0.454 lb. = kg x 2.203
kgm = lb.ft. x 0.139 lb.ft. = kgm x 7.233
kg/m = lb.in. x 17.87 lb.in. = kg/m x 0.056
kg/cm² = psi x 0.070 psi = kg/cm² x 14.22
lb./Imp.gall x 0.100 lb./Imp.gal. = kg/ x 10.00
kg/=
lb./US.gall x 0.120 lb./US.gal. = kg/ x 8.333
kg/m³ = lb./cu.ft. x 16.21 lb./cu.ft. = kg/m³ x 0.062
Nm = lb.ft. x 1.356 lb.ft. = Nm x 0.737
bar = psi x 0.07 psi = bar x 14.503
Example:
42 mm →???? inch
42x0.0394= 1.6548 inch
42 inch →???? mm
42x25.4=1066.8 mm
00-14
CONTENTS
SECTION 10
CONTENTS
1. TRANSMISSION................................................................. 1 3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION..................... 48

• INTRODUCTION.................................................................. 1 • 3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE ................. 49
• 1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shift version) ........................ 2
4. FRONT AXLE.................................................................... 53
• • 1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS.......................................2
• • 1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM...........5 • 4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT......... 54
• • 1.1.3 GEARBOX .........................................................6 • 4.2 DIFFERENTIAL ........................................................... 56
• • GEARBOX COMPONENTS ........................................7
• • 1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH..................................................8 5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ..................................................... 58
• • 1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
DISTRIBUTION VALVE......................................9
(106-115 CV models) (CCLS version)................................ 59
• • 1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID
VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC ..................13 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
• • 1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC (120-165 CV models) (CCLS version)................................ 60
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC ....................................14 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
• 1.2 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version) .................. 15 (106-115 CV models) (LS version) ..................................... 61
• • 1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS.....................................15 • HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
• • 1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.........18
(120-165 CV models) (LS version) ..................................... 62
• • 1.2.3 GEARBOX .......................................................19
• • GEARBOX COMPONENTS ......................................20 • 5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP ............................ 63
• • 1.2.4 MAIN CLUTCH................................................21 • • 5.1.1 BOOST PUMP ................................................ 66
• • 1.2.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND • • 5.1.2 HYDRAULIC PUMP ........................................ 67
SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE...................22 • • 5.1.3 LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE
• • 1.2.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID CUT-OFF VALVE ............................................ 69
VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC ..................26 • 5.2 HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP
• • 1.2.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM (106-115 CV models) ................................................. 77
SCHEMATIC ...................................................27
• 5.3 STEERING GEAR PUMP
• 1.3 REAR AXLE ................................................................ 29 (106-115 CV models) ................................................. 78
• 1.4 REAR PTO.................................................................. 31 • 5.4 GEAR PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC SERVICES
AND STEERING (120-165 CV models) ...................... 79
2. BRAKING SYSTEM.......................................................... 33
• 5.5 PRIORITY VALVE ....................................................... 81
• 2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ..................................... 34
• 5.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE................. 82
• 2.2 BRAKE ....................................................................... 35
• • 5.6.1 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH FIXED
• 2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM .................................... 36 DISPLACEMENT PUMP (CCLS) .................... 85
• • 2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING • • 5.6.2 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH
(ITALY VERSION) ............................................36 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP (LS) ....... 87
• • 2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING • • 5.6.3 SERVICES CONTROL SECTION .................... 88
(EXPORT VERSION)........................................38 • • 5.6.4 DESCRIPTIONS OF COMPONENTS.............. 89
• • 2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING • • 5.6.5 INLET MANIFOLD (CC version) ...................... 91
(ITALY VERSION) ............................................41 • • 5.6.6 LIFT CONTROL VALVE SECTION .................. 94
• • 2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING
(EXPORT VERSION)........................................42
• • COMPRESSOR ........................................................43
• • PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE...................................44
• • CAB SUSPENSION FEED VALVE ............................45
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY) ........................46
• • TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1-WAY) ........................47
10-i
TRANSMISSION INTRODUCTION
1. TRANSMISSION
INTRODUCTION
• The AGROTON MARK III series is supplied to the customer with two transmission configurations:
a. POWER SHIFT transmission
b. POWER SHUTTLE transmission
The main difference between these two configurations lies in the behaviour of the electronic control unit when
reversing the direction of travel.
In the POWER SHIFT version, when the operator operates the shuttle control to change the direction of travel, the
command is actually only implemented when the speed of the tractor falls below 10 km/h and when the operator
depresses the clutch pedal.
In the POWER SHUTTLE version, the reversal of the direction of travel is managed entirely by the electronic control
unit without the operator having to depress the clutch pedal.
This type of control is achieved by way of a proportional solenoid valve that directly controls the main clutch.
• The transmission can be divided into the following three sections:

A. Gearbox
B. Rear axle
C. Rear PTO
A B
D0004360
10-1
TRANSMISSION MAIN COMPONENTS (Power Shift version)
1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shift version)
1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
1 2
3 4 5 6
17
16
15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 D0004370
1. Rear PTO control solenoid valve 6. Pilot line fitting for main clutch 11. Transmission oil temperature sensor 16. Rear PTO speed selector lever
2. Rear PTO control valve 7. Main clutch control pump (Booster) 12. Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve 17. Rear PTO speed selector lever (Optional)
3. Engine speed sensor (nLse - nMot) 8. Transmission oil low pressure sensor 13. Transmission oil suction line filter
4. Hydraulic pump for transmission 9. Gearbox output shaft speed sensor (nLsa) 14. Speed sensor for odometer (nAb)
5. Hydraulic gearbox control distribution valve 10. Creeper engagement shaft 15. Rear power take-off
10-2
18
19
23
22 21 20
18. Left brake cylinder

19. 30 km/h speed limiting pin
20. Mechanical gearbox shift lever
21. Right brake cylinder
D0004380 22. Differential lock control valve
23. Differential lock control solenoid valve
10-3
25
24
26
29 28 27 D0004390
24. Left axle casing

25. Lift shaft
26. Right axle casing
27. Rear PTO speed sensor
28. Gearbox oil level indicator
29. Rear reduction unit oil level indicator
10-4
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Power Shift version)
1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The transmission hydraulic system is supplied by a gear pump driven from a lateral power-take-off.
The gear pump supplies pressurised fluid for the following uses:
• hydraulic gearbox control valve
• forward/reverse shuttle control valve
• main clutch pump (Booster)
• 4WD control solenoid valve
• rear PTO control solenoid valve
• differential lock control solenoid valve
• lubrication of the gearbox, rear differential and rear PTO clutch control shaft.
Lubrication circuit
pressure relief valve
Lubrication of
rear differential
PTO control
solenoid valve
Lubrication
Gearbox of rear PTO
lubrication drive shaft
Cooler
(not part of the
transmission)
Four-wheel
drive control
solenoid valve Gearbox control
distribution valve
To main clutch
Pressure Temperature
sensor sensor
Booster Gear pump
Cold starting Suction filter

safety valve
D0004411
10-5
GEARBOX DESCRIPTION (Power Shift version)
1.1.3 GEARBOX
DESCRIPTION
• The POWER SHIFT transmission receives drive from the engine (1) and transmits drive through the hydraulically-con-
trolled gearbox (2), the creeper unit (3), the main clutch (4) and the 6-speed mechanical gearbox (5) to the pinion (6)
and the power take-off (7) that provides the drive to the front axle .
The POWER SHIFT transmission is equipped with a double-output power take-off (9) to drive the hydraulic system
pumps.
9 4
2
1
3 5
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª 2ª 1ª
8 7 D0004400
COMPONENTS
1. Engine
2. Hydraulically-controlled 8-speed gearbox (4 forward and 4 reverse)
3. Creeper unit
4. Main clutch
5. 6-speed mechanical gearbox
6. Pinion
7. 4WD engagement clutch
8. Power take-off for front axle drive
9. Power take-off for hydraulic pumps
10-6
GEARBOX COMPONENTS (Power Shift version)
GEARBOX COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 7 10 15
5 6 8 9 11 12 13 14
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª
2ª 1ª
D0004480
23 21 22 20 19 18 17 16
1. Flywheel and damper 6. Clutch “A” 11. Hydraulic pumps PTO drive gear 16. 1st and 2nd speed synchronizer 21. Clutch “G”
2. Clutch housing 7. Creeper unit 12. 3rd and 4th speed synchronizer 17. Pinion 22. Clutch “B”
3. Input shaft 8. Creeper unit synchronizer 13. 5th and 6th speed synchronizer 18. 4WD control clutch 23. Clutch “D”
4. Hydraulically-controlled gearbox 9. Main clutch 14. 1st and 2nd speed drive shaft 19. Creeper unit driven shaft
5. Clutch “C” 10. Mechanical gearbox 15. Rear PTO drive shaft 20. Clutch “F”
10-7
GEARBOX MAIN CLUTCH (Power Shift version)
1.1.4 MAIN CLUTCH
The main clutch of the POWER SHIFT transmission is an oil-bath multiplate unit with servo-assisted engagement and
hydraulic pilot system.
Clutch operation is entirely manual by way of the clutch pedal.
The system is equipped with a clutch cylinder (Booster) that directs fluid under pressure to the main clutch in accordance
with the travel of the clutch pedal.
ECU
D0004420
1. Clutch pedal
2. Clutch pilot cylinder
3. Transmission gear pump
4. Clutch control cylinder (Booster)
5. Main clutch
10-8
GEARBOX HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE (Power Shift version)
1.1.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE
The function of the hydraulic gearbox distribution valve is to pilot and control the engagement of the gears in the
hydraulically-controlled gearbox .
The distribution valve controls the operation of:
A. the hydraulic gearbox control valve (1) to select S, H, M and L ratios
B. the shuttle control valve (2) to select FORWARD and REVERSE gears.
This distribution valve also supplies hydraulic fluid for the lubrication of the mechanical gearbox, the rear differential and
the rear PTO control shaft.
1 2
Y7
B
F
Y6
Y5
VR1 VR2
VR
Y1
G1
Y4
H1
B1 S2
W
S1
R1 U
P2
P1
H2
PILOT P4
PRESSURE
VALVE 10 bar
Y2 G2
PILOT PRESSURE
VALVE 18 bar
P4
Y3
1
D
D0004430
CONTROL AND
LUBRICATING PUMP
10-9
GEARBOX GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE (Power Shift version)
A. GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE
PRESSURE TEST POINTS
a b c d e f
g
h
n m D0004440
Pos. Function Thread size
a. A or F clutch pressure M10x1
b. B or G clutch pressure M10x1
c. Y3 or Y4 solenoid valve pressure M10x1
d. Pressure Pg to relief valve M10x1
e. Pressure Pr from relief valve (18 bar) M10x1
f. Engagement pressure of clutch C or D M10x1
g. General pressure (18 bar) M10x1
h. Engagement pressure of clutch A/B or F/G M10x1
l. Pilot pressure (10 bar) M10x1
m. D clutch pressure M10x1
n. C clutch pressure M10x1
p. Modulated pressure M10x1
10-10
GEARBOX GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE (Power Shift version)
MAIN COMPONENTS
G1 S1 H2 H1
B1 Y3
R1 Y4
P1 Y1
P2 Y5
U Y2
P4 G2 P3
D0005320
B1 Breather valve
G1 Clutch selection valve for A/B or F/G clutches
S1 Relief valve
H2 Clutch engagement valve for C/D clutches
H1 Clutch engagement valve for A/B or F/G clutches
Y3 Pilot solenoid valve for engagement valve H2
Y1 Pilot solenoid valve for clutch selection valve G1
Y5 Pilot solenoid valve for road/field selection valve
Y2 Pilot solenoid valve for C or D clutch selection valve G2
P3 Pilot pressure regulating valve
G2 Clutch selection valve for C or D clutches
P4 General pressure regulating valve
U Road/field operating mode selection valve
P1 Pressure modulating valve
P2 2-stage valve
R1 Null shift valve
10-11
GEARBOX SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE (Power Shift version)
B. SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE
MAIN COMPONENTS
VR Y6 Y7 S2
1 1
D0005330
Y6 Pilot solenoid valve for FORWARD gear

Y7 Pilot solenoid valve for REVERSE gear
VR FORWARD/REVERSE control spool valve
S2 Relief valve
1 Neutral return device
10-12
GEARBOX CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC (Power Shift version)
1.1.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC

Forward
C A C A C A C A
Input
shaft D B D B D B D B
C A
Output
shaft GF GF GF GF
L gear M gear H gear S gear

D B
Reverse
GF
C A C A C A C A
Neutral
D B D B D B D B
GF GF GF GF

D0004501
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from L to S gear (L→M→H→S)

Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
L M H S L M H S
Y6 ● ● ● ●
Y7 ● ● ● ● ● = Solenoid valve energised
Y1 ● ● ● ● ❍ = Solenoid valve briefly
Y2 ● ● ● ● energised
Y3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ during gear change
Y4 ❍ ❍
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from S to L gear (S→H→M→L)

Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
S H M L S H M L
Y6 ● ● ● ●
Y2 ● ● ● energised
Y4 ❍ ❍
10-13
GEARBOX TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC (Power Shift version)
1.1.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
COMPONENTS
A1 Electronic transmission control unit
A1- E8G
A2 Shuttle control lever (FORWARD/REVERSE)
EDM1 18
ED1+ 10 67 SD2 A6
ED2-
ED3(V)
45
37
17
25, 27
AD1
AD2 A3 Gearbox control valve
ED4(R) 9 32, 49 AD3
ED6 6 2, 24 AD4
EAM3 7
30
33
AD5
AD6 A4 Shuttle control valve
EDM2 13 5 AD7 H4
EAM1 35 26 AD8
EAM2
EF1
22
42
29 AD9 A14 A5 Range selector lever (L M H S)
EF2 16, 19 51 SD1
EF3
PWM1
71, 47
39
50 SDD1
1V A7 A6 Provision for tachymeter connection
A8
A7 Display
A2
A8 Diagnostics connection
A10 Engine load sensor
A5 +
A11 -
A11 Clutch pedal position sensor
A13 Transmission oil temperature sensor
Starting
A13 S3 inhibitor
S4 switch A14 Transmission oil low pressure indicator
A10
S6
B2 Pinion speed sensor (nAb) (theoretical groundspeed)
B3 Hydraulic gearbox output speed sensor (nLsa)
B2
B3 B4 Transmission input speed sensor (nLse - nMot)
ENGINE
B4 A3 A4 F1 Fuse (1A)
F2 Fuse (8A)
H4 FORWARD/REVERSE indicator lamp
H5 Audible alarm
S3 Clutch pedal depressed sensor
S4 Mechanical gearbox neutral sensor
1 F1 2 KL.30 PERMANENT PLUS
(+)
(+)
1 F2 2 KL.15 IGNITION S6 Transmission oil low pressure sensor (18 bar)
A14 A5
H
A13 T
07 29 08 10 45 55 31 54 (+)
(+) 37 EAM3 AD9 ED6 ED1 ED2 VP2 VP1 VP1
AD1 ED3(V) (T+) (T-) 50
09 SDD1 ED1 A8
AD2 ED4(R)
11 17
A2 UREF(5V) AD1 Y1 (GV1) (-)
25/27
AD2 Y2 (GV2)
H
22 32/49
X EAM2 AD3 Y3 (HV1) A3
A11 02/24
21 VMA AD4 Y4 (HV2)
47 26
DIAG. AD8 Y5 (MVKL)
71 30
EF3 AD5
19
DIAG. 33
16 AD6 (+)
EF2
42 51
EF1 SD1 SD1
A10 VMG1 EAM1 PWM1 EDM2 EDM1 AD7 VPS VM1 VM2 SD2 (-) A7
28 35 39 13 18 05 03 52 06 34 67
H5
Y7 Y6
(MVR) (MVV)
B2 B3 B4
S4
S3 S6 A6
P H4 A4
(-)
D0004491
10-14
TRANSMISSION MAIN COMPONENTS (Power Shuttle version)
1.2 TRANSMISSION (Power Shuttle version)
1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6
17
16
15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 D0005170
1. Rear PTO control solenoid valve 6. Hydraulic gearbox distribution valve 11. Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve 16. Rear PTO speed selector lever
2. Rear PTO control valve 7. Transmission oil low pressure sensor 12. Transmission oil suction line filter 17. Rear PTO speed selector lever (Optional)
3. Engine speed sensor (nLse - nMot) 8. Gearbox output shaft speed sensor (nLsa) 13. Speed sensor for odometer (nAb)
4. Clutch control solenoid valve 9. Creeper engagement shaft 14. Clutch speed sensor (nHk)
5. Hydraulic pump for transmission 10. Transmission oil temperature sensor 15. Rear power take-off
10-15
18
19
23
22 21 20
18. Left brake cylinder

19. 30 km/h speed limiting pin
20. Mechanical gearbox shift lever
21. Right brake cylinder
22. Differential lock control valve
23. Differential lock control solenoid valve
D0005230
10-16
25
24
26
29 28 27 D0004390
24. Left axle casing

25. Lift shaft
26. Right axle casing
27. Rear PTO speed sensor
28. Gearbox oil level indicator
29. Rear reduction unit oil level indicator
10-17
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Power Shuttle version)
1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The transmission hydraulic system is supplied by a gear pump driven from a lateral power take-off.
The gear pump supplies pressurised fluid for the following uses:
• hydraulic gearbox control valve
• forward/reverse shuttle control valve
• proportional solenoid control valve for main clutch
• 4WD control solenoid valve
• rear PTO control solenoid valve
• differential lock control solenoid valve
• lubrication of the gearbox, rear differential and rear PTO clutch control shaft.
Lubrication circuit
pressure relief valve
Lubrication of
rear differential
PTO control
solenoid valve
Lubrication
Gearbox of rear PTO
lubrication drive shaft
Gearbox control
distribution valve
Cooler
(not part of the
Main clutch transmission)
Four-wheel
drive control
solenoid valve
Proportional
solenoid valve
Pressure Temperature
sensor sensor
Gear pump
Cold starting Suction filter

safety valve
D0005181
10-18
GEARBOX DESCRIPTION (Power Shuttle version)
1.2.3 GEARBOX
DESCRIPTION
• The POWER SHUTTLE transmission receives drive from the engine (1) and transmits drive through the hydraulically-
controlled gearbox (2), the creeper unit (3), the main clutch (4) and the 6-speed mechanical gearbox (5) to the pinion
(6) and the power take-off (7) that provides the drive to the front axle .
The POWER SHUTTLE transmission is also equipped with a double-output power take-off (9) to drive the hydraulic
system pumps.
9 4
2
1
3 5
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª 2ª 1ª
8 7 D0004400
COMPONENTS
1. Engine
2. Hydraulically-controlled 8-speed gearbox (4 forward and 4 reverse)
3. Creeper unit
4. Main clutch
5. 6-speed mechanical gearbox
6. Pinion
7. 4WD engagement clutch
8. Power take-off for front axle drive
9. Power take-off for hydraulic pumps
10-19
GEARBOX COMPONENTS (Power Shuttle version)
GEARBOX COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 7 10 15
5 6 8 9 11 12 13 14
NO LL 4ª 3ª 6ª 5ª
2ª 1ª
D0005190
23 21 22 20 19 18 17 16
1. Flywheel and damper 6. Clutch “A” 11. Hydraulic pumps PTO drive gear 16. 1st and 2nd speed synchronizer 21. Clutch “G”
2. Clutch housing 7. Creeper unit 12. 3rd and 4th speed synchronizer 17. Pinion 22. Clutch “B”
3. Input shaft 8. Creeper unit synchronizer 13. 5th and 6th speed synchronizer 18. 4WD control clutch 23. Clutch “D”
4. Hydraulically-controlled gearbox 9. Main clutch 14. 1st and 2nd speed drive shaft 19. Creeper unit driven shaft
5. Clutch “C” 10. Mechanical gearbox 15. Rear PTO drive shaft 20. Clutch “F”
10-20
GEARBOX MAIN CLUTCH (Power Shuttle version)
1.2.4 MAIN CLUTCH
The main clutch of the POWER SHUTTLE transmission is an oil-bath multiplate unit with hydraulic control.
Clutch operation is entirely automatic and is controlled by an electronic control unit which receives signals from the clutch
pedal position sensor.
The system has a clutch control solenoid valve that directs pressurised fluid to the clutch in accordance with the pedal
position.
4
2
3
1
ECU
D0005200
1. Clutch pedal
2. Clutch pedal position sensor
3. Electronic transmission control unit
4. Transmission gear pump
5. Clutch control proportional solenoid valve
6. Main clutch
10-21
GEARBOX HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE (Power Shuttle version)
1.2.5 HYDRAULIC GEARBOX AND SHUTTLE DISTRIBUTION VALVE
The function of the hydraulic gearbox distribution valve is to pilot and control the engagement of the gears in the
hydraulically-controlled gearbox .
The distribution valve controls the operation of:
A. the hydraulic gearbox control valve (1) to select S, H, M and L ratios
B. the shuttle control valve (2) to select FORWARD and REVERSE gears.
This distribution valve also supplies hydraulic fluid for the lubrication of the mechanical gearbox, the rear differential and
the rear PTO control shaft.
1
A
Y7
B
F
Y6
Y5
VR1 VR2
VR
Y1
G1
Y4
H1
B1 S2
W
S1
R1 U
P2
P1
H2
PILOT P4
PRESSURE
VALVE 10 bar
Y2 G2
PILOT PRESSURE P4
VALVE 18 bar
1
Y3
D
Y8
CONTROL AND
LUBRICATING PUMP D0005210
10-22
GEARBOX GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE (Power Shuttle version)
A. GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE
PRESSURE TEST POINTS
a b c d e f
g
h
n m D0004440
Pos. Function Thread size
a. A or F clutch pressure M10x1
b. B or G clutch pressure M10x1
c. Y3 or Y4 solenoid valve pressure M10x1
d. Pressure Pg to relief valve M10x1
e. Pressure Pr from relief valve (18 bar) M10x1
f. Engagement pressure of clutch C or D M10x1
g. General pressure (18 bar) M10x1
h. Engagement pressure of clutch A/B or F/G M10x1
l. Pilot pressure (10 bar) M10x1
m. D clutch pressure M10x1
n. C clutch pressure M10x1
p. Modulated pressure M10x1
10-23
GEARBOX GEARBOX CONTROL VALVE (Power Shuttle version)
MAIN COMPONENTS
G1 S1 H2 H1
B1 Y3
R1 Y4
P1 Y1
P2 Y5
U Y2
P4 G2 P3
D0005320
B1 Breather valve
G1 Clutch selection valve for A/B or F/G clutches
S1 Relief valve
H2 Clutch engagement valve for C/D clutches
H1 Clutch engagement valve for A/B or F/G clutches
Y1 Pilot solenoid valve for clutch selection valve G1
Y5 Pilot solenoid valve for road/field selection valve
Y2 Pilot solenoid valve for C or D clutch selection valve G2
P3 Pilot pressure regulating valve
G2 Clutch selection valve forC or D clutches
P4 General pressure regulating valve
U Road/field operating mode selection valve
P1 Pressure modulating valve
P2 2-stage valve
R1 Null shift valve
10-24
GEARBOX SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE (Power Shuttle version)
B. SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE
MAIN COMPONENTS
VR Y6 Y7 S2
1 1
D0005330
Y6 Pilot solenoid valve for FORWARD gear

Y7 Pilot solenoid valve for REVERSE gear
VR FORWARD/REVERSE control spool valve
S2 Relief valve
1 Neutral return device
10-25
GEARBOX CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC (Power Shuttle)
1.2.6 CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT AND SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION SCHEMATIC

Forward
C A C A C A C A
Input
shaft D B D B D B D B
C A
Output
shaft GF GF GF GF

D B
Reverse
GF
C A C A C A C A
Neutral
D B D B D B D B
GF GF GF GF

D0004501
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from L to S gear (L→M→H→S)

Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
L M H S L M H S
Y6 ● ● ● ●
Y2 ● ● ● ● energised
Y4 ❍ ❍
Solenoid valve operation when shifting from S to L gear (S→H→M→L)

Forward Reverse
Solenoid valve
S H M L S H M L
Y6 ● ● ● ●
Y2 ● ● ● energised
Y4 ❍ ❍
10-26
GEARBOX TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC (Power Shuttle version)
1.2.7 TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
COMPONENTS
A1 Electronic transmission control unit(EST45)
EST-45
SD 2 59 36 SD 4 A9
A2.1 Range selector lever (L M H S)
ED 11 29
ED 8 44 57 ADM 5
EU 1
ED 6
38
67
11
34
ADM 6
ADM 7
A2.2 Shuttle control lever (FORWARD/REVERSE)
ED 7 22 33 ADM 8
ED 1 63 50 AIP 7
ED 2
ED 3
65
20 A1
32
55
AIP 3
AIP 4
A3 Gearbox control valve
ED 12 30
EDM 1
ER 1
31
39
56 AIP 1 H3 A5 Diagnostics
EF 7 17 5 ADM 4 A12
EF 6 40
EF 5 16 A6 Display
EF 4 62 14 SD 1 A6
15 SDDK
H5
A9 Tachymeter
S7 A5 A10 Engine load sensor

A11 Proportional solenoid valve for main clutch control
B10 +
-
A2.1 A12 INFOCENTER
A2.2
B1 Engine speed sensor (nLse - nMot)
B11 B13
B3 Hydraulic gearbox output speed sensor (nAb)
A11 S4
A10 S6 PEDAL
CLUTCH
K1 B4 Transmission input speed sensor (nLsa)
B9 Clutch speed sensor (nHk)
B3 B9 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION B4
B10 Clutch pedal position sensor
ENGINE CLUTCH
B11 Temperature sensor
A3 A4
B1 B13 Clutch proximity sensor
F1 Fuse (8A)
F2 Fuse (8A)
H3 Low oil pressure indicator lamp
H5 Audible alarm
1 F1 2 KL.30
(+)
(+)
1 F2 2 KL.15
K1 Interlock starter relay 70A
1
S7
1
P
1
S6
S4 Mechanical gearbox neutral sensor
B13 H3
B9 3 B4 3 B3 3 B1 3 2 2 2
A5 1
2 2 2 2 44 45 23 68 5 21 30 29 S6 Transmission oil low pressure sensor (18 bar)
ED8 VP1 VPE1 VPE2 ADM4 ED10 ED12 ED11
4 15 2
1 1 1 1 VMG2 SDDK
17
3
EF7
36 A6 X2:D H5 S7 Interlock button
40
VMG1 SD4 A9
EF6
62 3 X2:A
EF4 14 X1:B
16 SD1
EF5 57 B
38 ADM5 Y1(GV1)
EU1 11 C
37 ADM6 Y2(GV2)
2 AU 34 D
ADM7 Y3(HV1) X2:C
A1 33 E A3
B10 H
3
ADM8
50 A
Y4(HV2) A12
T AIP7
24 Y5(MVR)
1 VMGA1 8 F
VPS2 (+) OPTION
H
T
B11 32 1
39 AIP3 Y6(MVV)
ER1 55 2
VP 67
ED6
AIP4 Y7(MVR) A4
A2.1 TIPP + 22 VPS1
12 3
(+)
TIPP - ED7
56 1
63 AIP1 FK
V - AUTOM. ED1 13 2 A11
65 VPS1 (+)
VP N - AUTOM. ED2
20
R - AUTOM. ED3
EDM1 VM1 VM2 SD2
A2.2
KL.30 31 01 02 59
87 85
1
K1 S4 OPTION
30 86 A10
2
KL.50a KL.50
Mot. avv. Blocco. avv.
D0005221
10-27
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
REAR AXLE DESCRIPTION
1.3 REAR AXLE
DESCRIPTION
The rear axle receives drive from the pinion (4) and transmits drive through the differential (5) and epicyclic reduction units
(2) to the rear wheels (1).
The rear axle is equipped with an electro-hydraulically controlled differential lock (6) and two hydraulically operated brakes
(3).
4
2 2
3 3
1 1
6 5
D0004450
COMPONENTS
1. Wheels
2. Epicyclic reduction unit
3. Brake
4. Pinion
5. Differential
6. Differential lock
10-29
REAR AXLE COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D0004470
12 11 10 9
1. Differential lock 7. Hub

2. Central axle housing 8. Axle casing
3. Differential 9. Planet carrier
4. Brake control device 10. Ring gear
5. Brake 11. Planet pinion
6. Half-shaft 12. Crown wheel
10-30
REAR AXLE DESCRIPTION
1.4 REAR PTO
DESCRIPTION
The rear PTO provides drive for external implements at a preselected rotation speed.
The rotary drive is taken directly from the engine and then reduced through a 2 -or 4-speed gearbox with manual speed
selection.
The PTO is engaged by way of an electro-hydraulically controlled clutch .
a b
3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 6 5
562 1046 c d
D0004460
1. Clutch Speed of PTO output shaft - 4-speed version

2. Synchronizer 1 Synchronizer 2
3. Intermediate shaft Synchronizer 1
c d
4. Intermediate shaft
5. PTO shaft a 562 1046
6. Synchronizer 2 b 772 1437
10-31
REAR PTO COMPONENTS
COMPONENTS
2 SPEED VERSION 4 SPEED VERSION

a b
1 2 1 2
3 3
4 4
8
5 5
6 6
7 7
D0005340
c d c d
1. PTO engagement clutch 5. Synchronizer (speeds a/b)

2. PTO input shaft 6. PTO end shaft
3. Intermediate shaft 7 PTO output shaft
4. Intermediate shaft 8. Synchronizer (speeds c/d)
10-32
BRAKING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2. BRAKING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The braking system is comprised of 2 braking devices (one for each rear wheel) operated by two hydraulic pumps by way
of mechanical controls.
Each pump supplies fluid to the brake on one side (left or right) thereby allowing the operator to brake on one side only and
thus reduce the steering radius.
3
2
5
4
6
8
7
D0004510
1. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Rear axle

2. Right master cylinder 6 Right brake
3. Brake microswitches (n° 2) 7. Left brake
4. Brake pedal 8 Left master cylinder
10-33
BRAKING SYSTEM MASTER CYLINDER
2.1 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
1
2
3
D0004520
1. Bleed screw TECHNICAL DATA

2. Barrel Piston diameter: 23.81 mm (0.938 in.)
3. Push-rod Piston stroke: 30 mm (1.182 in.)
Maximum operating pressure: 120 bar (1740 psi)
10-34
BRAKING SYSTEM BRAKE
2.2 BRAKE
5
1
A-A
A A
7
D0004530
1. Piston 5. Support
2. Plunger 6. Rod
3. Adjustment nuts 7. Parking brake control lever
4. Lever
10-35
BRAKING SYSTEM TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
2.3 TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
The tractor may be equipped with one of the four following trailer braking systems:
1. hydraulic trailer braking (Italy version)
2. hydraulic trailer braking (Export version)
3. air trailer braking (Italy version)
4. air trailer braking (Export version)
2.3.1 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)
Freno a mano
Hand brake
P
Y
B N LS 2
D0004540
1. Valve activation lever in position “1”

• When the lever (1) is in position “1” (valve activated) and the brake pedals are not pressed, a pressure of 12.5 bar
(181.3 psi) is available at port B.
• This pressure is supplied constantly to the trailer to release the parking brake.
• When the operator engages the parking brake, the solenoid valve (2) is energised; this nullifies the pressure at
port B.
• The pressure at port B is directly proportional to the pressure present in the tractor braking circuits Y.
2. Valve activation lever in position “O”

• When the lever (1) is in position “O” (valve deactivated), there is no pressure at port B.
In this condition, the pressure at port B is always null independently of the pressure in the tractor braking circuits.
10-36
1
N
LS
B
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P
N LS
E
B T
D0004550
FUNCTION TECHNICAL DATA

Port P - Valve feed • Maximum pressure at port N:
Port N - To lubrication line 210 bar (3046 psi)
Port B - To trailer brake • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Drain 12.5±2 bar (181.3±29 psi)
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Maximum pressure at port B:
135 --0 5 bar (1957.5 --0 72.5 psi)
Port LS - Load Sensing signal
• Feed flow rate:
20–80 /min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)
10-37
2.3.2 HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)
N
LS
B
D0004560
• When the brakes are not operated the pressure at port B is null.
• When the operator applies the tractor brakes, the pressure in the circuit pilots the braking valve and the pressure at
port B increases proportionally to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
10-38
MODELS 106 - 110 - 115 CV
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P T
D0004570
N B
Port P - Valve feed TECHNICAL DATA

Port N - To lubrication line • Maximum pressure at port N:
Port B - To trailer brake 210 bar (3046 psi)
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port T - Drain 0 bar (0 psi)
• Maximum pressure at port B:
142 +0 8 bar (2059 +0 116 psi)
• Feed flow rate:
20–80 /min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)
10-39
MODELS 120 - 135 - 150 - 165 CV
LS B LS
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P T
N B LS D0004580
Port P - Valve feed TECHNICAL DATA

Port N - To lubrication line • Maximum pressure at port N:
Port B - To trailer brake 210 bar (3046 psi)
Port T - Drain • Minimum constant pressure at port B:
Port Y - Connection to tractor braking system 0 bar (0 psi)
Port LS - Load Sensing signal • Maximum pressure at port B:
142 +0 8 bar (2059 +0 116 psi)
• Feed flow rate:
20–80 /min (5.3 -- 21.14 US.gpm)
10-40
2.3.3 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY VERSION)
3
E
2 4 5
1
Capacity 20
G
10
11
9 8
STANDARD SYSTEM BRAKING

D0004600
COMPONENTS
1. Compressed air reservoir 7. Trailer braking valve
2. Air compressor 8. Circuit pressure sensor
3. Engine 9. Circuit pressure indicator
4. Pressure limiting valve (7.8 bar (113 psi)) 10. Brake master cylinder
5. Quick-action coupler for trailer 11. Brake
6. Feed valve for cab air suspension
10-41
2.3.4 AIR TRAILER BRAKING (EXPORT VERSION)
3
E
2 4
1 5
Red
Capacity 20
5
6
Yellow 5
7 Black
8
G
10 9
11 12
STANDARD SYSTEM BRAKING

D0004591
1. Compressed air reservoir 7. Trailer braking valve (2-way)

2. Air compressor 8. Trailer braking valve (1-way)
3. Engine 9. Circuit pressure sensor.
4. Pressure limiting valve (7.8 bar (113 psi)) 10. Circuit pressure indicator
5. Quick-action coupler for trailer 11. Brake master cylinder
6. Feed valve for cab air suspension 12. Brake
10-42
BRAKING SYSTEM COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
4
a
D0004620
a. Port 0.1 - Compressor lubrication TECHNICAL DATA

b. Port 0 Bore: 90 mm (3.546 in.)
c. Port 2 - Compressed air delivery Stroke: 36 mm (1.418 in.)
Displacement: 229 cm³
1. Cylinder head
2. Cylinder Max. pressure.: 10 bar (145 psi)
3. Flange Crankshaft end float: 0.08–0.38 mm (0.003 – 0.015 in.)
4. Crankshaft
10-43
BRAKING SYSTEM PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE
PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE
1 21
1-2
DIAGRAM
7,8±0,2 bar
1 21
0
12 + 2 bar
22 3 1-2
D0004690
Port 1 - From compressor TECHNICAL DATA

Port 3 - Excess pressure vent Cut-out pressure: 7.8±0.2 bar (113±2.9 psi)
Port 21 - To compressed air reservoir Cut-in pressure: 0.6–1 bar (8.7 – 14.5 psi)
Relief valve setting: 12 +0 2 bar (174 +0 29 psi)
10-44
BRAKING SYSTEM CAB SUSPENSION FEED VALVE
CAB SUSPENSION FEED VALVE
FUNCTION
Supplies compressed air to the pneumatic cab suspension system only when the pressure in the trailer braking circuit
exceeds 6 --0 0.3 bar (87 --0 4.35 psi)
D0004700
TECHNICAL DATA
Opening pressure: 6 --0 0.3 bar (87 --0 4.35 psi)
Maximum operating pressure: 13 bar (188 psi)
10-45
BRAKING SYSTEM TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY)
TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (2-WAY)
41 42 1
DIAGRAM 3
1
41
42
P2 (bar)
9
8
Delivery pressure
7
2
)
.42
6
41
f (P
)
5 42
f( 1
2=
2 =
P4
4 P4
1)
3 P4
f(
2=
2 P4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
P41/P42 (bar) D0004761
Hydraulic control pressure
1. Parking brake actuating lever Port 1 - From compressed air reservoir

2. Bleed screw Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 41 - From left brake
Port 42 - From right brake
10-46
BRAKING SYSTEM TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM (1-WAY)
TRAILER BRAKING VALVE (1-WAY)
4
2
1
D0004710
Port 1 - From compressed air reservoir

Port 2 - To trailer brake
Port 4 - Pilot from delivery line to trailer
(2-way braking)
10-47
HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION DESCRIPTION
3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
DESCRIPTION
The function of the hydraulic front suspension system is to absorb impacts when travelling over rough terrain and to keep
the tractor body on an even keel on the road.
The system comprises:
• swinging axle support arm (1)
• position sensor (2)
• 2 suspension cylinders (3)
• front suspension control valve (4)
• electronic control unit (5)
4
5
2
1 D0004720
10-48
HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
3.1 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL VALVE
FUNCTION
In addition to the primary function of enabling front axle suspension by charging the hydraulic-pneumatic accumulators
that constitute the elastic elements of the system, the front suspension control valve also serves to control the raising and
lowering of the front axle.
1 ASP
A
SV1
BL2 RV3
DBV2 LS-V
LS 6
5 BL3 AV2
SV2
2
B
ZSP1
ASP
3
RV1
BL1
DIAGRAM
LS
5
A
LS DBV1
LS-V P T
BL3
BL2
ASP1 ASP2 T AV1
S
RV2
AV DBV1 DBV2
SV1
250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar RV3

A
AV2
RV2
H
ZSP1 SV2
BL1
RV1
B P
D0004750
1. Cylinder retraction control solenoid valve 5. Pressure discharge valve

2. LS signal control solenoid valve 6. Accumulator (setting: 140 bar)
3. Cylinder extension control solenoid valve 7. Use A relief valve (setting: 250 bar)
4. Accumulator (setting: 65 bar) 8. Use B relief valve (setting: 250 bar)
10-49
OPERATION
1. When the suspension is deactivated
LS
LS
A
1
LS-V
BL3
P T 7
6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2
4 S
DBV1 DBV2
SV1
AV
RV3
A AV2
3 ZSP1
RV2
5 2
H
b
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P
a D0004640
• When the suspension is deactivated, the electronic control unit energises the solenoid (1) by sending an LS signal to
the priority valve (in the case of the gear pump version) or to the variable displacement pump.
• This allows the pressurised oil from the pump (2) to flow to line a and compress the membrane of the accumulator (3)
up to the maximum circuit pressure.
• The oil is discharged from the piston side through passage B and through the solenoid valve (7) which is energised.
• The piston (4) is consequently pushed upwards to its stroke-end position, thereby returning the system to fixed axle
condition.
• The suspension is deactivated by the operator pressing a switch.
10-50
2. When the operator activates the system
A
LS
LS
LS-V
P T
BL3
6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2 S
4
DBV1 DBV2
SV1
AV
RV3
5
A AV2
RV2
ZSP1
2
b H
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P
a D0004650
• When the operator presses the switch to activate the suspension, the electronic control unit energises the solenoids
(1) and (5).
• This allows the pressurised oil from the pump (2) to flow to line b and thus start to push the piston (4) downwards.
• At the same time, the oil compresses the membranes of the accumulators and the oil in lines a and b increases.
• When the pressure in line a reaches the opening pressure of the relief valve (8), the valve opens and discharges some
of the oil to the drain circuit.
• When the position sensor detects that the suspension has attained the levelling position, the electronic control unit
de-activates the solenoids (1) and (5) and the part of the system containing the precharged accumulators is isolated
from the rest of the system.
10-51
3. When the system is active

• When the tractor is in motion and the wheels encounter an obstacle, the front axle is pushed upwards.
• This causes the pressure P2 to increase (the accumulators 6 are compressed) while the pressure P1 decreases
(accumulator 3 is decompressed).
• The pressure balance is thus altered and the system (which is closed) acts to restore the original condition.
1
A
LS
LS
LS-V
P T
BL3
6 ASP1 ASP2 T
BL2 S
DBV1 DBV2
SV1
P2 AV
RV3
5
A AV2
3 ZSP1 RV2
2
P1 H
SV2
BL1
B RV1 P
4 D0004660
S
S max
P2 max
S,P2
S min
t
P1
P1 min
t shock t damping t
D0002411
10-52
FRONT AXLE
4. FRONT AXLE
B B
1710
=
A A
=
52º –0 2
1710
D0004780
10-53
FRONT AXLE HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT
4.1 HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT
VERSION WITHOUT SBA
4 5 6 7
8
1 2 3
9
10 11
12
18 17
16 15 14 13 D0004790
A-A
1. Planet carrier 10. Oil seal

2. Planet pinion 11. Plain bearing
3. Ring gear 12. Half-shaft
4. Bearing 13. Lower kingpin
5. Flange 14. Oil seal
6. Oil seal 15. Bearing
7. Upper kingpin 16. Oil seal
8. Hub carrier 17. Bearing
9. Front axle 18. Sun wheel
10-54
FRONT AXLE HUB CARRIER AND FINAL REDUCTION UNIT
VERSION WITH SBA
4 5 6 7
8
1 2 3 C
9
10 11
12
18 17
16 15 14 13
B-B
19
19 20
C-C 21 22
D0004800
1. Planet carrier 12. Half-shaft

2. Planet pinion 13. Lower kingpin
3. Ring gear 14. Oil seal
4. Bearing 15. Bearing
5. Flange 16. Oil seal
6. Oil seal 17. Bearing
7. Upper kingpin 18. Sun wheel
8. Hub carrier 19. Steering sensor (n° 2)
9. Front axle 20. Shim
10. Oil seal 21. Disc
11. Plain bearing 22. Lock ring
10-55
FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
4.2 DIFFERENTIAL
VERSION WITH 100% HYDRAULIC LOCKING
3 4 5 6 7 8
2 9
1 10
11
21 12
20
19
18
17
13
16
14
15
D0004810
1. Roller cage 12. Spacer

2. Belleville springs 13. Bearing
3. Bearing 14. Oil seal
4. Cover 15. Hub
5. Clutch plates 16. Pinion shaft
6. Differential cage 17. Bearing
7. Planet pinion 18. Crown wheel
8. Differential cage 19. Thrust plate
9. Sun gear 20. Thrust levers
10. Bearing 21. Piston
11. Half-shaft
10-56
FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
45% SELF-LOCKING VERSION
2 3 4 5 6
1 7
8
14
13
9
12
10
11
D0005350
1. Bearing 8. Half-shaft
2. Clutch plates 9. Bearing
3. Differential cage 10. Oil seal
4. Planet pinion 11. Hub
5. Differential cage 12. Pinion shaft
6. Sun gear 13. Bearing
7. Bearing 14. Crown wheel
10-57
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
5. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
The AGROTON MK3 series may be equipped with two different types of hydraulic system:
1- CCLS hydraulic system, with fixed displacement pump.
2- LS hydraulic system, with variable displacement pump.
The CCLS system has fixed displacement gear pump that supplies oil to the various hydraulic functions at a flow rate that
is proportional to the engine speed.
When the engine is running at maximum speed and none of the hydraulic actuators are in operation (e.g. during road use),
oil is pumped through the system at around 80 litres per minute (with a consequent increase in temperature and fuel
consumption).
Furthermore, if two or more actuators are operated when the engine is running at low speed, the pump will be unable to
meet the demand and consequently the actuators will operate at a lower speed in accordance with the available oil flow.
The LS system has a variable displacement piston pump which sends oil to the hydraulic functions only according to need.
In this system, when the engine is running at maximum speed and no hydraulic actuators are in operation, the pump
effectively only circulates the oil that is dispersed through internal leakage in the devices connected to the system (just a
few litres per minute), thus saving energy and fuel.
Furthermore, the variable displacement pump has a higher capacity than the gear pump (120 litres/min.) and can thus
provide a sufficient flow rate to operate all the hydraulic functions simultaneously.
10-58
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 106-115 CV models (CCLS version)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (106-115 CV models) (CCLS version)
Druckloser
Ruecklauf
LS M7
A AP WV3 WV4
LS
R1
LS-V P T X
BL3
Y
ASP1 ASP2 P
BL2 T X
p =65bar p =65bar
0 0
S
AV1 DBV1 DBV2
SV1
ø3 ø3 RV3
A 250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar
ZSP1 1 1
RV2 AV2
p =140bar
0
H 0 0
SV2
2 2
RV1 BL1
B P
F F
Schmierkreis Einfuellstutzen
-DBV 4 bar A B A B
Wärmetauscher
N B
Schmierung
Zapfwellenkupplung
Systemdruck- Y
Schmierung Halteventil 20 - 2 bar
Schaltgetriebe Bypass- Ventil 3 bar DS
P T
Hydrostatische Lenkung
P L
LS-Block
Lastschalt- M4
18 bar kupplungen
T R Hubwerk
Schmierung
Mech. betätigtes Magnetventil Hinterachse
Ventil für Hinterachs-
Zapfwellenkupplung differential Lenkzylinder
Sperre
LS LS
Zusätzliche P CF
P
Anschlüsse EF
AP WV1 EHR WV2 EP Y
Magnetventil PP
Temperatur- Vorderachskupplung R
X
Druckschalter schalter
Durchm.0,5mm
X
S
P
Pumpe am Getriebe
Kaltstart-DBV 25 bar G Fördermenge 25 cm3/U
∆p=8,4 bar in Schaltstellg.1 od.2

61 l/min bei Nenndrehzahl
∆p=3 bar in Schaltstellg.0

Feinfilter mit β10=1,5 1 1
Bypass-Ventil β30=20 Grobfilter
200 ␮m M6 0 0
2 2
M3 H
F F
Hydraulikpumpe
Pumpe 16 ccm 32 cm3 Motor
A B R1 A A B
Ansaugfeinfilter Bypassventil
25 ␮m
D0004740
Getriebegehäuse
10-59
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 120-165 CV models (CCLS version)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (120-165 CV models) (CCLS version)
LS
A AP WV3 WV4
LS
R1
LS-V P T X
BL3 Y
P
ASP1 ASP2 BL2 T X
p =65bar p =65bar
0 0
S
AV1 DBV1 DBV2
SV1
ø3 ø3 RV3
A 250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar
ZSP1
1 1
RV2 AV2
p 0=140bar
0 0
H
SV2
2 2
BL1
B RV1 P
F F
Einfuellstutzen
A B A B
Nx B LS
P T Hydrostatische Lenkung
P L
Hubwerk
T R
Schmierung
Hinterachse
Lenkzylinder
Resonator
LS
AP WV1 EHR WV2 EP Y

R
X
X
S
P
∆p=8,4 bar in Schaltstellg.1 od.2

∆p=3 bar in Schaltstellg.0
1 1 1
CF EF LS
0 0 0
2 2 2
M3 H
F F F
Motor
Hydraulikpumpe
A B R1 A A B
Ansaugfeinfilter Bypassventil
25 ␮m
D0005250
Getriebegehäuse
10-60
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 106-115 CV models (LS version)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (106-115 CV models) (LS version)
Druckloser
Ruecklauf
LS M7
A AP WV3 WV4
LS
R1
LS-V P T X
BL3 Y
P
ASP1 ASP2 BL2 T X
p =65bar p =65bar
0 0
S
AV1 DBV1 DBV2
SV1
ø3 ø3 RV3
A 250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar
ZSP1 1 1
AV2
p =140bar RV2
0
0 0
H
SV2
2 2
BL1
B RV1 P
F F
Einfuellstutzen
Schmierkreis
-DBV 4 bar A B A B
Wärmetauscher
Power Beyond
Schmierung
Differential
Schmierung N B
Zapfwellenkupplung
Systemdruck-
Schmierung Halteventil 20 - 2 bar Y
Schaltgetriebe Bypass- Ventil 3 bar
DS
P T P L
LS-Block Lastschalt- M4
18 bar kupplungen
T R Hubwerk
Mech. betätigtes Schmierung
Magnetventil Hinterachse
Ventil für Hinterachs-
Zapfwellenkupplung differential Lenkzylinder
Sperre
LS LS
CF
Zusätzliche P
P
Anschlüsse EF
AP WV1 EHR WV2 EP Y
Magnetventil PP
Vorderachskupplung M3 R
Temperatur- 0,3 X
Druckschalter schalter Y
P
X
S
Pumpe am Getriebe
Kaltstart-DBV 25 bar G Fördermenge 25 cm3/U
61 l/min bei Nenndrehzahl B M5 X
Ls
Feinfilter mit β10=1,5 1 1
Bypass-Ventil β30=20 G
Grobfilter
200 ␮m filter FO
0 0
M6
2 2
FI 235 bar
H
F F
M2
5 bar 57
Pumpe 16 ccm
A B R1 A A B
S L1,L M1
100-(280)␮m DS
P = max 0,2bar at 130 l/min
D0005260
Getriebegehäuse
10-61
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 120-165 CV models (LS version)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (120-165 CV models) (LS version)
Druckloser
Ruecklauf
M7
LS
A AP WV3 WV4
LS R1
LS-V P T X
BL3 Y
P
ASP1 ASP2 BL2 T X
p =65bar p =65bar
0 0
S
AV1 DBV1 DBV2
SV1
ø3 ø3 RV3
A 250 +10 bar 250 +10 bar
ZSP1 1 1
AV2
p 0=140bar RV2
0 0
H
SV2
2 2
BL1
RV1 P
B
F F
Einfuellstutzen
X
A B A B
Power Beyond
Schmierung N B
Zapfwellenkupplung x
P T P L
M4
T R Hubwerk
Schmierung
Hinterachse
Lenkzylinder
LS LS
P EF
P
CF
AP WV1 EHR WV2 EP Y

M3 R
X
Y
P
X
S
B M5 X
LS
0,5 bar
G 1 1
filter FO
0 0
2 2
FI 235 bar
H
F F
M2
5 bar
A B R1 A A B
S L1,L M1
100-(280)␮m
DS
P = max 0,2bar at 130 l/min
D0005270
Getriebegehäuse
10-62
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
5.1 VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
L1 A
M1
M2
C C
B A
X
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
2 3
S
X
FO
M1
B
235 bar L
L1
G 1
S
5 bar
FI
FO FI M2 4
D0004900
FUNCTION COMPONENTS
Port L: drain 1. Antishock valve
Port X: LS signal 2. Load Sensing valve
Port S: suction 3. Pressure cut-off valve
Port B: delivery 4. By-pass valve
Port G: transmission lubrication
Port FI: filter inlet
Port FO: filter outlet
10-63
6
5
4 7 8
3
10
2
1
19
18
17
16 15 14 13 12 11
A-A
D0004960
COMPONENTS
1. Input shaft 11. Boost pump
2. Oil seal 12. Boost pump housing
3. Swash plate return spring 13. Bearing
4. Swash plate 14. Valve plate
5. Control rod 15. Pistons (n° 9)
6. Control piston 16. Piston retainer ring
7. Cylinder barrel 17. Piston shoe
8. Spacer 18. Taper roller bearing
9. End cover 19. Pump housing
10. Roller bearings
10-64
COMPONENTS
1. Pressure limiting valve
2. Filter by-pass valve
3. Filter by-pass valve spring D0005110 B-B 3 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
12 11 10 9 8 7
D0004910
C-C
COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing spool valve 7. Adjustment nuts
2. Restrictor 8. Spring cover
3. Collar 9. Pressure cut-off valve spring
4. Load Sensing valve spring 10. Collar
5. Spring cover 11. Restrictor (Ø 0.6 mm) (0.024 in.)
6. Adjustment nuts 12. Pressure cut-off valve spool
10-65
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BOOST PUMP
5.1.1 BOOST PUMP
FUNCTION
• Rotary drive and torque is transmitted to the pump from the shaft and converted into hydraulic energy. The
pressurised oil flow from the boost pump is directed to the variable displacement pump and the transmission
lubrication circuit.
3
2
45cc
1 57cc 5 6
4
D0004820
OPERATION
• The boost pump (1) draws oil from the rear gearbox and directs it under pressure to the filter (2) and the variable
displacement pump (3).
• The pressurised oil from the boost pump is also used for lubrication of the transmission (4).
• The pressure generated by the boost pump is regulated by the pressure limiting valve (5) (setting: 5 bar (72.3 psi)) that
prevents excessive pressure from building in the lubrication circuit on cold-starting and during cold weather
conditions.
• The pressure-boosting circuit also includes a low boost pressure sensor (6) (set to 5 bar) that detects clogging of the
filter (2) and alerts the operator by illuminating a warning light.
10-66
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HYDRAULIC PUMP
5.1.2 HYDRAULIC PUMP
FUNCTION
• The rotary drive and torque transmitted from the
shaft to the pump is converted into hydraulic energy;
the pressurised flow from the pump varies according
to the demand from the hydraulic loads.
• The flow rate can be varied by altering the angle of
the swash plate.
5
3 A 4
2
6 B 7
D0005010
STRUCTURE
• The cylinder block (4) is fixed to the shaft (1) by a • The pistons (5) stroke axially within their bores in the
broached fitting B and the shaft (1) is supported by cylinder block (4).
the front and rear bearings.
• The rotation of the cylinder block (4) causes the oil in
• The pistons (5) have ball ends; the piston shoes (6) fit the bores to be pressurised; the positions of the inlet
around the ball ends of the pistons to form a single and outlet ports are determined by slots in the valve
assembly. The pistons (5) and the shoes (6) together plate (7).
form a ball joint. The oil is drawn into the bores and forced out
through the slots in the valve plate (7).
• The swash plate (3) has a flat surface A against which
the piston shoes slide (6) with a circular motion.
10-67
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HYDRAULIC PUMP
OPERATION
1. Pump operation
1 - The cylinder block (4) rotates with the shaft (1)
and the piston shoes (6) slide on the flat surface
«A».
3 A 6 S 4 C
The swash plate (3) can swing within the arc «B»;
the stroke of the pistons varies according to the 1
angle «α» between the shaft axis (1) and the X x
axis of the swash plate (3). ␣
Angle «α» is known as the «swash plate angle».
2 - When the axis X of the swash plate (3) is at an
angle «α» to the shaft (1) and consequently to the
cylinder block (4), the surface «A» acts as a cam
for the piston shoes (6). Consequently, as the
shaft rotates, the pistons (5) stroke within their
bores in the cylinder block (4), thereby a creating
a difference between the volumes C and D which B Fig. 1
D
causes oil to be drawn in and forced out in
quantities equal to this difference (D –
C=delivery).
In other terms, as the cylinder block (4) rotates,
the volume of chamber D is reduced while the
volume of chamber C is increased, thereby
causing oil to be drawn in.
(Fig. 1 shows the condition of the pump on
completion of the suction stage in chamber D 3 4 C
and the delivery stage in chamber C ).
3 - When the axis X of the swash plate (3) is parallel
to the axis of the cylinder block (4) (swash plate
angle «α»=0), the difference between the
volumes C and D inside the cylinder block (6) is
zero and no oil is pumped (Fig. 2). x
(In reality, the swash plate angle «α» is never truly
equal to 0).
4 - The pump delivery is therefore directly
proportional to the swash plate angle «α».
2. Controlling the requirement of oil

Fig. 2 D
D0000530
• At a given rotation speed input, the required oil
flow is controlled by the angle «α» between the 8
swash plate (3) and the shaft (1).
2 3 C
The swash plate (3) is inclined by the springs (10).
Against the spring works the control piston (8). 10
The position of the control piston (8) defines the
angle «α».
• Below the max. pressure «α» is adjusted in this
way, that between the pressure of the pump and ␣
the pressure of LS-signal is a certain difference
(control pressure difference).
• Work the pump at the max. pressure, «α» is
adjusted to that position which guaranteed not
to exceed this pressure.
That means «α» is set to a smaller value than
from LS-signal whished. (Fig. 3). Fig. 3 D D0005020
10-68
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE
5.1.3 LOAD SENSING VALVE, PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE
1 2
PLS=PA
⌬PR 7 8 PA
4 6 PP
3
D0004830
COMPONENTS
1. Load Sensing valve spool
2. Load sensing valve spring
3. Pressure cut-off valve spool
4. Pressure cut-off valve spring
5. Swash plate return spring
6. Control piston
7. Directional control valve
8. Load
10-69
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Swash-plate angle control
• The swash-plate angle of the pump (and consequently the pump displacement), is controlled in such a way that the
pressure difference ∆PR between the pump delivery pressure PP and the delivery pressure PLS to the load at the
work port of the control valve is maintained at a constant value. (∆PR = Pump delivery pressure PP -- PLS delivery
pressure to load).
• If the pressure difference ∆PR falls relative to the pressure setting of the LS valve, the swash plate angle will increase.
If the pressure difference ∆PR rises, the swash plate angle will decrease.
★ For details of this mechanism, see the description of the «HYDRAULIC PUMP».
Directional
control valve
T PLS
Delivery pump
PP
Control piston
TP Valve
LS Valve
D0004841
10-70
LOAD SENSING (LS) VALVE
FUNCTION
• The LS valve regulates the pump delivery in accordance with the position of the control lever of the directional control
valve i.e. in accordance with the demand from the loads.
• The LS valve senses the demand from the loads by way of the pressure difference ∆PR between the pump delivery
pressure PP and the pressure at the outlet port of the directional control valve PLS ; this enables the valve to regulate
the delivery Q of the main pump.
(PP, PLS and ∆PR, are respectively: the pump delivery pressure, the pressure of the Load Sensing signal and
difference between these two pressures).
• In other terms, the LS valve detects the pressure difference ∆PR, generated by the the flow of oil passing through the
passages uncovered by the spool and regulates the pump delivery Q so as to maintain a constant pressure drop.
This means that the pump delivery is proportional to the demand from the directional control valve.
OPERATION
Pump operation can be divided into four stages:
a. When the directional control valve is in neutral position
b. When a control lever is operated
c. When the flow rate stabilises
d. When the system enters “saturation” condition
10-71
a. When the directional control valve is in «NEUTRAL» position
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
PEN
PP Min Max
7
X
M 5 6
D0004850
• The pressure PLS of the LS signal from the control valve outlet port, enters the chamber a of the LS valve; the pump
delivery pressure PP enters the chamber b on the opposite side.
• The shift in the position of the spool (1) is determined by the combination of the force exerted by the pressure PLS plus
the force of the spring (2) and the force exerted on the opposite side of the spool by the pressure PP.
• Before the engine is started, the control piston (6) is pushed to the right by the spring (5) (position corresponding to
the maximum swash plate angle).
• When the engine is started, if all the control valve spools are in «NEUTRAL» position, the pressure PLS of the LS
signal remains at 0 bar (0 psi) because there is no flow through the control valves and the signal is connected to drain.
At the same time, the pump delivery pressure PP increases because the hydraulic actuators are stationary.
When the force exerted by the pressure PP in chamber b overcomes the force of the spring (2), the spool (1) shifts to
the right thereby allowing the pressure PP to flow to the chamber X of the piston (6) as the connection is made
between the passages c and d.
• The force exerted by the oil pressure on the piston (6) overcomes the force exerted by the spring (5). This causes the
piston to shift to the left i.e. in the direction of the minimum swash plate angle.
• The pump delivery pressure PP stabilises around 22 bar (319 psi), which corresponds to the standby pressure.
10-72
b. When a control lever is operated
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
7 8
PEN
PP Min Max
f
X
M 5 6
D0004860
• When a control lever is moved from the NEUTRAL position, this generates an LS signal corresponding to the load
delivery pressure PLS.
• The LS signal pressure in chamber a causes the spool to shift to the left, thereby connecting the passages d and e.
The chamber X is depressurised and the spring (5) causes the swash plate to move to the maximum displacement
angle.
• System balance is restored when the pressure ∆PR exerts on the spool (1) a force equal to the difference in force due
to the spring (2) thus restoring the connection between the passages c and d.
10-73
c. When the flow rate stabilises
d 1 2
c
d
PP T PLS
g
PEN
PP
X
M 5 6
D0004870
• When the pump delivery reaches the demand from the auxiliary control valve, the pump delivery pressure PP present
in the chamber b of the LS valve balances the combined force of the pressure PLS of the LS in chamber a and the
force exerted by the spring (6).
On reaching this state of equilibrium, the piston (1) comes to a stop in an intermediate position.
• In this condition, the passage connecting chamber c to chamber d remains partially open, thereby maintaining the
pressure in chamber d.
An oil flow enters the control piston (6) at a sufficient pressure to balance the force exerted by the spring (5).
• The stability of this equilibrium is ensured by a stabilised flow from the restrictor g.
• The force of the spring (2) is regulated so that the piston (1) is balanced when
PP -- PLS = ∆PR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• In practical terms, pump delivery is made proportional to the aperture of the auxiliary control valve, maintaining the pressure
difference ∆PR = 22 bar (319 psi).
• This condition remains unaltered until there is a change in the operating conditions (e.g. a change in engine speed, reduction
or increase in the demand for flow or pressure, etc.).
10-74
d. When the system enters “saturation” condition
b 1 d e a 2
PP T PLS
7 8
PEN
PP Min Max
f
X
M 5 6
D0004880
• If the engine speed is reduced during the operation of one or more loads, there will be a corresponding reduction in
the flow from the pump. It follows that the pump will compensate for this by altering the swash plate angle.
• When the pump reaches its maximum displacement, and thus can no longer increase its delivery, the difference
between the pump delivery pressure PP and the pressure PLS of the LS (pressure difference ∆PR) will become
smaller (“saturation” condition).
• The pressure PLS present in chamber a of the LS valve will be nearly equal to the pressure PP and the piston (1) will
be moved left by the combined force of the pressure PLS and the spring (2).
The piston thus closes the passage c and connects the passages d and e.
• The pressurised oil in chamber X of the control piston (6) flows through the passages d and e to reach the pump drain
chamber; in this way the pressure in chamber X of the control piston (6) becomes equal to the drain pressure.
• As a result, the control piston (6) is shifted to the right by the movement of the swash plate determined by the spring
(5) up to the maximum swash plate angle.
10-75
PRESSURE CUT-OFF VALVE (TP)
FUNCTION
• The pressure cut-off valve regulates the pump delivery on reaching maximum pressure.
PP T PLS
PEN
PP
Min Max
D0004890
OPERATION
• The pressure cut-off valve senses the pump delivery pressure and, on reaching the maximum pressure setting,
reduces the pump delivery to zero, by-passing the action of the LS valve.
• The pump delivery is thus returned to a minimum value sufficient for the internal lubrication of the pump of the main
auxiliary services and to maintain the hydraulic system at maximum pressure.
10-76
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP (106-115 CV models)
5.2 HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP (106-115 CV models)
D0005280

Port L: suction Displacement: 32 cc/rev
Port P: delivery Maximum pressure: 200 bar (2900 psi)
10-77
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM STEERING GEAR PUMP (106-115 CV models)
5.3 STEERING GEAR PUMP (106-115 CV models)
D0005290

Port L: suction Displacement: 16 cc/rev.
Port P: delivery Maximum pressure: 180 bar (2610 psi)
10-78
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM GEAR PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC SERVICES AND STEERING (120-165 CV models)
5.4 GEAR PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC SERVICES AND STEERING (120-165 CV

models)
S
EF
CF
LS
A A
View A
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
CF EF LS
S D0004970

Port S: suction Displacement: 32 cc/rev.
Port CF: priority delivery Maximum pressure: 200 bar (2900 psi)
Port EF: secondary delivery
Port LS: LS signal
10-79
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM GEAR PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC SERVICES AND STEERING (120-165 CV models)
3
1 2 b
5
B d
4
EF
CF
e
LS
a
c
f
B 7 6
A-A B -B
D0004980
COMPONENTS 5 . Spool
1. Priority valve body 6. Spring
2. Pump housing 7. Driven shaft
3. End cover
4. Input shaft
DESCRIPTION
The gear pump sends oil under pressure to the chamber a from where it is sent through the port CF to the power steering.
At the same time, the pressurised oil reaches chamber b of the spring (6) and the chamber c opposite the spring (6) through
the passage d.
As the LS line is sent to drain by the power steering, a small amount of oil (about 1 litre/min.) flows through the port LS.
This creates a pressure difference between the two sides of the spool (5) that is consequently pushed downwards, thereby
allowing the oil to flow to chamber e and from there to the auxiliary services .
When the steering wheel is turned, the connection between the drain and the LS line is broken and the LS line is connected
to the delivery line to the steering cylinder. This nullifies the pressure difference between the two sides of the spool and
causes the spring to push the spool upwards, thereby allowing oil to flow from chamber a to chamber f.
10-80
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRIORITY VALVE
5.5 PRIORITY VALVE
106-115 CV VERSION
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P CF EF
PP
LS
LS PP
P
EF CF
D0005300
FUNCTION
Port P - Valve feed Port EF - Delivery to services
Port LS - Load Sensing signal Port PP - Valve pilot flow
Port CF - Delivery to power steering
120-165 CV VERSION
CF
LS
EF P
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
CF EF
LS
P
D0005310
FUNCTION
Port CF - Delivery to the power steering Port EF - Delivery to services
Port P - Valve feed Port LS - Load Sensing signal
10-81
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE (Version with fixed displacement pump)
5.6 AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE
VERSION WITH FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP

FUNCTION
• The function of the auxiliary services control valve is to control the flow of pressurised oil to the auxiliary services and
the rear lift.
• This control valve is a parallel circuit valve, which means that all the services receive oil flow simultaneously .
1 2 3 4 6 4 7 4 6
Y
R
X
X
S
P
9 1 1
0 0
2 2
8
H
F F
A B R1 A A B
5
REAR GEARBOX
D0004990
DESCRIPTION
• The pressurised oil from the pump (1) enters the inlet section (2); from here it is distributed to the spool sections
through internal passages.
• In the inlet section (2) we find an input gauge (8) and a relief valve (3) for LS-signal.
• The input gauge adjusts the pressure to supply the auxiliary valves (6) in this way, that it is always corresponding to
the spring force (9) higher than the pressure of the LS-signal.
• The pressure limitation is provided by limitation of the LS-signal pressure, done by valve (3).
• All the spools, when operated, generate a pressure signal (Load Sensing signal) that is equal to the pressure demand
from each load.
The highest of these pressure signals, selected by the bistable valves (4), is directed to the pressure relief valve (3).
• On the lift spool section there is an antishock valve (5) (on the UP control side) that serves to prevent excessive
pressure caused by jolting of the implement.
10-82
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE (Version with variable displacement pump)
VERSION WITH VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
FUNCTION
The function of the auxiliary services control valve is to control the flow of pressurised oil to the auxiliary services and the
rear lift.
This control valve is of the parallel circuit Load Sensing type.
1 2 3 5 3 6 3 5
Y
R
X
Y
P
X
S
1 1
0 0
2 2
H
F F
A B R1 A A B
REAR GEARBOX 4
D0005000
DESCRIPTION
• The pressurised oil from the pump (1) enters the inlet section (2); from here it is distributed to the spool sections
through internal passages.
• All the spools, when operated, generate a pressure signal (Load Sensing signal) that is equal to the pressure demand
from each load.
The highest of these pressure signals, selected by the bistable valves (3), is sent to the variable displacement pump
through port Y of the control valve.
• On the lift spool section (6) there is an antishock valve (4) (on the UP control side) that serves to prevent excessive
pressure caused by jolting of the implement.
10-83
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AUXILIARY SERVICES CONTROL VALVE
5.6.1 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH FIXED DISPLACEMENT PUMP (CCLS)
4-WAY VERSION WITHOUT FURTHER EQUIPMENT (I.E. FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION)
3
2 4 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
6 4 3 2 1
5
1
R
X
R1 X
S
P
A A
1
0 1
B A B
0
2
2
H
6
F
R
R
B
B
A
A
7 7 5 7 7
D0005150
1. Cover plate 5. Inlet manifold

2. Control valve section n° 1 6. Relief valve
3. Lift control valve section 7. Check valve
4. Control valve section n° 2
4-WAY VERSION WITH FURTHER EQUIPMENT (I.E. FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION)
3
2 4 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
6 4 3 2 1
5 Y
1
R
R1 X
P
S
P
A A
1
0 1
B A B
0
2
2
H
F
Y R 6
R
B
B
A
7 7 5 7 7
D0005160
1. Cover plate 5. Inlet manifold

2. Control valve section n° 1 6. Relief valve
4. Control valve section n° 2
10-85
8-WAY VERSION
3
2 4 7 8
5 9
1 1
R1
P P
A A A A
B A B B B
Y R 6 Y R
10 10 10 10
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
6 4 3 2 1 9 7 8 1
Y
R X
R X
Y
X
P X
S
P
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
H
F F F F
A B R1 A A B A B A B
5 10 10 10 10
D0005140
1. Cover plate 6. Relief valve

2. Control valve section n° 1 7. Control valve section n° 3
3. Lift control valve section 8. Control valve section n° 4
4. Control valve section n° 2 9. Inlet manifold
5. Inlet manifold 10. Check valve
10-86
5.6.2 TYPES OF CONTROL VALVE WITH VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP (LS)

4-WAY VERSION
3
2 4
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
5 4 3 2 1
1 5
R
X
X X
R1 X
P
P
S
A A
1
0 1
B A B
0
2
2
H
F
F
R
R
B
B
A
A
6 6 6 6
D0005120
1. Cover plate 4. Control valve section n° 2

2. Control valve section n° 1 5. Inlet manifold
8-WAY VERSION
3
2 4 6 7
8
1 5 1
R1
P
A A A A
P
B B R B B
A
Y R
9 9 9 9
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

Y
R X
R X
Y Y
P X
P X
S
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
H
F F F F
A B R1 A A B A B A B
5 4 9 3 2 9 1 8 7 9 6 9 1 D0005130
1. Cover plate 6. Control valve section n° 3

2. Control valve section n° 1 7. Control valve section n° 4
3. Lift control valve section 8. Manifold
4. Control valve section n° 2 9. Check valve
5. Inlet manifold
10-87
5.6.3 SERVICES CONTROL SECTION
2
B
A
3
R R
Y
4
P
1
6 5 D0005100
1. Spool return device 4. Flow control

2. Check valve 5. Flow control spool
3. Spool 6. Check valve
10-88
5.6.4 DESCRIPTIONS OF COMPONENTS
SPOOL RETURN DEVICE
1
2
D0005040
1. Spool return spring

2. Spool
Check valve (NR)
3 B
4
1
R
2
D0005050
1. Slide 4. Valve seat

2. Ball 5. Spool
3. Check valve spring
10-89
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
1 2
3
D0005060
1. Spring
2. Flow control spool
3. Control shaft
10-90
5.6.5 INLET MANIFOLD (CC version)
DESCRIPTION
The function of the inlet manifold is to send only the required amount of oil to the actuators and to send any excess oil
supplied by the pump to the drain circuit.
The inlet manifold also includes a relief valve that limits the operating pressure of the actuators.
3 HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
4
1
4
P 3
2
R
2 1
D0005070
1. Pressure compensating valve spool

2. Compensating valve spring
3. Relief valve
4. Relief valve spring
10-91
OPERATION
1. When the actuators are not operated
b
a
1 CONTROL VALVE
D0005080
• When the engine is running and the driver does not operate any of the hydraulic service controls, the pump sends oil
to the inlet manifold (port P).
• As all the actuators are stationary, the oil pressure increases in chamber a and consequently also in chamber b.
• When the oil pressure in chambers a and b exceeds the force exerted by the spring (2), the spool (1) is shifted
downwards, allowing the excess oil from the pump to flow to drain.
10-92
2. When an actuator is operated
b
CONTROL VALVE
a
P
y
5
c 2
D0005090
• When an actuator is operated, the pressure required for its operation is also directed to the channel y (Load Sensing
signal channel) and then sent to chamber c of the manifold.
• This causes the spool (1) to shift upwards and the oil required to operate the load is sent to the control valve.
• When the load pressure balances the force of the spring (4), poppet (5) is shifted to the left, allowing limitation of the
operating pressure.
10-93
5.6.6 LIFT CONTROL VALVE SECTION
DESCRIPTION
• The lift control section is a 1-way hydraulic control valve operated by two proportional solenoid valves.
• The control incorporates an antishock valve that protects the hydraulic circuit and against pressure surges caused by
jolting of the implement during work and transport.
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
P Y R
A
P Y R
1 2 3 4 5 7
A R
D0004920
11 10 9 8 6
COMPONENTS 7. DOWN control solenoid valve

1. UP control solenoid valve 8. Flow control spring
2. Check valve 9. Flow control spool
3. Check valve spring 10. Spring
4. Antishock valve 11. UP control spool
5. Antishock valve spring
6. DOWN control spool
10-94
OPERATION
1. When the lift control is in neutral position
• The oil from the pump enters chamber a and from here flows into passage b.
• At the same time the oil flows into chamber c of the flow control (1) through passage d.
• This causes the spool to shift to the right until the connecting passage between chamber a and passage b is closed.
• The pressure in chamber e caused by the weight of the implement mounted on the linkage (e.g.: plough), keeps the
check valve (2) closed, thereby ensuring that the lift maintains its position.
• The chamber e is thus a closed chamber that prevents any uncontrolled movement of the lift.
• The pressure in chamber e also acts on the antishock valve (3) that eliminates any pressure surges caused by jolting
of the implement during work or transport.
.
e 3
A R
c b d a 1 D0004930
10-95
2. When the lift is raised

• When the lift is raised, the electronic lift control energises the solenoid (4) which move the spool (5) to the right.
• The oil in passage b can therefore flow through the check valve (2) into chamber e and from there to the lift cylinders.
• At the same time, the pressure present in passage b can flow into the chamber i and into the passage f and from there
through the channel g into chamber h of the flow control (1).
• As the oil pressure is the same on both sides of the spool, the spool is shifted by the force of the spring (6) and the oil
can flow from chamber a into the passage b.
e 2
4 5
A R
i D0004940
b 1 g a 6 h
10-96
3. When the lift is lowered

• During lifting or when the lift is stationary, the spool (8) is pushed to the right by the spring (9).
• As a result, the passage between the chambers m and n is closed and the pressure in chamber p pushes the spool
(10) to the right.
When the lift is lowered, the electronic lift control energises the solenoid (7) that moves the spool (8) to the left.
The oil in chamber n can flow into chamber m and the pressure in chamber p is reduced.
• Now the force balance coming from the pressure in the chambers e and p influencing the spool (10), is disturbed and
moved to the left. Oil can flow now from e to m.
• As a result, the oil in the lift cylinders is directed to the drain circuit and the lift is lowered.
• As the solenoid is of the proportional type, the more current supplied, the more the spool (8) shifts to the left, thereby
allowing more oil to flow and the lift to descend more rapidly.
• The electronic control obtains float position by energising the solenoid valve (7) and holding it fully open.
• In this condition, the oil in the lift cylinders is sent to the drain circuit so that the lift is free to move up and down and
follow the contours of the terrain.
10 e n m 9 8
A R
p
7
A R
D0004950
10-97
CONTENTS
SECTION 20
CONTENTS
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SERDIA (LEVEL III) ..................... 1 • 9. SERDIA UPGRADE FROM VERSION
• 1. ENTRY AND COMMUNICATION ........................................ 2 2.5 TO VERSION 3.1 ..........................................................57
• • 1.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................. 2 • • 9.1 IMPROVEMENTS AND HELP WITH PROBLEMS
IN COMMUNICATING WITH
• • 1.2 ORDERING ................................................................. 3
NOTEBOOKS/WIN 98 ...............................................57
• • 1.3 SWITCH ON NOTEBOOK AND INSTALL
• • 9.2 NEW ENTRY MASK WITH MEASURED VALUES
SOFTWARE ................................................................ 4
AND COLOURED-CODED INDICATION OF
• • 1.4 USER LEVEL, ACCESS AUTHORIZATION................. 5 CONNECTION STATUS ............................................58
• • 1.5 MAKING A CONNECTION BETWEEN ECU • • 9.3 NEW SWITCH “JOBS“ FOR PERFORMING
(ENGINE) AND NOTEBOOK ....................................... 6 SELECTED SERVICING OPERATIONS,
• • 1.6 PROGRAM START ..................................................... 6 E.G. ADJUSTING CONTROLLER OR ADJUSTING
• • 1.7 OFFLINE MODE.......................................................... 7 OFFSET .....................................................................59
• • 1.8 WORKING WITH THE PROGRAM.............................. 9 • • 9.4 IN- AND OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT IS NOW
• • 1.9 PRINT (OUTPUT) ...................................................... 11 ADDITIONALLY CONFIGURABLE USING
PLAIN TEXT
• • 1.10 PROTOCOL (PROTOKOLL)...................................... 12
(PREVIOUSLY ONLY CODE NUMBERS) ..................60
• • 1.11 END COMMUNICATION .......................................... 12
• • 9.5 UPGRADES IN "PARAMETER SETTING/
• 2. ECU SELECTION .............................................................. 13 CONFIGURATION“....................................................60
• • 2.1 GENERAL ................................................................. 13
• • 2.2 RECOGNITION OF ECUS......................................... 13 OPERATOR’S MANUAL EDS
• • 2.3 IDENTIFICATION DATA ............................................ 13 (Electronic Diagnosis System) ........................................... 61
• 3. MEASURED VALUES ....................................................... 14 • 1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION ..............................................62
• • 3.1 ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES (GENERAL) ............. 14 • • 1.1 FUNCTIONAL SCOPE...............................................62
• • 3.2 RAM VALUES ........................................................... 18 • • 1.2 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS .................................63
• • 3.3 DATA LOGGER (ONLY EMS) ................................... 18 • • 1.3 STARTING AND TERMINATING OF THE EDS
PROGRAM ................................................................65
• • 3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT ............................... 18
• • 3.5 CAN-Status............................................................... 18 • 2. TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS ...........................................67
• • 3.6 EXAMPLE OF A DISPLAYED ERROR • • 2.1 THE MAIN MENU ......................................................67
INFORMATION: ........................................................ 20 • • 2.2 ONLINE HELP ...........................................................69
• 4. PARAMETERS .................................................................. 21 • 3. POWER-SHIFT DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 38 .........70
• • 4.1 CONFIGURATION .................................................... 21 • • 3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION
• • 4.2 OVERALL PROGRAMMING ..................................... 32 DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 38 ......................................70
• • 4.3 CALIBRATION .......................................................... 32 • • 3.2 DEST 38 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.........................71
• • 3.3 Error codes POWERSHIFT /DEST 38 ......................81
• 5. ERROR MEMORY ............................................................ 34
• • 3.4 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION ................83
• • 5.1 GENERAL ................................................................. 34
• • OTHER INFORMATIONS ...................................................89
• 6. FUNCTION TEST .............................................................. 39
• • 3.5 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE
• • 6.1 GENERAL ................................................................. 39
TRANSMISSION T-7100 ...........................................90
• 7.
EXTRAS ............................................................................ 40 • • 3.6 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100 ..........91
• •
7.1 MAXIMUM VEHICLE SPEED .................................... 40 • • 3.7 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE
• •
7.2 LOGISTIC DATA ....................................................... 40 TRANSMISSION T-7200 ...........................................92
• •
7.3 LOAD SPECTRUM (ONLY EMS) .............................. 41 • • 3.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR
• •
7.4 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL EXCEEDED SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300 .............................................93
(ONLY EMS).............................................................. 41 • • 3.9 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE
• • 7.5 OVERRIDE MEMORY (ONLY EMS).......................... 41 TRANSMISSION T-7300 ...........................................94
• 8 WHAT SHOULD YOU DO IF ...? ....................................... 42 • • 3.10 ERROR ANALYSIS ....................................................95
• • 8.1 SERDIA IN GENERAL ............................................... 42
• • 8.2 EMR .......................................................................... 45
20-i
CONTENTS
• 4. POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45 .....97

• • 4.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION
DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 45......................................97
• • 4.2 DEST 45 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION .......................98
• • 4.3 ERROR CODES POWER-SHUTTLE /DEST 45 .......113
• • 4.4 DISPLAY POWERSHUTTLE....................................114
• • 4.5 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION ..............115
• • 4.6 OTHER INFORMATIONS ........................................126
TRANSMISSION T-7100 .........................................127
• • 4.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100 ........128
TRANSMISSION T-7200 .........................................129
• • 4.10 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR
SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300 ...........................................130
• • 4.11 ERROR ANALYSIS..................................................131
• 5. AGROTRONIC-HD + ASM ..............................................133
• • 5.1 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION .....................................134
• • 5.2 ERROR CODES OF THE AGROTRONIC-HD..........141
• 6. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF THE
INFOCENTER...................................................................144
• • 6.2 CONSTANT VALUES FOR INFOCENTER...............155
• 7. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF THE
SPRING-SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE .............................159
• • 7.2 PIN ASSIGNMENT OF THE ELECTRONIC BOX
“SPRING-SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE ” .................164
• • 7.3 ERROR CODES.......................................................165
20-ii
SERDIA OPERATOR’S MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
SERDIA (LEVEL III)
20-1
SERDIA ENTRY AND COMUNICATION
1. ENTRY AND COMMUNICATION

1.1 OVERVIEW
Digital electronic engine ECUs have become a normal part of modern engine technology.
These ECUs are designed, at the very least, to fulfil the functions of comparable mechnical modules (e.g. governors), as
well as to provide additional functionality. SERDIA is required in order to make communication with these digital electronic
DEUTZ ECUs possible. With
a) an interface (cable with diagnostics plug and copy protection) and
b) a commercially available notebook (or PC),
SERDIA forms a special tool
.
1.1.1 INTRODUCTION
SERDIA is a software program. Together with the notebook and the interface, it constitutes a tool which serves as an aid
to communication with the engine ECUs.
SERDIA supports DEUTZ ECUs EMR, EMS and MVS. You can also communicate with three different ECUs using just one
software product.
Any changes you wish to make to the ECUs as far as settings, parametrizations, error deletion and calibra-tion are con-
cerned are only possible with SERDIA.
SERDIA runs under the MS Windows®3.11 and Windows95(98) user surface.
You can choose English or German as the user language when carrying out program installation.
The user surface enables the user to call up the functions required simply by clicking on the appropriate buttons.
The menu points listed below are available:
• ECU selection
• Measured values
• Parameters
• Error memory
• Function test
• Extras
20-2
1.1.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

You should have the following minimum system configuration in order to work with SERDIA:
Hardware:
• Notebook o PC (IBM-AT compatible):.... with 1 serial interface RS 232 (There should be no mouse connected) and par-
allel printer interface
• Grafiphs carde:....................................... VGA/SVGA
• Processor: .............................................. 80486 (or later)
• Frequenz:................................................ 100 MHz
• RAM:....................................................... 8 MB RAM (or later)
• Hard disk (free memory capacity): ......... 15 MB (or later)
• Diskdrive:................................................ 3,5” (1,44 MB)
ECUs (engine):
• EMR (Elektronischer Motor-Regler)........ Electronic engine governor,
ECU TN 0211 1910 e 0211 2017
Software Version N° 12.1.08 and lower
• Diagnostics interface.............................. Serial in ace. with ISO 9141
Interface, connector piece between ECU (engine) and PC:

• Level adaptator for ISO 9141, SAE J1708 e RS 485
• Safety switch with dongle function, copy protection
• Power supply range 12-24 V
• Power supply side: Engine
• Protective switch against incorrect polarity and surge voltage
• Decoupling
Software:
• Operating system ................................... DOS versione 5.0 or later
• User surface ........................................... MS-Windows 3.11 or Windows 95
Installation is also possible under Windows 3.1; however, this creates a specific Windows problem: Conflicts may occur
when accessing serial interface COM1 (see Chapter 8, What should you do if...?). Further information is also given in the
Readme file supplied with SERDIA).
For proper display of the contents of the SERDIA windows under Windows 3.11, you should install the standard screen
driver (VGA).
1.2 ORDERING
SERDIA can be ordered, like the DEUTZ special tools, through:
SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR GROUP S.p.A.

Viale F. CASSANI, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALIA
1.2.1 FIRST-TIME USERS

For first-time users, we recommend the SERDIA package Re-order No. 5.9030.740.4/10.
Scope of supply:
• SERDIA software (1 x 3.5' installation diskette)
• Diagnostics interface with implemented user level
• Brief instructions on installation
• A list of tools and modifications usefui when troubleshooting, is included
• Carrying case
20-3
1.2.2 ORDERING SINGLE PARTS

Ser. No. Part Competence level Re-order No.
T7 Installation diskette 5.9030.740.0
T8 Adapter 5.9030.741.0
T9 Interface level III Major overhaul 5.9030.740.2
1.2.3 Adapter
Some OEMs have different diagnostics plugs for certain versions. An adapter is therefore required for the interface from the
12 pole DE UTZ plug to the appropriate OEM plug.
The DEUTZ 12 pole counterpart is available as a genuine DEUTZ part.
A ready-made adapter is available, for diagnostics on engines in DE UTZ Fahr tractors (DEUTZ 12 pole -> DFA 14 pole):
DEUTZ Part No. 5.9030.741.0
1.3 SWITCH ON NOTEBOOK AND INSTALL SOFTWARE

1.3.1 INSTALLING MS WINDOWS®
If you do not already have MS Windows® or Windows95(98) installed on your hard disk, you must do this first of all, fol-
lowing the instructions for installation given for MS Windows® and Windows95(98).
1.3.2 INSTALLING SERDIA

Before you begin installation, you must first make sure that all applications are closed. To be sure, you should therefore
leave MS Windows® and start anew.
In order to operate SERDIA software, you require an interface with a connection to an engine ECU. If this interface is not
available, it is still possible to install SERDIA, but you will only be able to operate it in offline mode. Chapter 1.6.2 Offline
mode tells you which program restrictions this involves.
TO INSTALL:
• Switch on the computer
• Insert the SERDIA installation disk in the 3.5" disk drive (drive A:).
• Start Windows.
With Windows 3.11 (3.1):

• In the main group, open "File manager" by double clicking on the symbol using the mouse.
• Select disk drive A:
• Start "install.exe" by double clicking with the mouse.
• Follow the installation instructions appearing on the screen.
• Remove the installation disk from the disk drive and keep safe.
• After re-starting, open the "SERDIA" program group by double clicking.
• Start "Diagnostics Service" by double clicking.
With Windows 95 (98):

• Open "Desktop" by double clicking.
• Open "3.5 disk (A:)" by double clicking.
• Start "install.exe" (Run Me!) by double clicking.
• Follow the installation instructions on the screen.
• Remove the installation disk from the disk drive and keep safe.
• After re-starting, click on the "Start" button and select the "Programs" folder.
• Start the program "Diagnostics service" in the "Serdia" sub-menu.
20-4
1.3.3 SERDIA UPDATES

You will be informed of software updates by our service information department, as they occur.
There is no automatic exchange against older versions of the software.
When installing the update the target directory should contain the SERDIA version number.
1.4 USER LEVEL, ACCESS AUTHORIZATION

DEUTZ Service has defined three different user levels (I, II, III) for SERDIA users. These levels are specified in the interface.
We make these distinctions in order to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to the setting parameters (com-
parable to the lead seals on fuel injection pumps).
Access authorization functions in such a way that only certain parameters and function fields are allowed through a filter.
This then allows access to the appropriate user level.
20-5
1.5 MAKING A CONNECTION BETWEEN ECU (ENGINE) AND NOTEBOOK

• Serial communication
• Baud rate = 9600
• Serial port = COM1
An interface forming part of the SERDIA scope of delivery serves as a link between the ECU and the notebook. Despite a
large number of safety measures in the interface and the ECU, such as protection against incorrect polarity, surge voltage
protection and decoupling, the possibility of errors can never be entirely excluded.
For this reason, the connection should be made by adhering closely to the following sequence:
1- Switch off engine, turn off ignition switch (terminal). Do not switch on the notebook yet.
2- Plug the diagnostics plug on the interface into the diagnostics socket on the vehicle/equipment.
3- Connect the other interface side with serial interface RS 232/COM1 . (9 pole plug at the back of your
noteback).
ATTENTION!
On PCs, the COM1 interface may sometimes be occupied by the mouse. If this is the case, you should
connect the interface to the second serial interface (COM2). This must then be configured (see Chapter
8, What should you do if...?).
4 - You can now switch on the ignition (terminal 1 5) and the notebook. For the time being, do not switch on the engine.
5 - You can now start the program SERDIA in accordance with the instructions given in Chapter 1.6 Program start.
1.6 PROGRAM START

Call the program SERDIA under Windows by double clicking.
SERDIA starts up with a main screen and a sub-screen "ECU selection". In this screen, you can only select "OK", "Cancel"
or "Help".
20-6
1.6.1 ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION WITH THE ECU

Automatic recognition (identification) of the ECU can take up to 60 seconds as the program checks out all the possible in-
terfaces and ECUs one after the other.
• If no ECU or interface is connected, SERDIA will operate in offline mode, see Chapter 1.7.2 DEMO mode.
• If communication with the ECU cannot be established, the system issues an error message, see Chapter Error in es-
tablishing the communication link.
Once communication has been successfully established, the main screen "Diagnostics service" is displayed with the fields
"ECU (electronic control unit)" and "ECU identification". This main screen contains a predefined selection menu.
1.7 OFFLINE MODE

If no ECU/engine and/or interface is available, SERDIA can be operated for training purposes in the password-protected
mode or in the DEMO mode.
The password-protected mode and the DEMO mode are always offered by SERDIA if no successful establishment of com-
munications has been reported.
20-7
Click on "Ignore". The desired mode is selected in the "Confirm" window.
1.7.1 PASSWORD-PROTECTED MODE

If "Yes" is selected in the "Confirm" window, authorized users can enter a password (inquiries at head office) and then read
and print out configuration files without an ECU. However, they cannot alter the files.
1.7.2 DEMO MODE (TRAINING WITHOUT ECU)

If "No" is selected in the "Confirm" window, the user reaches the DEMO mode.
1 - Here, handling of SERDIA can be practiced, without actual figures.
2 - Stored graphics can be read and printed out, provided that the graphics were stored in binary format (file-name ex-
tension ".egr"). See 3.1.2 Graphics.
ATTENTION!
It is not possible to carry out function tests covering the functioning of the ECU.
20-8
1.8 WORKING WITH THE PROGRAM

Brief description:
1) Call SERDIA under Windows
2) Click on ECU selection in the SERDIA main screen
3) Select the ECU you require in the screen "ECU selection"
4) Select the menu point you require in the SERDIA main screen
1.8.1 MAIN SCREEN, MENU SELECTION

A predefined selection menu is displayed in the main screen. Brief description of the buttons:
Menu point ECUs Explanation
Selection of the required ECU.
ECU selection All
(Only one ECU can be selected at any time)
Display of current actual values (also if engine not in operation,
Aktuelle Actual measured values All
but in this case with U-Blatt)
RAM values Only for level III
Data logger EMS Only Display recorder contents
Input/output assignment All Assignment of the signals used to the ECU pins
CAN-Status
Parameters
Configuration All Read and update configuration data
Overall programming EMR, EMS
Calibration of measured value sensor, e.g. accelerator
Calibration All pedal sensor
Error memory
Error memory All Copy, display and delete error memory
Function test EMR Only Operate actuator
Extras
Maximum speed EMR Only Selection of three different maximum speeds
Logistic data All
Load spectrum EMS Only
Maintenance interval exceeded EMS Only
Override memory EMS Only
Help All General help for the main screen and the associated buttons
20-9
1.8.2 MENU POINT "ECU SELECTION”

It may be the case that one DEUTZ engine is fitted with one or several ECUs (e.g. the combination of MVS with EMS). How-
ever, SERDIA can only communicate with one ECU.
Exception: It is also possible for the list of errors to be read via EMS, and measured values can be read from the MVS.
You must therefore first select the ECU you require from the menu point 'ECU selection'.
For more details, please see Chapter 2, ECU selection.
1.8.3 MENU POINT "MEASURED VALUES” ("ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES")

Selection and display of measured values is also possible from a list of measured values (including input and output val-
ues).
Displayed measured values that have exceeded an upper or lower value (if applicable) are stored in color.
Only those measuring points that are appropriate to the ECU are displayed in sequence, differentiated by the following:
• read measured values
• read ejectronics measured values
• read mcorter data (EMS speda menu)
displayed by:
• designation
• value
• unit
The measured values are rerreshed after a predefined sensor rate. They can be displayed with the engine shut down as well
as with the engine in operation.
For rnore information, please see Chapter 3. Meas,ed values.
1.8.4 MENU POINT "PARAMETERS"

The wide range of possibilities open to you with DEUIZ ECUs means that very specit\c programrning IS requireci in ac-
cordance with each indivtdual applicauon case Changes to parametrization beconne necessary if:
• custonner requiremenis
• abaptation to locai requirements
• replacement installation
The pararneters can only be changed with SERDIA!
This menu point also does away with the neecl br screwdriver setting, as is necessary with analog ECUs. Individuai pa-
rameters (such as dynamic go~ernor characteristics) can uso LE changed 'nithin predefsned limits. Parametrization is car-
ried out in two separate screens, one for configuration and one for calibration. Access to the flelds in the various screens
is controlled from the user level. Fields for which no access authorization exists are not displayed. It is even possible to
swap over entire blocks or parameters from this function field in order to create variants.
For more information. please see Chapter 4, Parameters..
1.8.5 MENU POINT "ECU SELECTION”

The error messages stored in the ECUs can be read from this menu point.
Error messages refer solely to the electrical parts of the engine system, such as the cable harness and the measured value
sensors.
An error message may take the form of: "Broken cable or short-circuit".
Only passive error messages can be cleared, active messages are retained. When the error is corrected, active error mes-
sages are changed into passive error messages. The error message will be retained even if you disconnect the battery/
power supply.
Error messages display information on
• error location
• type of error
• total number of errors (at the error locations)
• frequency
• error status (active / passive)
• environment data at the time the error was detected.
20-10
SERDIA provides help in remedying defects; you may also find it useful to consult the menu points "Measured values" and
"Function test". For more information, please see Chapter 5, Error memory.
1.8.6 MENU POINT "FUNCTION TEST"

SERDIA supports a wide range of function tests, distinguishing between the various actuators (e.g. actuator test for EMR).
Functional checks are a particular help when investigating defects and carrying out maintenance work.
For instance, it is possible to activate and check individual actuator outputs. To carry out this work, you must switch over
to test mode.
Before doing so, the engine must be shut down!
During a function test, the actuators are activated by the tester program while the engine is shut down.
You switch the actuators on and off by clicking on the check box next to the actuator designation in the "setpoint" column.
The reaction of the actuator status triggered by the ECU is displayed under the actual value.
The actuator statuses are always controlled in the ECU. This control function can only be transferred to SERDIA by the
ECU, i.e. if the required actual value is not produced, this is probably due to a wiring error. It can then be helpful to make use
of the combination of the menu points "Error message" and "Function test" in order to track down the cause.
For further information about function testing, please see Chapter 6, Function test”.
1.8.7 MENU POINT "EXTRAS"

SERDIA supports a large number of Extra points; these differ from ECU to ECU. To access these Extra points, you must call
up the sub-menu points, each of which will lead you to its own screen:
• Maximum speed
• Logistics data
• Load spectrum
• Maintenance interval exceeded
• Override memory
For more information, please see Chapter 7, Extras.
1.8.8 Help
In addition to these operating instructions, you may find it useful to consult the on-line "Help" provided by the SERDIA pro-
gram. I.e., click on the button "Help" under Windows.
1.9 PRINT (OUTPUT)

The data for identifying the ECU, and also the data in other windows, can be issued in two different ways.
20-11
1) As a printout. A suitable printer driver has to be selected under Windows. At the top of all printouts, the logistical data
appear:
• Type of ECU
• Date and time
• Interface serial number
• Engine number
• Part number functional data set
• Number of operating hours
2) The ECU data can also be stored as a file. This file can be further processed in Excel.
The following table gives an overview of the possibilities for storing data from the various screens:
• as printable files for further processing, e.g. in Excel
• as configuration files to report changes
• as a graphic file (*.egr) readable in the SERDIA demo mode.
From screen Button Extension Notes
Service Diagnosis Print (File) *. Ecu for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Actual measured values File *. Msw for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Graphics ( ASCII ) *. Agr for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Graphics ( binario ) *. Egr readable in the SERDIA demo mode
Input/output assignment Print (File) *. Ino for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Configuration Print (File) *. Kfg for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Configuration file
Configuration Save in file *. Hex (partial data set, level-dependent)
Configuration file
Overall programming ECU -> File *. Hex
(complete data set, Level III and Ilia)
Error memory Print (File) *. Err for further processing, e.g. in Excel
Logistical data Print (File) *. Dat for further processing, e.g. in Excel
1.10 PROTOCOL (PROTOKOLL)

This switch is only provided within the scope of development for configuration of the interface.
1.11 END COMMUNICATION

1.11.1 PROGRAM END
Before you disconnect the notebook from the engine ECU, you should return to the main menu and click on "Close".
If you have modified any parameters, in many cases it is worth checking the current parametrization, for safety's sake.
Proceed by carrying out the following steps:
1. End SERDIA
2. Switch off engine power supply, and then switch on again
3. Start SERDIA again
4. Re-activate the ECU
5. Activate the menu point “Parameters”
6. Click on -> PC” (“SG -> PC”) in the configuration screen.
7. To print out the configuration data, press "Print" (“Print ON”).
8. File the printout with the engine documentation
1.11.2 DISCONNECTING THE ECU

You should only disconnect the engine ECU from the notebook (i.e. interface with cable) after you have left the program
SERDIA by pressing "Close".
20-12
SERDIA ECU SELECTION
2. ECU SELECTION
2.1 GENERAL
DEUTZ engines may be equipped with one or several ECUs (e.g. the combination MVS with EMS). SERDIA, however, can
only communicate with one ECU. Exception: the error list can also be read from the MVS ECU via EMS.
It is therefore necessary to first select the desired ECU from the menu poin "ECU selection".
Recognition of the different ECUs is managed by SERDIA for the user.
Possible ECUs:
EMR (Electronic Engine Governor)
MVS (Magnetic Valve System)
EMS (Engine-Monitoring System)
2.2 RECOGNITION OF ECUS

SERDIA automatically assists recognition of the connected ECUs upon program start. Identification may take up to 60 sec-
onds as the possible interfaces and ECUs have to be polled one after the other.
Following successful recognition the ECU selection screen is automatically overlayed. Only the recognized ECUs are of-
fered for selection. The ECUS which are not selectable are marked by a grey font.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION DATA
2.3.1 EMR IDENTIFICATION

• Meaning of data displayed: DEUTZ part number.
• Product number: Type of selected ECU: 1 = EMR - 2 = MVS - 3 = EMS
• Hardware version number: This number indicates the development status of the ECU.
• Software version number: Number of the EEPROM contained in the ECU. If the digit left from the decimal changes
(e.g. from 2.1 to 3,1), the data set does no longer suit the ECU. In this case it is necessary to consult the headquarters.
• Day, month, year: Date of the latest parameterization on the ECU.
• Service ID: Serial number of the interface used for the previous access. The leading digit indicates the access level.
• Interface serial number: Serial number of the currently used interface.
20-13
SERDIA MEASURED VALUES
3 MEASURED VALUES
3.1 ACTUAL MEASURED VALUES (GENERAL)

The measured values are read cyclically and displayed on the screen "actual measured values"..
Figure: Current measured values of the EMR
ATTENTION!
Values beyond the sensor measuring range are underlayed in colour:
• yellow: above measuring range,
• blue: below measuring range.
De.scription of keys:
Meas. values: (“Actual measured values”):
The window "Measured value selection" is displayed with all measured values available. Measured values to be displayed
can be selected there. In general, the repeat rate of display is increased through a reduced number of measured values to
be displayed. The possible measured values available may vary according to the type of the ECU.
Graphics:
The "Graphics" switch is used to display the pattern over time of the selected measured variables (maximum 5). If more
than 5 variables are selected, an error message appears.
20-14
Collect, time:
The duration of the recording appears in the field ”Collect. time”, in seconds. The lowest value for the dura-tion
of recording is one second. The upper measurement time can be entered as several hours (expressed
in seconds). The basic setting is 10 s. The shortest scanning rate is:
• 40 ms for RAM values
• 60 ms for the other values.
A measurement duration of 10 s gives
• 250 measuring points (10000 ms / 40 ms) with RAM values
• 166 measuring points (10000 ms / 60 ms) with the other values.
Since the program can cover a maximum of approximately 2000 measuring points, before data recording
starts the scanning rate is adjusted automatically as necessary.
The lowest possible scanning rate is determined by the duration of the data transfer from the ECU to the
PC. The more variables are to be displayed at the same time, the longer the data transfer will take and the
lower the scanning rate will be.
File: The current measured values can be stored in a file and reloaded later, for example for further processing in Excel.
Print: The displayed measured values are printed.
Close: Return to the main window "Service diagnosis".
3.1.1 MEASURED VALUE SELECTION
Figure: Measured value selection EMR
In this list you can activate or deactivate measured values for display. You can activate and deactivate individual values by
clicking on the check box; alternatively you select all the values by using one of the switches described below.
Save: The measured values displayed are saved to a file.
Load: A selected measured value is entered from a file.
Delete selection: All measured values are deactivated for display.
Select all: All measured values are activated for display.
OK: The updated measured value selection is adopted and the program returns to a display of the current measured val-
ues.
Cancel: The program returns to a display of the current measured values. Updates to the measured value selection are re-
jected.
20-15
3.1.1.1 MEASURED VALUES EMR

The following table gives an overview of the measured values which can be displayed. Some parameters require con-
figuration for that purpose (see Chapter 4 Parameters), in which case specific measuring points may be assigned to the in-
puts and outputs of the EMR (Menu "Configuration", page 11: assignment inputs/ measured values and page 13:
assignment outputs/measured values). The values required for the parameter configuration are given in the table. The as-
signment can be checked in the menu "Measured values" with the window "Display of inputs and outputs" (see 3.4 Input/
output assignment).
Measured value selection
Parameter
Meas. point designation Unit Description Configuration parameter ✽ value
Battery voltage V Battery voltage - -
1/min Engine speed 1 (camshaft)

2000
Engine speed Ass(F1 6)Out/Dig/PWM/Freq
Engine speed 2 (crankshaft) 2002
Control rod position mm Control rod position - -
(M9)Cooiant temperature °C Coolant temperature Ass(M9)Analnp3(CoolTemp) 3551
cmm/ Fuel injection quantity
Fuel injection quantity - -
Hub
Fuel consumption l/h Fuel consumption - -
(F24)Accelerator pedal
=SWG1 V Accelerator pedal voltage Ass(F24)Analnp1 (Pedal) 3511
Rel. Accelerator pedal

% Scanning pos. acceleratorpoti Ass(F24)Analnp1 (Pedal) 3511
= SWG1
(M24)Boost pressure bar Boost pressure Ass(M24)Analnp2(boostPr) 3531
(M21)Oil pressure bar Oil pressure Ass(M21)Analnp4 (OilPress) 3541
(F5)Output:Digital/PWM1 % Torque Ass(F5)Out/Dig/PWM1 2701
(F3)Output: Digita I/PWM2 % Alarm signal oil pressure Ass(F3)Out/Dig/PWM2 3011
(M3)Output:Digital3/PWM3 % Reserve
Engine speed 1 2000
(F16)Output:Dig/Freq/PWM % Ass(F1 6)Out/Dig/PWM/Freq
Engine speed2 2002
(F20)Hand throttle
=SWG2 Hand throttle Ass(F20)DigAnalnp(H.thr.) 3521
(F18)lnput:Digital/PWM1 %
(F21)lnput:Digital/PWM2 %
(F19)lnput:Digital %
Outp:0,0,0,0,0,M2,
Summary outputs
F15,F4(LSB)
Selector switch Selector switch
Vehicle speed km/h Vehicle speed
✽ See also table with configurable parameters in Chapter 4 Parameters.
20-16
3.1.2 GRAPHICS
Once any desired measured values are selected, up to a maximum of 5, the window "Graphic display" can be opened by
clicking on "Graphics".
The measured values are represented inside the display range (minimum to maximum). The scaling steps for the axes are
set in the column "Delta". By activating the control field "Auto", it is possible to have the program carry out scaling au-
tomatically. Since the program carries out this scaling taking into account the minimum and maximum values for the var-
iables concerned, it is not possible to have automatic scaling with variables which are constant in time. A maximum of two
axes, one on the left and one on the right side of the display area, are shown.
In the columns L (left) and R (right) a representation of an axis can be assigned to a measured variable.
EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION SWITCHES:

START: This function switch is used to start recording of the data.
UPDATE: This function switch is used to update the displayed information. This is necessary if there has been a change in
the minimum, maximum or delta values. The update process takes the new values into account.
PRINT ON: By clicking on this switch the transmission to a printer is started. First the printer selection appears, then a com-
ment can be inserted if desired, and then printing starts.
SAVE: The Information from the representation displayed can be saved in a file in two different ways:
• As an ASCII file ('.agr) for further processing in Excel

• As a binary file (*.egr) to represent measurement graphics in OFFLINE mode. See 1.7 Offline mode.
The graphics information saved in a file is read in and displayed.
20-17
3.2 RAM VALUES

Access to the RAM values is not possible for Level III.
3.3 DATA LOGGER (ONLY EMS)

The screen of this menu point is only selectable when an EMS ECU has been selected.
3.4 INPUT/OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT

Inputs and outputs can be configured. This item in the menu displays the current input and output status.
Restriction: Only applies for EMS and EMR ECUs.
3.5 CAN-Status
This window displays the CAN bus activities of the EMR.
Sent: Contains the information Can: TxCounter (0 to 65535, word). The value is increased with each CAN sending message
and indicates the sending activity of the EMR.
Received: Contains the information Can: RxlrCounter (0 to 65535, word). The values is increased with each CAN sending
message and indicates the sending activity of the EMR.
20-18
Bus Off: Counter that indicates how often the EMR has separated from the CAN bus because of constant errors (Can-
BusOffCounter 0 to 255, byte).toma
Status: CanOnline indicates whether the EMR is active on the CAN bus. Via the ISO 9141 interface a value 1 is sent for on-
line and a value 0 for offline. The program SERDIA displays the text "online" (for value 1) or "offline" (for value 0).
Phase: The variable CanSetPointPhase (0 to 255, byte) is sent via the ISO 9141 interface. This variable displays the pro-
cedure with regard to time of the setpoint assignments:
Phase Text
0 0: Engine standstill, Initialization
1 1: Engine standstill, phase! , no CAN error
2 2: Engine standstill, phase2, CAN timeout error
3 3: Engine start, ... until idling speed is recognized
4 4: Engine runs, wait for CAN setpoint
5 5: Engine runs, setpoint preset via CAN is allright
6 6: Engine runs, emergency op., setpoint preset via CAN failed
7 7: This phase doesn't exist
Error information: The EMR sends an error number CanErrorNumber (0 to 255, byte) specifically for CAN bus errors via
the-ISO 9141 interface. A text is assigned in SERDIA to these numbers, which is displayed in the window of the CAN in-
terface.
Code Text
0 0: No fault existing
1 1: Message request not received bei controller object 15
2 2: Invalid controller object
3 3: controller object multi assignment
4 4: CAN active, but no message activated
5 5: Diagnosis object not activated
6 6: Scan rate 0 in diagnosis message
7 7: Scan rate 0 in measure value telegram
8 8: preset engine speed config.6 does not match TSC2 activation
9 9: TSC1 activated, but 'Setpoint eng. speed not set to 6’
10 10: ”GovernConf=6,neither TSC1 nor function shift is activated
11 11: GovernConf=6 & Setp.eng.speed=6', but TSC1 is not activated
12 12: TSC1 activated, but Governor config!=6
13 13: TSC1NotAct&FunctShiftAct& GovernConf.!=6 => ShiftMGovernMode!=0
14 14: TSC1Act&FunctShiftAct&GovernConf.=6'=--'ShiftMaskGovernMode!=0
100 100 Receipt message failed
101 101 Setpoint telegram failed w.eng.idle (repl, value)
102 102 Setpoint telegram missing w.eng.idle due to low battery voltage
103 103 Setpoint telegram missing after eng.start due to low battery
104 104 Setpoint telegram missing after eng,start, repl.value used
105 105 Setpoint telegram missing during eng.open, repl.value used
Time-Out errors of receipt messages require special handling. All of these are reported with an error number
To identify which message causes a Time-Out error, SERDIA proceeds as follows:
• CanRxObjActive indicates the active, i.e. actually received messages in bits.
• CanConf_bits contains the configured receipt messages in bits.
20-19
SERDIA negates CanRxObjActive in bits (inactive message) and then performs an AND combination with CanConf_bits in
bits. As result one obtains in bits the receipt messages which are configured and inactive (CanRxTimeOutBits).
A text is assigned to each bit of CanRxTimeOutBits, which represents the name of the relevant receipt messages. As not
all bits may be used, it is defined in the text by entering "dc" for "don't care" that the text output is suppressed for this bit.
If the text "100 Receipt message failed" is displayed, there is an additional text output of the list of missing receipt mes-
sages.
3.6 EXAMPLE OF A DISPLAYED ERROR INFORMATION:

100 Receipt message failed
Engine Temperature
Engine Fluid Level
Pressure Function shift
Inlet / Exhaust Conditions
VanRxTimeOutBit Text
0 Engine Temperature
1 Inlet / Exhaust Conditions
2 Engine Fluid Level /Pressure
3 TSC1
4 Engine protection
5 Function shift
6 Dc
7 Dc
8 Dc
9 Dc
10 Dc
11 Dc
12 Dc
13 Dc
14 Dc
15 Dc
20-20
SERDIA PARAMETERS
4. PARAMETERS
4.1 CONFIGURATION
Via the menu item "Parameters" in the menu bar, you get to the "Configuration" screen. The configuration procedure is as
follows:
• Scroll with keys "Next" and "Previous" to the page which contains the Parameter to be set (example: "AccPedal
(SWG1)up. ref" on page 10: Setpoint gen. calibration values).
• Click on the field "New value" and enter the necessary numerical value. This must be between the indicated minimum
and maximum.
• Click on "PC->ECU". All configuration data is transmitted to the ECU.
The data is now incorporated in the ECU and can be used for testing the engine setting. It is however lost upon shutting
off the supply voltage.
• Save data record with the key "Save in ECU" (old data is overwritten).
• For checking purposes the data can be read out and displayed with the key "ECU->PC".
• Following satisfactory engine run the data record can be saved with the "Save in file" key on the hard disc or on a dis-
kette.
Figure: Example of a choice of configuration parameters.
EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION SWITCH
ECU->PC: The configuration data is read from the ECU and is displayed.
PC->ECU: Updated configuration data is uploaded to the ECU. In order for the uploaded data to be permanent, you must
activate the "Save in ECU" switch for the ECU.
Open file: The configuration data is read and displayed from a hex file.
Save in file:The configuration data is saved in a hex file.

The engine number will be suggested as file name for storage on from SERDIA 2.5. This suggestion is not compulsive; other
file names may be chosen nevertheless.
Then confirm with OK. The file (i.e. the engine data record) is then saved under the name <Engine number> hex.
Save in ECU (applies for EMR only): The configuration data are permanently saved in the ECU. changes to the con-
figuration have to be reported!
20-21
SERDIA PARAMETERS
ATTENTION!
• All changes to the configuration have to be reported!
• The reporting procedure is described in Service Bulletin 0199-99-9287.
Previous: The reporting procedure is described in Service Bulletin 0199-99-9287.

Next: Displays data for the next screen page.
Print ON: A print-out is made of the configuration data currently displayed.
4.1.1 EMR
.
1- The following table gives an overview of the possible configuration parameters.
2- Settings that cannot be made while the engine is running are identified by the message ”Stop engine”
3- SERDIA only displays one page at a time.
EMR PARAMETERS CONFIGURABLE WITH LEVEL III

typ
MK 3 TTG Parameter Unit Min. Max. Description
Wert
Page 1: General overview
Engine serial number 0 4,2x109 12345678 8 digits
Number of cylinders 4 8 ace. to engine type
48 1013
No. of teeth eng. speed 2 18 200 129
44 1012
PassLevel 1 (OEM) 0 4,2x109
PassLevel 2 (Service) 0 4,2x109
Page 2: Only for BOSCH EDO inline pumps
RefVal.EDC RackPos 20 mm 0 65535 4000
RefVal.EDC RackPos. 0 mm 0 65535 1800
RefVal.EDCValueRefCoil 0 65535 1800
AutoCalib:Current % 0 100 78,2
AutoCalib:WaitingTime s 0 100 1,0
Page 3: Engine speed settings
Idling speed 1/min 500 4000 770 Idling speed engine ( < rated speed)
Fixed eng. speed 1 1/min 500 4000 1000 Fixed speed setpoint 1
Fixed eng. speed 2 1/min 500 4000 1000 Rated speed engine
Rated speed 1/min 500 4000 2300 Fixed speed setpoint 2
Rated speed limp home 1/min 500 4000 2000 Rated speed upon failure of speed sensor 1
Overspeed 1/min 500 4000 3000 Limit overspeed
Recov. speed overrun 1/min 500 4000 2000 Reset limit overspeed
average:0=1 turn, 1=2 turns 0 1 0 Average speed smoothing
Page 4: Speed governor
SpeedGvnr: P part % 0 100 18/4,0 Gain factor P part (genset/automotive)
SpeedGvnr: I part % 0 100 10/10,0 Gain factor I part (genset/automotive.)
SpeedGvnr: D part % 0 100 10/5,0 Gain factor D part (genset/automotive)
Damping factor w. minor speed fluctuation
SpeedGvnr: damping % 0 100 90/65,1
(genset. /automotive)
Speed governor:
SpeedGvnr: damping range 1/min 0 100 15/80,0
damping range (gensets/ automotive)
Engine speed ramp down 1/min/s 0 10000 100 Max. contr. speed setpoint speed ramp down
Engine speed ramp up 1/min/s 0 10000 10,1 Max. contr. speed setpoint speed ramp up
20-22
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 5: Position governor
Only change the following 10 parameters in consultation with the head office
Posgvnr: P part % 0 100 10 Gain factor P part
Posgvnr: 1 part % 0 100 5 Gain factor I part
Posgvnr: D part % 0 100 5 Gain factor D part
Posgvnr: DT2 part % 0 100 10 Gain factor DT2 part
Posgvnr: Gain % 100 200 180,1 Gain factor with minor speed fluctuation
Posgvnr: gain range mm 0 1 0,25 Gain fluctuation range for gain factor
QuickCurrentDecSteepness 1/min 0 65535 40000
QuickCurrentDecTime ms 0 65535 50
Page 6: Functions
Torque curve variants (2 variants✽),
Perm, values:
Assign config. top curve 0 2 0
0 = torque curve 1
1 = Switching betw. torque curves 1+2
Setpoint eng. speed values (6 variants ✽)
Perm, values:
0 = Only variable speed governing
1 = Switching betw. eng. speeds 1 and 2
Ass spec. eng. speed config 0 6 0
2 = Switching betw. fixed / variable speed
3, 4 = Switching betw.speed variable / save:
(3 = w. setp.speed, 4 = w. actual speed)
5 = two setpoint transmitters
Speed droop selection (4 variants✽)
Perm, values:
0 = constant speed droop
Ass droop config 0 3 0
1 = variable speed droop
2 = switching between speed droop 1 and 2
3 = switching betw.const. / variable speed droop
Type of governing (4 variants✽)
Perm, values:
0 = Variable-speed governing
Ass governor config 0 6 0
1 = Min-max-speed governing
2 = Switching betw.var./min.-max.
speed governingx
For the following 14 functions: On = 1, Off = 0
BoostPressSim (on/off) 0 1 0 Boost pressure simulation
BoostPressMeas (on/off) 0 1 1 Boost pressure measurement
EngSpeed sensor2 (on/off) 0 1 0 Redundant eng. speed sensing
VehSpeedLimit (on/off) 0 1 1 Veh. speed limit
CylinderShutoff (on/off) 0 1 1 Overrun cond. with overspeed
LimpHomeOper 0 1 0 Limp-home upon control rod travel sensor failure
Torque computation (off: referred to torque curve,
Torque Indicator(on/off) 0 1 1
on: torque curve point)
SAME Output (on/off) 0 1 0 Customer-specific output function
QuickCurrentDec (on/off) 0 1 0
BOSCH EDC inline p. (on/off) 0 1 0
TempMonitoring (on/off) 0 1 0 Temperature monitoring
OilPressMon(on/off) 0 1 0 Oil pressure monitoring
20-23
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 7: Monitoring
CoolTempMon.:
°C -30 130 118 Limit engine shutoff (130° = none)
ShutoffValue
CoolTempMon.:
s 0 600 0 Time delay engine shutoff
Shutoff Delay
CoolTempMon.:
°C -30 130 110,0 Reset limit
RecovValue
CoolTempMon.: Fuel qty red. % 0 100 20 Fuel inj. quantity reduction (0% = none)
CoolTempMon.: Red. delay s 0 600 15 Time delay fuel inj.quantity reduction
CoolTempMon.: Alarm limit °C -30 130 113 Limit alarm
OilPrMonitor: shutoff fact % 0 100 80 Factor for limit engine shutoff (0% = none)
OilPrMonitor:
% 0 100 20 Time delay engine shutoff
shutoff delay
OilPrMonitor:
% 0 100 20 Factor for reset value
recov fact
OilPrMon.:
s 0 600 15 Time delay fuel inj. quantity reduction
Power Red. delay
Engine speed position 500...260
1/min 8 Engine speed values
valuesp 0
Oil pressure warning bar 0...0,5 Oil pressure warning limit=fct(speed)
Page 9: Sensor calibration values
The following values are dependent only on the type of sensor used and consequently do not generally need to be changed.
BPSensor: upper err limit digits 0 1023 820 Boost pr. sensor: upper failure trigger point
BPSensor: upper ref (2 bar) digits 0 1023 454 Boost pr. sensor: voltage at 2 bar
BPSensor: lower ref (1 bar) digits 0 1023 219 Boost pr. sensor: voltage at 1 bar
BPSensor: lower err limit digits 0 1023 60 Boost.pr. sensor: lower failure trigger point
OilPrSens.:upper err limit digits 1023 820 Oil pr. sensor: upper failure trigger point
OilPrSens.:upper ref (5 bar) digits 0 1023 511 Oil pr. sensor: voltage at 5 bar
OilPrSens.:lower ref (0 bar) digits 0 1023 102 Oil pr. sensor: voltage at 0 bar
OilPrSens.:lower err limit digits 0 1023 40 Oil pr. sensor: lower failure trigger point
CoolTempSens.:up. err limit digits 0 1023 1020 Coolant temp. sensor: upper failure trigger point
CoolTempSens.:lo. err limit digits 0 1023 10 Coolant temp. sensor: lower failure trigger point
LowerMapBranch
digits 0 26...394 4 values
TempSensor
UpperMapBranch
digits 64...838 6 values
TempSensor.
Page 10: Setpoint gen. calibration values
T1:setpoint sensor 0 255 2 Smoothing time constant SWG
The following 8 parameters can be set with the menu ”Calibration”, see 4.3. - *SWG = setpoint sensor
AccPedal(SWG1)up. err val. digits 0 65535 963 SWG1: upper failure trigger point
AccPedal(SWG1)up. ref. digits 0 65535 922 SWG1: voltage max. position
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. ref. digits 0 65535 103 SWG1: voltage min. position
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. err val. digits 0 65535 62 SWG1: lower failure trigger point
Hand thr. (SWG2)up. err val. digits 0 65535 961 SWG2: upper failure trigger point
Hand thr. (SWG2)up. ref. digits 0 65535 830 SWG2: voltage max. position
Hand thr. (SWG2)lo. ref. digits 0 65535 190 SWG2: voltage min. position
Hand thr. (SWG2)lo. err val. digits 0 65535 61 SWG2: lower failure trigger point
20-24
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 11: Assignment inputs/measured values
(F18) Input: Digital / PWM 1
Ass (F18) Inp/PWM1 0 3999 1
(PWM setpoint)
(F21) Input: Digital / PWM 2
Ass (F21) Inp/PWM2 0 3999 2
(PWM setpoint alternate to F18)
Ass (F24) AnaInp1 (F24) Input: Analog 1
0 3999 3511
(Pedal) (accel.pr. sensor)
Ass (M24) AnaInp2 (M24) Input: Analog 2
0 3999 3531
(boostPr) (boost pr. sensor)
0 3999 3551
(CoolTemp) (coolant temp. sensor)
0 3999 3541
(OilPress) (oil pr. sensor)
Ass (F20) DigAnaInp (F20) Input: Digital / Analog
0 3999 3521
(H.thr.) (hand throttle)
Monitoring delay 0 50 1 ON delay of input monitoring
Page 12: Assignment switch inputs/functions
If the sign is changed, the switch positions (open/closed) are reversed.
1 = Input Digital / PWM 1 (Pin F18)
2 = Input Digital / PWM 2 (Pin F21)
3 = Input Digital (Pin F19)
4 = Input Digital / Analog (Pin F20)
5 = Input AnaInput4 (Pin M21)
Max. 5 inputs can be 6 = F3 is input (only for ECU 0211 2088)
assigned to the total Example:
of 7 switch inputs. AssInpTorque curve switching betw.1 / 2: Entry -3: At Input Pin F19 the torque curve can be
switched:
closed = torque curve 2
open = torque curve 1
Entry 3: At Input Pin F19 the torque curve can be switched:
closed = torque curve 1
open = torque curve 2
AssInp:torque curve 1 or 2 -5 5 3 Switching between two torque curves
AssInp:speed droop 1 or 2 -5 5 2 Switching between two fixed speed droops
AssInp:speed specificationi -5 5 1 Switching between two eng. speeds
AssInp:governor type -5 5 4 Switching between two governor types
AssInp:lower engine speed -5 5 0 Fixing lower eng. speed
AssInp:upper engine speed -5 5 0 Fixing upper eng. speed
AssInp:hold engine speed -5 5 0 Holding eng. speed
AssInp:selector switch -5 5 5 Selector switch
Page 13: Assignment outputs/measured values
PWMfreq. for all inp/outp Hz 50 500 100
Ass (F16) (F16) Output: Digital / PWM / Frequency
-3999 3999 2000
Out/Dig/PWM/Freq (Eng. speed 1)
Ass (F5) Out/Dig/PWM1 -3999 3999 2701 (F5) Output: Digital / PWM 1 (torque)
(F3) Output: Digital / PWM 2
Ass (F3) Out/Dig/PWM2 -3999 3999 3011
(Warn.sign. KMT)
Ass (M3) Out/Dig3/PWM3 -3999 3999 0 (M3) Output: Digital / PWM 3
(F4) Output: Digital
Ass (F4) OutputDig1 -3999 3999 3200
1 (error pilot light)
(F15) Output: Digital 2
Zuw (F15) OutputDig2 -3999 3999 3013
(Warn.sign. oil pr.)
(M2) Output: Digital 3
Zuw (M2) OutputDig3 -3999 3999 3201
(solenoid)
20-25
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 14: Start behaviour and cold start aid
mm3/ Fuel quantity at start up to idling eng. speed.
Starting fuel quantity 0 200 110
str. Applies to coolant temperature > 0°C
mm3/
Fuel quantity high idle 0 200 10 Fuel quantity at high idle
corsa
mm3/ Initial injection quantity w. boost pressure
Suction fuel quantity 0 200 90
str. simulation
Overfueling 0 20 0
Overfueling recovery 0 25 0
Cold start fuel qty times s 0 600 30 Cold start overfueling time
mm3/
Cold start overfueling 0 50 20,01 Engine start overfueling for T < 0°C
str.
Eng.speed ramp cold start 1/min/s 5 250 100 Max. eng. speed ramp cold start
Max. PreHeatTime s 0 600 10
Min. PreHeatTime s 0 600 0
ColdSt:PreHeatBackupTime s 0 600 2
Max. PostHeatTime s 0 600 10
Min. PostHeatTime s 0 600 0
const. speed droop °C -30 130 0
CoStMaxHeat
°C -30 130 -30
Temp(pre&post)
Page 16: Breakaway characteristics
const. speed droop 1 % 0 80 6 Speed droop 1
const. speed droop 2 % 0 80 0 Speed droop 2
Engine speed position values 1/min 600...20000 8 engine speed values
Variable droop
% Speed droop=fct(engine speed)
= fct(engine speed)
Page 17: Speed-dependent PID control
Engine speed position values 1/min 600...2500 7 Engine speed values
mm3/
Quantity position values 0...100 4 fuel injection quantity values (ref. points)
Hub
P-Part=fct(eng.speed, fuel quantity)
Speed governor: P map % 100...200
(28 values)
I-Part=fct(eng.speed, fuel quantity)
RSpeed governor: I map % 50...100
(28 values)
D-Part=fct(eng.speed, fuel quantity)
Speed governor: D map % 25...400
(28 values)
Page 18: Smoke limitation
Boost pressure position
bar 4,0 4 Boost pressure values
values
mm3/ Fuel injection quantity=fct(eng.speed,boost
fuel injection quantity limit. 68...104
corsa pressure) (20 values)
Page 19: Simulation of boost pressure sensor after failure
Eng. speed pos. values for
1/mm 800...2500 8 Speed values
boost pr. simul
fuel inj. qty limiting for boost mm3/
20 Fuel inj. quantiy limitation =fct(eng.speed, time)
pr. simul. str.
Page 20: Power parameters
Max. torque (fix) Nm 0 64255 500
20-26
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 21: Min/max speed governor
AccelPos. Position pts % 0...41 5 Setpoint generator
mm3/ fuel inj. quantity=fct(eng.speed,
DrivMap: injection qty 0...100
Hub Accel. pedal position) (25 values)
Page 22: Vehicle speed governor
Speed limiting km/ora 0 300 40 Veh.speed limiting
Tacho calibration lmp/m 1 150 130 Tachometer constant
VehSpeedLimit: P-factor % 0 100 10 Governor parameter speed limit
VehSpeedLimit: I-factor % 0 100 10 Governor parameter speed limit
VehSpeedLimit: D-factor % 0 100 10 Governor parameter speed limit
EngSpeed:TachometerFail. 1/min 500 4000 2000 Maximum permissible speed after tachometer fail
Tacho Timeout s 0 100 5
Max. consumption l/ora 0 200 200
Page 23: CAN, general settings
CAN bus (on/off) 0 1 0
CAN time out Mon (on/off) 0 1 0
CAN: EMR Adress
Can: Baud Rate kBaud 0 255 0
Can:Start Time Out s 0 100 10
Can: Rx Obj Mincount 0 255 4
Can: Low Voltage V 0 66 9
Can: Volt Timeout s 0 100 30
Can: Rx Obj Missing No 0 255 4
Can: Config Tel On 0 63 0
Can :Dia Tel On 0 2047 1961
Can: Meß Tel On 0 3 1
CAN-Sensor ON/OFF 0 65535
LC1: Eng Speed
1/min 1500 0 4000
Ptl Ref)
LC1: Eng Speed
1/min 1500 0 4000
Pt2 (Upper)
LC1: Eng Speed
1/min 1700 0 4000
Pt3 (Lower)
LC2: Eng Speed
1/min 0 0 4000
Ptl (Ref)
LC2: Eng Speed
1/min 0 0 4000
Pt2(Upper)
LC2: Eng Speed
1/min 0 0 4000
Pt3(Lower)
Page 24: CAN: (7700)Rec/Send Telegr. Objects (controller setting)
Rec: EngineTemperature 0 15 0
Recilmake/
0 15 0
ExhaustCond
Rec: Eng Qii Level/
0 15 0
OilPres
Rec:TSC1 0 15 8
Rec: EMR Engine
0 15 12
Protection
Rec: EMR function shift 0 15 0
20-27
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Rec: Request 0 15 15
Rec:Del. active errors 0 15 6
Rec:Del. error memory 0 15 7
Rec: free 0 15 0
Send:EEC1 0 15 1
Send;EEC2 0 15 2
Send: Meas
0 15 10
Value Objeet
Send: Diagnosis Object 0 15 13
Send: Config Object. 0 15 0
Page 25: CAN- (7720)Source Adr.Rec.messages
Engine temperature 0 255 0
Inlet/Exhaust conditions 0 255 0
Engine fluid level/pressure 0 255 0
TSC1 0 255 3
EMR: Engine protection 0 255 3
EMR function shift 0 255 0
Request 0 255 0
Del. active errorsi 0 255 3
Del. error memory 0 255 3
Free 0 255 0
Page 26: CAN: (7850)Priorities: Object Telegr.
engine temperature 0 7 0
engine fluid level/pressure 0 7 0
TSC1 0 7 3
EMR:Engine protection 0 7 3
Request 0 7 6
Del. active errors 0 7 6
Del. error memory 0 7 6
free 0 7 0
EEC1 0 7 3
EEC2 0 7 3
Page 27: CAN: (7865)Priorities: Diagnosis Telegr.
Active errors 0 7 6
EMR status Diglnputs 0 7 0
EMR status DigOutputs 0 7 0
Engine fluid level/pressure 0 7 6
Engine configuration 0 7 0
Number of errors 0 7 6
Passive errors 0 7 6
Error Environment Data 0 7 6
Engine hours 0 7 6
20-28
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 28: CAN: (7880)Priorities: Config. Telegr.
EMR: Controfler Config. 0 7 0
EMR: Analoglnput 1 Config. 0 7 0
EMR: AnalogInput 2 Config. 0 7 0
EMR: Analoglnput 2 Config. 0 7 0
EMR:PWM-Output Config. 0 7 0
EMR:Dig. Output Config. 0 7 0
Page 29: CAN: (7888)Priorities: Meas. Values Telegr.
Fuel economy 0 7 6
EMR measured values 0 7 0
Page 30: CAN: (7750)SendRepeatRate: ObjectTelegr.
engine temperature ms 0 15000 0
Inlet/Exhaust conditions ms 0 15000 0
engine fluid level/pressure ms 0 15000 0
TSC1 ms 0 15000 80
EMR: Engine protection ms 0 15000 100
EMR function shift ms 0 15000 0
Request ms 0 15000 0
Del. active errorsi ms 0 15000 0
Del. error memory ms 0 15000 0
free ms 0 15000 0
EEC1 ms 0 15000 80
EEC2 ms 0 15000 200
Page 31: CAN: (776S)SendRepeatRate: DiagnosisTelegr.
Active errors ms 0 15000 1000
EMR status Dig lnputs ms 0 15000 0
EMR status Dig Outputs ms 0 15000 0
Engine temperature ms 0 15000 1000
engine fluid level/pressure ms 0 15000 500
Inlet/Exhaust conditions ms 0 15000 500
engine configuration ms 0 15000 0
Page 32: CAN: (7788)SendRepeatRate: MeasValueTelegr.
Fuel economy ms 0 15000 100
EMR measured values ms 0 15000 0
Page 33: CAN: (7900)PDU IdentPart Object Telegr.
engine temperature 0 65535 0
TSC1 0 65535 0
EMR:Engine protection 0 65535 65283
Request 0 65535 59904
Del, active errors 0 65535 65235
Del, error memory 0 65535 65228
free 0 65535 0
EEC1 0 65535 61444
EEC2 0 65535 61443
20-29
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 34: CAN: (7915)PDU IdentPart Diagnosis Telegr.
Active errors 0 65535 65226
EMR status Diglnputs 0 65535 0
EMR status DigOutputs 0 65535 0
engine configuration 0 65535 0
Number of errors 0 65535 65230
Passive errors 0 65535 65227
Error Environment Data 0 65535 65229
Engine hours 0 65535 65253
Page 35: CAN: (7930)PDU IdentPart Config. Telegr.
EMR: Controller Config. 0 65535 0
EMR:AnalogInput1 Config. 0 65535 0
EMR:AnalogInput2 Config. 0 65535 0
EMR:PWM-Input Config. 0 65535 0
EMR:PWM-Output Config. 0 65535 0
EMR:Dig.Output Config. 0 65535 0
Page 36: CAN: (7938)PDU IdentPart Meas.Values Telegr.
Fuel economy 0 65535 65266
EMR measured values 0 65535 0
Page 37: CAN: (7960)Fault codes of rel. fault messages
Setpoint generator 1 0 65535 91
Boost pressure sensor 0 65535 102
Coolant temperature sensor 0 65535 110
Oil pressure sensor 0 65535 100
Electronics temperature 0 65535 171
EngSpeedSensorl EngRun 0 65535 190
EngSpeedSensor2 EngRun 0 65535 190
RackTravelSensor not vibr. 0 65535 200
Oversp. only during shutd 0 65535 190
Actuator deviation excessive 0 65535 209
Coolant Temp.high(alarm) 0 65535 110
Coolant Temp. high
0 65535 110
(shutdown)
Oil pressure low (alarm) 0 65535 100
Oil pressure low (shutdown) 0 65535 100
PWM Input 2 0 65535 204
PWM Input 1 0 65535 205
Fault data set 0 65535 206
Fault hardware parameters 0 65535 210
Fault CAN 0 65535 203
Fault CAN, voltage too low 0 65535 207
Fault shutdown solenoid 0 65535 208
Fault EDC AutoRegulation 0 65535 202
20-30
SERDIA PARAMETERS
typ
Wert
Page 38: CAN: (7740)SwitchoverRelease: Governor, speed droop, limiting curve, preset engine speed
Shift mask: setpoint speed 0 63 8
Shift mask: limiting curve 0 7 0
Shift mask: speed droop 0 7 0
Shift mask: governor mode 0 7 0
Page 39: CAN: (7662)EMR-fault message via OiagTelegr. (on/off)
Boost pressure sensor 0 1 1
Coolant temperature sensor 0 1 1
Oil pressure sensor 0 1 1
Electronics temperature 0 1 1
Eng Speed Sensorl
0 1 1
Eng Run
Eng Speed Sensor 2
0 1 1
Eng Run
Rack Travel Sensor not vibr. 0 1 1
Oversp. only during shutd. 0 1 1
Actuator deviation excessive 0 1 1
Coolant Temp. high (alarm) 0 1 1
Coolant Temp. high
0 1 1
(shutdown)
Oil pressure low (alarm) 0 1 1
Oil pressure low (shutdown) 0 1 1
PWM Input 2 0 1 1
PWM Input 1 0 1 1
Fault data set 0 1 1
Fault hardware parameters 0 1 1
Fault CAN 0 1 1
Fault CAN, voltage too low 0 1 1
Fault shutdown solenoid 0 1 1
Fault EDC Auto Regulation 0 1 1
✽ See also system description EMR, Chapter 3 System functions.
20-31
SERDIA PARAMETERS
4.2 OVERALL PROGRAMMING

ATTENTION!
• Complete programming (i.e. access to all parameters) is only possible on level III.
Saving data contained in the ECU:
• With "ECU -> file" read data from ECU. The "Save file under" window is shown.
• Save data under any name as Hex-File (file name.hex).
Complete programming of ECU:
• Click on key "Programming" and the "Open" window is shown.
• Select desired Hex file and open.
• " Click on key "Save in ECU".
Of the configuration data only that operating data is shown which was read from the ECU (2nd column) or from a file (3rd
column. Prior to uploading of the configuration data to the ECU, the operating data can be edited in the 4th column. This
data is also uploaded when uploading the configuration data to the ECU.
Figure: Menu complete programming (“Overal programming”)
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTION[ SWITCH:

ECU->fi!e: The configuration data is read from the ECU, displayed and can be saved as HEX file.
Programming: Updated configuration data is uploaded to the ECU, In order for the upload to be permanent, you must op-
erate the "Save in ECU" switch on the ECU.
Save in ECU (only applies for EMR): The configuration data are permanently saved in the ECU
Restriction: Only applies for EMR and EMS.
4.3 CALIBRATION
The accelerator pedal and the hand throttle potentiometer (if any) must be calibra-ted in combination with the EMR (not ap-
plicable for gensets).
Important prerequisites:
• Engine shut off
• Supply voltage (ignition/terminal 15) switched on
• Accelerator in frame
20-32
SERDIA PARAMETERS
TERMINOLOGY EXPLANATIONS:
Acceler(SWG1): Accelerator pedal sensor (setpoint generator 1), Input 24 FS
Hand throttle(SWG2): Hand throttle potentiometer (setpoint generator 2), Input 20 FS
GENERAL PROCEDURE DURING CALIBRATION PROCESS:

• Select calibration size in upper window.
• Move accelerator pedal/hand throttle potentiometer to desired position.
• "Get value" switch activated: Actuate switch, the calibration value assigned to the position is shown in the editing field.
• "Get value" switch not activated: Enter calibration value in editing field.
• Upload calibration value with "PC->ECU" to ECU.
• Save calibration value with "Save in ECU" in ECU.
• Switch ignition on/off.
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTION SWITCH:

Get value: If the "Get value" switch has been set to activated, you can fetch the calibration value belonging to a pedal po-
sition using this switch.
PC->ECU: The calibration value displayed is uploaded to the ECU.
Save in ECU (only applies for EMR): The calibration data are permanently saved in the ECU.
20-33
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY
5. ERROR MEMORY
5.1 GENERAL
The error memory lists the errors which have occurred since the memory was last cleared and which can be diagnosed. Se-
lection of the menu point "Error memory" causes the current content of the error memory to be displayed.
• When errors have been eliminated, the relevant error messages in the "Error memory" window can be deleted:
• Have messages from the error memory displayed by actuating the "Read EM" button.
• Mark in the "Error location" window the indicated error location using the mouse (Example: "8112:(M17)Rack travel
sensor"). The error location receives a gray background.
• Click on "Clear EM" button. The error location is deleted, the message disappears.
• Quit the "Error memory" window with "Close".
Figure: Example of an error memory output.
DESCRIPTION OF THE FIELDS:

Error location: List of error location: From this list you can select a single error location for more detailed information.
Type of error: All data in this field of the list refer to the error location selected in the upper field.
Environment data: Additional data (e.g. measured values) containing further information on the error location you have
selected.
Total number of errors: Total of all registered error locations.
Frequency: Frequency of occurrence of the error location selected.
Error status: Selected error active or passive.
EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION SWITCHES:

Read EM: With this function switch you can retrieve the error memory from the ECU, and the display is updated.
Clear EM: With this function switch you can send a command to the ECU to delete the error memory.
20-34
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY
5.1.1 ERROR MEMORY (EMR)

List of possible error locations of the EMR:
- 8002: (F18)Signal monitoring PWM-lnp1
- 8012: F21)Signal monitoring PWM-lnp2
- 8020: ECU (positioner actuation)
- 8030: shutoff magnet
- 8112: (M17) Rack travel sensor
- 8120: (F24) AccelerPedal(SWG1) = SWG 1
- 8130: (F20) HandThrottle(SWG2) = SWG 2
- 8140: (M9) CoolantTempSensor
- 8150:(M24) BoostPressureSensor
- 8160:(M21) OilPressureSensor
- 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft
- 8180:(M11)Speed 2, terminal W
- 8190:(interno)ElectronicsTemperature
- 81A0:(M11)Engine speed sensor
- 8210:Data loss EEPROM
- 8220:Data loss coil data
- 8230: EDCcalibration error
- 8305:Speed monitoring
- 8343:Coolant temp, monitoring
- 8345:Eng.OFF->CoolantTempMonit
- 8363:Oil pressure monitoring
- 8365:Eng.OFF->OilPressMonit
- 8405:Actuator (positioner, travel meter, fuel rack)
- 8500:ISO-Bus-Error
- 8600:CAN-Bus-Error
The possible types of error are:

(0) Broken cable or short-circuit
(1) Broken cable or short-circuit
(2) Measuring point defective
(3) Power reduced
(4) Limit exceeded, power reduction activated
(5) Shutoff limit exceeded/ fallen below
The following table may be used as tool for eliminating possible causes of errors occurred. The status of the error pilot light
is to be observed:
• Permanent light: Error status during which limited engine operation is still possible.
• The defect must be eliminated as soon as possible to prevent further damage. Error statuses which result in engine
shutdown or prevent engine start. The defect must be eliminated to allow restarting of the engine
20-35
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY
ERROR MESSAGES, CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Error messages (only readable with SERDIA) n.

Error pilot lamp Possible causes Remedy
Type of error Error location O.K
Permant light (0) Broken cable • 8120: (F24)AcceterPedal Plug-in connection → Restore plug-in connection
(Engine or short-circuit =SWG11 interrupted.
operation • 8130:(F20)HandThrottle OK ↓
restricted) = SWG 22 Plug-in contacts conta- → Clean connector and replace if
• 8140:(M9)CoolantTempSensor3 minated or corroded necessary
• 8150:(M24)BoostPressure OK ↓
Sensor Sensor defective → Replace sensor
• 8160:(M21)OilPressure Sensor OK ↓
• 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft4 Cable harness → Check cable harness and re-
• 8180:(M11)Speed 2, terminal W defective. place if necessary
• 8190:(intern)Electronics
Temperature
(2) Measuring •8002:(F18)Signal monitoring PWM signal cannot be → Check signal
point defective PWM-Inp1 evaluated
•8012:(F21)Signal monitoring
PWM-Inp2
•(3)Power •8343:Coolant temp, monitoring Temperature warning → Check coolant
reduced5 •8363:Oil pressure monitoring limit exceeded too Check oil level
long.
Fallen below oil
pressure alarm limit for
too long.
OK ↓
Faulty configuration. → Check data in SERDIA menu
Check "configuration" and
change if necessary
(5) Shutoff limit • 8305:Speed monitoring Overrun cond.
exceeded/ fallen activated.
below6
Flashing (0)Broken cable • 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft7 Plug-in connection → Restore plug-in connection.
(Engine off) or short-circuit interrupted
OK ↓
Plug-in contacts conta- → Clean connector and replace if
minated or corroded necessary
OK ↓
Sensor defective → Replace sensor
OK ↓
Cable harness → Check cable harness and re-
defective place if necessary
( 2 ) M e a s u r i n g • 8112:(M17)Rack travel sensor Plug-in connection → Restore plug-in connection
point defective interrupted
OK ↓
OK ↓
Actuator defective → Replace actuator
OK ↓
Cable harness Check cable harness and re-
defective → place if necessary
20-36
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY
Error messages (only readable with SERDIA) n.

Error pilot lamp Possible causes Remedy
Type of error Error location O.K
Flashing (5) Shutoff limit • 8305:Speed monitoring Overspeed reached
(Engine off) exceeded/ fallen • 8345:Eng.OFF->CoolantTemp-
below Monit. Temperature alarm → Check coolant
• 8365:Eng.OFF->OilPressMonit limit exceeded for too Check oil level
long. Fallen below oil
• 8405:Actuator (positioner, travel pressure alarm limit for
meter, fuel rack) too long.
OK ↓
Faulty configuration → Check data in SERDIA menu
(e.g. overrun cond. "Configuration" and change if
OFF) necessary

Engine start not (0) Broken cable • 8210:Data loss EEPROM Battery or cable → Check battery.
ipossible or short-circuit • 8220:Data loss coil data harness defective, Check cable harness.
a) Flashing • 8020:ECU (positioner actuation) ECU failure Replace ECU.
b) Flashing or Error in central → Replace ECU

Permanent light electronics, program in
EMR was not executed
c) 0ff (0) Broken cable • 8170:(M13)Speed 1, camshaft7 Plug-in connection → Restore plug-in connection
or short-circuit interrupted
OK ↓
OK ↓
OK ↓
Cable harness → Check cable harness and re-
defective place if necessary
(5) Shutoff limit • 8405: Actuator (positioner, travel Actuator defective → Replace actuator
exceeded/ fallen meter, fuel rack)
below
1
Switch to SWG 2 (if SWG 2 availabtel. Fixed speed with 2% speed droop is set.
2
Switch to SWG 1 (if SWG 1 available). Fixed speed vyilh 2% speed droop is set.
3 Electronics temperature is evaluated.
4
Continued running with reduced rated speed, if speed sensor 2 is available.
5
Injected fuel limitation (if activated).
6 The measured value exceeds maximum speed.
7
Speed sensor 2 not available or defective.
20-37
SERDIA ERROR MEMORY
Defective sensors or pickups can be checked for their correct reference values with the help of the following table.
It is recommended to use a multimeter as measurement aid.
REFERENCE VALUES FOR SENSORS AND PICKUPS

Mode of measur-
Component DEUTZ part number Ref. value for intact component
ment
Accelerator value pickup BOSCH
0419 9457 Resistor Rtotal ≅ 1kΩ
Accelerator value pickup Philips Hall-effect pickup, no mesu-red values

DC voltage
KMA20-30 available
Resistor R =310Ω
Speed sensor camshaft 0419 0811 ACvoltage. VACpeak≅ 40mV
Inductivity L=140mH
Resistor Between pin 1 + 2: Ri≅ 47kΩ
Between pin 1 + 3: Ri≅ 13kΩ
Oil pressure sensor KAVLICO 0419 9478
DC voltage1 Ubetr=5V
at 1083mbar U≅ 0,49V
Resistor Between pin 1 + 2: Ri≅ 58kΩ
Charge air pr. sensor Between pin 3 + 2: Ri≅ 58kΩ
0419 9552
KAVLICO
DC voltage1 Ues=5V
at 1083mbar U≅ 1,083V
Coolant temp, sensor
0419 9333 Resistor Ri≅ 2,3kΩ a 21,5° C
BOSCH
Solenoid ETO Resistor Ri≅ 0,5Ω
Resistor Ri≅ 8Ω
Travel meas. system in EMR-positioner
(Meas.coil=Pin 3 u. Pin 4) Inductivity L≅ 27mH stop position
L≅ 6mH full throttle position
Resistor Ri≅ 8Ω
Travel meas. system in EMR postioner
(Meas.coil=Pin 3 u. Pin 5)
Inductivity L≅ 12mH constant
Resistor R≅ 1,3Ω
Actuator in EMR positioner
(Meas.coil=Pin 1 + Pin 2)
Inductivity L≅ 8mH
1
Additional aid: power supply unit
20-38
SERDIA FUNCTION TEST
6. FUNCTION TEST
6.1 GENERAL
This menu item is only activated for users of access level III.
The actuator should only be operated with the engine switched off.
Figure: Menu for function test of EMR actuator
STRUCTURE OF THE DISPLAY WINDOW

• Measured values are displayed in the top window.
• You use the "Meas. values" switch to select those measured values you wish to display from all the measured values
available (see Chapter 3 Measured values).
• In the bottom table, the setpoint values and actual values of the actuators are entered. You can only make entries in this
table if the ECU has been switched to test mode.
• You switch to test mode by activating the field "Test mode". You deactivate this field in order to switch off test mode.
• You can specify values in the "Setpoint value" in test mode. The actual values are read consecutively and are displayed
in the right-hand column.
20-39
SERDIA EXTRAS
7. EXTRAS
7.1 MAXIMUM VEHICLE SPEED

Three different maximum vehicle speeds (30, 40, 50 km/h) can be selected on this screen..
7.2 LOGISTIC DATA

On this screen the logistic data
• Engine serial number
• Part number of EMR function data record
• Part number of ASAP2 data record
• Day, month and year of production can be read from the ECU and printed.
ATTENTION!
• Only DEUTZ man enter and save data in the ECU.
Figure: Logistic data of the EMR
20-40
SERDIA EXTRAS
7.3 LOAD SPECTRUM (ONLY EMS)

This screen provides an overview of speed and load ranges at which the engine is being operated. Entries in the ECU can
be deleted by a user with a higher level of access authorization.
Restriction: Only applies for EMS
7.4 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL EXCEEDED (ONLY EMS)

Exceeded maintenance intervals are displayed. Users with a higher level of access authorization can also delete exceeded
maintenance intervals.
7.5 OVERRIDE MEMORY (ONLY EMS)

For individual measured values this screen displays periods during which the engine was operated in warning or shut-
down range. Entries in the ECU can be deleted by a user with a higher level of access authorization.
20-41
SERDIA WHAT SHOULD YOU DO IF...?
8 WHAT SHOULD YOU DO IF ...?
8.1 SERDIA IN GENERAL
8.1.1 ERROR IN ESTABLISHING THE COMMUNICATION LINK

If you are unable to establish a communication link despite having an interface and an ECU connected, you will receive the
following error message:
POSSIBLE CAUSES OF THE ERROR MESSAGE:

• There is no power supply to the EMR or to the interface.
• The power supply was interrupted when the engine was shut down.
• The wrong serial interface has been assigned on the PC (see 8.1.2).
• There is an incorrect polarity of the power supply from the engine to the interface.
• You have not connected all 4 leads (+, -, k, I).
• Incorrect or faulty ECU.
TROUBLESHOOTING, QUICK CHECK FEATURES:

• The yellow interface LED should light up when you call SERDIA.
• Measure the power supply diagnostics plug (the interface requires 8-28V DC).
• Check the serial interface assignment under Windows, usually COM1.
• Connect a different ECU.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON OPERATING VOLTAGE FOR ECUS. INTERFACE AND PC:

• The EMR ECU is suitable for an operating voltage of a minimum of 10 V to a maximum of 30 V (type12-24V).
Current consumption: 5A at 12V 7A at 24V
• The MVS is only suitable for a operating voltage of 24 V
• The interface is fed with power from the engine side and is suited for voltages between 12 V and 24 V
• The ECUs and the interface are protected against incorrect polarity and surge voltage. Nevertheless, connection by
mistake (e.g. to 230 V) can result in damage.
• An optoelectronic coupler integrated in the interface allows you to connect the PC (notebook and printer) to the vehicle
battery or the earth without any risk of damage to the ECU and the interface, and without any loss of data.
20-42
8.1.2 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION WITH ISETUP

On PCs the COM1 interface may be occupied by the mouse. In this case, you should connect the interface to the second
serial interface (COM2). You can then configure this port using SETUP in order to communicate with the interface.
PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
• Call program SETUP.EXE.
• Select the other COM port and confirm with OK..
• Initialization file ISODRV.INI is updated automatically.
• Re-start Windows.
ATTENTION!
• On many PCs the second serial interface is 25 pole. If this is the case, you should use a hardware adapter (con-
version from 25 to 9 poles) when connecting the 9 pole diagnostics interface.
Figure: Help file screen from SETUP.EXE
8.1.3 ACCESS CONFLICTS UNDER WINDOWS 3.1

The interface driver ISODRV.386 can only be loaded statically. You enter the driver ISODRV.386 in Windows file SYS-
TEM.INI under section [386Enh] (at the same time specifying your current directory). This can result in problems with other
application programs occurring that also access the serial interface.
REMEDY:
• Call program ISETUP.EXE.
• Delete driver entry from SYSTEM.INI.
• Re-start Windows 3.1.
20-43
8.1.4 ERROR MESSAGE UNDER WINDOWS 3.11 WHEN STARTING UP SERDIA

When you start up SERDIA under Windows 3.11, you may receive the following error message:
The cause is the non-active driver VXDLDR.386.
REMEDY:
• Call program SETUP.EXE.
• Check the field 'Device VXDLDR.386 enabled' and confirm with OK.
The appropriate driver entry is made automatically in the file SYSTEM.INI.
• Re-start Windows 3.11.
20-44
8.2 EMR
8.2.1 THE ENGINE "SURGES"
TRACING THE CAUSE:
As with engines featuring a mechanical governor, on engines which have EMR, technical components such as the pump,
a well-running fuel rack, fuel supply, etc., must be included. It is particularly the case if the engine has already been running
satisfactorily that "engine surges" occurring afterwards are not usually related to the EMR.
GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT:
Governor adjustment applies primarily for new applications. It must be thoroughly tested and documented with the sys-
tem (engine and equipment) under all operating conditions.
When the new application has been concluded and cleared, you must notify head office of the governor parameters per-
taining to the application. For subsequent engines with the same application no further adaptation is necessary as a rule.
MENU ENTRY:
Main menu SERDIA -> Menu parameters -> Menu configuration -> pages 4, 5 and 17.
20-45
BASIC INFORMATION ON MAKING CORRECTIONS TO SETTINGS:

• Corrections to settings should be made with the engine running.
• Increase of P-I-D parts results in broader speed control fluctuation range.
• Enter the value you wish to correct in the field "new value". One possible method is as follows: mark the old value with
the mouse and type in the new value (this automatically removes the old value).
• Click on the switch "PC->ECU" in order to send the new value to the ECU. The governor takes over the new governor
characteristics; you will recognise the result by the engine's running characteristics.
• After you have successfully made the required corrections to the settings and before you disconnect the power supply
(Chapter 15), you must save the new parameter setting in the EMR. To do so, click on the switch "Save in ECU".
BASIC GOVERNOR SETTING:

The ECU at end of line is programmed with the following standard values:
Standard values
Parameter (Variable) Remarks
Genset Vehicle
SpeedGvnr: P part 18-201 4,0 Basic setting gain factors P-I-D parts. These parameters are in-
SpeedGvnr: 1 part 10,0 10,0 dependent of the engine status (speed, continuous load active).
SpeedGvnr: D part 5-12 2.5 They are the main instruments used when setting the governor.
SpeedGvnr: damping 90,0 65,0 Reduction of the governor parameters for the static range.
Speed band around setpoint value. Within this speed band the en-
SpeedGvnr: damping range 15,0 80,0 gine runs under steady-state conditions accurately and smoothly
without reacting violently to speed variations.
PosGvnr: P part 10,0 10,0
PosGvnr: I part 10-151 5,0
PosGvnr: D part 5-101 5,0 Corrections to settings should only be made following approval of
PosGvnr: DT2 part 8,0 8.0 head office.
PosGvnr: gain 160-180 180.0
PosGvnr: gain range 0,25 0,25
1Differing standard values are possible, depending on the engine type and the application!
Standard values, speed and load-dependent parameters (page 17):

3 performance maps for P, I, und D part = fct (speed, fuel injection volume).
Parameters (Variable) Standard value Remarks

X: Engine speed position values
600 ... 2500 7 speed values
(1/min)
Y: Quantity position values
0, 20...100 4 injection volume values
(cmm/Hub)
Total of 3 x 28 entries. The entry "100%" results in assumption of the governor
Map (%) 100
P-I-D parts (page 4). Corrections must be made at the relevant working point.
20-46
CARRYING OUT CORRECTIONS TO SETTINGS:

Before changing a parameter we recommend that you save the current configuration with "Save in file" and/or that you
print out the configuration.
There are three stages to the setting procedure:
1. Parametri di base unità di controllo PID.
PID governor basic parameters. Basically, settings are made using the basic parameters.
• Should it be necessary to reset the basic governor settings, you should set all the governor maps (page 17) to
100%.
• The P part is the most important parameter and must be set first. Increase the parameter value for "SpeedGvnr:
P part" starting from 10% until, following excitation by a load step, the engine tends to a vibration of f>1 Hz. Then
reduce the P part again by 25%. Example: P part with vibration tendency (unstable) = 12.12-25% of 12 = 9 (new
set value).
The setting depends very much on the system's moment of inertia (engine+generator). For moments of inertia up to
8 kgm2 , the P part value range lies between 10 and 45%. For greater moments of inertia, the P part can be increased
up to 90%.
Note for genset engines:You should determine the optimal governor values under operating speed conditions and
under different loads. Note the various P parts thus determined, and enter them as mean value in "SpeedGvnr: P
part".
For double frequency systems, you should include the second frequency in the calculation of the mean value.
Note for motor vehicle engines: Optimal governor values should be determined at a number of speed and load
points. Note the various P parts thus determined, and enter them as mean value in "SpeedGvnr: P part".
The various P parts resulting from the various load and speed points must be corrected in the PID map.
Le parti P risultanti dai diversi punti di carico e di numeri di giri devono essere corrette nelle caratteristiche PID.
• The D and I parts are then set following the same procedure (page 4); i.e. you increase the values starting from 5%
until the system becomes unstable. Then reduce by 25%.
2. Parameters for static and dynamic operation.
Setting the parameters "SpeedGvnr: damping" and "SpeedGvnr: damping range"
Con il parametro “RegolGiri: Settore smorzamento” viene definito il settore di velocità nel quale il numero di giri è in
condizione statica. Ad esempio l’immissione del valore 15 min-1 nel numero di giri nominale determina un settore di
+/-15 min-1.
The parameter "SpeedGvnr: damping range" determines the speed range within which the engine speed is situated
under steady-state conditions, e.g. the entry 15 min"1 represents a band of +/-15 min"1 about the setpoint speed.
The parameter "SpeedGvnr: damping" determines the reduction of the governor parameters (PID parts) for the static
range; i.e. if the speed lies within the speed band around the setpoint value, the governor parameters (PID parts) are
reduced to the value in accordance with the damping factor,
e.g.: SpeedGvnr: P part=10%
SpeedGvnr: damping =65%
This has the effect of reducing the P part to 6.5% under steady-state engine operating conditions of the setpoint
speed range ± damping range. The purpose of this measure is to ensure that the engine runs accurately and quietly
within the speed range without reacting violently to small changes in speed. If, as a result of a fault, the engine runs
outside the speed range, the governor parameters that have been set will again become 100% effective, and the gov-
ernor will correct the speed error as quickly as possible.
For standard settings, see Basic governor settings. Corrections to settings can only be made during the engine test
phase.
3. Speed and load-dependent parameters.
A parameter map is envisaged for each of the basic parameters R I, D, depending on the speed and the quantity of fuel
injected (load) (page 17). The effective parameters are determined by multiplying the basic parameters by the con-
tents of the maps,
e.g.: SpeedGvnr: P part =10%
Map P part=200% at 20001 /min and 50 cmm/stroke
Result; The P part becomes 20% effective for the working point.
20-47
8.2.2 CALIBRATING THE-ACCELERATOR

As a rule, the accelerator takes the form of a pedal and is controlled by the driver. However, the input envisaged for the ac-
celerator (24 pin vehicle plug) may also be used as a remote control input, as is the case in locomotive and marine ap-
plications. Regardless of the application, calibration must be carried out in every case.
Calibration must be carried out before the initial startup as well as in the event of a replacement. This work is to be un-
dertaken by the customer or by Service.
The accelerator pedal does not always come as part of the DEUTZ AG scope of supply. However, we recommend use of
the accelerator pedal sensor DEUTZ part number 0419 9457. Other pedals may be used, but you should first obtain ap-
proval from head office. The following requirements apply:
• Connection in accordance with the EMR system overview:
Signal input (24 pin/vehicle plug) to GND (23 pin/vehicle plug)
• Analog signal:
> 0,5 V (pedal at rest), e.g. 1V
< 4,5 V (pedal pressed against the stop), e.g. 4V
• The EMR makes a reference voltage available at the vehicle plug (25 pin, +5V).
This reference voltage is also intended for the hand throttle potentiometer. The charging current should therefore not
exceed a total of 25 mA if the accelerator pedal sensor and hand throttle potentiometers are connected in parallel, (i.e.
total resistance > 200 ).
CALIBRATING THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL USING THE "CALIBRATION" MENU:

Calibration is menu-guided. The two stop positions "parked position" and "full throttle" are calibrated as limit values. See
"General procedure for calibration", Chapter 4.3, Calibration.
CALIBRATING THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL USING THE MENUS "MEASURED VALUES' AND 'CONFIGURATION":
It is the purpose of calibration to inform the ECU of the limit values "parked position" as lower reference point and "full throt-
tle" as upper reference point. In addition, the "upper fault value" (+5% of the upper reference point) and the "lower error val-
ue" (-5% of the upper reference point) must be entered in accordance with the two reference points.
PARAMETER DESIGNATIONS
Configuration screen Calibration screen Value
Acceler(SWG1)
AccPedal(SWG1)up. err val. max. setpoint x 1.05
upper fault limit[full throttle.. .5V]
Acceler(SWG1)
AccPedal(SWG1)up. ref max. setpoint
full throttle [pressed down, upper limit]
Acceler(SWG1)
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. ref Pedal at rest = Idle
parked position [lower limit]
Acceler(SWG1)
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. err val. Pedal at rest -- 0.05 x max setpoint
lower fault limit [OV... parked pos.]
MEASUREMENT OF THE LIMIT VALUES:

• Call the menu "Measured values", "Actual measured values".
• Measured value "(F24)Accelerator pedal=SWG1": with pedal at rest (lower reference) and pedal fully pressed down
(upper reference) "Get value" and transfer to ECU and save.
20-48
CONFIGURATION:
• Call menu point "Parameters", "Configuration".
• Enter values in accordance with the table of examples shown below ("Configuration of pedal input", see below).
Conversion: 5V=1023 digits.
Example: Configuration of the accelerator pedal input
Actual value/
Factory setting Calibration Configuration page 10
Measured value
Parameter
5V = 1023 digits
[ mV] [ digits] [ mV]
[ mV] [ digits]
AccPedal(SWG1)up. err val. 4750 973 43571 893
AccPedal(SWG1)up. ref) 4500 921 4150 4150 850
AccPedai(SWG1)lo. ref 500 102 670 670 137
AccPedal(SWG1)lo. err val. 250 51 4632 95
1 Measured value "upper reference point" + 5 % (of the upper reference point)
2
Measured value "lower reference point" - 5 % (of the lower reference point)
8.2.3 CALIBRATION OF HAND THROTTLE

The hand throttle (Pin 20 FS) is provided for vehicles and agricultural machinery. The driver has the possibility to preset a
relevant engine operating speed during ploughing, for instance, and then remove his foot from the accelerator pedal. As
with comparable mechanical control levers, the hand throttle control must be reset to zero (lowest engine speed) before
starting.
The hand throttle control overrides the accelerator pedal and determines the minimum engine speed. Proportional to the
setpoint value the speed is adjustable between low idling (LI) (e.g. 650 min"1) and rated speed (e.g. 2300 min"1). According
to the hand throttle setpoint input, the engine responds analogous to the accelerator pedal. If a speed is preset, for in-
stance, to 1500 min'1 with the hand throttle, the accelerator pedal can only increase the speed from this value.
The hand throttle control is not part of the DEUTZ scope of supply and must be programmed, however, in the EMR ex fac-
tory.
A potentiometer may be used as adjusting element and installed by the customer.
Requirement for hand throttle setpoint value (potentiometer) for installation by the customer:
• Input Pin 20 vehicle plug
• Supply of potentiometer as pedal sensor, 5V reference voltage Pin 25, and GND Pin 23.
• Load reference voltage together with accelerator pedal sensor < 25 mA.
• Protective system IP65
• Adjustment of end stops between 10% and 90% of potentiometer value.
E.g. potentiometer resistor = 5kW, the adjustment range between the mechanical stops may then be between 500W and
4500W. Such an adjustment range can be obtained by
a) Restriction of angle of rotation

b) Series resistors in the supply lines.
CALIBRATION OF HAND THROTTLE POTENTIOMETER:
ATTENTION!
• The two end stops of the potentiometers must be calibrated.
It is the aim that the ECU be informed of the limit values of the two stops "Potentiometer stop LI speed" as lower reference
point and "Potentiometer stop rated speed" as upper reference point. Depending on the two reference points, the "Upper
error value" (+5% of the upper reference point) and the "Lower error value" (-5% of the upper reference point) must be ad-
ditionally entered.
20-49
DESIGNATION OF PARAMETERS
Configuration screen Calibration screen Value

Hand throttle(SWG2)upper fault limit
Hand thr.(SWG2)up, err val. Rated engine speed x 1 .05
(upper limit. ..5V)
Hand throttle(SWG2)max.eng. speed
Hand thr.(SWG2)up. ref Rated engine speed
(upper limit)
Hand throttle(SWG2)min.eng.speed
Hand thr.(SWG2)lo. ref Low idling engine speed
(lower limit)
Hand throttle(SWG2)lower fault limit
Hand thr.(SWG2)lo. err val. LI engine speed - 0.05 x rated eng. speed
(OV... lower limit)
8.2.4 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSTICS

ON-LINE DISPLAY:
DIAGNOSTICS:I
Trouble n.O.K. Remedy
Plug-in connection disconnected? → Re-connect plug-in connection.
OK ↓
Plug contacts dirty or corroded? → Clean or if necessary replace plug.
OK ↓
Sensor defective? → Replace sensor.
OK ↓
Cable harness defective? → Check and if necessary replace cable harness.
20-50
8.2.5 ENGINE DOES NOT START
Indication Possible cause Remedy

Starter speed > 160 1/min is not rea- Check using multimeter: terminal voltage at star- • Replace battery.
ched. ter < 7V (1 2V system. • Clean earth wire connections.
Starter speed ok, fuel rack travels to
Faulty fuel supply. • Restore fuel supply.
start position.
Starter speed ok, fuel rack stays at • Remove vehicle plug and check for correct con-
zero position. No power supply, connected to wrong pins or in- nections
correct polarity. pin 14F = + Ubatt
pin 1F = -Ubatt
pin 2F = -Ubatt
Shutoff solenoid defective or not connected.
Fuel rack stiff. •Locate site causing stiffness and remedy as ap-
propriate.
Speed sensor defective •Replace sensor, check plug connection and line.
Starting fuel charge limitation is set too low or co- Using SERDIA check measured value "(M9)co-
olant temperature is too high for the EMR. olant temperature" in the menu "current measu-
red values".
There is a serious fault in the EMR system. You
• Locate error using SERDIA.
Flashing pilot light. should remedy the fault before attempting any
further starts.
SERDIA error message: • Replace actuator, see service example, actuator
Identification of fuel rack travel deviation, measu-
"8405: Actuator (positioner, replacement. Additional setting is not neces-
red value in shutdown range
travel meter, fuel rack)". sary.
SERDIA error message Short circuit or interruption on the speed sensor • Replace sensor, check plug connection for con-
“8170: (camshaft sensor) or supply line or plug connec- tamination or corrosion, check lines between
(M13) Speed 1, camshaft". tion. vehicle plug and sensor for damage.
SERDIA error message:

Memory error in the EMR
"8210: Data loss EEPROM" • Replace ECU. Transfer data from old ECU to the
Memory error in the EMR
"8220: Data loss coil data" new one (1:1)
ECU Failure
"8020: ECU (positioner actuation)"
SERDIA error message: • Replace sensor, check plug connection for con-
Oil pressure measured value (M21) lies outside
"8160: tamination or corrosion, check lines between
permitted range, also with engine switched off.
(M21) OilPressure-Sensor" vehicle plug and sensor for damage.
SERDIA error message: Coolant temperature measured value (M9) lies ou- • Replace sensor, plug and line control.
"8140: tside the permitted range, also with engine
(M9) CoolantTemp-Sensor" switched off.
SERDIA error message:
•Check calibration values in the menu "Calibra-
"8120: Accelerator pedal sensor incorrectly calibrated.
tion" and change if necessary.
(F24) Acceler Pedal(SWGI)"
20-51
8.2.6 ENGINE SHUTS OFF FOR NON-DEFINABLE REASONS
Following shutdown: Shutdown not initiated by error message

(Key switch not yet actuated, in the EMR.
off/on) Other possibilities:
Error pilot light off • Fuel supply
• Speed monitoring independent of EMR. • Restore fuel system.
• Check whether additional speed monitoring (e.g. so-
lenoid) is available and make relevant system check.
• Interruption of supply voltage. • Check EMR vehicle plug, fuse, key switch etc. for lo-
ose contact.
Following shutdown: Carry out systematic check depending on error mes-

Trace error location and error environment with
(Key switch not yet actuated, sage:
SERDIA. Error message:
off/on). • Guide value: rated speed+15% to be corrected if ne-
• Overspeed (is reached for instance upon sud-
Error pilot light Permanent cessary.
den load change).
light • Check connector on oil pressure sensor for loose
• e.g. "Oil pressure" additional remark: "inactive".
contact and replace sensor if necessary.
Following shutdown: A serious error in the EMR system is involved. Take actions according to error location definition.
(Key switch not yet actuated, Prior to engine start,, trace error location with This may be replacement of ECU, actuator or sensor.
off/on) SERDIA. The additional remark "inactive" indicates a loose con-
Error pilot light flashing tact at the indicated error location.
8.2.7 REPLACING THE EMR ACTUATOR

The actuator is a purely mechanical part of the EMR. As such, it forms a fixed part of the engine. The operating magnet it
contains is controlled by the EMR and serves to position the fuel rack and thus regulate fuel supply to the engine. A travel
meter contained in the actuator informs the EMR of the fuel rack position.
The following error messages may mean that you need to replace the actuator:
• 8112:(M17) Rack travel sensor
• 8405: Actuator (positioner, travel meter, fuel rack)
INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPLACEMENT:

• Switch off the power supply to the EMR and disconnect the cable connection from the actuator. For safety reasons it
is essential that you remove the positive pole battery connection.
• Remove the old actuator and clean the contact surface on the engine.
ATTENTION!
• With the actuator removed, the fuel rack is in its maximum filling position, i.e. on no account should you start the
engine!!
• Fit the new actuator to the engine using sealing compound DEUTZ part number 0101 6102. If you are replacing the ac-
tuator, make sure that the new actuator is compatible with the ECU. Currently, 3 combinations are possible:
20-52
ACTUATOR/ECU COMPATIBILITY
Software version Corresponding

ECU Part No. What to do if the actuator fails
No. EMR actuator, P/N
If you are replacing parts, this combination must be replaced in its entirety
0211 1846 0211 1841 by the combination 0211 1911 / 0211 1910. Please consult head office be-
fore proceeding further.
0211 1910 0211 1911
1,08
0211 2017 The actuator is identical with 0211 1911 as far as contents are concerned.
0211 1926
< K 953 430 Only the casing securing method is different.
1,11
0211 2088 1,10 0211 1926
• Re-connect to the ECU and switch on engine.

• Using SERDIA, under the menu "Parameters"->"Configuration" use the button "PC->ECU" to transfer the parameters
to the EMR and test the engine for correct running.
• If the engine is running properly, save the parameters in the EC.
• When you have completed the tests with SERDIA, delete the error memory.
• In the SERDIA main menu, print out the list for ECU identification and under "Extras" print out the logistics data, to serve
as documentation.
• You must send the old actuator to head office together with the documentation.
20-53
8.2.8 REPLACING THE EMR ECU

The ECU can be replaced in two ways:
1. If the old ECU is damaged but data can still be read (communication with SERDIA is still possible).
1st step: Copy the engine data record from the old ECU:
• Switch on ignition/power supply.
• Call the program SERDIA.
• In SERDIA, change over to the menu "Parameters"->"Overall programming".
• Click on the button "ECU -> file". This will read the configuration files. Next, the window "Save as" is opened.
• Save the file under a name.Save the file under a name.
The engine number will be suggested as file name for storage on from SERDIA 2.5. This suggestion is not compulsive; other
file names may be chosen nevertheless. Then confirm with OK. The file (i.e. the engine data record) is then saved under the
name <Engine number>. hex. When the data record is transferred from the old ECU, it is then assigned information re-
garding the number of hours of engine operation and the number of engine starts.
•• End the program. Switch off ignition/power supply.
2nd step: Replace ECU:
You must check the compatibility of the ECUs by referring to the following table (same part number). You should also check
and ensure the compatibility of the ECU with the actuator.
20-54
ACTUATOR/ECU COMPATIBILITY
Software version Corresponding

ECU Part No. What to do if the ECU fails
No. EMR actuator, P/N
If you are replacing parts, this combination must be replaced in its entirety
0211 1846 0211 1841 by the combination 0211 1911 /0211 1910. Please consult head office be-
fore proceeding further.
0211 1910 0211 1911 Can only be replaced by P/N 0211 1918
For 101 2/1 01 3:
0211 2017 1,08 replace with P/N 021 1 201 7 software version no. 1.11, identifiable by the
0211 1926
< K 953 430 housing no., from K 953 430.
For 1015: replace with P/N 0422 61 78.
0211 2017 Cannot be replaced by different ECUs. It is essential to ensure that the hou-
1.11 0211 1926
< K 953 430 sing no. > K 953 430.
0211 2088 1.10 0211 1926 Only for DEUTZFAHR.

• Call SERDIA.
• In SERDIA, switch over to the menu "Parameters"->"Overall programming".
• Click on the button "Programming". The window "Open" will then appear.
• Select the engine data record stored in the memory (<engine number>.hex) by double clicking with the mouse.
• Transfer the engine data record to the EMR by clicking on the button "OK".
• Save the engine data record in the ECU by clicking on the button "Save in ECU".
3rd step: Start up the engine and check it is running satisfactorily.

• In the menu "Error memory", delete the error memory. 2.
20-55
2. Installing a new ECU with a factory-programmed engine data record.

Every EMR has an engine-specific data record which is stored in a central computer at DEUTZ AG when the engine is de-
livered to the customer. DEUTZ AG should be notified in the event of any changes being made to the settings in the EMR
configuration. If you order a new ECU, it will be programmed with a data record to which DEUTZ AG has
access under the appropriate engine number.
ATTENTION!
• i.e. if you do not notify DEUTZ AG of any corrections to the engine settings, these cannot be taken into account
when a new ECU is programmed.
• Switch off ignition/power supply,

• Release the two plugged connections on the old ECU.
• Connect the ECU to the engine and the vehicle plug (both 25 pole).
• Call SERDIA program.
• Delete error memory in the menu "Error memory".
• Start engine and check for satisfactory running.
8.2.9 Error when entering configuration data

This error message is triggered when SERDIA is unable to enter the hex file. It may be that the file contains umlauts (ä, ö, ü)
or certain special symbols that SERDIA is unable to read.
20-56
SERDIA UPGRADE FROM VERSION 2.5 TO VERSION 3.1
9. SERDIA UPGRADE FROM VERSION 2.5 TO VERSION 3.1
9.1 IMPROVEMENTS AND HELP WITH PROBLEMS IN COMMUNICATING WITH

NOTEBOOKS/WIN 98
Since Windows 98 began to be more and more frequently used in notebook computers various problems have appeared
in SERDIA’s interaction with notebooks - e.g. ‚Control unit cannot be found‘ or sporadic connection breakdowns etc.; the
causes vary, depending on manufacturer.
SERDIA 3.1 solves some of these problems.
Another problem is being caused by a new function in Windows 98 called ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power In-
terface).
It is absolutely essential to disable ACPI.
Windows 98 does not however permit this function to be disabled easily.
SERDIA 3.1 therefore includes files with which you can disable the ACPI function and reactivate the “old” APM (Advanced
Power Management) function (as in Windows 95).
This procedure cannot be automated (because only some notebooks are affected).
Your manual assistance is therefore needed.
What can you do in such a case?
• Read the ”Readme.txt“ file supplied with SERDIA 3.1
• Check whether ACPI has been enabled on your notebook:
(Start\Settings\System Control\System\Device Manager\System Components)
• If there are ACPI entries present, ACPI can be disabled with the file "disable_ACPI_neu.reg“ - to be found in the working
directory of SERDIA 3.1. (ACPI can be re-enabled with "enable_ACPI_neu.reg“).
• Perform hardware detection. (Start\Settings\System Control\Hardware\Continue\Search for new hardware).
NOTE: the Windows 98 installation CD may be needed.
• Restart computer
Example with ACPI enabled
20-57
9.2 NEW ENTRY MASK WITH MEASURED VALUES AND COLOURED-CODED INDICATION OF
CONNECTION STATUS
Innovations individually
• Some measured values are displayed direct (selection not configurable).
• Additional switch "Jobs“, see also 3.0.
• Output of complete content possible with “Select control unit/print“.
• In “Select control unit“ the control unit can now be re-stimulated without quitting SERDIA.
• The communication status between PC\notebook and control unit is now indicated by a coloured code in the status-
bar as well as in plain text:
- Yellow (flashing): ISO-block processing: i.e. actual data (e.g. measured values) are being exchanged between SER-
DIA and control unit.
- Green (flashing): ISO-connection OK, i.e. only blocks for maintaining communication are being exchanged between
SERDIA and control unit.
- Red: Communication interrupted
20-58
9.3 NEW SWITCH “JOBS“ FOR PERFORMING SELECTED SERVICING OPERATIONS,

E.G. ADJUSTING CONTROLLER OR ADJUSTING OFFSET
The advantage of this added feature is that settings and views are visible and operator-accessible grouped together on a
single screen page according to job (servicing operation), not spread over several pages as in SERDIA Vers. 2.5.
Example: “Adjusting controller“ (Reglereinstellung)
Example: "Adjusting offset“ (P-Grad Einstellung)
20-59
9.4 IN- AND OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT IS NOW ADDITIONALLY CONFIGURABLE USING

PLAIN TEXT (PREVIOUSLY ONLY CODE NUMBERS)
With the "Jobs“ switch the possible assignments are now displayed in "Specification of in- and
outputs“ (right mouse-click) and assigned (left mouse-click). From the same mask the switch-selectable
functions can also be assigned and the measured values for all in- and outputs displayed.
This configuration option is available only from Level III upwards.
9.5 UPGRADES IN "PARAMETER SETTING/CONFIGURATION“

9.5.1 Configuration pages with “rider“
By means of the "riders“ it is now possible to jump between selected pages.
9.5.2 With the highest access level subrecords can now be created and roof 1curves
displayed graphically
First and foremost this affects service personnel at company headquarters. The service network benefits mainly from eas-
ier handling of changes in functional scope.
9.5.3 For programming reasons it has been necessary to move the configuration pages
In SERDIA 3.1 all pages from 21 onwards are now 2 pages away from their position in SERDIA 2.5.
E.g. the previous page 25 is now page 27. Account is taken of the change in the SERDIA Manual Vers. 3.1.
20-60
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
20-59
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) INTRODUCTION
1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
The electronic components in the AGROTRON are tested and programmed by means of the Electronic Diagnosis System
(EDS) from DEUTZ-FAHR.
The existing version of the EDS consists of an interface cable and an adapter cable as well as of an installation disk with the
corresponding programs.
The PC program and the cables are distributed via:
SAME-DEUTZ-FAHR GROUP S.p.A.

Viale F. CASSANI, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALIA
1.1 FUNCTIONAL SCOPE

The EDS software includes the following subprograms:
• POWERSHIFT and POWERSHUTTLE transmission
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the gear box error memory
- Programming of the gear box, e.g. upon replacement of the box (end-of-line programming)
- Calibration of the sensor at the clutch pedal (end-of-line programming)
- Evaluation of the contact pressure of the main clutch (only for power shuttle)
• Agrotronic-hD
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the AGROTRONIC-hD box error memory
- Calibrate valves
• Infocenter
- Diagnosis
- Programming of the constant values
• Spring-suspended front axle
- Diagnosis
- Readout of the control box error memory
- Reading resp. loading of the control box standard data (parameters) converter
20-60
1.2 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Converter
Serial K-line
line
Control box
Hardware Setup
1.2.1 INTERFACE CABLE (SERIAL)
The depicted interface cable is plugged into the serial interface (COM 1 or COM 2) of the computer and connected with the
corresponding connectors of the adapter cable.
1 - Plug (designation ”EIC”) for connection to the serial interface (RS 232) at the computer for diagnosis INFOCENTER.
2 - Plug (designation ”9141”) for connection to the serial interface (RS 232) at the computer for diagnosis POWERSHIFT-
and POWERSHUTTLE-transmission, AGROTRONIC-hD and spring-suspended front axle.
3 - Plug for 12 V supply of the interface cable for connection to the cigar lighter.
4 - Diagnosis plug for AGROTRONIC-hD, gear box control and spring-suspended front axle, 4-pole.
5 - Diagnosis plug for INFOCENTER, 2-pole.
6 - Adapter for diagnosis POWERSHIFT transmission, old version.
20-61
1.2.2 ADAPTER CABLE FOR CENTRAL DIAGNOSIS INTERFACE
The depicted adapter cable is plugged into the diagnosis interface in the fuse box and connected with the corresponding
connectors of the PC interface cable.
8 - Central plug 14-pole for connection in the fuse box
9 - Diagnosis plug for ”Agrotronic-hD”, 4-pole
10 - Diagnosis plug for ”Infocenter”, 2-pole
11 - Diagnosis plug ”Powershift Agrotron 4.70 – 6.45”, 4-pole
12 - Diagnosis plug ”Spring-suspended front axle”, 4-pole
13 - Diagnosis plug ”Electronic motor control”, 4-pole
14 - Diagnosis plug for ”Full powershift Agrotron 160-200”, 3-pole
15 - Diagnosis connection for ”MOBI-DIG (ZF)”, 4-pole
NOTE. Both free cable ends are not used.
1.2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The applied computer (notebook, laptop or portable system) needs to fulfill the following requirements in order to install
and execute EDS:
• IBM compatible personal computer with at least a 80486 processor.
CAUTION!
For the use of SERDIA – SERvice DIAgnosis program for the electronic motor control from DEUTZ AG – a Pen-
tium‘-processor is recommended.
• Main memory (RAM) at least 640 kB
• Disk drive 3,5” for 1,44 MB floppy disks (HD)
• Hard disk with at least 2,5 MB of free memory space
• at least one serial interface COM 1 (RS 232)
• Operating system MS-DOS from version 6.xx on
• An additional serial/k-line converter is required for the communication with the diagnosis interface (included in the
scope of supply of the company Wilbär).
20-62
1.2.4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT!
The EDS program needs to be installed and executed in the DOS mode of the computer in order to prevent mal-
functions! The installation has to be carried out according to the installation instructions included in the scope of
supply.
The installation procedure valid according to the current release is shown step by step in the subsequent description:
• Start computer in DOS mode (C:\_)
• Insert floppy disk in drive A
• Change to drive A (A:\_) by means of entering A: and pressing of the ENTER-key
• The automatic installation procedure is launched by means of entering install
Hereby a new subdirectory (C:\EDS) is created on the hard disk in which the EDS program will be installed. During the
installation process the user is assisted by instructions on the screen.
• After succesful installation the EDS program is launched automatically.
• The program is terminated by selecting Option 8 (C:\EDS_)
• The subdirectory EDS is quit (C:\_) by means of entering cd. (resp. cd\).
1.3 STARTING AND TERMINATING OF THE EDS PROGRAM
IMPORTANT!
If Windows 95/Windows 3.1 is installed as operating system the EDS program needs to be launched
in DOS mode (in case of Win’95 via the MS-DOS input prompt icon). Otherwise malfunctions may
occur during the diagnosis!
1.3.1 STARTING OF THE EDS PROGRAM

• Start computer in DOS mode (C:\_)
• Change into the subdirectory EDS (C:\EDS:>_) by means of entering CD EDS.
• The program is launched by entering EDS; the initial menu appears with the following select options:
Fig. 1 - Initial Menu
Within the initial menu, pressing one of the numerical keys (1 to 7) determines which component (e.g. Agrotronic-hD+ASM)
is supposed to be checked and on which computer interface (COM 1 or COM 2) the signals arrive.
20-63
1.3.2 Terminating of the EDS program

• The initial menu (see figure) appears again after terminating the selected subprogram (e.g. Agrotronic-hD+ASM)
• The EDS program is quit by means of selecting Option 8.
• The display C:\EDS:>_ shows that the operating system is still located in the subdirectory EDS which is quit by entering
cd.., causing DOS to return to the root directory.
• If EDS was launched in DOS mode under Windows 95 (via the MS-DOS input prompt), entering EXIT causes Windows
to close the DOS window and return to the Windows desktop.
20-64
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS
2. TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS
DEST is a program for diagnosis and end-of-line programming of the transmission control units DEST 38 and DEST 45. It
consists of a main menu in which the corresponding control unit is selected and the actual diagnosis programs.
The user interface of this program is realized according to the SAA standard. This means for the user:
• a uniform menu prompting system
• an online help available at any time
• mouse-support
• operation via hotkeys (designated by highlighted characters)
2.1 THE MAIN MENU

On start-up of DEST (compare part 1.1.3: ” Starting and terminating of the EDS program”) the last selected diagnosis con-
trol is started automatically. The corresponding diagnosis program must be quit in order to return to the main menu (DEST
38 – menu item File > End; DEST 39/45 – menu item File > main menu). From the DEST 38 diagnosis it is always possible
to return to the main menu.
2.1.1 SCREEN AND MENU STRUCTURE
Fig. 2 - Menu structure
The screen setup with the main menu is identical for the transmission diagnosis programs; in the diagnosis programs DEST
38, 39/45 the menu line is merely supplemented by the menu item Diagnosis. Left at the top in the menu line the current pro-
gram level is indicated, e.g. MAIN MENU. The rotating dash left beside it signalizes to the user that the program is working
correctly on the lowest level. If this dash stands still an error has occured and the program must be restarted.
The user activates the menu by means of pressing the ALT key or the F10 key and may select a submenu by means of the
cursor keys. The same goal is accomplished by means of pressing the ALT key and one of the hotkeys assigned to every
menu item simultaneously.
This hotkey is a highlighted character for every menu item (e.g. the ”F” for the menu item File, invoked with the combination
ALT + F).
The menu may be quit by means of the ESC key (resp. the ALT key).
2.1.2 FILE
• File >End
Terminates the program; altered settings (language, colour palette and interface in use) are stored. If the program is ter-
minated directly after quitting DEST 38 the start menu of DEST 38 is invoked automatically on the next start-up; oth-
erwise the main menu reappears.
20-65
2.1.3 CONTROL
Fig. 3 - Control
• Control > DEST38
Launches the diagnosis program DEST 38 after a confirmation.
CAUTION!
Colour, language and interface settings cannot be taken over!

Launches the diagnosis program DEST 39 after a confirmation.
CAUTION!
This program cannot be started if there is no file dest39.ini existing!

Launches the diagnosis program DEST 45 after a confirmation and takes over the current settings.
2.1.4 OPTIONS
• Options > Colour palette
Selection of various colour palettes for the screen display.
Fig. 4 - Menu Colour
20-66
• Options > Language (Lingua)

Changes the communication language between user and program.
Fig. 5 - Menu Change language
• Selection of the serial interface COM1 for the communication between control device and PC.
• Options >Interface COM 2)

Selection of the serial interface COM2 for the communication between control device and PC.
• Options > Simulated communication

This menu item is disabled due to safety reasons; the selection Simulation is not stored.
2.2 ONLINE HELP

The diagnosis program DEST offers the user help at any time about the current environment (context help) as well as help
about the current key assignment. All help texts are stored as text files to be displayed at any time during the running pro-
gram. Future supplements or changes of these texts can be carried out without problems by means of a text editor.
The user of the diagnosis program DEST has the opportunity to invoke an online help within the program context at any
time:
• by means of pressing the F1 key
• by means of pressing ALT + H
• by means of clicking on the << HELP >> button with the mouse
The online help basically describes the operation of the currently active window. Further texts (e.g. a detailed description
of specific control device data) can also be included.
The possible key combinations in the context are shown by means of pressing the F9 key.
20-67
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHIFT DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 38
3. POWER-SHIFT DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 38
3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 38

As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor and computer needs to be established so as to check the trans-
mission control by means of DEST 38 resp. to be able to carry out the end-of-line programming. The interface cable and the
adapter cable are serving for this purpose.
Fig. 6 - I nterface cable - and adapter cable

1 - Connect plug (2) of the interface cable with the designation ”9141” to the computer (COM interface)
2 - Connect plug (3) of the interface cable for the 12 V supply to the cigar lighter
3 - Connect the 4-pole plug of the interface cable to the plug (11) – designation ”powershift Agrotron 4.70-6.45” – of the
adapter cable
4 - Insert the central plug of the adapter cable into the central diagnosis interface in the fuse box
5 - Switch ON ignition
6 - Start the computer and call the EDS program (compare item A 1.3 – Launching and terminating of the EDS program)
7 - Call option 1 in the initial menu
8 - Make sure that the right diagnosis program (DEST 38) is invoked. On the right side in the bottom frame of the screen
DEST 38 needs to be displayed, e.g. DEST 38 – V 2.2 – 16.12.97.
If necessary change to the main menu and launch DEST 38 via the menu item Control > DEST 38.
CAUTION!
Before starting the diagnosis verify that the proper interface (COM 1 or COM 2) is selected!
NOTE. Agrotron tractors with the vehicle identification numbers up to 80xx 1999 (i.e. green cabin) usually are not
equipped with a central diagnosis interface. To be able to check the transmission control however, with these trac-
tors it is necessary to connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the interface cable with the 3-pole diagnosis terminal of the
transmission using the intermediate cable (6).
The diagnosis terminal is located in the cabin at the rear on the right side under the floor mat, resp. in the right pan-
elling (close to the E-box).
20-68
3.2 DEST 38 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
3.2.1 FILE
• File > End
The menu item ”End” saves the settings selected under the menu item ”options” (colour palette, language and selected
interface) and terminates the diagnosis program.
Upon the next start-up of the diagnosis program the settings are automatically read and set.
3.2.2 DIAGNOSIS
Fig. 7 - Menu Diagnosis
• Diagnosis > Read error memory

The menu item Read error memory opens a window divided into two parts (see figure). The double frame and the high-
lighted lines Read error memory resp. Error description show which part of the window is currently active.
In the left part of the window in the first line the current operating-hours of the transmission-E-box are displayed. As the
operating-hours counter of the E-box is always running when the ignition is switched on, the hour data of Infocenter and
transmission-E-box do not match!
The second line indicates the number of errors stored in the error memory of the transmission box.
The lower window section shows the stored errors of the transmission box. Under the column Error no. the corre-
sponding error number resp. the error code is displayed.
The column Number indicates how many times this error has occured and in the column Operating-hours the number
of operating-hours during the first occurrence of the corresponding error are indicated.
20-69
Fig. 8 - Read error memory
The user can select an error with the cursor keys and cause a detailed error description to be displayed on the right side of
the screen by means of clicking on OK or pressing ENTER. The error text can be scrolled by means of the cursor keys if it
exceeds the size of the right window. Pressing of ESC or C reactivates the left screen window.
If the left window is active, all errors can be saved in a text file with their detailed description by means of pressing F2. In ad-
dition to the error descriptions the current operating-hours counter, the identification data, the current date as well as the
vehicle identification number and the number of the electronic box are saved. However, vehicle identification number and
number of the electronic box can only be saved if the corresponding entry in the EEPROM is valid.
• Diagnosis > Delete error memory

”Delete error memory” opens a window which prompts the user to confirm the deletion of the error memory. If the user
confirms with ENTER the error memory will be erased. Pressing ESC (or C) aborts the procedure without erasing the er-
ror memory.
Fig. 9 - Delete error memory
20-70
• Diagnosis > HEX data display

This menu item is not relevant for diagnosis, as only internal data in hexadecimal notation is displayed here.
On selection of the menu item HEX data display the window shown below appears, in which the user can enter up to four
hexadecimal addresses.
Fig. 10 - HEX data display
In addition to the address data the user has to enter the number of bytes (maximum 13) he wants to read at this start ad-
dress. On confirmation with OK their contents are dumped on the screen.
With << + >> / << - >> the start addresses are incremented resp. decremented by one.
With << ++ >> / << — >> the start addresses are increased resp. decreased by 13 (decimal).
With << CONT >> the contents are read continually. Selection of this button causes the label to change to ”<< STAT >>”.
Reselection toggles again. Pressing the key ESC or ALT + C quits this menu item.
20-71
• Diagnosis > Plaintext data display
CAUTION!
After quitting the menu item ”End-of-line programming” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off and
on again in order to update all data in the window ”Plaintext data display”!
Plaintext data display opens a window in which the data is displayed in their corresponding physical units. The structure
and contents of the window are shown below.
Fig. 11 - Plaintext data display
The window (see figure) is divided into three areas. In the left area the data of various sensors are indicated in their cor-
responding physical unit among other things. The upper area on the right indicates the status of the digital inputs, the lower
area on the right shows the status of the digital outputs.
In addition, as for the digital outputs, the errors of the corresponding outputs recognized by the control unit are also dis-
played. Thereby the letter ”K” under the output signifies a short circuit to the supply voltage. The letter ”U” stands for a line
interruption resp. a short circuit to ground.
In the bottom line of the window several select fields, so-called buttons, are shown which can be selected by pressing the
corresponding highlighted letter.
By pressing the button <<CONT>> (continuous display) located at the bottom window border, resp. by pressing the letter
”T” the static display toggles to continuous display; i.e. all areas are refreshed continually.
Hereby the button label changes to <<STAT>>. The current status can be seen at the upper left border of each area. Beside
it a turning dash indicates the refresh rate. If once an area has been updated the dash turns clockwise into the next position.
Reselecting this button or pressing the letter ”T” again toggles to singular reading of the areas again (static display), except
for the error display of the digital outputs which are constantly refreshed.
Charts with the descriptions about the pin assignment and the applied abbreviations of the digital inputs and outputs can
be called by means of pressing the keys F3 and F4.
The sensor errors are displayed by means of selecting the button << ERRORS >> (see figure).
Regardless of the setting the sensor errors are also constantly updated. The display of the sensor errors covers the display
of the digital inputs/outputs. If the display of the sensor errors is selected the button label << ERRORS >> changes into <<
DIG I/O >>. Activating this button causes the digital inputs/outputs to show up again.
As to the fact that in the window ”Plaintext data display” even in ”STAT” mode data are read and refreshed continuously,
the program may possibly show slightly delayed reactions after pressing a key.
20-72
Fig. 12 - Sensor errors

All digital outputs can be set individually by means of activating the button << SETDIG >> which causes the window shown
on the next page to appear. This window can also be invoked via the menu item ”Diagnosis > set output ports”. If ”Activate
outputs” is selected via the button << SETDIG >> the window ”Plain text data display” will be kept open. However the data
will not be refreshed any more, regardless of the setting.
• Diagnosis > Set output ports
CAUTION!
• Due to safety reasons this menu item can only be selected when the engine has stopped!
• After terminating the menu item ”End-of-line programming” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched
off and on again before the menu item ”Set output ports” can be selected. Otherwise the call is aborted by
prompting the error message ”Set output ports not possible!”.
Fig. 13 - Set output ports

Via the menu item ”Set output ports” it is possible to set or reset the individual digital outputs.After calling the menu item
”Set output ports” a window appears in which the data of the individual outputs of the transmission-E-box is displayed. The
data display is divided into nine columns and six lines, whereby every column is assigned one digital output of the E-box.
20-73
Line 1: In this line the internal addresses of the digital outputs are indicated.
Line 2: This line indicates the current status of the output. Hereby the indication ”1” signifies that the output is set and there-
fore a signal (voltage) is existing at the corresponding pin of the E-box. The indication ”0” signifies that the output is not set
and therefore no signal is existing.
Highlighted fields in different colours show to the user those outputs which are connected to the E-box and therefore are
ready to be activated.
Line 3: In this line the activated components of the corresponding output are indicated.
Line 4: In this line the user can select one of the connected outputs by means of the cursor keys, i.e. the desired field is high-
lighted in a different colour. This output status can be toggled (activated resp. deactivated) by pressing the ENTER key. The
output will be set in the E-box and subsequently be read in again by the DEST program. After the reading process lines 2
and 4 are refreshed. Due to safety reasons the changes which have been carried out will be reset to the normal state after
the menu item ”Set output ports” has been quit.
Lines 5 and 6: In these lines the errors of the digital outputs are shown. Thereby the letter ”K” signifies a short circuit to the
supply voltage and the letter ”U” stands for a line interruption resp. a short circuit to ground.
A Chart with the description of the applied abbreviations can be called by means of selecting the <<HELP>> button.
• Diagnosis > EEPROM read/write
This menu item allows the user to read and edit the customer area contents of the EEPROM. On selection a
window appears in which the contents are shown (see figure). The user can alter individual characters with the
help of the cursor keys and confirm these changes with <<OK>> (key combination ALT + O or ENTER). By this
means the altered data are stored in the EEPROM.
This menu item can be quit by means of pressing the ESC key or ALT + C.
Fig. 14 - EEPROM read/write
The first nine characters of the customer area are highlighted in a different colour. The menu item ”End-of-line program-
ming” fills in the vehicle identification number into this area.
In case of storing the contents of the error memory into a file DEST 38 checks whether the first four characters of the EEP-
ROM customer area correspond to a valid vehicle identification number. If this is the case the vehicle identification number
and the corresponding number of the electronic box will also be stored into the file. Otherwise both values cannot be
stored. Due to the aforementioned reasons this area should not be edited by the user himself.
Therefore, on opening the window the cursor is located at the position on the right beside it.
20-74
3.2.3 MENU CONTROL
Fig. 15 - Control
• Control > Infos

The menu item ”Infos” indicates the operating-hours of the transmission box in a window (see below) as well as its spe-
cific identification data. These data cannot be altered.
Fig. 16 - Control >Infos
• Control > End of line programming
CAUTION!
After terminating the menu item ”Set output ports” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off and on
again before the menu item ”End of line programming” can be selected. Otherwise the call is aborted by
prompting the error message ”Select transmission version not possible!”.
The menu item ”End of line programming” opens a divided window for the purpose of configuration of the transmission
box and for adjustment of the clutch. In the upper window area the configuration data is displayed. In the lower area the
user can find instructions for the end-of-line programming.
20-75
Fig. 17 - End of line programming
First the program reads the 8 digit vehicle identification number from the EEPROM. If the first four digits correspond to a
valid vehicle identification number the configuration data are read directly from the box. If the configuration data of the box
are consistent to the corresponding data of the vehicle identification prenumber all data (transmission version, type of
transmission, vehicle configuration, electronic box and vehicle identification number) will be displayed. If they are not con-
sistent only the read out data from the control unit will be displayed. In addition, a warning will appear with instructions to
reconfigure the box. The same applies if the vehicle identification number read from the EEPROM is invalid.
The vehicle configuration can be changed by means of selecting the button <<CONFIG>> or the letter ”F”. At first the ve-
hicle identification prenumber (the first four digits of the vehicle identification number) is highlighted in a different colour.
The vehicle identification number defined for the corresponding type of vehicle can be selected from a table stored in the
program by means of the cursor keys. The configuration data belonging to the respective type of tractor are altered si-
multaneously.
Fig. 18 - End of line programming/Change configuration (Modifica della configurazione)
Before these data are stored by pressing the ENTER key it is obligatory to compare the pre-set speed version (30 / 40 km/
h or 50 km/h) with the actual speed version of the tractor. If these do not match the proper speed version has to be set by
means of pressing the cursor keys again.
After pressing the ENTER key the last four digits of the vehicle identification number will be highlighted in a different colour.
Here the user has to fill in the serial number of the tractor which is stored in the EEPROM by pressing the ENTER key.
20-76
Subsequently the transmission box will be configured with the corresponding data by activating <<OK>> or pressing EN-
TER. In addition, the entire vehicle identification number will be written into the first nine bytes of the EEPROM customer ar-
ea.
If the configuration is completed the clutch can be adjusted by means of <<OK>> or ENTER (see figure). If the instructions
are executed the clutch adjustment can also be terminated with <<OK>> or ENTER causing a message to appear whether
the clutch adjustment was carried out succesfully or not.
Fig. 19 - End of line programming/Clutch adjustment (Regolazione della frizione)
Leaving end-of-line programming:

The end-of-line mode can be quit by shortly switching the ignition off and on again. Simultaneously, the ”01 display” and
the wrench symbol in the Powershift display disappear.
3.2.4 OPTIONS
The option menu offers the user the possibility to alter the program environment. These settings are saved when the pro-
gram is terminated.
Fig. 20 - Options
20-77
• Options > Select colours

In this menu item settings for the appropriate screen colours can be selected. In the select menu all possible palettes
are shown and can be selected by means of the cursor keys. The colours of the selected palette are shown in a preview.
If the selected colour palette is determined to be kept, confirm by pressing the ENTER key.
Fig. 21 - Select colours (Modifica colori)

• Options > Language
In the submenu ”Options – Language” another language can be selected. After confirming with ENTER (resp. ALT + O)
all screen texts are displayed in the selected language.
Fig. 22- Language

• Options > Interface COM 1
By selecting one of the two menu items the communication with the box is carried out via the corresponding interface.
The selected interface is marked..
CAUTION!
Only an interface actually available on the computer can be selected!

Selecting this menu item causes allows most of the program functions to be called without a connection to a trans-
mission control unit. For this purpose the program EDS simulates the communication between computer and trans-
mission box. However not all the functions are currently executable with simulated control.
20-78
3.3 Error codes POWERSHIFT /DEST 38
3.3.1 GENERAL
In case of an error only the error code with the highest error number will be displayed on the screen (depends on the pri-
ority). Simultaneously the error symbol ”wrench” appears on the display. On errors which lead to neutral position on the
next reversing (clutch disengaged) an acoustic alarm signal is being created (3 beeps). Every neutral gear shift results in a
permanent alarm signal (beep). Independently of that the detected errors are saved in the EEProm.
Error code: 1. Digit →type of error (rising priority) 2. Digit →error location
1n ... digital input failure
2n ... analog input failure
3n ... signal input failure
8n ... interruption/short circuit to ground at digital output
9n ... short circuit to plus at digital output
An ... other system errors
En ... error results in standby driving program
Fn ... no driving possible, permanent neutral
Display of special program mode on the screen

01 + wrench: End-of-line programming
02 + wrench: Activate outputs; in case of diag. errors the corresponding error code is displayed
Abbreviations
• LU Line interruption
• KM Short circuit to ground
• K+ Short circuit to vehicle electrical system plus (+UB) general
• K15 Short circuit to terminal 15 (switched plus)
• 5VREF 5V reference voltage for clutch sensor and temperature sensor
• LS Powershift ...
• Nmot Speed at powershift gear input, engine speed
• Nlsa Speed at powershift gear output
• Nab Speed at output, ground speed
• AMUX Analog multiplexer (component in the E-box)
• BE End-of-line
Definitions for key words in the error code list

• Main clutch neutral position: Clutch pedal is in neutral position; not actuated
• Main clutch actuated: Clutch pedal is in ”inch area”, not neutral, not disengaged
• Main clutch disengaged: Clutch pedal is entirely kicked; clutch disengaged
• Permanent neutral
- Relay is switched off
- Outputs (valves) are switched off
- Can only be left by switching the ignition off and on again
Multiple error
Multiple errors can occur as sequence error due to overdrive of one of the input signals speed sensor Nlsa, temperature
sensor, clutch sensor (AMUX overdrive).
Check: Nlsa, temperature sensor, clutch sensor
1 - In the following table the most probable error cause resp. the most probable error location are respectively men-
tioned in first place.
2 - The displayed error code is an indication for the faulty component. Type of error or error location can also possibly be
caused by other components (e.g. in case of multiple errors, defective power supply).
3 - Error code table is valid for T7100 and T7200 / T7300 vehicles.
20-79
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
3.4 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION
Code Type of Possible error cause Possible remedy System reaction Remarks
error/location
oil pressure switch check switch warning lamp is lighting Only diagnosed if
system pressure defective (does not open) Nmot > 2,55 sec
10 18 bar KM check cabling over 1000 rpm;
system pressure defective check system pressure pressure switch opens on
LU, KM, K+ check cabling Default: cold

temperature sensor defective check temperature clutch hold time, filling time in case of AMUX
20 temperature sensor sensor overdrive:
multiple error Check sensor Nlsa cabling only field characteristic permanent neutral
check clutch sensor on K+: permanent neutral,
permanent beep
LU, KM, K+ check cabling field characteristic reserved, as no engine
engine load signal faulty check engine load signal substitution torque load signal is existing
engine load signal del motore (300 Hz, 5-95% pul- Observe configuration
30
se width) on end-of-line programming!
wrong configuration on
end-of-line programming
reserved for further digital ou-
80 – – – tput, LU, KM
LU, KM check cabling LU, KM is diagnosed
81 transfer valve 1 LU, KM powershift blocked if valve is switched off
valve faulty check valve
LU, KM check cabling LU, KM is diagnosed
82 transfer valve 2 LU, KM powershift blocked if valve is switched off
only forr T7200
characteristic line LU, KM check cabling
81 powershift blocked LU, KM is diagnosed
valve LU, KM valve faulty check valve
if valve is switched off
LU, KM can only be diagnosed
when system is switched on
warning lam (oil LU, KM check cabling
82 – LU, KM diagnosis depends on
pressure, overspeed) lamp defective check lamp vehicle configuration customer:
no diag.
(LU, KM) reserved for further di-
90 (LU, KM) – – – gital output, K+
POWER-SHIFT DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 38
20-81
Type of
Code Possible error cause Possible remedy System reaction Remarks
error/location
20-82
transfer valve K+ check cabling K+ is diagnosed if solenoid val-
91 1K+ powershift blocked ve is switched on
transfer valve 2 K+ check cabling K+ is diagnosed if solenoid val-
92 powershift blocked
(K+) valve faulty check valve ve is switched on
K+ check cabling only for T7200

95 characteristic powershift blocked K+ is diagnosed if solenoid val-
line valve (K+) valve faulty check valve ve is switched on
warning lamp K+ check cabling

K+ can only be diagnosed when
96 (oil pressure, –
system is switched on
overspeed) (K+) lamp defective check lamp
powershift blocked, 3 beeps diagnosis only active if engine
overvoltage on reversing (clutch is running (>2,5 sec)
A0 Terminal 15 – –
disengaged) permanent
neutral, permanent beep Ub > 16 V
powershift blocked, 3 beeps
undervoltage diagnosis only active if engine is
A1 – – on reversing (clutch running (>2,5 sec)
Terminal 15 disengaged) permanent Ub > 16 V
neutral, permanent beep
LU, KM check cabling
operating-hours counter is not active monitoring:
A2 terminal 30 faulty counting any more if term 15 > term 30 + 2V
fuse defective check fuse
only for T7200
LU, KM, K+ at retaining check cabling powershift blocked LU, KM is diagnosed only when
retaining valves valve 1 or
A3 (LU, KM, K+)
system is switched off
retaining valve 2 check valve only field characteristic K+ is diagnosed only when
system is switched on
EEPROM of new appliance ignition off/on alternative value (0) as correc- error code is saved, but disap-
was not erased tion offset pears at display after ignition
data incorrectly entered re-enter/check the correction off/on
correction data data by means of Mobidig
A4 for filling times Input of correction values ac-
defectivei ignition off and terminal 30 Mobidig 200 (only special ZF cording to specification by ZF
defective during EEPROM customer service) customer service.
writing process Special plug-in for
EEPROM defective Mobidig 200 required!.
error/location
LU, KM, K+ ignition off/on OFF/ON 3 beeps
upon reversing demand and
speed sensor defective check cabling clutch disengaged: neutral inadmissible speed step
speed Nlsa check speed sensor shift, permanent beep change from > sensor failure
E2 defective multiple error aggravated reversing threshold to < minimum speed
(grad. monitoring) check cabling conditions in case of AMUX overdrive:
temperature sensor, powershift blocked permanent neutral
clutch sensor
upon KS+: permanent neutral,
permanent beep
LU, KM, K+ check cabling 3 beeps
speed sensor defective check speed sensor upon reversing demand active monitoring only upon
and clutch disengaged: standstill
neutral shift, permanent beep observe limit values:
speed Nlsa defective
E3 (active monitoring) aggravated reversing Umin = 0,5V
conditions Umax = 4,5V
multiple error check cabling temperature powershift blocked in case of AMUX overdrive:
sensor, clutch sensor permanent neutral
upon KS+: permanent neutral,
permanent beep
3 beeps
LU, KM, K+ ignition off/on upon reversing demand and inadmissible speed step
speed Nab defective speed sensor defective check cabling clutch disengaged:
E4 change from > sensor failure
(grad. monitoring) full braking on slippery check speed sensor neutral shift, permanent beep thresholdto < minimum speed
subsoil aggravated reversing
conditions
3 beeps
upon reversing demand active monitoring only upon
speed Nab defective LU, KM, K+ check cabling and clutch disengaged: standstill
E5 (active monitoring) speed sensor defective check speed senso neutral shift, permanent beep Umin = 0,5V
aggravated reversing Umax = 4,5V
conditions
20-83
Type of
error/location
20-84
inadmissible speed step chan-
3 beeps
ge from > sensor failure thre-
upon reversing demand and shold to < minimum speed
LU, KM, K+ ignition OFF/ON clutch disengaged: neutral
speed Nmot defective shift, permanent beep Caution: Speed sensor
E6 speed sensor defective check cabling
(grad. monitoring) Nmot has no active aggravated
fast engine stall check speed sensor monitoring (voltage
reversing conditions
monitoring), i.e. upon
ignition ”on” this failure
cannot be detected:
powershift blocked
Vehicle breaks down!
3 beeps
K+ check cabling upon reversing demand and K+ is diagnosed only when sy-
clutch disengaged: neutral stem is switched on
E7 reversing lamp (K+) lamp defective check lamp shift, Deutz:
permanent beep aggravated reversing condi- No reversing lamp
tions
3 beeps LU, KM is diagnosed only when
upon reversing demand and system is switched on
check cabling clutch disengaged: neutral activation is depending on vehi-
reversing lamp LU, KM
E8 check lamp shift, permanent beep cle configuration
(LU, KM) lamp defective
conditions aggravated reversing diagnosis LU, KM is
depending on vehicle configuration Deutz:
no diagnosis, no reversing lamp
LU, KM, K+ check cabling 3 beeps
synchro neutral neutral switch defective check neutral switch and clutch upon reversing demand:
E9 switch supply voltage defective disengaged: check supply vol- neutral shift, permanent beep switch suited for diagnosis
tage aggravated reversing condi-
tions
error/location
sensor incorrectly adjusted check sensor mounting 3 beeps
LU, KM, K+ check cabling upon reversing demand neutral limit values:
sensor defective check sensor shift, permanent beep Umin = 0,4V
EA clutch sensor Umax = 4,6V
multiple error check cabling sensor Nlsa, permanent neutral aggravated
temperature sensor reversing conditions in case of AMUX overdrive:
powershift blocked
end-of-line programming ”clu- end-of-line programming:
tch sensory” was not carried clutch sensory error will not be reset after
out after changes in the clutch detection
sensory tolerance range ± 20% of pro-
switch point clutch switch out of check mechanical tolerances of 3 beeps grammed switch point
tolerance range clutch sensory
upon reversing demand neutral Clutch switch is closed upon
plausibility: clutch clutch switch disadjusted check/change admissible tole- shift, permanent beep clutch in neutral position.
EB sensor/clutch switch rance range In neutral position LU is
aggravated reversing detected
clutch sensor disadjusted check cabling conditions
clutch sensor signal:
LU, KM, K+ at clutch senso check clutch sensor mounting powershift blocked neutral: LOW
LU, KM, K+ at clutch switch check clutch switch mounting disengaged: High
clutch switch defective in case of AMUX overdrive:
clutch sensor defective check cabling sensor Nlsa, permanent neutral
temperature sensor
end-of-line programming with carry out end-of-line program- 3 beeps error will not be reset after
disadjusted clutch sensory ming detection
plausibility: error in the EEPROM check clutch sensor mounting upon reversing demand neutral plausibility monitoring of
end-of-line data for shift, permanent beep end-of-line programming
EC clutch thresholds,
EEPROM defective check clutch switch mounting aggravated reversing thresholds:
clutch switch point - clutch neutral position
conditions
- clutch disengaged
- clutch switch point
LU, KM, K+ check cabling
communication ”EE” if communication
invalid signal check communication
EE failure to display Deutz beep interval failure to display
(scope) > 2,5 sec
fuse E-box defective check E-box fuse
20-85
Type of
error/location
20-86
wrong control unit replace control unit pin code is only
(T71/T72)
permanent neutral upon
F0 pin code (T71/T72) LU, KM, K+ initialisation (ignition on) upon initialisation
evaluated can only be quit by means
check cabling
of ignition off/on
error in the EEPROM ignition off/on can only be quit by means of
ignition off/on
EEPROM data T7100 vehicle equipped with check E-box T7100/T7200 vehicle version or EEPROM
F1 permanent neutral,
inconsistent T7200 E-box or vice versa configuration within a
EEPROM defective carry out end-of-line BE block inconsistent,
programming faulty
LU, KM check cabling permanent neutral, LU, KM is diagnosed when

F2 V valve (LU, KM)) valve is shut off
valve defective check valve permanent beep
K+ check cabling permanent neutral, K+ is diagnosed when
F3 V valve (K+) permanent beep solenoid valve is switched on
valve defective check valve
LU, KM check cabling permanent neutral, LU, KM is diagnosed when
F4 R valve (LU, KM)
valve defective check valve permanent beep valve is shut off
K+ check cabling permanent neutral, K+ is diagnosed when solenoid
F5 R valve (K+)
valve defective check valve permanent beep valve is switched on
LU, KM, K+ check cabling 3 beeps upon invalid signal > 0,5 sec
F6 F/R preset switch when clutch disengaged:
F/R preset switch defective check F/R preset switch when clutch is defective:
permanent neutral, permanent neutral
permanent beepe
Umax = 6V
Iin case of AMUX overdrive:
K+ at 5VREF supply check cabling
5V supply permanent neutral
multiple error check cabling Nlsa, permanent neutral,
FA (clutch sensor, error will not be reset after
temperature sensor, permanent beep
Temperature sensor) detection
clutch sensor
can only be quit by means of
ignition off/on
error/location
ESGT7 electronic ”new”
end-of-line data terminal 30 defective during carry out end-of-line program- permanent neutral, both BE blocks are defective,
FB
defective EEProm writing process ming permanent beep no restoration possible
EEProm defective
counter supply (K+) is only de-
tected upon power on! error will
not be reset after detection
indication in error memory
about output causing K+
KM at the MV supply ”relay” is not activated upon
supply VPS outputs K+ at an output (AD1...AD9) permanent neutral shift power on

FC (switched plus) upon power on check cabling (MV supply) upon KM: Caution:
defective K+ at the MV supply upon permanent beep, 3 beeps If counter supply occurs at the
MV supply during operation
power on
ignition ”off” cannot be de-
tected any more
permanent beep, 3 beeps in
case of KM depending on the
short circuit current (relay cut
off)
OTHER INFORMATIONS
Error consequence/System reaction Possible error cause Possible remedy
ZF electronic system is not running up commu- check supply paths (battery voltage < 9V), LU, KM
no display activation resp. display ”EE” nication line defective check fuses (term15, term30)
power supply (plus, ground) defective check communication lines
upon start-up powershift gear switches back mmediately to
neutral (jerk can be observed), display: ”N”, but no error code cabling speed sensor Nmot LU, KM, K+ check cabling speed sensor Nmot
20-87
3.5 SENSORS AND SOLENOID VALVES AT THE TRANSMISSION T-7100
20-88
solenoid valves for:
power take off (outside)
differential lock (inside)
switches for street/field
display proportional valve
(only with power shuttle)
locking magnet
for street/field 18 bar system
shifting pressure switch
ram switches:
neutral switch (outside)
starting block switch
(inside/only with powershift)
speed output
power take off
speed output
electro-hydraulic powerhift gear output
gear shift n Lsa
speed output
output/ground speed solenoid valve temperature speed output
n Ab all-wheel drive transmission powershift gear input/
oil engine speed
n Mot; n Lsw
speed output
driving clutch
(gear shift input)
n HK
(only with power shuttle
3.6 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100
Cannon bayonet
Hydraulic pressure connector
retaining valve Pressure valve
18 bar
Pressure-reducing
valve 10 bar Pressure
control valve
Release valve
Pilot valve
Two-way valve
forwad/neutral/backward
Pilot valve
Solenoid valves Y1 – Y4:

Y1 = MVR; solenoid valve backward
Y2 = GV1; transfer valve 1
Y3 = MVV; solenoid valve forward
20-89
20-90
speet output ram switches:
powerhift gear input/engine neutral switch (outside)
speed n Mot; N Lse starting block switch electro-hydraulic
(inside/only with powershift) gear shift
electrical connection
proportional valve forward/backward
(only with power shuttle) control block
18 bar system pressure

switch
differential lock
(inside)
speed output
power take off
speed output driving temperatur

clutch (gear shift input)
n HK (only with power shuttle) solenoid valve transmission electrial connection
all-wheel oil
speed output drive speed output
output/ground speed powershift gear
output n Lsa
n AB
3.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300
Gear shift valve

A/B; F/G Safety valve raining valve C/D
Magnet Y6 Magnet Y7
Raining valve A/B; F/G Forward; MVV Backward
Bleed valve
Safety valve
Magnet Y3 Reversing piston

Clutch C/D
Retaining valve 2; HV2
Release valve Magnet Y4

Clutch A/B; F/G
Pressure
control valve Magnet Y1
Clutch A/B; F/G
Gear valve 1; GV1
Two-step valve Magnet Y5

Field/street characteristik MVK
Two-step valve
field or street Magnet Y2
characteristic Clutch C/D Release valve for
Gear valve 2; GV2 neutral position
Shift pressure
valve 18 bar
Gear valve C/D Pilot pressure
valve 10 bar
4-GEAR POWERSHIFT CONTROL UNIT FORWARD-BACKWARD CONTROL BLOCK

20-91
20-92
speed output
powershift gear output
n Lsa
solenoid valve temperature shift and lubricatin electrical connection
all-wheel drive transmission oil pump F-B block
speed output
powershift gear input/engine /
speed
speed output
output/ground
speed n Ab
type plate
electro-hydraulic
control unit
suction filter control switch electrical connection

oil pressure
3.10 ERROR ANALYSIS

Interchanging of electrical connectors at the transmission T-7100 L and T-7200 L
Various sensors/solenoid valves/switches at the transmission are located very close to each other and are equipped with
the same type of connector. At these locations the electrical mating connectors at the cable harness cannot be layed in a
way which ensures that accidental interchanging may be absolutely excluded.
The following consideration shows the consequences if electrical connectors are interchanged:
3.10.1 SOLENOID VALVE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L AND T-7200 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 75 mm with T-7100 and 55 mm with T-7200.
VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”OFF”
• All-wheel ”OFF” ‡ 12V voltage at temperature sensor
• Error code on display
• Electronic system shifts gear to permanent neutral
• Vehicle cannot be moved any more!
VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”ON”

• All-wheel ”ON” ‡ 0V voltage at temperature sensor
• Error code on display; temperature sensor defective
• Hard gear shifts (5V supply in electronic system is overloaded, but short circuit proof)
Temperature sensor plug on VA – SV

• Hard gear shifts
3.10.2 STARTING BLOCK SWITCH AND NEUTRAL SWITCH T-7100 L AND T-7200 L
• Starting block switch normally closed contact ”green”
• Neutral switch normally opened contact ”red”
Both switches are equipped with 2-pole AMP superseal connectors of different colour (green/red)
Neutral plug on starting switch

Neutral switch defective, standby driving is possible
Starting block on neutral switch

Neutral switch not closed = no synchro gear is shifted --> 510 W
• Starting relay is not picking up
Engine start-up not possible
Neutral switch closed = synchro gear is shifted --> 121 W

• Starting relay is picking up
• Engine start-up with gear engaged
LS transmission on ”N”
Clutch actuation required for driving
Error code on display
Neutral switch defective, standby driving possible (also with non connected plug)
20-93
3.10.3 SV DIFFERENTIAL LOCK AND SV POWER TAKE OFF CLUTCH T-7100 L AND T-7200 L
Both valves are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 40 mm
Plug differential lock on SV power take off valve

• Interchanged functions upon switch actuation in cabin
• Power take off stub is running upon diff. ”ON”
Upon ZW clutch ”ON” and differential lock ”OFF” the differential lock is engaged. Critical driving state with regard to safety,
e.g. when driving in a curve, etc.
3.10.4 SPEED SENSORS INPUT/OUTPUT WITH T-7100 L

AMP superseal 3-pole connectors at both sensors, distance approx. 80 mm
Plug output on input sensor and vice versa

(both plugs are connected!)
Upon powershift step L and H

• Error message on display
• LS transmission in neutral
Upon powershift step M

• Error is not detected
No consequences
Only one plug is connected

OUTPUT not connected
Standby driving possible
INPUT not connected

• Plausibility
3.10.5 LOCKING MAGNET FIELD/STREET AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 115 mm
Locking magnet plug on temperature sensor

• Error see item 1.4.1
20-94
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
4. POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
4.1 PREPARATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSIS WITH DEST 45

As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor and computer needs to be established so as to check the trans-
mission control by means of DEST 45 resp. to be able to carry out the end-of-line programming.
Fig. 23 - Interface cable and adapter cable
The interface cable and the adapter cable are serving for this purpose (see figure).
3 - Connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (11) – designation ”powershift Agrotron 4.70-6.45” – of
the adapter cable
4 - Insert the central plug (8) of the adapter cable into the central diagnosis interface in the fuse box
5 - Switch ON ignition
7 - Call Option 1 in the initial menu
8 - Make sure that the right diagnosis program (DEST 345) is invoked. On the right side in the upper frame of the screen
DEST 45 needs to be displayed, and below e.g. DEST 45 – V 2.2 – 16.12.97. If necessary change to the main menu and
launch DEST 45 via the menu item Control > DEST 45.
CAUTION!
Before starting the diagnosis verify that the proper interface (COM 1 or COM 2) is selected in the menu item Op-
tions!
20-95
4.2 DEST 45 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
4.2.1 FILE >MAIN MENU
Fig. 24 - File >Main menu
• File > Main menu

Selecting this menu item quits the active control and calls the main menu in which the user can select the next control
to be diagnosed or quit the program. All current settings are saved and upon the next start-up the main menu reap-
pears.
• File > End
The menu item ”End” saves the settings selected under the menu item ”options” (colour palette, language and selected
interface) and terminates the diagnosis program.
Upon the next start-up of the diagnosis program the settings are automatically taken over and the diagnosis program
DEST 45 is called.
20-96
4.2.2 MENU DIAGNOSIS

• Diagnosis > Read error memory
The menu item ”Read error memory ” opens a window divided into two parts in which the contents of the error memory
are displayed in chronological order.
Fig. 25 - Read error memory

The double frame and the highlighted lines ”Read error memory” resp. ”Error description” show which part of the win-
dow is currently active.
In the left part of the window the current operating-hours of the transmission-E-box (not to be compared with the op-
erating hours of the infocenter!) and the number of the various errors detected by the transmission-E-box are displayed.
Below the errors stored in the E-box are indicated. In the column ”Errors” the respective error codes are listed. The col-
umn ”active” indicates the corresponding error status. ”Y” stands for yes; i.e. the error is currently active – resp. ”N” for
no; i.e. the error is currently not active. The third column ”Number” indicates how many times the respective error has
occured. The information under ”Operating-hours” indicates when the respective error has occured.
The user can select an error with the cursor keys and cause a detailed error description to be displayed on the right side
of the screen by means of clicking on OK or pressing ENTER. The error text can be scrolled by means of the cursor keys
if it exceeds the size of the right window.
Pressing of ESC or C reactivates the left screen window.
If the left window is active, all errors can be saved in a text file with their detailed description by means of pressing F2.
In addition to the error descriptions the current operating-hours counter, the identification data, the current date as well
as the vehicle identification number and the number of the electronic box are saved. However, vehicle identification
number and number of the electronic box can only be saved if the corresponding entry in the EEPROM is valid.
20-97
• Diagnosis > Delete error memory (Cancellazione memoria errori)

“Delete error memory” opens a window which prompts the user to confirm the deletion of the error memory.
Fig. 26 - Delete error memory
• Diagnosis > HEX data display

This menu item is not relevant for diagnosis, as only internal data in hexadecimal notation are displayed here.
On selection of the menu item HEX data display a window appears, in which the user can enter up to four hexadecimal
addresses (see figure). In addition to the address data the user has to enter the number of bytes (maximum 12) he wants
to read at this start address. On confirmation with OK their contents are dumped on the screen..
Fig. 27 - HEX data display
With << + >> / << - >> the start addresses are incremented resp. decremented by one.
With << ++ >> / << — >> the start addresses are increased resp. decreased by 12 (decimal).
With << CONT >> the contents are read continually (default). Selection of this button causes the label to change to ”<<
STAT >>”. Reselection toggles again.
Pressing the key ESC (or ALT + C) quits this menu item.
20-98
• Diagnosis > Plaintext data display
CAUTION!
After selecting the menu item ”End-of-line programming” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off
and on again in order to update all data in the window ”Plaintext data display”!
Plain text data display opens a window in which the data are converted and displayed in their corresponding physical
units. The structure and contents of the window are shown in the figure below.
By pressing the key ”T” it is possible to toggle between continuous display and static display.
The current status is indicated left at the top of the window as CONT (for continuous display) resp. STAT (for static dis-
play).
Fig. 28 - Plaintext data display

It is possible to switch between the individual windows for digital inputs, digital outputs, sensor errors and internal var-
iables by means of the select fields (buttons) << DIG_IN >>, << DIG_OUT >>, << ERRORS >> and << INTERNAL >> (al-
so compare ”DEST 38 program description”). The window for speeds/drive information is always visible.
Possible errors are indicated in each individual window.
In case of continuous display a rotating dot indicates which variable resp. which value is currently being refreshed.
Charts with descriptions about matching internal pin assignments and for the contacts of the E-box for the respective
windows can be called by means of pressing the keys F3 and F4.
Pressing the key ESC (or C) quits this menu item.
• << DIG_IN >> Digital inputs
Upon selecting << DIG_IN >> a list of the digital inputs appears on the right side of the screen together with their cor-
responding addresses and values. So in the continuous display mode (CONT) it is possible to check whether the re-
spective signal is being transferred in to the E-box.
Tip plus Powershift plus at the gear lever
Tip minus Powershift minus at the gear lever
FS neutral Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in neutral position
FS forward Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in forward position
FS reverse Drive switch (power-shuttle lever) in reverse position
System pressure 18 bar system pressure switch
HK pedal switch Proximity switch at main clutch pedal
Pin code 1 Set to value 1 if type of transmission is T7100
Pin code 2 Set to value 1 if type of transmission is T7200
Gear sync transm Starter inhibit switch at control console
Starter inhibit Push-button switch at drive switch (POWER-SHUTTLE lever)
20-99
• << DIG_OUT >> Digital outputs

Upon selecting << DIG_OUT >> a list of the ”digital outputs” appears on the right side of the screen together with their
corresponding addresses and values. So in the continuous display mode (CONT) it is possible to display the output sig-
nals of the E-box.
Fig. 29 - Digital outputs
• << ERRORS >> Sensor errors)

Upon selecting << ERRORS >> a list of the sensor errors appears on the right side of the screen.
Fig. 30 - Sensor errors
20-100
• << INTERNAL >> Internal variables

Upon selecting << INTERNAL >> a list of the ”internal variables” appears on the right side of the screen together with
their values and physical units. All displayed values are calculated by the E-box.
•
Fig. 31 - Internal variables
HK pressure Pressure at the main clutch (calculated by means of measuring the current which flows to the pro-
portional valve)
HK contact pres Contact pressure of the main clutch evaluated during end-of-line programming
HK pedal position Position of the clutch pedal (calculated from the voltage level of the angle sensor at the clutch pedal)
• Diagnosis > Set output ports
CAUTION!
• Due to safety reasons this menu item can only be selected when the engine has stopped!
• If the menu item ”End-of-line programming” has been previously executed the ignition on the vehicle needs
to be switched off and on again once. Otherwise the digital outputs cannot be activated!
Fig. 32 - Select output ports
20-101
Via the menu item ”Select output ports” it is possible to set or reset the individual digital outputs. After calling the menu item
”Select output ports” a window appears in which the data of the individual outputs of the transmission-E-box are dis-
played. The outputs are indicated line by line.
Column 1: In this column the components activated by the respective output are indicated.
Column 2: In this column the internal addresses (pins) of the digital outputs are indicated.
Column 3: This column indicates the current status of the output: Hereby the indication ”1” signifies that the output is set
and therefore a signal (voltage) is existing at the corresponding pin of the E-box. The indication ”0” signifies that the output
is not set and therefore no signal is existing. Highlighted fields in different colours show to the user those outputs which are
connected to the E-box and therefore are ready to be activated.
Column 4: In this column the user can select one of the connected outputs by means of the cursor keys, i.e. the desired
field is highlighted in a different colour. This output status can be toggled (activated resp. deactivated) by pressing the EN-
TER key. The output will be set in the E-box and subsequently be read in again by the DEST program. Due to safety reasons
the changes which have been carried out will be reset to the normal state after the menu item ”Activate outputs” has been
quit.
Column 5: In this column the errors of the digital outputs are shown. Thereby the letters”KM”signify a short circuit to
ground and ”LU” stands for a line interruption.
• Diagnosis > EEPROM read/write

This menu item allows the user to read and edit the customer area contents of the EEPROM. On selection a window ap-
pears in which the contents are shown (see figure). The user can alter individual characters with the help of the cursor
keys and confirm these changes with <<OK>> (ALT + O or ENTER). Subsequent to every writing process into the EEP-
ROM customer area an identification (date) is saved which can be read later on via the menu item Control > Information.
This menu item can be quit by means of pressing the ESC key (or ALT + C).
Fig. 33 - EEPROM read/write
The first nine characters of the customer area are highlighted in a different colour. The menu item ”End-of-line program-
ming” fills in the vehicle identification number into this area.
In case of storing the contents of the error memory into a file DEST 45 checks whether the first four characters of the EEP-
ROM customer area correspond to a valid vehicle identification prenumber. If this is the case the vehicle identification
number and the corresponding number of the electronic box will also be stored into the file. Otherwise both values cannot
be stored.
Due to the aforementioned reasons this area should not be edited by the user himself. Therefore, upon opening the window
the cursor is located at the position on the right beside it.
20-102
• Diagnosis > Operating-hours counter

This menu item enables the user to read and edit the contents of the electronic operating-hours counter. Subsequent
to the initial input a window is opened in order to confirm the data. The input itself is to be carried out with decimal values
in hours.
Fig. 34 - Operating-hours counter
20-103
4.2.3 CONTROL
The submenu ”Control” contains the menu items ”Information” and ”End-of-line programming”
Fig. 35 - Control
• Control > Information

The menu item ”Information” indicates in a window the operating-hours, the EEProm login data, the control unit login
data as well as the control unit identification data. These data cannot be edited.
Fig. 36 - Information
20-104
• Control > End of line programming
CAUTION!
After terminating the menu item ”Activate outputs” the ignition on the vehicle needs to be switched off and on
again before the menu item ”End-of-line programming” can be selected. Otherwise the call is aborted by
prompting the error message ”Select transmission version not possible!”.
The menu item ”End-of-line programming” opens a divided window for the purpose of configuration of the trans-
mission box and for adjustment of the clutch. In the upper window area the configuration data is displayed. In the lower
area the user can find instructions for the end-of- line programming.
Fig. 37 - End-of-line programming
First the program reads the 8 digit vehicle identification number from the EEPROM. If the first four digits correspond to
a valid vehicle identification prenumber the configuration data are read directly from the box. If the configuration data
of the box are consistent to the corresponding data of the vehicle identification prenumber all data (transmission ver-
sion, type of transmission, vehicle configuration, electronic box and vehicle identification number) will be displayed. If
they are not consistent only the read out data from the control unit will be displayed. In addition, a warning will appear
with instructions to reconfigure the box. The same applies if the vehicle identification prenumber read from the EEP-
ROM is invalid.
The vehicle configuration can be changed by means of selecting the button << CONFIG >> or the letter ”F”. At first the
vehicle identification prenumber (the first four digits of the vehicle identification number) is highlighted in a different col-
our. The vehicle identification number defined for the corresponding type of vehicle can be selected from a table stored
in the program by means of the cursor keys. The configuration data belonging to the respective type of tractor are al-
tered simultaneously.
Before these data are stored by pressing the ENTER key it is obligatory to compare the pre-set speed version (30 / 40
km/h or 50 km/h) with the actual speed version of the tractor. If these do not match the proper speed version has to be
set by means of pressing the cursor keys again.
20-105
Fig. 38 - Select vehicle identification number
After pressing the ENTER key the last four digits of the vehicle identification number will be highlighted in a different col-
our. Here the user has to fill in the serial number of the tractor which is stored in the EEPROM by pressing the ENTER
key.
Fig. 39 - Clutch adjustment
Subsequently the transmission box will be configured with the corresponding data by activating << OK >> or pressing
ENTER. In addition, the entire vehicle identification number will be written into the first nine bytes of the EEPROM cus-
tomer area. If the configuration is completed the clutch can be adjusted by means of << 1 >>. If the instructions are ex-
ecuted the clutch adjustment is terminated with << OK >> (or ENTER) causing a message to appear whether the clutch
adjustment was carried out succesfully or not.
20-106
Determination of the contact pressure of the main clutch

In order to insure engaging without a jerk upon automatical reversing, the components transmission control unit (E-box),
proportional valve and main clutch are to be coordinated by means of determining the contact pressure.
Fig. 40 - Determination of contact pressure
CAUTION!
As the vehicle starts moving on its own during the process, take care that there is sufficiently free space in front of
the tractor!
Fig. 41 - Safety note
The determination of the contact pressure is started by means of << 2 >>. For this purpose the followinf works need to be
carried out:
• Remedy all pending errors at the power-shuttle system
• Warm up the tractor (transmission oil temperature at least 40 ×C).
• Place the tractor on a solid leveled surface and move the drive switch into the neutral position. Let the engine run.
• Create a safety area with a size of at least 5 meters in front of the tractor which nobody is allowed to enter!
• Engage the gear (T7100 = 2. Gear; T7200 = 3. Gear).
• Connect the computer, boot the system and call ”Control > End-of-line programming”. The determination of the con-
tact pressure is started by means of << 2 >>.
20-107
• Further instructions can be directly taken from the <<HELP>> file stored in the computer. After quitting the help file the
determination of the contact pressure is carried on according to the instruction.
• During the calibration process the pressure in the main clutch upon which frictional connection occurs is determined.
Hereby the tractor moves about 0,5 m forward on ist own. Simultaneously the E-box detects the ”speed at the output
of the main clutch” and terminates the determination of the contact pressure.
> Contact pressure T 7200 5,0 – 8,0 bar
> Contact pressure T 7100 6,0 – 9,0 bar
• The determined value is stored in the transmission control unit (E-box) by means of switching the ignition off and on
again and can be looked up in the plain text display under << INTERNAL >>.
Leaving end-of-line programming:

The end-of-line mode is quit by pressing C (or ESC). The determined values are stored in the EEPROM by means of switch-
ing the ignition off and on again.
20-108
4.2.4 OPTIONS
The option menu offers the user the possibility to alter the program environment. All settings executed under this menu
item are saved when the program is terminated.
Fig. 42 - Options
• Options > Colour palette

In this menu item settings for the appropriate screen colours can be selected. All possible palettes can be selected by
means of the cursor keys and be shown in a preview. The selected colour palette is retained by means of pressing EN-
TER.
Fig. 43 - Change colours
20-109
• Options > Language

In the submenu ”Options – Language” another language can be selected. After confirming with ENTER (resp. ALT + O)
all screen texts are displayed in the selected language.
Fig. 44 - Change language
• Options > Interface COM 1

By selecting one of the two menu items the communication with the box is carried out via the corresponding interface.
The selected interface is marked.
Only an interface actually available on the computer can be selected!

Selecting this menu item causes allows most of the program functions to be called without a connection to a trans-
mission control unit. For this purpose the program EDS simulates the communication between computer and trans-
mission box. However not all the functions are currently executable with simulated control.
20-110
4.3 ERROR CODES POWER-SHUTTLE /DEST 45

Legend error code list T7x00 V/R-auto EST 45
Validity: V410 (IV) version
General
In case of a multiple error only the error code with the highest external error number will be displayed on the screen. Si-
multaneously the error symbol ”wrench” appears on the display. The external error numbers are sorted according to the
severity of the required reaction upon an error.
Rough sub-division of the external error number

0 ...9 reserved for operation indications
10 ...99 Operation mode normal, operation mode stand-by strategy, operation mode limp home, operation mode emer-
gency operation, operation mode vehicle shut-down (except for EE), operation mode permanent neutral
Abbreviations
• LU Line interruption
• KM Short circuit to ground
• K+ Short circuit to vehicle electrical system plus general
• Nmot Speed at powershift gear input (=nLSE)
• nLSA Speed at powershift gear output
• nHK Speed at main clutch output
• nAB Speed at output, ground speed
• HK Main clutch
• HKPed Main clutch pedal
• ED Digital input
• EU Analog input voltage (U)
• ER Analog input resistance (R)
• EF Frequency input (F)
• AU Voltage output (U) (plus supply sensor system)
• VMG Ground supply transmitter (sensor system)
• VMGA Ground supply transmitter analog (sensor system)
• ADM Digital output ground
• AIP Current output (I) proportional
• VPS Plus supply (actuator system)
20-111
4.4 DISPLAY POWERSHUTTLE
Error code Drive program Significance/function
Non-critical error, tractor can be operated normally.

10-20 Normal driving Start-up / change of directions possibly delayed or only by jerks.
Ground speed too high.

21 Normal driving Reduce ground speed until error code disappears.
If the error code is not disappearing contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.
Transmission oil temperature too high.

22 Normal driving Reduce tractor load until error code disappears.
If the error code is not disappearing contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.
27-41 Limited driving Powershift bloccato.
Powershifts are blocked.

Stand-by program Conditions for starting upon change of directions:
47-58
(Limp home) Commutator switch at least 1 second in neutral position upon standstill of
tractor.
Powershifts are blocked.

Driving clutch is not working – driving only possible by means of change of di-
rections switch.
64-70 Emergency program Commutator switch at least 1 second in neutral position upon standstill of
tractor.
Contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop immediately and have the error be elimi-
nated.
76-99 No driving possible Contact the DEUTZ-FAHR after-sales service.
20-112
4.5 ERROR CODE LIST WITH DESCRIPTION
Code Error location/error cause System reaction possible remedy Remarks

• Generally upon
”new” electronic system
Operation mode NORMAL Carry out/repeat • Self-preservation
11 EEPROM end-of-line data invalid HK adjustment • Reserve value
(contact pressure)
Default contact pressure • Checks or plausibility invalid
• Both EEPROM blocks defective no
automatic restoration possible
Default value: cold (HK pedal holding ti- Check cabling

me, splitter holding time, slip times) • Possible sequence error from:
Check temperature sensor
12 Temperature sensor LU, K+ • K+ HK sensor
Check sensor supply
• K+ sensor supply AU1
No change of operation mode Check vehicle electr. system voltage
Default value: cold (HK pedal holding ti- Check cabling
me, splitter holding time, slip times) • Possible sequence error from:
Check temperature sensor
13 Temperature sensor KM • K+ HK sensor
Check sensor supply
No change of operation mode • K+ sensor supply AU1
Check vehicle electr. system voltage
Check cabling
Synchronous neutral switch Check neutral switch • Self-preservation
14 plausibility No change of operation mode (Start interlock switch) • Plausibility circuit
(Start interlock switch) Check speed sensor/cabling • Nhk-SyncN-Nab
Nab, Nhk
Check cabling • Diagnosis only if

Warning light LU
15 (Oil pressure/HK overspeed) No change of operation mode configured
Check lamp in disconnected state LU can only be diagnosed
Check cabling • Diagnosis only if configured

Warning light KM
16 (Oil pressure/HK overspeed) No change of operation mode • KM can only be diagnosed in
Check supply warning light disconnected state
•Diagnosis only if configured
Warning light K+ Check cabling
17 No change of operation mode • KM can only bediagnosed in
(Oil pressure/HK overspeed) Check supply warning light connected state
POWER-SHUTTLE DIAGNOSISPROGRAMM DEST 45
20-113
Check oil pressure switch
• Is only diagnosed if Nmot > Nmot
20-114
Warning light is lighting Check cabling threshold
18 System pressure plausibility
No change of operation mode Check system pressure • Switch closed if pressure Is existing
Check speed sensor Nmot
On display ”EE”, permanent beep Check cabling
19 Signal line display KM • Error code is not used
No change of operation mode Check display
On display ”EE”, permanent beep Check cabling
20 Signal line display K+ • Error code is not used
No change of operation mode Check display
Permanent beep as long as
21 Speed limit exceeded overspeed is existing Reduce driving speed • Diagnosis only if configured
No change of operation mode
• Temperature monitoring only if con-
figured
Upon exceeding 5x beep, Reduce load • Error code upon exceeding of max.
22 Temperature exceeded
subsequently 1x beep every 2 min. Shut down engine permissible upper limit temperature
• Indication ”temperature warning” is
independent of EC priority
Operation mode STAND-BY Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
27 Characteristic line valve LU STRATEGY Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • Only for T7200
Operation mode Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from LU

28 Characteristic line valve KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • Only for T7200
• Possibly sequence error from LU
VPS2
Operation mode Check cabling
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
29 Characteristic line valve K+ Check valve
• Can also lead to error ”VPS2-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) Plausi” (Int. EC:47)
• Only for T7200
• Only for T7200
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Possibly sequence error from
30 Retaining valve 2 LU Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2)
• LU can only be diagnosed in
• Only for T7200
Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode LU VPS2
31 Retaining valve 2 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
• KM can only be diagnosed in dis-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state
• Self preservation
• Only for T7200
• Possibly sequence error from
LU VPS2
32 Retaining valve 2 K+ STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
Check valve
(Powershift blocked) • Can also lead to error

Check valve supply (VPS2) ”VPS2-Plausi” (Int. EC:47)
• K+ can only be diagnosed in con-
nected state
• Only for T7200
Operation mode Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
33 Retaining valve 1 LU STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve LU VPS2
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) • LU can only be diagnosed in dis-
connected state
• Only for T7200
Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from
Operation mode
LU VPS2
34 Retaining valve 1 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
(Powershift blocked) • KM can only be diagnosed in dis-
Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state
• Only for T7200
LU VPS2
STAND-BY STRATEGY • Self preservation
35 Retaining valve 1 K+ Check valve
(Powershift blocked) • Can also lead to error ”VPS2- Plau-
Check valve supply (VPS2)
si” (Int. EC:47)
• K+ can only be diagnosed in con-
nected state
20-115
Operation mode Check cabling LU VPS2
20-116
36 Transfer valve 2 LU STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in dis-
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) connected state (toggling only upon
defined peed ratio)
Check cabling
Operation mode VPS2
37 Transfer valve 2 KM STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply disconnected state
(VPS2) • Self preservation
Check cabling VPS2

Operation mode
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
38 Transfer valve 2 K+ • Can also lead to error
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply “VPS2-Plausi” (CE int.: 47)
(VPS2)
Check cabling • Possibly sequence error from LU

Operation mode VPS2
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve
39 Transfer valve 1 LU • LU can only be diagnosed in
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply disconnected state (toggling only
(VPS2) upon defined speed ratio)
Check cabling VPS2
Operation mode
STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • LU can only be diagnosed in
40 Transfer valve 1 KM
Check valve supply disconnected state (toggling only
(Powershift blocked) upon defined speed ratio) Self pre-
(VPS2)
servation
Operation mode Check cabling LU VPS2
41 Transfer valve 2 K+ STAND-BY STRATEGY Check valve • Can also lead to error
(Powershift blocked) Check valve supply (VPS2) “VPS2-Plausi” (CE int.: 47)
• Upon reversing demand neutral
Check cabling shifting, permanent beep
47 nAB speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing standstill is not ab-
solutely required!
Check cabling shifting, permanent beep
48 nAB speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
solutely required!
• Inadmissible speed discontinuity
from transmitter failure threshold to
Operation mode LIMP-HOME
nAB speed transmitter gradient Ignition off/on • Upon reversing demand neutral
49 Check cabling
(Plausibility) standstill threshold shifting, permanent beep
solutely required!
Check cabling

50 nHK speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
Check cabling • Upon reversing demand neutral
51 nHK speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
Check speed sensor shifting, permanent beep
Ignition off/on from transmitter failure threshold to
nHK speed transmitter standstill threshold
52 gradient (Plausibility) Operation mode LIMP-HOME Check cabling
Check speed sensor • Upon reversing demand neutral
shifting, permanent beep
53 nLSA speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
54 nLSA speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
nLSA speed transmitter standstill threshold
55 Operation mode LIMP-HOME Check cabling
gradient (Plausibility)
56 nMOT speed transmitter LU, K+ Operation mode LIMP-HOME shifting, permanent beep
Check speed sensor
57 nMOT speed transmitter KM Operation mode LIMP-HOME
20-117
20-118
58 nMOT speed transmitter Operation mode LIMP-HOME standstill threshold
gradient (Plausibility) Check cabling
Ignition off/on
End-of-line programming • Switch point out of tolerance range
Carry out/repeat
Neutral shifting permanent beep
• Upon neutral shifting
Clutch pedal sensory Check/adjust mechanical tolerance,
64 system plausibility Operation mode EMERGENCY OP- • HK pedal switch is closed with
ERATION Of the HK pedal sensory system
Sensor/switch HK pedal in idle position

HK pedal adjustment Check cabling
• HK pedal sensor signal:
Check HK switch Idle: LOW
Check sensor supply stepped: HIGH
Check sensor/switch LU, KM, K+
Check cabling permanent beep
Neutral shifting Check sensor mounting • Possibly sequence error from:
65 Clutch pedal sensoryl LU sensor supply (AU1)
system LU, KM Operation mode
EMERGENCY OPERATION Check sensor
• Limit values:
Check sensor supply Umin approx. 0,5V
Umax approx. 4,5V
Neutral shifting • Possibly sequence error from:

Clutch pedal sensory Check cabling • EMERGENCY K+ temperature sen-
66 Operation mode EMERGENCY OPE-
system K+ Check sensor mounting sor or OPERATION K+ sensor sup-
RATION
ply AU1
• Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Check sensor
66 • Limit values:
Check sensor supply
Umin approx. 0,5V
Umax approx. 4,5V
beep
Check cabling
• Possibly sequence error from:
Neutral shifting Check cabling del sensore temperatura Vehicle electrical system
67 Sensor supply undervoltage Operation mode / sensore frizione undervoltage
EMERGENCY OPERATION Check cabling at temperature sensor/ • Can also lead to sequence errors
clutch sensor
• Temperature sensor
Clutch sensory system
beep
Neutral shifting

K+ HK sensor
68 Sensor supply overvoltage EMERGENCY OPERATION Check cabling at temperature K+ temperature sensor
Check cabling at temperature sensor/clutch sensor
• Can also lead to sequence errors
sensor/clutch sensor
• Temperature sensor
Clutch sensory system
Ignition off/on • Self preservation
Clutch pedal sensory system Neutral shifting
End-of-line programming • Programmed thresholds not logical
69 plausibility Operation mode
End-of-line data Carry out/repeat HK pedal (Idle position, switch point,
EMERGENCY OPERATION disengaged)
adjustment
• Generally upon ”new” electronic
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on system
70 EEPROM end-of-line Operation mode End-of-line programming • Both EEPROM blocks are defective
EMERGENCY OPERATION Carry out/repeat HK pedal adjust- (invalid checksum), no automatic
ment restoration possible
Can also lead to errors ”HK sensor/
switch plausibility” (int. code 6)
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Possibly sequence error of LU
76 Proportional valve LU Operation mode Check valve VPS1!
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) • Upon neutral shifting permanent
beep
Neutral shifting Check cabling • Self preservation
77 Proportional valve KM Operation mode Check valve • Upon neutral shifting permanent
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) beep
20-119
Neutral shifting Check cabling
20-120
79 Forward valve LU • Possibly sequence error of LU VPS1!
Operation mode Check valve
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE • Upon neutral shifting
Check valve supply (VPS1)
permanent beep
80 Forward valve KM Operation mode Check valve • Upon neutral shifting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply (VPS1) permanent beep
Check cabling • Self preservation
Neutral shifting
Check valve • Possibly sequence error of LU VPS1
82 Reverse valve LU Operation mode
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve supply • Upon neutral shifting

(VPS1) permanent beep
Check cabling • Self preservation
83 Reverse valve KM Operation mode
Check valve • Upon neutral shifting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE
Check valve supply (VPS1) permanent beep
85 Combining error drive switch
(LU, KM, K+) Operation mode • Upon neutral shifting
Check drive switch
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE permanent beep
Check pin code • Self preservation
Ignition off/on • Pin code is evaluated only
Pin code not corresponding
87 to type of vehicle Operation mode Check end-of-line data, carry out upon initialisation
PERMANENT NEUTRAL end-of-line programming (type of • Defectice pin code.
(T7100/T7200)
vehicle, vehicle version) Wrong type of vehicle/version pro-
Check cabling grammed
permanent beep
• EC also defective with term30
Check cabling (KM, K+)
• LU VPS can also lead to sequence
Neutral shifting Check voltage at VPS 1 errors F-/R-/prop.-SV)
89 VPS1 plausibility (KM, K+) Operation mode Check voltage at term30 • Possibly sequence error resulting
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling delle valvole from counter supply (K+) at F/R
F/R (K+) valve upon power on
proportional valve
• Possibly sequence error from: Sa-

fety processor not programmed
permanent beep
Check cabling (KM, K+) • EC also defective with term30
Neutral shifting Check voltage at VPS 2 • LU VPS2 can only be detected via
90 VPS2 plausibility (KM, K+) Operation mode Check voltage at term30 sequence errors
PERMANENT NEUTRAL Check cabling di • Possibly sequence error resulting
GV/HV/MVKI (K+) from counter supply (K+) at GV/HV/
MVKl upon power on
Safety processor not programmed
Engage/disengage creep
speed lever
Check cabling at •HK plausibility only if configured
Neutral shifting proportional valve (K+) •Self preservation
91 HK plausibility circuit Operation mode Check proportional valve •Plausibility circuit: Nisa-HK-Nhk
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check HK •For T72 creep speed lever
Check speed sensory system Position”N” is possible!
Nlsa, Nhk
Check hydraulic system
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on
Vehicle electrical system
92 Operation mode Check vehicle electrical system
overvoltage
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling
20-121
Neutral shifting Ignition off/on
Vehicle electrical system
20-122
93 undervoltage Operation mode Check vehicle electrical system
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check cabling
Neutral shifting • Upon neutral shifting
Check cabling
94 Proportional valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve
plausibility” (int. EC 46)
Check cabling
95 Forward valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
Check valve
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE • Can also lead to error ”VPS1-
Check cabling
96 Reverse valve K+ Operation mode permanent beep
SHUT DOWN VEHICLE Check valve
• Error can only occur upon wrongly
programmed application controls
(not upon standard controls)
• Wrong parameterization of:
• Slip_configuration
• _LS_Plausi_Konfig
• _PC_Konfig
• _Diag_Disable
Operation mode
97 Application error Check application data • _Syncn_Plausi_Disable
PERMANENT NEUTRAL
• _Kplp_Plausi_Disable
• GP-ID invalid
• KD-ID invalid
• FD-ID invalid
• KUNDE_KD_FD invalid
• GP-KD-vers. Invalid
• GP-FD-vers. invalid
• Customer programming (customer,
Ignition off/on
Operation mode version) invalid, not existing
98 Configuration error Check/carry out end-of-line pro-
PERMANENT NEUTRAL • Basic program not suitable for end-
gramming (customer, version)
of-line programming - by customer
EEPROM end-of-line data Operation mode Ignition off/on • Checksum of the EEPROM config-
99
defective (vehicle configuration) PERMANENT NEUTRAL Repeat end-of-line programming uration data defective. No vehicle
version can be selected.
20-123
4.6 OTHER INFORMATIONS
Error consequence/System reaction possible error cause possible remedy
20-124
EST45 is not running up Check supply paths LU, KM
no display activation resp. display ”EE” Communication line defective Check fuse (term15, term30)
Power supply defective Check communication line (LU)
Ignition off/on, repeat
EST45 is not running up
Check supply paths LU, KM
Diagnosis tool cannot establish connection Communication line defective
Check fuse (term15, term30)
Power supply defective
Check communication line (LU)
Wrong vehicle version selected upon Check/correct end-of-line programmed
Upon starting/reversing powershift end-of-line programming vehicle version in programmazione fine linea
gear shifts over to neutral (jerk can be observed). Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective Check cabling speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa
display: ”N”, FR-arrows flashing, no error
code, permanent beep Fault in hydraulic system Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
(neutral by reversing monitoring) Check hydraulic system
Wrong vehicle version selected upon end-of- Check/correct end-of-line programmed
line programming vehicle version
Automatic shifting upward/downward in Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective, Check cabling speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
interchanged
the splitter, shifting noise every 1-2 sec. Check cabling transfer valves GV1/GV2
Transfer valves GV1/GV2 interchanged
Fault in hydraulic system (pressure Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
modulation by GV toggling) Check hydraulic system
Wrong vehicle version selected upo Check/correct end-of-line programmed

end-of-line programming vehicle version
Short traction force interruption during
driving with Closed drive train Speed sensor Nmot and Nlsa defective Check cabling speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
(LS pressure modulation) Fault in hydraulic system (pressure modulation Check speed sensors Nmot and Nlsa
by GV toggling) Check hydraulic system
Check starting block signal
Automatic starting not possible, vehicle remains in neutral Starting block signal not existing
(LU, KM, K+)
ram switches:
neutral switch (outside)
starting block switch
(inside/only with powershift)
switches for
street/field display proportional valve
(only with power shuttle)
locking magnet
for street/field
shifting 18 bar system pressure switch

speed output
power take off
speed output
electro-hydraulic powershift gear
gear shift output n Lsa
speed output
output/ground speet solenoid valve temperature speed output
n Ab all-wheel drive transmission powershift gear
oil input/engine speed
n Mot; n Lse
speed output
driving clutch (gear shift input)
n HK (only with power shuttle)
20-125
4.8 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7100
20-126
Cannon Bayonet
Hydraulic pressure plug-socket
retaining valve Main pressure valve
18 bar
Pressure-reducing valve
10 bar Pressure
control valve
Release valve
Pilot valve
Two-way valve
forward/neutral/reverse
Pilot valve
Solenoid valves Y1 – Y4:

Y1 = MVR; solenoid valve reverse
Y3 = MVV; solenoid valve forward
speed output ram switches:

powershift gear input/engine speed neutral switch (outside)
n Mot; n Lse starting block switch electro-hydraulic
(inside/only with powershift) gear shift
electrical connection
proportional valve forward/reverse
(only with power shuttle) control block
18 bar system
pressure switch
speed output
power take off
speed output temperature

driving clutch (gear shift input)
n HK (only with power shuttle) solenoid valve transmission electrical connection
all-wheel drive oil
speed output speed output
output/ground powershift gear output
speed n Ab N Lsa
20-127
4.10 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC GEAR SHIFT T-7200 / T-7300
20-128
Gear shift
valve A/B; F/G Safety valve Retaining valve C/D
Magnet Y6 Magnet Y7
Retaining valve A/B; F/G forward; MVV reverse
Bleed Valve
Safety valve
Magnet Y3 Reversing piston

Clutch C/D
Release Valve Magnet Y4

Clutch A/B; F/G
Pressure
control valve Magnet Y1
Clutch A/B; F/G
Retaining valve 1; GV1
Two-step valve Magnet Y5

Field/street characteristik MVK
Two-way valve
field or street Magnet Y2
characteristic Clutch C/D Release valve for
Transfer valve 2; GV2 neutral position
Shift pressure
valve 18 Bar
Transfers valve C/D pilot
Pressure valve 10 bar
4-GEAR POWERSHIFT CONTROL UNIT FORWARD-REVERSE CONTROL BLOCK

4.11 ERROR ANALYSIS

Interchanging of electrical connectors at the transmission T-7100 L and T-7200 L
Various sensors/solenoid valves/switches at the transmission are located very close to each other and are equipped with
the same type of connector. At these locations the electrical mating connectors at the cable harness cannot be layed in a
way which ensures that accidental interchanging may be absolutely excluded.
The following consideration shows the consequences if electrical connectors are interchanged:
4.11.1 VA SOLENOID VALVE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L AND T-7200 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 75 mm with T-7100 and 55 mm with T-7200.
VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”OFF”
• All-wheel ”OFF” ‡ 12V voltage at temperature sensor
• Electronic system shifts gear to permanent neutral
Vehicle cannot be moved any more!
VA plug on temperature sensor and VA – SV ”ON”

• All-wheel ”ON” ‡ 0V voltage at temperature sensor
• Hard gear shifts (5V supply in electronic system is overloaded, but short circuit proof)
Temperature sensor plug on VA – SV

• Hard gear shifts
4.11.2 SV DIFFERENTIAL LOCK AND SV POWER TAKE OFF CLUTCH T-7100 L AND T-7200 L
Both valves are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 40 mm
Plug differential lock on SV power take off valve

• Interchanged functions upon switch actuation in cabin
• Power take off stub is running upon diff. ”ON”
Upon ZW clutch ”ON” and differential lock ”OFF” the differential lock is engaged. Critical driving state with regard to safety,
e.g. when driving in a curve, etc.
4.11.3 SPEED SENSORS INPUT/OUTPUT WITH T-7100 L

AMP superseal 3-pole connectors at both sensors, distance approx. 80 mm
Plug output on input sensor and vice versa

(both plugs are connected!)
Upon powershift step L and H

• LS transmission in neutral
Upon powershift step M

No consequences
20-129
Only one plug is connected

OUTPUT not connected
INPUT not connected
• Plausibility
4.11.4 LOCKING MAGNET FIELD/STREET AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR T-7100 L

Both elements are equipped with Jet-Tronic connectors; distance approx. 115 mm
Locking magnet plug on temperature sensor
4.11.5 PLUG DRIVING CLUTCH NHK ON OUTPUT/GROUND SPEED NAB AND VICE VERSA
WITH T-7200 L (both plugs are connected)
• Tractor is starting for a short time
• Error message ”91” on display: Powershift gear in neutral
20-130
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) AGROTRONIC-HD + ASM
5. AGROTRONIC-HD + ASM
As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor (E-box) and computer needs to be established so as to check
the Agrotronic-hD + ASM resp. to calibrate the valves. The interface cable and the adapter cable are serving for this pur-
pose (see figure).
• Connect plug (2) of the interface cable with the designation ”9141” to the computer (COM interface)
• Connect plug (3) of the interface cable for the 12 V supply to the cigar lighter
• Connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (9) – designation ”Agrotronic-hD” – of the adapter cable
• Insert the central plug (8) of the adapter cable into the central diagnosis interface in the fuse box
• Switch on ignition and start the motor
• Start the computer and call the EDS program (compare item A 1.3 – Launching and terminating of the EDS program)
• Make sure that the right option is called in the initial menu:
Opzione 2 -> plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 1
Opzione 3 -> plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 2
equipped with a central diagnosis interface.
To be able to check the Agrotronic-hD however, with these tractors it is necessary to connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the in-
terface cable directly with the 4-pole diagnosis terminal of the hydraulic system. The diagnosis terminal is located in the
cabin at the rear on the right side under the floor mat, resp. in the right panelling (close to the E-box).
20-131
5.1 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
5.1.1 MAIN MENU

After selecting Option 2 resp. Option 3 (depending on the computer interface) the main menu appears:
Fig. 46 - Main menu
In the main menu the individual submenus can be activated. There are two possibilities to accomplish this:
• Press one of the keys 1 – 6
• Select the desired subprogram by means of the cursor keys (cursor up/cursor down) and confirm by pressing the EN-
TER key.
Press the ESC key to quit the respective subprogram and to return to the main menu.
5.1.2 QUERY INPUTS
Fig. 47 - Query inputs
20-132
• Query inputs > Lower rate

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Slowly turn the drop speed dial. The reading is supposed to be up-
dated continually:
- Min. drop speed (turtle) display: approx. 0,35V
- Max drop speed (rabbit) display: approx. 8,00V
• Query inputs > Maximum Height

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Slowly turn the drop speed dial. The reading is supposed to be up-
dated continually:
- Min. lift height (figure 0) display: approx. 0,35V
- Max lift height (figure 10) display: approx. 8,00V
• Query inputs > Intermix

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Slowly turn the system selector. The reading is supposed to be up-
dated continually:
- 100% tractive force (left stop, plough symbol), display: approx. 0,35V
- 100% position (right stop, lift system symbol) display: approx. 8,00V
• Query inputs > Depht Set

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Slowly turn the setpoint dial. The reading is supposed to be updated
continually:
- Left stop (position F = free floating) display: approx. 0,35V
- Right stop (position F = full lift) display: approx. 8,00V
• Query inputs > Main Control

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Move the lever to the following positions:
- Lift display: approx. 5,1 ... 5,8 Volt
- Stop display: approx. 3,5 ... 4,0 Volt
- Lower display: approx. 1,9 ... 2,3 Volt
- Fast drop display: approx. 1,3 ... 1,7 Volt
• Query inputs > Hitch Position

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. Move the hoisting unit from lowered position to fully lifted position
(caution: set lift height dial to figure 10, position sensor is adjusted correctly). The reading is supposed to be updated
continually upon hoisting linkage movements:
- Hoisting unit lowered display: approx. 5,2V
- Hoisting unit lifted display: approx. 0,7V
• Tractive force sensors:

Tension: Voltage decreases; direction of force along the tractor longitudinal axis
Compression: Voltage increases; direction of force along the tractor longitudinal axis
• Query inputs > Draft Right

The signal input into the electronic box is tested.
There is no load on the hoisting unit, display 3,5 ... 4,5V
The reading indicates the signal voltage of the tractive force sensor upon no-load state of the hoisting unit. The signal
voltage should be 4,0 ± 0,5 Volt. This requires an 8 V supply (DC) on the tractive force sensor, see reference voltage 8 V
• Query inputs > Draft Left

The signal input into the electronic box is tested.
There is no load on the hoisting unit, display 3,5 ... 4,5V
The reading indicates the signal voltage of the tractive force sensor upon no-load state of the hoisting unit. The signal
voltage should be 4,0 ± 0,5 Volt.
20-133
• Query inputs >External sensor (e.g. beet digger)

The signal input into the electronic box is tested. With a mounted external sensor the reading is supposed to be updated
continually upon actuation of the sensor. For this purpose the external sensor needs to be connected to the external
socket.
• Query inputs > Input Power

The voltage input into the electronic box is tested.
The setpoint is 13,5 ± 0,5 V (DC)
If the actual value matches this setpoint while the engine is running, the electrical system, the battery and the electric
generator are working properly.
• Query inputs >8 Volt Sensor Ref

✴he supply voltage output of the electronic box to the operator’s console (drop speed, lift height dial, system selection,
setpoint) to the tractive force sensors
The setpoint is 8 ± 0,5 V (DC)
• Query inputs >Position Sensor Ref

The supply voltage output of the electronic box: - to the position sensor.
The setpoint is 5,0 +0,5/ -0,1 V (DC)
• Query inputs >4 WD Feedback (not valid for Agrotron 160-200)

The supply voltage output of the electronic box to the all-wheel drive valve is tested. The actual value depends on the
charge condition of the battery.
- Spring return switch all-wheel drive not actuated, display approx. 0,16 V
- Spring return switch all-wheel drive or differential lock actuated, display approx. 12 V
- Spring return switch ASM and spring return switch all-wheel drive actuated, (and wheels in straight position) display
approx. 11 V
• Query inputs > Indicated Speed

The signal input of the theoretical ground speed sensor into the electronic box is tested. The theoretical ground speed
is displayed while driving. The display is in accordance with the display in the INFOCENTER.
• Query inputs > True speed

The signal input of the true ground speed sensor (radar sensor) into the electronic box is tested. The true ground speed
is displayed while driving. The display is in accordance with the display in the INFOCENTER..
• Query inputs > Slip Percent

The signal input of the slip signal is tested by which the electronic box is realizing the traction control. There is only a
reading if the tractor is equipped with a radar sensor and after proper calibration of the tractor. The traction control read-
ing is in accordance with the reading in the INFOCENTER.
• Query inputs > Radar Installed Flag

0 = There is no radar signal (i.e. the tractor is not equipped with a radar sensor)
1 = The radar signal is existing
The electronic box detects the radar signal and automatically sets the flag after traction control has been active for the
first time. If the radar sensor is mounted subsequently the radar flag needs to be set to “0”.
• Query inputs >Brake (not valid for Agrotron 160-200)

Geprüft wird das Eingangssignal von den Bremsschaltern in die Box. Mit diesem Signal wird bei der ASM-Funktion die
Differentialsperre ausgeschaltet.
- Operating brake is not applied, display 0
- Operating brake is applied, display 1
- Upon applying of single-wheel brake, display 1
• Query inputs > Slip Control On/Off

The signal of the wheel-slip switch into the electronic box is tested.
- Wheel-slip switch is not actuated, display 0
- Wheel-slip switch is actuated, display 1
20-134
• Query inputs >Diff-Lock On/Off (not valid for Agrotron 160-200)

The signal of the ASM control function of the box is tested, i.e. the input signal of the differential lock spring return
switch.
Spring return switch ASM needs to be actuated.
- Differential lock spring return switch is not actuated, display 0
- Differential lock spring return switch is actuated, display 1
• Query inputs > ASM On/Off

Getestet wird die ASM-Steuerfunktion der Box.
Spring return switch ASM needs to be actuated.
- Differential lock spring return switch or all wheel drive is not actuated, display 0
- Differential lock spring return switch or all wheel drive is actuated, display 1
• Query inputs > Steering angle 1

The input signal of the steering angle sensors into the box is tested. Start the engine and turn the steering to the left and
subsequently to the right. While doing this, observe the reading as it is updated according to the steering angle..
Steering angle Reading upon steering

Agrotron Type of front
axle sensor 0° ...15° 15° ...25° 25° ...30° >30°
Sensor 1 0 0 1 1
80 - 105 AS-2025
Sensor1 0 1 1 0
AS-2035/ Sensor 1 0 1 1 0
106-150
AS-2045 Sensor 2 0 0 1 1
230 - 260 AS-2075 Sensor 1 0 1 1 –

Sensor 2 0 0 1 –
• Query inputs > Steering angle 2

The input signal of the steering angle sensors into the box is tested. Start the engine and turn the steering to the right and
subsequently to the left. While doing this, observe the reading as it is updated according to the steering angle.
Steering angle Reading upon steering

Agrotron Type of front
axle sensor 0° ...15° 15° ...25° 25° ...30° >30°
Sensor 1 0 0 1 0
80 - 105 AS-2025
Sensor1 0 1 1 1
AS-2035/ Sensor 1 0 0 1 1
106-150
AS-2045 Sensor 2 0 1 1 0
Sensor 1 0 0 1 –
230 - 260 AS-2075
Sensor 2 0 1 1 –
• Query inputs > External Raise

The input signal into the box sent from the remote push-buttons for lifting is tested.
Gleichzeitig wird die Hydraulik für die interne Betätigung gesperrt!
- Remote push-button for lifting (right or left) is not pressed display 0
- Remote push-button for lifting (right or left) is pressed display 1
• Query inputs > External Lower

The input signal into the box sent from the remote push-buttons for lowering is tested.
Simultaneously the hydraulic system is blocked for internal actuation!
- Remote push-button for lifting (right or left) is not pressed display 0
- Remote push-button for lifting (right or left) is pressed display 1
Press ESC to return to the main menu.
20-135
5.1.3 QUERY OUTPUTS
Fig. 48 - Set outputs
• Query outputs > Raise Duty Cycle

The output signal of the electronic box to the solenoid valve for lifting is tested. The AGROTRONIC-hD is always locked
upon switching-on the ignition – the yellow LED is lighting.
- Display = 0
Activate the AGROTRONIC-hD – the yellow LED extinguishes. Move the operating lever to position lift – the red LED is
lighting up.
- Display > 0
• Query outputs > Lower Duty Cycle

The output signal of the electronic box to the solenoid valve for lowering is tested. The AGROTRONIC-hD is always
locked upon switching-on the ignition – the yellow LED is lighting.
- Display = 0
Activate the AGROTRONIC-hD – the yellow LED extinguishes. Move the operating lever to position drop – the green
LED is lighting up.
- Display > 0
• Query outputs >Diff-Lock /4WD (not valid for Agrotron 160-200)

Only in connection with switched-on ASM.
The differential lock push-button and the all-wheel drive push-button are not pressed.
- Display: Differential lock 0, all-wheel drive 0
Press the ASM push-button and the differential lock push-button.
- Display: all-wheel drive 1, Differential lock 1
Press the ASM push-button and the all-wheel drive push-button.
- Display: all-wheel drive 1, Differential lock 0
• Query outputs > Monitor Output

The output signal of the electronic box to the solenoid valve for lifting is tested. Activate the AGROTRONIC-hD - the yel-
low LED extinguishes.
Move the operating lever to position lift – the red LED is lighting up.
- Display 0
Move the operating lever to position stop – the red LED extinguishes.
- Display 1
20-136
• Query outputs > Diagnosis LED

The yellow LED is lighting upon switching-on the ignition (the AGROTRONIC-hD is locked).
- Display 1
Activate the AGROTRONIC-hD – the yellow LED extinguishes.
- Display 0
• Query outputs > Watch dog

The watch dog is a low test current which the box sends through both of the solenoids (lifting and lowering solenoids)
in order to check them.
- Watch dog existing display 1
- Watch dog not existing display 0
• Query outputs > Error in outputs for raising, lowering, differential lock and all-heel drive
The outputs of the electronic box to the respective solenoid valve are tested.
- Display 0, if no error is existing.
- Display 1, in case of an error.
Errors for differential lock and all-wheel drive are displayed only if the ASM push-button is pressed.
Press ESC to return to the main menu.
5.1.4 ERROR HISTORY

In this menu all errors in the Agrotronic-hD are displayed. All occuring errors being indicated by means of a blinking code
are saved in the electronic box and can thus be retrieved if necessary.
Fig. 49 - Error History
For description of the error codes refer to the appendix of this chapter resp. to the workshop manual.
• 1: Clear All Errors

Press push-button 1 or select “Clear All Errors” by means of the arrow keys – the text will be highlighted - and press the
return-key.
Subsequently the display reads No Error.
NOTE. After having been recovered an error please erase the error memory.
• 2: Quit
Press push-button 2 or select “Quit” by means of the arrow keys – the text will be highlighted -and press the ENTER-
key. Subsequently the initial menu appears.
20-137
5.1.5 CLEAR RADARFLAG

In case of a mounted radar sensor the electronic box detects the connected sensor and sets the radar flag automatically.
If the radar sensor is removed the AGROTRONIC-hD signals an error code. Upon removal of the radar sensor the radar flag
needs to be reset in order to avoid this error message.
5.1.6 CALIBRATE VALVES

Due to solenoid valve tolerances of the control device an uncomfortable jerking can be felt upon lifting/lowering or upon
driving with shock absorbtion.
The electronic box can be calibrated individually to the lifting and lowering solenoid in order to eliminate this non uniform
behaviour. The procedure is as follows:
CAUTION!
During the calibration process the hoisting gear is lifted and lowered automatically.
1 - Connect attaching device:
- with hydraulic cylinder Ø 80 approx. 1 t
- with hydraulic cylinder Ø 100 approx. 1,5 t
2 - Warm up tractor, lower and lift hoisting gear several times, check the proper adjustment of the position sensor = the
unit must not operate against overpressure.
3 - Lift the attaching device to a medium elevating height (approx. 100 mm cylinder travel distance) and move the op-
erating lever to the stop position.
CAUTION!
The attaching device must have sufficient distance to the ground.
4 - Press key 5, the following indication is displayed: Valves are being calibrated.
Press any key.
The calibration process runs automatically. During the calibration process the yellow diagnosis LED is flashing. Ad-
ditionally the respective LEDs of the outputs under calibration are lighting: First lifting (red LED), subsequently low-
ering (green LED).
Upon termination of the calibration process the yellow LED is lighting permanently, the AGROTRONIC-hD is inter-
locked and can be activated.
• If the calibration process has not been carried out properly error codes 51 and 52 are being displayed.
• The calibration process is aborted by means of pressing any key.
5.1.7 QUIT
Quit the Agrotronic-hD program by means of pressing the key 6 or by selecting via the cursor keys.
20-138
5.2 ERROR CODES OF THE AGROTRONIC-HD

The AGROTRONIC-l-h - hD includes a diagnosis system which constantly monitors all functions as well as the sensors.
Occuring errors are indicated by flashing of the yellow LED (1) and then saved in the error memory of the E-box.
Fig. 50 - Diagnosis LED
Example (see figure 49)

Error code 21 = blinking two times (tens) – blinking pause of 1,5 sec –blinking one time (ones)
Error code 11 = blinking one time (tens) – blinking pause of 1,5 sec –blinking one time (ones)
Two error codes are separated from each other by a blinking pause of 3 sec.
20-139
5.2.1 EHR I – H - HD LEVEL ERRORS

All occuring errors are classified into three error levels upon which the AGROTRONIC I – I – hD reacts differently:
• Critical error: Error code 11 ... 19
• Medium error: Error code 22 ... 26
• Non-critical error:Error code 31 ... 52
Error level Reaction of the AGROTRONIC-hD

Error codes with initial digit 1.
Critical error The control is stopped; the system is locked. The control can only be resumed after recovering the
error, switching the ignition off and on again and reactivating the system.
The control is stopped; the system is locked and cannot be reactivated. The error display can only
Medium error be terminated after recovering the error, switching the ignition off and on again and reactivating
the system. Upon these errors lifting and lowering of the hoisting unit is still possible by means of
the remote push-buttons.
Non-critical error The control is not stopped; the system is not locked. The error display will only be terminated after
recovering the error.
5.2.2 CRITICAL ERROR

Error
Short description Error description
code
11 Output stage lifting Cable to lifting solenoid: Short circuit or open connection
12 Output stage lowering Cable to lowering solenoid: Short circuit or open connection
16 Power supply for voltage The operator’s console and for the operating lever is not OK
17 Battery Battery voltage too high (exceeds 16 V)
Signal not OK.
18 Main control
- Operating lever not connected or wire breakage
19 Battery Battery voltage too low (below 10 V)
5.2.3 MEDIUM ERRORS

Error
code
Signal not OK
- Wire breakage
22 Position sensor - Position sensor not connected
- Short circuit or short circuit to ground
- Wrong adjustment of the position sensor
Signal not OK.
23 Depth set
- Wire breakage or potentiometer not connected
Signal not OK.
24 Maximum height
- Wire breakage or potentiometer not connected
26 Power supply voltage Power supply voltage for the position sensor not OK (Uv ref = 5,5 ± 1V (CC)
20-140
5.2.4 NON-CRITICAL ERRORS

Error
code
Signal not OK.
- Wire breakage
31 Draft sensor right - Draft sensor not connected
- Draft sensor has been overloaded
Signal not OK.
- Wire breakage
32 Draft sensor left - Draft sensor not connected
- Draft sensor has been overloaded
Lower rate Signal not OK

34
(Lowering speed control) - Wire breakage or potentiometer not connected
Intermix Signal not OK.

36 (Function selector knob) - Wire breakage or potentiometer not connected
Despite of current flowing through the solenoid for lifting the hoisting unit is
not lifting within 30 sec because.
37 Main control valve unit
- the oil supply for the control drive unit is not OK
- the control drive unit became stuck
True ground speed Signal not OK.

41
(RADAR) - Error only occurs when the traction control is switched on.
Signal not OK.
Indicated (theoretical) - speed Error only occurs when the traction control is switched on.
42
ground CAUTION: If both speed signals are not OK no error will be indicated, as this
state is normal upon standstill of the tractor.
44 External sensor Signal not OK or short circuit to power supply voltage.
Output signal to front
45 Signal not OK. Wire breakage or short circuit
axle drive relay
Output signal to solenoid
46 Signal not OK. Wire breakage or short circuit
valve differential lock
Calibration lifting
51 solenoid
Calibration not carried out correctly.
Calibration lowering
52 Calibration not carried out correctly.
solenoid
20-141
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER
6. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF THE INFOCENTER

As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor (infocenter) and computer needs to be established so as to
check the infocenter by means of the EDS program resp. to change the constant values. The interface cable and the adapt-
er cable are serving for this purpose (see figure).
1 - Connect plug (1) of the interface cable with the designation ”EIC” to the computer (COM interface).
3 - Connect the 2-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (10) – designation ”Info center” – of the adapter cable
5 - Switch on ignition
7 - Make sure that the right option is called in the initial menu:
Option 4 -> plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 1
equipped with a central diagnosis interface.
To be able to check the Infocenter however, with these tractors it is necessary to connect the 2-pole plug of the interface
cable directly with the diagnosis terminal of the Infocenter. The diagnosis terminal is located in the cable harness at the
backside of the Infocenter.
20-142

6.1.1 MAIN MENU
Fig. 52 - Main menu
In the upper part of the window information about the selected interface (COM 1, COM 2) as well as information about the
hardware version (Infocenter) and the software can be found.
The lower part of the window contains the select menu for the subprograms of the Infocenter diagnosis. The cursor is flash-
ing behind “function”.
The respective subprograms can be called by means of pressing the specified key:
• F1 launches the subprogram “Change constant values”
• F2 launches the subprogram “Diagnosis printout”
• F3 launches the subprogram “Test mode”
• END terminates the Infocenter diagnosis program and calls the EDS initial menu.
20-143
6.1.2 F1 – CONSTANTS CHANGE

By pressing the key F1 an additional window headlined “display and program constants” appears:
Fig. 53 - Display and program constants
It is possible to compare the stored constants in the Infocenter with the help of the constant list (see item 3, resp. vehicle
workshop manual).
• Procedure for changing constant values:
Select the desired constant value by means of the cursor keys (the corresponding line is highlighted)
- Press the ENTER key. By doing so, another window appears in which the new value can be entered.
- Press the ENTER key again to confirm the change and return to the constant values menu.
When the proper values are assigned to all constants, the main menu is called again by selecting the bottom line “End
constant values menu” (and pressing ENTER).
CAUTION!
The realized changes are only saved after terminating the diagnosis program and subsequently switching the ig-
nition off and on again.
20-144
6.1.3 F2 – DIAGNOSIS PRINT

Upon pressing the key F2 the diagnosis printout menu appears:
• Printer ready?
• ESC = No, abort
• Return = Yes, printout
Press the ESC key (keyboard top left) to abort the procedure and to return to the main menu.
Press the ENTER key (Return) to start the diagnosis printout:
Fig. 54 - Diagnosis printout
The data from “production date” are only valid for the supplier of the INFOCENTER.
20-145
6.1.4 F3 – TEST MODE

Upon pressing the key F3 the test mode appears. At the lower screen edge the test mode menu is displayed:
It is possible to do the following by pressing the key:

• F1 Check the inputs into the INFOCENTER.
• F2 Set (activate) the outputs of the INFOCENTER.
• F3 Check the LCDs (upon INFOCENTER 2 and 3).
• F5 Check the analog inputs into the INFOCENTER.
• F6 Check the pointer instruments.
• END Leave the test mode; subsequently the main menu appears.
TEST MODE > F1 CHECK INPUTS

Upon pressing the key F1 the following window appears:
(The representation shows the example of an INFOCENTER 2 in the AGROTRON 150. The ignition is switched ON.)
Fig. 56 - Check inputs
• Check inputs > parking brake

The signal input of the hand brake control switch at plug X 130, pin 8 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is
tested.
- Locking brake actuated: Indication hand brake ON
- Locking brake released: Indication hand brake OFF
• Check inputs > Air filter
The signal input of the negative pressure switch air filter at plug X 131, pin 8 of the INFO-CENTER (only for INFOCENTER
3) is tested.
- Ignition on, indication air filter OFF
- Start engine, connect cable of negative pressure switch, indication air filter ON
20-146
• Check inputs > Transm.fl.press.

The signal input of the system pressure switch at plug X 130, pin 7 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is test-
ed.
- Engine off, ignition on: Indication transmission oil pressure ON
- Start engine: Indication transmission oil pressureOFF
• Check inputs > air pressure

The signal input of the pressure transducer at plug X 131, pin 17 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3) is tested.
Engine off, ignition on, indication pressurized air gauge > 7 bar:
- Indication pressurized air off
Ignition on, reduce boiler pressure to < 5 bar by repeated braking:
- Indication pressurized air ON
• Check inputs > eng. oil level

This function cannot be tested as it is not realized (transmitter not existing).
• Check inputs > Preheat

The signal input of the preheating time control unit at plug X 131, pin 19 of the INFOCENTER (only for INFOCENTER 3)
is tested.
- Ignition ON, during preheating process indication ON, subsequently indication OFF.
• Check inputs > Front PTO

The signal input of the switch front power take-off at plug X 131, pin 10 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition ON, indication FRONT power take-off OFF
- Start engine, front power take-off ON, indication front power take-off ON
• Check inputs > Rear PTO

The signal input of the switch rear power take-off at plug X 131, pin 11 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
- Ignition ON, indication rear power take-off OFF
- Start engine, rear power take-off ON, indication rear power take-off ON
• Check inputs > road lights

The signal input of the switch dipped beam at plug X 130, pin 4 of the INFOCENTER is tested .
- Ignition ON, switch dipped beam OFF, indication dipped beam OFF
- Ignition ON, switch dipped beam ON, indication dipped beam ON
• Check inputs > turn signal 2

The signal input of the multifunctional switch at plug X 131, pin 2 of the INFOCENTER is tested.
With connected trailer the indication changes between flashing indicator 2 on and flashing indicator 2 off in the rhythm
of the flashing.
• Check inputs > turn signal

- Ignition on, flashing indicator not actuated indication flashing indicator off
- Ignition on, actuate flashing indicator indication changes between flashing indicator on and off.
• Check inputs > high beam

- Ignition ON, Indication: Main beam OFF
- Switch ON main beam (flash light) Indication: Main beam ON
Press the ENTER key to return to the TEST MODE.

TEST MODE > F2 SET OUTPUTS
20-147
Fig. 57 - Set outputs
The last line “End output menu” is marked by a bar. Press the cursor keys to move the bar to the desired function and start
the function by pressing ENTER.
• Set outputs > Lamp test

All LEDs (light emitting diodes) in the INFOCENTER are tested.
- Indication: All LEDs are lighting up.
For terminating the test step select “Reset outputs” and press the RETURN key.
- Indication: All LEDs are extinguishing.
• Set outputs > Warning lamp

The central warning light in the INFOCENTER 3 is tested.
- Indication: The warning light is lighting up.
- Indication: The warning light is extinguishing.
• Set outputs > Beep

The acoustic alarm - beep - in the INFOCENTER 3 is tested.
- Indication: The acoustic alarm - beep – is sounding.
- Indication: Beep stops.
• Set outputs > true ground speed

With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the true ground speed (plug X130 pin 5) to pin 1 of the signal
socket.
- Indication: Ground frequency on.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 1 (true ground speed sig-
nal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints with ground frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with ground frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)
20-148
• Set outputs > theor. ground speed

With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the theoretical ground speed (plug X130 pin 11) to pin 2 of
the signal socket.
- Indication: Wheel frequency ON.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 2 (theoretical ground
speed signal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints:with wheel frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with wheel frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)
• Set outputs > rear P.T.O.
With this test step a signal is transmitted from the output of the power take-off speed (plug X130 pin 6) to pin 3 of the sig-
nal socket.
- Indication: RPTO frequency on.
Now a voltage signal is existing at the 7-pole signal socket. Measuring is possible between pin 3 (power take-off speed
signal) and pin 7 (ground).
- Setpoints: with RPTO frequency on: approx. 0,8 V (DC)
with RPTO frequency off: approx. 8 V (DC)
• Set outputs > Reset outputs

All set outputs are reset and replaced by the original values.
Select “End output menu” and press the ENTER key to reset all outputs automatically and change into the test mode.
TEST MODE > F3 CHECK LCD

Fig. 58 - Check LCD displays
The last line “End LCD menu” is marked by a bar. Press the cursor keys to move the bar to the desired function and start
the function by pressing ENTER.
20-149
•Check LCD > 7 segment all segments off

All segments are cleared in the indication fields for operating-
hours, speed, etc.
• Check LCD > 7 segment horizontal segments
All horizontal segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > 7 segment vertical segments
All vertical segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > 7 segment all segments on
All segments appear in the indication fields.
• Check LCD > Checkctl – all dots off
All indications are deleted in the warning and maintenance display
(only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > Checkctl – chess board pattern
In the warning and maintenance display every field is filled with a
weak grid (only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > Checkctl – all dots on
In the warning and maintenance display every field is filled with a
slightly stronger grid than in the test step “chess board pattern”
(only for INFOCENTER 3).
• Check LCD > End LCD menu
Select this item to return to the test mode menu.
TEST MODE > F5 ANALOG INPUTS

Upon pressing the key F5 when the ignition is switched on the following window appears:
Fig. 59 - Check analog inputs
20-150
The values of charge control and terminal 15 reference will change when the engine is running:
Check analog inputs:

0 Tank 11,4% analog value
1 Temperature 100% analog value
2 Charge control 100% analog value
3 Terminal 15 reference 13,7 Volt terminal 15 voltage
• Analog inputs > Tank

The signal of the tank transducer at plug X 131, pin 13 of the INFOCENTER is tested: The indicated % value corre-
sponds to the actual tank level. It is the percentage of the existing terminal 15 reference. When the plug is pulled off from
the tank transducer 100% will be indicated.
• Analog inputs > Temperature

The signal of the temperature sensor (engine coolant) at plug X 131, pin 15 of the INFO-CENTER is tested. The relation
between the input signal and the reference voltage terminal 15 is indicated in %.
• Analog inputs > Charge control

The signal of the charge control for the electric generator at plug X 131, pin 7 of the INFO-CENTER is tested. When the
engine is running a display of 100% indicates proper charging by the electric generator.
• Analog inputs > Terminal 15 reference

The power supply on terminal 15 at plug X 130, pin 2 of the INFOCENTER is tested. The indication 13,7 V is the actual
operating voltage.
Press the ENTER key to return to the TEST MODE.
TEST MODE > F6 POINTER

Upon pressing the key F6 the following window appears: The cursor is flashing behind “engine speed angle”. Engine speed
angle signifies Revolution Counter Angle.
Fig. 60 - Move pointer to position
• Pointer > Engine speed angle

Enter an angle, e.g. 180.
- Display: DZM angle 180 <<
After pressing the ENTER key the pointer of the engine speed indication will move from its 0 position by 180 (to about
1900 rpm).
20-151
• Pointer > Tank angle

After having performed the previous test step the following window appears:
- The cursor is flashing behind “Tank angle”.

- Display: Tank angle 45 <<
Dopo aver premuto il tasto INVIO il puntatore del serbatoio si sposterà dalla posizione 0 di 45° verso il centro dello stru-
mento indicatore (il quale dispone di un angolo di indicazione generale di 90° ù
• Pointer > Temperature angle
After pressing the ENTER key the tank pointer will move from its 0 position by 45 towards the center of the indicating in-
strument. (The indicating instrument has an overall indication angle of 90.)

- Display: Temp angle 45 <<
After pressing the ENTER key the temperature pointer will move from its 0 position by 45 o towards the center of the in-
dicating instrument. (The indicating instrument has an overall indication angle of 90 o .) Simultaneously the pointer win-
dow is quit and the main menue reappears.
6.1.5 END =QUIT THE INFOCENTER PROGRAM

Upon pressing the “End” key the following window appears:
In case of INFOCENTER 3 a gong is sounding now and all LEDs are lighting up. Subsequently, for about three seconds the
message “Read EProm from multipurpose instrument” appears.
20-152
The realized changes from the item “F1=change constant values” are saved. Changes like “Move pointer to position” etc.
are rejected and a self-test of the INFOCENTER will be performed.
Subsequently the EDS initial menu reappears (compare part A 1.3 “Launching and terminating of the EDS program”).
6.2 CONSTANT VALUES FOR INFOCENTER

Every INFOCENTER is programmed with 14 constant values in order to take into account the design features of the tractor,
which can be, e.g.
• Indication of the ground speed in km/h or mph
• Indication of the power take-off speed
• Radar sensor: existing or not existing
The central unit needs to be programmed with a specific progression of constant values which determines the type of trac-
tor and the design features. Every progression of constant values has a running number (K...) which is unique.
NOTE. Upon calibration (traveling the 100 m distance) the constant values 9 and 10 will be newly determined.
The constant values are displayed by the central unit upon the following conditions:
• Ignition OFF; dipped beam OFF
• Pull the main beam switch and hold it
• Switch ON the ignition
• After approx. 10 sec the constant values are flashing and can thus be read; Release the main beam switch
• Return to normal indication by means off ignition OFF-ON
The number of the constant value is indicated in the “speed” display and the value is indicated in the “Operating-hours” dis-
play.
• K1 - Theoretical ground speed above 15 km/h
• K2 - Rear power take-off
• K3 - not occupied
• K4 - Front power take-off 100 rpm
Upon later up-grading of the front power take-off K4 does not need to be programmed.
• K5 - Operating-hours
• K6 - (Gear ratio engine – electric generator) engine speed
• K7 - Constant value for the true ground speed (radar sensor) above 15 km/h
• K8 - Determination of km/h or mph, language, radar sensor existing/not existing
• K9 - Theoretical ground speed below 15 km/h. Determined by calibration (traveling the 100 m distance)
• K10 - True ground speed (radar sensor) below 15 km/h. Determined by calibration (traveling the 100 m distance)
• K12 - Rear power take-off
20-153
Table 1: Constant values K1 – K14
Agrotron
80-100 105 106 - 135 150

Constant 160 - 200 230 - 260
4.70 - 4095 6.01 6.00 - 6.30 6.45
K11) 3809 3675 2438 2826 1660/14402) 2220/20783)
K2 20 29/64) 70
K3 0
K4 210
K5 Operating hours
4800
1800
K6 (mechanical engine speed controller)
(electronic engine
speed controller)
K7 1000
K8 see Table 2
K91) 3809 3675 2438 2826 1660/14402) 2220/20783)
K10 1000
K11 0
K12 6
K13 0
K14 0
NOTA
1) In case of the Agrotron tractors 80 – 150 the data of K1 and K9 refer to the 30 / 40 km/h version. For the 50 km/h version
these values need to be taken from table 3 and are to be entered accordingly.
2) Until month of construction 01/99: 1660, from month of construction 01/99 on: 1440
3) The constant values K1 and K9 for Agrotron 230/260 need to be chosen according to the tyre size (group 1; group 2)
as stated in table 4.
4) 29: with factory mounted sensor
6: with upgraded sensor (assembly set 04426723)
20-154
Table 2: Values of constant K8
Value of Radar sensor Flashing light -

Language Speed display
constant K8 existing? beep
75 danish km/h NO ON
107 danish km/h SI ON
11 danish km/h NO OFF
43 danish km/h SI OFF
65 german km/h NO ON
97 german km/h SI ON
1 german km/h NO OFF
33 german km/h SI OFF
66 english km/h NO ON
67 english km/h NO ON
98 english km/h YES ON
99 english km/h YES ON
2 english km/h NO OFF
3 english km/h NO OFF
34 english km/h YES OFF
35 english km/h YES OFF
69 french km/h NO ON
101 french km/h YES ON
5 french km/h NO OFF
37 french km/h YES OFF
77 italian km/h NO ON
109 italian km/h YES ON
13 italian km/h NO OFF
45 italian km/h YES OFF
79 dutch km/h NO ON
111 dutch km/h YES ON
15 dutch km/h NO OFF
47 dutch km/h YES OFF
73 portugese km/h NO ON
105 portugese km/h YES ON
10 portugese km/h NO OFF
41 portugese km/h YES OFF
71 spanish km/h NO ON
103 spanish km/h YES ON
7 spanish km/h NO OFF
39 spanish km/h YES OFF
20-155
Table 3: Constants K1; K9 for 30/40 km/h version, resp. 50 km/h version, and constant K6 depending on the engine con-
troller
K1 = K9 K1 = K9 Engine version, K6
Typ Vehicle ID no. EMR✽✽
30/40 50 km/h mech. controller
8001/8002 4.70 3809 – 1800 4400
8003/8004 4.80/80 3809 – 1800 4400
8005/8006 4.85/85 3809 – 1800 4400
8007/8008 4.90/90 3809 – 1800 4400
8009/8010 4.95/100 3809 – 1800 4400
8011 6.00/106 2438 – 1800 4800
8012 6.00/106 2438 2372 1800 4800
8013 6.05/110 2438 – 1800 4800
8014 6.05/110 2438 2372 1800 4800
8015 6.15 2438 – 1800 4800
8016 6.15 2438 2372 1800 4800
8017 6.20/120 2438 – 1800 4800
8018 6.20/120 2438 2267 1800 4800
8019 6.30/135 2438 2267 1800 4800
8020 6.45/150 2826 2411 1800 4800
8028 6.01/105 3675 – 1800 4400
8029 160 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8030 175 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8031 200 1660/1440✽ – – 4800
8058 230 – 2220 – 4800
8058 230 – 2078 – 4800
8059 260 – 2220 – 4800
8059 260 – 2078 – 4800
8063 115 2438 2372 1800 4800
8092/8093 120/135 – 2326 – 4800
✽ 1660: until month of construction 01/99, 1440 from month of construction 01/99
✽✽ EMR= electronic motor controller
Table 4: Constants K1; K9 for Agrotron 230 and 260 depending on the rear wheel tyres.
Group 1 Group 2
K1 = K9 =2220 K1 = K9 =2220
Designation Circumferential line (mm) Designation Circumferential line (mm)
20.8 R 42 5783 710 / 70 R 42 6180
650 / 65 R 42 5744 650 / 65 R 46 6060
620 / 70 R 42 5810 650 / 85 R 38 6084
710 / 75 R 34 5761 620 / 70 R 46 6120
710 / 70 R 38 5780 – –
580 / 70 R 42 5700 – –
20-156
EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System) DIAGNOSIS OF THE SPRING-SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE
7. PREPARATIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS OF THE SPRING-SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE
As a preparatory measure the connection between tractor and computer needs to be established so as to check the front
axle control unit. The interface cable and the adapter cable are serving for this purpose (see figure).
3 - Connect the 4-pole plug (4) of the interface cable to the plug (12) – designation ”front axle spring-suspension” – of the
adapter cable
5 - Switch on ignition and start the engine
7 - Make sure that the right option is called in the initial menu:
Option 6 ->plug (2) with the designation ”9141” to interface COM 1
20-157

7.1.1 MAIN MENU
Fig. 65 - Main menu
The main menu serves for the activation of the individual submenus. There are two ways to accomplish this purpose:
• Press one of the keys 1 – 7
• Select the desired subprogram by means of the cursor keys (arrow up/arrow down) and confirm by pressing the ENTER
key.
Press the ESC key to quit the subprograms and to return to the main menu.
7.1.2 MONITOR INPUT/OUTPUT

There are two plugs connected at the electronic box of the spring-suspended front axle (below the bottle holder): A black
plug with the designation JX3 and a white plug with the designation JX4. The input and output signals are transfered into
the elctronic box via these two plugs.
Upon selection of menu item 1, all input and output signals existing at the control box of the spring-suspended front axle
are displayed on the screen.
Fig. 66 - Monitor Input/output
20-158
• Monitor input/output > 4WD (4RM)

The all-wheel drive input signal is transfered into the electronic box via plug JX4, pin 11. When the all-wheel drive is
switched off you can measure a voltage of 12 V between pin 11 and ground. This voltage is transfered from the central
electrical system (safety circuit board) via plug P3, pin 17.
For switching the axle ON/OFF upon standstill of the tractor (v < 2 km/h) this signal must amount to 12 Volt.
• Monitor input/output > Brake

The input signal of the brake is transfered into the electronic box via plug JX4, pin 13. When the brake is not actuated
a voltage of 12 V is transfered into the electronic box from the central electric system plug P3, pin 19 via relay 8 and fuse
no. 10.
For switching the axle ON/OFF upon standstill of the tractor (v < 2 km/h) this signal must amount to 12 Volt.
• Monitor input/output > Switch

Input signal of the rocker switch spring-suspension on/off. When the rocker switch is pressed, a voltage of 12 V is ex-
isting at pin 1 of the rocker switch plug being transfered to the electronic box JX4, pin 12.
• Monitor input/output > Ground speed (km/h)

The signal (130 pulses/meter travel distance) is generated from the bevel gear shaft sensor, being transfered into the
electronic box via the plug AS3, pin 4 (under the right side console near the floor mat) and via the plug JX4, pin 19.
• Monitor input/output > Sensor Position (Volt)

The position sensor signal is transfered from pin 2 (middle pin) at the position sensor into the electronic box via the plug
JX4, pin 14. The setpoints are:
Axle off lowered: 1,8 ... 1,9 Volt
Axle on in medium position: 4,0 Volt
Axle on fully lifted: 6,0 Volt
Removed sensor in normal position: 1,5 Volt; pressed position: 6,4 Volt
• Monitor input/output > Raise Valve

When the vehicle is lifted a current is injected into the solenoid valve for lifting via pin 1 at the plug JX3. Between pin 1
and 2 of the solenoid valve for lifting a voltage of 12 Volt can be measured.
• Monitor input/output > Lower Valve

During the lowering process of the axle a current is injected into the solenoid valve for lowering via pin 2 at the plug JX3.
Between pin 1 and 2 of the solenoid valve for lowering a voltage of 12 Volt can be measured.
• Monitor input/output > Load sense Valve

During the lowering/lifting process of the axle a current is injected into the load sensing valve via pin 2 at the plug JX4.
Between pin 1 and 2 of the load sensing valve a voltage of 12 Volt can then be measured.
• Monitor input/output > Lamp

When the spring-suspension of the axle is active, the electronic box transfers a voltage to the lamp located in the rocker
switch via JX4, pin 8. This lamp indicates whether the spring-suspension is switched on and serves for indicating the er-
ror code by flashing in case of a pending error.
Read error code indication: Example: Error code 15
blinking one time (tens) – short pause (1,5 seconds) –blinking five times (ones). Two error codes are separated from
each other by a blinking pause of approx. 3 seconds. For a list of error codes see item E4.
20-159
7.1.3 OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS

The parameters saved in the control box (standard data) are displayed.
Fig. 67 - Operational Parameters
CAUTION!
In this program item the parameters cannot be altered.
7.1.4 DISPLAY CONTROLLER ERRORS

In this menu all errors saved in the control box are displayed.
Fig. 68 - Display Controller Errors
20-160
7.1.5 CLEAR CONTROLLER ERROR

All errors saved in the control box are erased.
Fig. 69 - Clear Controller Errors
7.1.6 RELOAD EEPROM WITH DEFAULT

By means of this menu the parameters (standard data) are written into the control box, e.g. upon replacement or data loss
of the control box (for the list of parameters refer to submenu item 2.3 in this manual). The parameters are permanently
saved in the program EDS and cannot be altered.
Fig. 70 - Reload EEPROM with Defaults
7.1.7 CALIBRATE SENSOR

This menu item is not executable. The position sensor setting is carried out upon lowered axle by means of corresponding
adjustment in the support to 1,8 – 1,9 Volt.
7.1.8 QUIT
The diagnosis program of the spring-suspended front axle is terminated and the EDS initial menu reappears.
20-161
7.2 PIN ASSIGNMENT OF THE ELECTRONIC BOX “SPRING-SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE ”
Black plug JX3
Pin Designation Remarks
JX3-1 Output solenoid valve “lifting” 12V
JX3-2 Output solenoid valve “lowering” 12V
12 V ZE: J2-7 ; Fuse F17 with 7,5A

JX3-4 Power supply electronic box
(with old design via overhung relay)
12 V ZE: J2-7 ; Fuse F17 with 7,5A

JX3-5 Power supply electronic box
(with old design via overhung relay)
JX3-20 Ground electronic box
White plug JX4
Pin Designation Remarks
JX4-2 Output solenoid valve load sensing 12V
JX4-8 Output diagnosis lamp 12V
JX4-9 Power supply position sensor 8V
JX4-11 Input all-wheel drive signal 12 V in case of all-wheel drive “OFF” from ZE P3-17
JX4-12 Input spring-suspension “ON/OFF” 12 from push-button PIN 1
JX4-13 Input brake signal 12 V if brake is not actuated; from ZE P3-19 via RL8 and F11
JX4-14 Analog input position sensor PIN 2 position sensor (2-6 V)
JX4-15 ISO-9141 serial interface k-line PIN 13 at diagnosis plug
JX4-17 Ground position sensor PIN 1 position sensor
pulses/m via INFOCENTER from bevel gear shaft sensor

JX4-19 Input theoretical ground speed
(from AS3-4)
JX4-22 ISO-9141 serial interface k-line PIN 14 at diagnosis plug
NOTE. The pins not mentioned are not occupied!
Mounting position of the E-box: Left side console under the blottle holder
Regarding the old system (press key for about 5 sec.): Overhung relay serves for resetting the E-box; switching is per-
formed through terminal 50 (picked up at AS1-4) and fuse-protected via an overhung fuse (5A).
20-162
7.3 ERROR CODES
Code Error description Connection Error description
11 Short circuit or interruption in the output to

Lifting solenoid JX3-1
solenoid valve “lifting”
Short circuit or interruption in the output to

12 Lowering solenoid JX3-2
solenoid valve “lowering”
Short circuit or interruption in the output to LS

13 Load sensing solenoid JX4-2
solenoid valve
Position sensor signal missing or out of

15 Position sensor JX4-14 working range, setpoint:
Axle lowered 1,8 ... 1,9 Volt
Error in the power supply voltage, setpoint 8

16 Position sensor JX4-9
Volt between pin 1 and 3 at the sensor
JX3-4
17 Battery Battery voltage exceeds 16 Volt
JX3-5
JX3-4
19 Battery Battery voltage is below 10 Volt
JX3-5
21 Rocker switch JX4-8 Short circuit in the rocker switch lamp.
20-163
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONTENTS
SECTION 30
CONTENTS
METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION

OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING ON THE VALVE FOR CAB LIFTING
TRACTOR BODY .......................................................... 1 • Removal and refitting ................................................ 27
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING TRAILER AIR BRAKES COUPLING VALVE
(CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE....................... 2 • Removal and renewal................................................ 28
DETAIL OF PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE....................... 3 • Operation .................................................................. 29
• Maintenance.............................................................. 31
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING
(CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE....................... 4 COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT
• Tensioning................................................................. 31
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION). 5
DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND RECHARGING
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION) ........ 6 THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM........................... 32
SYSTEMS AND SUPPLEMENTARY HYDRAULIC AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
COUPLERS (LS VERSION) .......................................... 7 • Removal .................................................................... 34
ENGINE HOOD AND LAMP ASSEMBLIES • Refitting..................................................................... 35
• Removal and adjustment ............................................ 9 RECEIVER-DRIER – (106-150 CV models)
• Refitting..................................................................... 12 • Removal and refitting ................................................ 36
CAB ACCESS STEPS RECEIVER-DRIER – (165 CV model)
• Removal and refitting................................................ 13 • Removal and refitting ................................................ 37
BATTERY CONDENSER COOLING FAN (165 CV model)
• Removal .................................................................... 14 • Removal .................................................................... 38
• Refitting..................................................................... 15 • Refitting..................................................................... 39
AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT CONDENSER ASSEMBLY (106-150 CV models)
(For versions with air trailer braking only) • Removal .................................................................... 40
• Removal and refitting................................................ 16 • Refitting..................................................................... 41
STARTER MOTOR GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS –
• Removal and refitting............................................... 17 (106-150 CV models)
ALTERNATOR • Removal .................................................................... 42
• Removal and refitting............................................... 18 • Refitting..................................................................... 43
ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS
• Renewal and tensioning............................................ 19 (165 CV model)
• Removal .................................................................... 44
AIR COMPRESSOR • Refitting..................................................................... 45
• Removal .................................................................... 22
• Refitting..................................................................... 23 RADIATOR (106-150 CV models)
• Removal .................................................................... 46
TRAILER PARKING AND SERVICE AIR BRAKE • Refitting..................................................................... 47
CONTROL VALVES
• Removal .................................................................... 24 RADIATOR (165 CV model)
• Refitting..................................................................... 25 • Removal .................................................................... 48
• Refitting..................................................................... 49
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Versions with air braking)
• Removal and refitting................................................ 26 EXPANSION TANK
• Removal and refitting ................................................ 50
30-i
CONTENTS
FAN (106-150 CV models) FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY

• Removal.....................................................................51 • Removal .................................................................... 90
• Refitting .....................................................................52 • Refitting..................................................................... 92
FAN (165 CV model) FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY
• Removal.....................................................................53 • Removal and refitting................................................ 93
• Refitting .....................................................................54 FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
COMPLETE RADIATOR/COOLERS ASSEMBLY (Where fitted)
• Removal.....................................................................55 • Removal .................................................................... 94
• Refitting .....................................................................57 • Refitting..................................................................... 96
FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING • Disassembly and assembly ...................................... 97
• Renewal .....................................................................58 FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT
• Refitting .....................................................................59 (Versions with front suspension)
TURBOCHARGER • Removal .................................................................... 99
• Removal.....................................................................60 • Refitting................................................................... 101
• Refitting .....................................................................60 FRONT SUSPENSION SOLENOID VALVES
ENGINE AIR INLET PIPE • Removal and refitting.............................................. 102
• Disassembly .............................................................61 FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
• Refitting .....................................................................61 • Removal and positioning ........................................ 103
AIR CLEANER REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS
• Removal.....................................................................62 (Versions with front lift only)
• Refitting .....................................................................63 • Removal and refitting.............................................. 105
EXHAUST PIPE FRONT CARRIER
• Removal and refitting.................................................64 (Versions with front suspension)
SILENCER • Removal and refitting.............................................. 106
• Removal and refitting.................................................65 ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER
4WD PROPELLER SHAFT • Renewal and testing ............................................... 107
(Version with front suspension) FUEL TANK
• Removal.....................................................................66 • Removal .................................................................. 109
• Refitting .....................................................................68 • Refitting................................................................... 111
BRAKE CYLINDERS TESTING THE
• Removal.....................................................................69 AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS............................... 112
• Refitting ....................................................................70
HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP
BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM .........................71 (106-115 CV models) (CC version)
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCHES • Removal .................................................................. 114
• Adjustment ................................................................73 • Refitting................................................................... 115
POWER STEERING GEAR PUMP ASSEMBLY
• Testing and removal ..................................................74 (120-165 CV models) (CC version)
• Removal .................................................................. 116
POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS
• Refitting................................................................... 117
• Removal and renewal ................................................76
VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP
FRONT WHEELS
(106-165 CV models) (LS version)
• Removal and refitting.................................................84
• Removal .................................................................. 118
FRONT FENDERS • Refitting................................................................... 120
• Removal and refitting.................................................85
POWER STEERING PUMP
REAR WHEELS (106-115 CV models) (CC version)
• Removal and refitting.................................................86 • Removal and refitting.............................................. 121
LIFT VALVE BLOCK PRIORITY VALVE (106 - 115 CV models)
• Removal and refitting.................................................87 • Removal and refitting.............................................. 122
FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS PRIORITY VALVE (120-165 CV models)
• Removal.....................................................................88 (Versions with variable displacement pump)
• Refitting .....................................................................89 • Removal and refitting.............................................. 123
30-ii
CONTENTS
CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER ENGINE ECU

• Removal and refitting.............................................. 124 • Removal and refitting .............................................. 165
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (CC version) CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES
• Removal .................................................................. 125 (Power Shift version)................................................ 166
• Refitting................................................................... 128 CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version) (Power Shuttle version) ........................................... 169
• Removal .................................................................. 129 CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE
• Refitting................................................................... 131 AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES BLOCK • Removal .................................................................. 171
• Disassembly ........................................................... 132 • Refitting................................................................... 174
• Assembly ................................................................ 133 PTO ENGAGEMENT AND
LIFT CYLINDERS SPEED SELECTION CONTROL CABLES
• Removal .................................................................. 134 • Renewal .................................................................. 175
• Refitting................................................................... 135 AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES
• Disassembly ........................................................... 136 • Renewal ................................................................. 178
LIFT POSITION SENSOR • Refitting................................................................... 179
• Testing .................................................................... 137 ADJUSTMENT OF THE
• Renewal .................................................................. 138 PARKING BRAKE MICROSWITCH ........................ 180
LIFT DRAFT SENSOR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
• Removal and refitting.............................................. 141 • Removal and refitting .............................................. 181
DRIVER'S SEAT RENEWAL OF THE HEATER VALVE ....................... 182
• Removal and refitting.............................................. 142 CAB HEATER MATRIX
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN • Removal .................................................................. 184
SWITCH UNIT, INSTRUMENT PANEL • Refitting................................................................... 186
• Removal .................................................................. 143 AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR
• Refitting................................................................... 144 • Removal .................................................................. 187
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND • Refitting................................................................... 188
SHUTTLE CONTROL RIGHT AIR CONDITIONING FAN
• Renewal .................................................................. 145 • Removal and refitting .............................................. 189
• Assembly ................................................................ 146
LEFT AIR CONDITIONING FAN
CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD • Removal and refitting .............................................. 190
• Removal .................................................................. 147
ADJUSTMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKES........... 191
• Refitting................................................................... 150
RENEWAL OF THE BOWDEN CABLE FOR
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
THE CAB DOOR LATCH .......................................... 192
• Removal .................................................................. 151
• Refitting .................................................................. 157 TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE
• Removal and refitting .............................................. 194
LEFT-HAND CONSOLE
• Removal .................................................................. 158 POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS DISPLAY
• Refitting................................................................... 159 • Removal and refitting .............................................. 195
LIFT, FRONT SUSPENSION AND CAB
TRANSMISSION ECUs • Removal .................................................................. 196
• Removal .................................................................. 160 • Refitting................................................................... 203
• Refitting................................................................... 162 ENGINE – TRANSMISSION
FUSE AND RELAY BOARD • Separation............................................................... 204
• Removal .................................................................. 163 • Reconnection .......................................................... 211
• Refitting................................................................... 164
30-iii
METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING
METHOD FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OF RIGID PIPES AND WIRING
1 - The rigid pipes of the various systems can all be re- IMPORTANT
moved individually , i.e. without having to remove
1 - After removing pipes, immediately plug the ends
any pipes belonging to other systems.
of the pipes and the open fittings on the compo-
2 - For particularly complex removal operations, num- nents from which they were disconnected in or-
ber the pipes in the order in which they are removed, der to prevent the entry of contaminants.
label any intermediate connections and the posi-
2 - After disconnecting electrical connectors, pro-
tions of the intermediate retaining clamps. Refit the
tect them against oil, dust and other contami-
pipes in reverse order to removal.
nants by covering them in bags made of
3 - After having repositioned the pipes in their original waterproof material and attach the bags to the
locations, tighten the fittings by hand and locate the wiring with insulating tape.
retaining clamps and intermediate fixings.
3 - Should any oil, coolant, moisture or water come
4 - First tighten the fittings using also a holding wrench into contact with the connectors, clean them with
to the torques specified in the tables in Section 00, compressed air at low pressure (max. 2 bar) and
and then tighten the pipe clamps. clean the wires and contacts with isopropyl al-
cohol or a specific water-repellent product.
5 - To enable the operator to determine the correct
routes for the rigid pipes and the wiring harnesses on 4 - Check wiring fixings carefully; these must not im-
the tractor frame, we have provided photographs pinge on the connectors and must be positioned
showing the original routes for the two versions of at regular intervals of about 30 cm to prevent vi-
the tractor with additional oil flow obtained by gear bration that could cause an interruption in cur-
pumps and a variable displacement pump, both of rent flow or signal loss.
which are equipped with air trailer braking.
30-1
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
30-2
DETAIL OF PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
DETAIL OF PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
30-3
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING (CC VERSION WITH PRIORITY VALVE)
30-4
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION)
PUMP SIDE SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION)
30-5
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION)
UPPER SYSTEMS AND WIRING (LS VERSION)
30-6
SYSTEMS AND SUPPLEMENTARY HYDRAULIC COUPLERS (LS VERSION)
SYSTEMS AND SUPPLEMENTARY HYDRAULIC COUPLERS (LS VERSION)
30-7
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ENGINE HOOD AND LAMP ASSEMBLIES
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE HOOD AND LAMP

ASSEMBLIES
1. Removal of the hood
3
1 - Raise the hood (1) fully.
1 2
2 - Disconnect the screen washer pipe (2).
3 - While keeping the hood in the raised position, remove
4
the cotter pins (3) and the washers (4).
F0016900
4 - Detach the gas springs (5) from the frame and remove
the complete hood assembly (1). 5 5
1
F0017000
1.1 Adjustment of the hood latch

11
10
★ Before adjusting the hood latch, make sure that the
hood release buttton is fitted and that the gas springs 9
are disconnected.
1 - Check that the spring (6) is engaged with the plate (7)
6
of the release button (8) and check that when the hood
gasket (9) comes to rest on the frame, the spring (6) en- 8
gages the groove on the striker (10).
If necessary, adjust the depth of the striker by way of 7
self-locking nut (11).
D0003920
2. Removal of the side panels

1 - Lift and remove the grilles (12).
12
F0017010
30-9
2 - Unscrew and remove the front bolts (13).
13
13
F0017020
3 - Unscrew and remove the rear nut (14) and remove the
washer (15).
14
15
F0017030
3. Removal of the lamp assemblies and hood re-

lease button
16
1 - Remove the lateral retaining screws (16).
F0017040
2 - Remove the central retaining screws (17).
17
F0017050
30-10
3 - Unplug the lamp connectors (19) from the lamp as-

semblies (18). 18
19
F0017060
4 - Remove the lamp assemblies (18) by rotating them to

the rear and moving them sideways to disengage the 18
release button (8).
F0017070
5 - If necessary, press the plate (7) of the release button

(8) to help disengage the spring (6).
1 7
F0017080
4. Removal of the lower guard

1 - Remove the four central retaining bolts (20).
20
F0017090
30-11
2 - Removal the side bolts (21), (22) and their washers.
21 22
F0017100
3 - Remove the lower guard (23) by withdrawing it towar-

ds the front of the tractor.
23
F0017110
REFITTING AND ADJUSTMENT

OF ENGINE HOOD AND LAMP 7
ASSEMBLIES
• Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1
★ While engaging the release button with the spring
(6), take care not to break the latch plate (7) by ap-
plying excessive force. 6
01153 F0017080
30-12
CAB ACCESS STEPS
REMOVAL OF THE CAB ACCESS STEPS
1 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (1) securing the lower

fender (2).
F0017170
2 - Loosen the bolts (3) and (4) securing the steps (5).
★ For safety reasons, do not remove the bolts yet.
3
5
4 4
F0017180
3 - Attach a hoist to the steps (5).
Steps: 17 kg (37.5 lb.) 5

4 - Remove the central bolt (3), disengage the steps (5)
from the two remaining bolts (4) and remove the steps.
F0017190
REFITTING THE CAB ACCESS

STEPS
30-13
BATTERY
REMOVAL OF THE BATTERY
1 - Open the tool box (1) and remove the retaining nut (2).
Remove the tool box (1).
2
F0017120
2 - Remove the bolts (3) with their washers (4) and remove
the battery cover (5).
3 4
3 4
F0017130
3 - Remove the terminal covers (6) and disconnect the

leads (7) and (8).
1
Always disconnect the negative lead (–) before 8
the positive lead (+). 6
7
F0017140
4 - Loosen off the nuts (9) sufficiently to tilt and remove

the battery (12) securing clamp (10) and rods (11).
9
10
11 12
F0017150
30-14
BATTERY
5 - Remove the battery (12) using the handles provided.

If the battery is not to be used for several days,
store it in a dry, well-ventilated place at a tem-
perature above +5°.
12
F0017160
REFITTING THE BATTERY

1
Always re-connect the positive lead (+) before the
negative lead (–).
30-15
AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT (versions with air trailer braking only)
REMOVAL OF THE AIR RESERVOIR AND BATTERY SUPPORT

(versions with air trailer braking only)
Discharge the residual pressure from the reservoir.
1 - Remove the battery.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE BATTERY»). 1
2 - Disconnect the pipes (1), (2) and (3) from the valves
mounted directly on the reservoir (4). 2
4
3
F0018110
3 - Support the assembly using suitable lifting equip-

ment; unscrew and remove the bolts (5) and spacers 6
(6) and (7).
★ Note that the thicker spacers are located at the top
of the bracket. 5 7
F0018120
4 - Lower the assembly (8); move the battery leads (9) out
of the way and remove the complete assembly.
9
8
F0018130
REFITTING THE AIR RESERVOIR

AND BATTERY SUPPORT
30-16
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL OF THE STARTER MOTOR
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega-

tive battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the left hood side panel (1).
F0021730
2 - Remove the terminal protector (2) and the nut (3) se-
curing leads (4) and (5).
5 3
F0017260
3 - Remove the terminal cover (6) and disconnect the lead

(7). 6 8
4 - Remove the starter motor (8).
For details, see the engine manual.
8
7
F0017270
REFITTING THE STARTER MOTOR

30-17
ALTERNATOR
REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF THE ALTERNATOR

1 - Remove the left and right side panels (1).
1
1
F0021710
2 - Remove the terminal protector (2), remove the nut (3)

and disconnect the lead (4).
3 - Remove the nut (5) and disconnect the lead (6).
5
2 3 6
4 F0017280
4 - Loosen the bolts (7) and (8) of the fuel pump bracket (9)
in order to slacken off the drivebelt (10).
8 11
5 - Remove the alternator (11).
For details, see the engine manual. 10
9
F0017290
REFITTING THE ALTERNATOR

• Refit the alternator following the removal steps in re-
verse order and adjust the drivebelt tension.
(For details, see «RENEWAL AND TENSIONING OF
THE ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT»).
30-18
ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT
RENEWAL AND TENSIONING OF THE ALTERNATOR DRIVEBELT
★ The drivebelt must be renewed at the first sign of wear.

Check for fraying, cracks and separation of the belt
plies.
★ Some of the operations described below refer only to
models equipped with front PTO and cab air condi-
tioning.
For machines not equipped with these items, these
operations should be ignored.
tive battery lead (--). 1
1
1 - Remove the side panels (1).
F0021710
2 - Loosen the tensioner block (2) and the nut (3) securing
the compressor (4).
4
3 2
F0017300
3 - Unscrew the threaded rod (5) of the tensioner to slack-

en off the fan drivebelt (6).
★ Loosen the drivebelt sufficiently to be able to slip it
6
off the compressor pulley.
F0017291
4 - Models with front PTO only:

loosen and fully unscrew the six bolts (7) securing the
flange of the cardan shaft (8).
7 10
5 - Detach the flange (9) from the flexible coupling (10).
9
8
F0017310
30-19
6 - Remove the bolts (11) and detach the fan (12) from the
drive pulley; insert the fan in the fan housing (13) and
remove the fan and compressor drivebelt (6). 13
11
6
12
F0017320
7 - Loosen the bolts (14), (15) securing the fuel pump, slip
off the alternator drivebelt (16) and remove it by pas- 15 16
sing it between the crankshaft pulley and the front car- 17
rier.
14
F0017330
8 - Fit the new alternator drivebelt (16) in the same way

and tension it using a ”T” drive bar and a 3/4” exten-
sion, or using a 3/4” angle drive bar through the hole in 15
the fuel pump bracket (18). 16
9 - To tension the drivebelt, turn the bar clockwise and
tighten the bolts (14) and (15). 14
18
F0017340
10 - The tension is to be checked using the tool and pro-

cedure indicated in the engine manual (code 0297
9771).
★ Static deflection ”A” on first fitting:
13 mm belt: 550±50 N
15 mm belt: 650±50 N
★ Static deflection ”A” after 15 minutes:
13 mm belt: 400±50 N
15 mm belt: 500±50 N
The check should be carried out with the engine
A
cold.
F0017350
30-20
11 - Fit the fan drivebelt (6) and tension it as described in

«REMOVAL OF THE CONDITIONING COMPRES-
SOR».
12 - Complete the refitting procedure by following the first
stage of the removal operations in reverse order.
F0017360
30-21
AIR COMPRESSOR (for air trailer braking)
REMOVAL OF THE AIR COMPRESSOR (for air trailer braking)
★ For models with separate power steering pump, first

remove the pump. (For details, see «REMOVAL OF 1
THE POWER STEERING PUMP». 5
2
1 - Loosen the hose clamp (1) and disconnect the hose (2)
from the compressor (3).
4
2 - Loosen the pipe fitting (4) and disconnect the delivery
pipe (5). 3
F0017760
3 - Disconnect the connector (6) of the engine oil filter

clogging sensor and remove the compressor lube
pipe (7).
★ Recover the gaskets, which may be re-utilised if 6
they are not damaged.
F0017770
4 - Remove the bolt (8) securing the bracket (9) and the
retaining strap (10) for the wiring (11). 11
5 - Remove the retaining bolt (12) of the fuel inlet pipe
clamp. 10
8
9
12
F0017780
6 - Unscrew and remove the nut (13) and the two bolts
(14).
13
14
14
F0017790
30-22
AIR COMPRESSOR (for air trailer braking)
7 - Remove the compressor (3) complete with the O-ring

seal (15).
1
Compressor: 12 kg (26.4 lb.)
F0017800
REFITTING THE AIR COMPRESSOR

• Refitting is the reverse of removal. 15
If the oil has been drained from the compressor crank-

case, add engine oil before re-connecting the lube
pipe.
Quantity of lubricating oil:

approximately 100 g (0.220 lb.)
1
★ Check the condition of the O-ring (15).
★ Apply grease to the seating to hold the O-ring (15) F0017810
in position.
30-23
TRAILER PARKING AND SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
REMOVAL OF THE TRAILER PARKING AND

SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the
ignition.
3
Eliminate all residual pressure from the trailer air brak-
ing circuit.
PARKING BRAKES 1
(Versions with air braking) 2
1- Disconnect the hydraulic brakes pipes (2) and upper
air delivery pipes (3) from the valve (1).
F0020410
2 - Disconnect the pipe (4) from the rear of the valve (1).
3 - Disconnect the tie-rod (6) from the valve control lever (5).
1
4
6 1
5
F0020420
4 - Remove the two lower nuts and bolts (7); remove the
valve (1).
1
7
F0020411
SERVICE BRAKES (Version EXPORT F)

1 - Disconnect the three brake control and delivery pipes
(9) from the valve (8).
9
2 - Remove the bolts (10) and remove the valve.
10
8
F0020920
30-24
TRAILER PARKING AND SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
REFITTING THE TRAILER PARKING AND

SERVICE AIR BRAKE CONTROL VALVES
1 - Start the engine and allow the pressure to build in the
air braking circuit.
2 - Check the seal at all removed fittings using a soapy
solution.
3 - Bleed the braking system
(For details see «BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM»).
4 - Check that the parking brake valve control lever op-
erates at the correct point and, if necessary, adjust the
length of the tie-rod (6).
Adjusting the length of the tie-rod

6
1
1 - Check that the parking brakes are perfectly adjusted
and that they are released.
2 - Check that distance between the valve mounting sur-
face and the axis of the control lever ball joint is
27.2±0.1 mm (1.072±0.004 in.) “A”.
A
3 - If necessary, adjust the length of the tie-rod (6) to ob-
tain the correct distance.
4 - Apply the parking brake a few times, checking that
D0004610
tractor and trailer brakes are applied simultaneously.
30-25
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Versions with air braking)
REMOVAL OF THE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

(Version with air braking)
ignition.
Eliminate all residual pressure from the air braking cir-
cuit. 2
1 - Disconnect the connector (1).
2 - Loosen the fitting (2) and remove the transducer (3). 3 1
REFITTING THE PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER F0020430
30-26
AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION VALVE FOR CAB LIFTING
REMOVAL OF THE AIR PRESSURE REGULATING/REDUCTION

VALVE FOR CAB LIFTING
ignition. 3
Eliminate all residual pressure from the air braking cir-
cuit. 2
1 - Loosen the fitting (1), remove the pressure reducing
valve (2) and position it to one side. 1
★ If the valve is to be renewed, disconnect also the
pipe (3).
F0020440
2 - Disconnect the pipe (5) from the pressure regulating

valve (4).
★ Also loosen the fitting on the other end of the pipe.
3 - Hold firm the fitting (6) on the reservoir while un-
screwing the fitting (7) and remove the valve.. 5 6
4 7
F0020450
REFITTING OF THE AIR

PRESSURE REGULATING/
REDUCTION VALVE FOR
CAB LIFTING
1 - Start the engine and allow pressure to build in the cir-
cuit.
2 - Check the seals for leaks using a soapy solution.
30-27
TRAILER AIR BRAKES COUPLING VALVE
REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF THE TRAILER AIR BRAKES

COUPLING VALVE
★ The removal operation illustrated refers to the ver-
sion I. 2
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ig-
nition.
1. Removal
★ The valve complete with its support should only be re-
moved in the event of removal of the complete control
valve assembly. 1
1 - Remove the three retaining bolts (1) of the support (2)

and position the assembly to one side. F0020560
2. Renewal
1 - Label the pipes (3), (4) and the fittings (5), (6) to avoid 5 3
confusion on refitting. 2
2 - Disconnect the pipes (3) and (4) from the valve (2).
3 - Remove the valve (2) after removing the three retaining 4
nuts and bolts (7). 7
6
F0020570
30-28
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
2
14÷17 bar
Low pressure gas
(203÷246,5 psi)
High pressure gas
3 bar 28 bar
(43,5 psi) (406 psi)
High pressure liquid
10
4
1a
3 1
9
CAB INTERIOR
D0000121
1- Compressor with electromagnetic clutch TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2- Condenser • Minimum and maximum safety pressure:
3- Receiver-drier 2.4–28.5 bar (34.8 – 413.3 psi)
4- Bistable pressure switch for compressor clutch en- • Refrigerant type: R134a
gagement/disengagement • Refrigerant quantity:
5- Expansion valve
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
6- Evaporator
g 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1950
7- Evaporator temperature sensor
8- Cab air blowers oz. 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 68.74
9- Air cowling • Total quantity of moisture-free oil added at 1st charg-
10 - Condenser cooling fan ing:: 210 cm³ (12.81 Cu.in.)
(for 165 CV models only)
30-29
OPERATION OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
The compressor (1) is driven from the crankshaft via a dri- The temperature of the air flow over the evaporator (6) gen-
vebelt and pulley with an electromagnetic clutch (1a), erated by the centrifugal blowers (8) is significantly higher
which is operated from a switch on the control panel. than -- 8°C (17.6°F), and therefore it gives up its heat to the
The system is protected by a safety pressure switch, refrigerant, causing it to boil and evaporate.
which performs the following functions: On leaving the evaporator (6), the refrigerant returns to the
1 - To inhibit engagement of the electromagnetic clutch compressor (1) to repeat the cycle.
(1a) when the system pressure falls below 2.4 bar The removal of heat from the ambient air flowing over the
(34.8 psi) as a result of incomplete charging or re- evaporator causes the moisture in the air to condense, and
frigerant loss. the air is thus dehumidified; the moisture condenses on
2 - To disengage the clutch (1a) and thereby stop the the fins of the evaporator, where, if it is not maintained at
compressor when the pressure exceeds the permit- temperature above 0°C (32°F), it will freeze and comprise
ted maximum of 28.5 bar (413.3 psi) (generally as a the efficiency of the evaporator.
result of over-heating). The task of maintaining the evaporator at a temperature
For 165 CV models only: a further contact controls the above 0°C (32°F) (and within the optimum temperature for
operation of the condenser fan (10) in order to maintain efficient heat exchange ), is performed by an electronic
normal operating pressure within the range of 16 – 20 bar temperatures sensor (7); this sensor disengages the com-
(232 – 290 psi). pressor clutch (1a) when the temperature falls to the lower
limit and engages the clutch (1a) when the evaporator tem-
The refrigerant (in vapour state) is drawn in by the com-
perature reaches an upper limit.
pressor where it is compressed, causing the temperature
of the vapour to rise; the refrigerant flows to the condenser The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins contains
(2), where its heat is radiated to the air flow and it is thus dust, pollen and other particles suspended in the air; con-
cooled to the point where it condenses to high-pressure li- tinuous condensation thus has the effect of purifying the
quid. air, and the drips of condensate are conveyed out of the
On leaving the condenser, the liquefied refrigerant flows to vehicle via two ducts.
the receiver-drier (3) which performs three main functions: A fixed quantity of moisture-free oil is added to the circuit
to filter out any impurities, to absorb any water in the cir- in order to lubricate all the mechanical components of the
cuit, and finally, to act as a storage reservoir. system; a certain percentage of this oil continuously cir-
On leaving the receiver-drier, the clean, dry liquid passes culates in the form of an oil mist, thereby lubricating the
to the evaporator (6) through an expansion valve (5), which compressor (pistons and bearings) and the expansion
meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator to ensure valve.
optimum evaporation.
In the evaporator, the refrigerant is heated and expands to
the point of evaporation with an ambient temperature of
around -- 8°C (17.6°F).
30-30
MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
The checks and servicing operations required for the air 5 - Removal and renewal of the receiver-drier.
conditioning system are as follows:
6 - Removal and renewal of the condenser.
1 - Checking the tension and condition of the compres-
sor drivebelt. 7 - Removal of the evaporator and the electronic tem-
2 - Discharging, flushing and recharging of the system perature sensor.
using a specific servicing machine and R134a refrig- (For these operations see «REMOVAL OF THE AIR
erant. CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR»).
3 - Removal and renewal of the compressor.
4 - Inspection and renewal of the electromagnetic clu-
tch pulley (to be carried out at a specialised service
centre).
ADJUSTING THE TENSION OF THE COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT

★ Before adjusting the tension, carefully examine the
drivebelt for signs of wear.
The belt must be renewed immediately at the first sign
of cracking, fraying or separation of the plies.
If a new belt is fitted, re-adjust the tension after ap-
prox. 15 operating hours.
1 - Remove the right-hand grille (1). 1
F0021720
2 - Loosen the screw (2) of the tensioner block (3) and

loosen the nut (4) securing the compressor (5).
5
3 - Turn the rod (6) to obtain a belt deflection of:
★ Static deflection ”A” on first fitting:
13 mm belt: 550±50 N
15 mm belt: 650±50 N
★ Static deflection ”A” after 15 minutes:
13 mm belt: 400±50 N
15 mm belt: 500±50 N 2
★ Use the same tool used for tensioning the the al- 3
4
ternator drivebelt. 6
F0017302
The check should be carried out with the engine cold.
4 - Tighten the screw of the tensioner block (3) and tight-

en the nut (4) and bolt (7) to secure the compressor in
position.
5 - Recheck the drivebelt tension.
7
4
F0017391
30-31
DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND RECHARGING THE

1 - Before discharging, flushing and recharging the d - Separation of the moisture-free oil from the
air conditioning system, inspect the system for liquid refrigerant and determination of its
leaks using a suitable leak detector. quantity by weight.
2 - In order to carry out the system servicing oper- e - Recharging the system with exactly the same
ations you will require a dedicated servicing ma- amounts of refrigerant and oil as those recov-
chine capable of performing the following tasks: ered.
a - Aspiration of the refrigerant fluid. f - Measuring the system delivery side pressure
b - Creation of a high vacuum to purge the sys- and return pressure (low pressure).
tem of contaminants.
c - Filtration of the recovered refrigerant.
1. Discharging the system Mod. 106-150 CV

1 - Connect the service machine to the high pressure
service valve (1) and follow the specific instructions for
the service machine to discharge the system.
2 - Disconnect the system component to be renewed or
overhauled immediately after the service machine
stops; plug the open ends of the system pipes as
1
quickly as possible.
2. Flushing and recharging the system F0017411
Before each recharging, the system must be purged of all

air, moisture and contaminants (oxides, deposits). Mod. 165 CV
This entails creating a high vacuum within the system to
evaporate any moisture present. The vapour, when extract- 1
ed, draws with it any contaminants present in the system.
★ For the flushing and recharging operations, the ser-
vice machine must be connected to the high (1) and
low (2) pressure service valves.
Maximum vacuum" must be maintained for at least
10 minutes.
F0020931
All models
F0017421
30-32
After flushing, the moisture-free oil recovered during the

discharging operation must be re-introduced into the sys-
tem, followed by the refrigerant.
Quantity of refrigerant (R134a):

Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
g 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1950
oz. 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 68.74
Quantity of oil: the quantity recovered.

If the system has to be discharged and flushed in or-
der to renew a system component, the quantity of oil
in the replaced component must be measured and
the same amount of new oil must added to that re-
covered with the refrigerant.
For details of the oil and refrigerant recharging pro-

cedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the
service machine.
30-33
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
REMOVAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
1 - Discharge the liquid refrigerant from the system.

(For details, see «DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM»).
2 - Remove the right-hand side panel (1).
F0021720
3 - Disconnect the inlet (3) and delivery (4) lines from the
compressor (2). 6
★ Immediately plug the open fittings to prevent the 5 2
entry of moisture. 1
4 - Remove the retaining bolt (5) of the collar (6) and move
the delivery pipe (4) to one side.
3
4
F0017370
5 - Unplug the electrical connector (7) of the electroma-

gnetic clutch.
7
F0017380
6 - Loosen the self-locking nut (8) of the compressor pivot

bolt (9). 2
F0017390
30-34
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
7 - Loosen the screw of the tensioner block (10).

12
8 - Unscrew the threaded tensioner rod (11) to slacken
the compressor/fan drivebelt (12).
★ Slacken the drivebelt sufficiently to be able to slip it
off the compressor pulley.
10
11
F0017301
9 - Remove the pivot bolt and remove the complete com-

pressor assembly (2).
2
F0017400
REFITTING THE AIR

CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
1
★ Remove the plugs and connect the pipes immediate-
ly, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent the entry of
moisture.
★ Check the condition of the O-ring seals and renew
them if damaged.
1 - Adjust the tension of the compressor/fan drivebelt.
(For details see «ADJUSTING THE TENSION OF THE
COMPRESSOR DRIVEBELT»).
2 - Flush and recharge the system.
(For details see «DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
30-35
RECEIVER-DRIER (Models 106-150 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE RECEIVER-DRIER (Models 106-150 CV)
1 - Recover the refrigerant from the system.

(For details, see «MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON-
DITIONING SYSTEM»). 2
2 - Disconnect the connector (1) of the pressure switch (2).
F0018690
3 - Disconnect the inlet (4) and outlet (5) pipes from the re-
ceiver-drier (3).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes immediately to prevent
moisture getting into the system.. 1 5
4 - Unscrew and remove the bolts(6) securing the bracket 7
(7) and remove the assembly.
6
If a new receiver-drier is to be installed, measure the
quantity of oil contained in the old unit in order to de- 4
3
termine the quantity of oil to be added to the system..
F0018700
REFITTING THE RECEIVER-DRIER

1
moisture.
★ Check the condition of the O-rings and replace them if
damaged.
30-36
RECEIVER-DRIER (Model 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE RECEIVER-DRIER (Model 165 CV)

(For details, see «MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON- 3
DITIONING SYSTEM»).
2 - Disconnect the connectors (1) and (2) of the pressure
switch (3). 1
F0020940
3 - Disconnect the inlet (5) and outlet (6) pipes from the re-
ceiver-drier (4).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes immediately to prevent 4
moisture getting into the system. 1
6
4 - Loosen the filter retaining clamp (7) and remove the
unit.
5
If a new receiver-drier is to be installed, measure the
7
quantity of oil contained in the old unit in order to de-
termine the quantity of oil to be added to the system..
F0020950
REFITTING THE RECEIVER-DRIER

1
moisture.
★ Check the condition of the O-rings and replace them if
damaged.
30-37
CONDENSER FAN (Model 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE CONDENSER FAN (Model 165 CV)
Remove the key from the ignition.

1 - Disconnect the connector (1).
F0020960
2 - Release the wires (2) from the cable clips fixed to the
fan guard (3). 3
F0020970
3 - Remove the screw (4) and remove the contactor (5).

4 - Using a thin blade, remove the complete fuse box (6).
4
F0020990
5 - Remove the bolts (7) and remove the pipe support (8).
6 - Position the upper pipes towards the rear of the 7
tractor and secure them.
F0020980
30-38
CONDENSER FAN (Model 165 CV)
7 - Remove the bolts (9) securing the fan (10).
10
F0021010
8 - Remove the fan (10).

10
F0021000
REFITTING THE COOLING FAN

30-39
CONDENSER ASSEMBLY (Models 106-150 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE CONDENSER ASSEMBLY (Models 106-150 CV)

1 5
1 - Remove the side panels.
2 - Recover the refrigerant from the system. 4
3 - Disconnect the pipes (2) and (3) from the condenser
(1).
1 2
★ Immediately plug the open ends of the pipes to 3
prevent moisture from getting into the system..
F0017430
4 - Unscrew the knobs (4) and remove the cowling (5).
5 - Tilt the mounting brackets (6) forwards.

6
6 - Remove the lower pivot bolts (7).
F0017440
7 - Remove the condenser assembly (1).

★ Take care not to damage the fins.
1
REFITTING THE CONDENSER F0017450
ASSEMBLY
1
★ Remove the plugs and connect the pipes imme-
diately, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent
moisture getting into the system.
them if damaged.
30-40
CONDENSER ASSEMBLY (Model 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE CONDENSER ASSEMBLY (Model 165 CV)
1 - Remove the cooling fan.

(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE COOLING 1
FAN»).
(For details see «DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND 3
RECHARGING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM»). 2
3 - Disconnect the pipes (2) and (3) from the condenser
(1).
1
★ Immediately plug the open ends of the pipes to
prevent moisture from getting into the system..
F0021020
4 - Remove the condenser assembly (1) by withdrawing it

upwards. 1
★ Take care not to damage the fins.
F0021030
REFITTING THE CONDENSER

ASSEMBLY
1
★ Remove the plugs and connect the pipes imme-
diately, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent
moisture getting into the system.
them if damaged.
30-41
GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS (Models 106-150 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS

(Models 106-150 CV)
2 - Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes (2) and (3) from
the fuel cooler (1).
★ Label the pipes and fittings to avoid confusion on 2 3
reconnection..
F0017460
3 - Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes (5) and (6) from
the oil cooler (4).
★ Label the pipes and fittings to avoid confusion on 6
5
reconnection.
★ Plug the open ends of the pipes to prevent mois-
ture getting into the system.
F0017470
4 - Unscrew the knobs (7) and tilt the condenser (9)

mounting brackets (8) forwards.
8
7
F0017441
5 - Remove the two bolts (10) supporting the coolers (1)

and (4). 1 10
4
F0017480
30-42
GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS (Models 106-150 CV)
6 - Remove the cooler assembly (1), (4) by pulling the han-

dle (11) upwards. 11
1
Keep the coolers vertical to prevent spillage of
oil/fuel.
4
F0017490
7 - Only if the assembly is to be renewed:

a - Draw off the fuel and oil from the coolers.
11
b - Recover the pivot bolts (12), the brackets (13) and
the handle (11) and fit to the new assembly.
13
1
12
F0017500
REFITTING THE GEARBOX OIL/

FUEL COOLERS
1
Bracket retaining bolts: Loctite 222
1 - Start the engine and allow the gearbox oil and fuel to
circulate for about 5 minutes to fill the coolers; check
the seals and fittings for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and check the gearbox oil level; top
up, if necessary.
This operation is essential if new coolers have
been fitted.
30-43
GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS (Model 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS

(Model 165 CV)
2 - Remove the clamp (1) and the bracket (2). 1
F0021040
3 - Disconnect the pipes (4) and (5) from the fuel cooler
(3).
★ Plug the pipes and the open fittings on the cooler to
prevent the entry of contaminants.
★ Renew the gaskets on refitting. 4
3
F0021050
4 - Disconnect the pipes (6) and (7) from the gearbox oil
cooler (6).
★ Plug the pipes and the open fittings on the cooler to
prevent the entry of contaminants.
7
8
6
6
F0021060
5- Unscrew the knobs (9) and move the mounting brac-

kets (10) to the vertical position.
10
9
F0021070
30-44
GEARBOX OIL/FUEL COOLERS (Model 165 CV)
6 - Remove the coolers assembly (3), (6) by withdrawing it

towards the left. 3
F0021080
REFITTING THE GEARBOX OIL/

FUEL COOLERS
1 - Start the engine and allow the gearbox oil and fuel to
circulate for about 5 minutes to fill the coolers; check
the seals and fittings for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and check the gearbox oil level; top
up, if necessary.
This operation is essential if new coolers have
been fitted.
30-45
RADIATOR (Models 106-150 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE RADIATOR (Models 106-150 CV)

2 - Drain off the engine coolant.
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54
3 - Remove the gearbox oil/ fuel coolers. F0021711
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE GEARBOX OIL/

FUEL COOLERS»).
4 - Remove the expansion tank.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE EXPANSION
3
TANK»).
5 - Disconnect the hose (1) of the pipe (2) to the engine
and remove the bulkhead fitting (3). 1
★ Slacken off the two hose clamps (4) and slide the
hose (1) over the pipe (2).
4 2
F0017510
6 - Slacken off the hose clamps (5) and disconnect the ra-
diator hose (6).
9
7 - Slacken off the hose clamp (7) and disconnect the 6
hose (8).
8 - Remove the retaining bolts (9) on the left-hand side of
the radiator. 7
9
5
8
F0017520
9 - Disconnect the lower hose (10) from the radiator.

10 - Remove the bolts (11) and clamps (12) securing the 12
wiring (13) to the right-hand side of the radiator. 11
13
10
F0017530
30-46
RADIATOR (Models 106-150 CV)
11 - Remove the radiator (14).
14
F0017540
REFITTING THE RADIATOR

1 - Fill the engine cooling system.
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54
2 - Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to circulate; check the system for leaks.
3 - Stop the engine, check the coolant level in the expan-
sion tank and top up if necessary.
30-47
RADIATOR (Mod. 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE RADIATOR (Mod. 165 CV)

2 - Drain off the engine coolant.
Coolant: 23 (6.07 US.gall.)

3 - Remove the gearbox oil/ fuel coolers.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE GEARBOX OIL/
FUEL COOLERS»).
F0021711
4 - Disconnect the hose (1) of the engine connection pipe

(2).
1
2
F0021090
5 - Disconnect the expansion tank connection pipe (4)

from the radiator (3).
4 3
F0021100
6 - Disconnect the lower hose (5) from the radiator.
F0021110
30-48
RADIATOR (Mod. 165 CV)
7 - Remove the bolts (6) and remove the radiator (3) by

moving it forwards and lifting it upwards.
3
6
6
F0021120
REFITTING THE RADIATOR


coolant to circulate; check the system for leaks.
30-49
EXPANSION TANK
REMOVAL OF THE EXPANSION TANK

★ The illustration shows the 135 CV model, but the procedure is identical for all models.
1 - Partially drain the engine cooling system..
Coolant: approx. 12 (3.17 US. gall.)

2 - Disconnect the pipe (1) on the left-hand side.
F0017570
3 - Disconnect the pipes (2) and (3) on the right-hand side.

4 - Unscrew and remove the nut (4) and washer (5).
4
5
3
F0017560
5 - Unscrew and remove the bolt (6) and washer (7).

6 - Remove the expansion tank (8).
8
6 7
F0017550
REFITTING THE EXPANSION TANK

Coolant: approx 12 (3.17 US. gall.)

coolant to circulate.
3 - Stop the engine, check the level in the expansion tank
and top up if necessary.
30-50
FAN (Models 106-150 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE FAN (Models 106-150 CV)

tive battery lead (–). 1 4
1 - Remove the side panels, the lamp assemblies and
lower grille.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE HOOD AND 1
SIDE PANELS»).
2 - Partially drain the engine cooling system.
2
3 - Disconnect the expansion tank (4) from the mechan- 3
ical fixings (1) and from the pipes (2), (3) on the right-
F0017561
hand side.
4 - Disconnect the hoses (6) and (7) from the radiator as-
sembly (5). 6
F0017521
5 - Loosen the bolts (8) and release the wiring (9) from the
retaining straps (10) and from the radiator support.
10
8
10
8
F0017531
6 - Undo and remove the guide (11) for the cooler con-
nection pipes (12) and (13).
11 12
13
F0017580
30-51
FAN (Models 106-150 CV)
7 - Unscrew and remove the two front retaining bolts (14)

of the support (15) and move the entire assembly to-
wards the front of the tractor so that the fan is clear of
the cowling.
14
15
F0017590
8 - Unscrew and remove the retaining bolts (16) of the fan

(17).
17
16
F0017322
9 - Remove the fan (17) by withdrawing it vertically up-

wards.
17
F0017601
REFITTING THE FAN

1 - Fill the engine cooling system with coolant.

30-52
FAN (Model 165 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE FAN (Model 165 CV)

tive battery lead (–). 1 4
1 - Remove the side panels, the lamp assemblies and
lower grille.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE HOOD AND 1
SIDE PANELS»).
2 - Drain the engine cooling system.
2
3 - Disconnect the expansion tank (4) from the mechan- 3
ical fixings (1) and from the pipes (2), (3) on the right-
F0017561
hand side.
4 - Disconnect the upper hoses (6) from the radiator as-

sembly (5).
5
F0021091
5 - Disconnect the lower hose (7) from the radiator as-

sembly.
F0021111
6 - Undo and remove the guide (8) for the pipes (9) and
(10). 8
7 - Loosen the screw (11) and release the wiring clip. 9
10
11
F0021130
30-53
FAN (Model 165 CV)
8 - Unscrew and remove the front retaining bolts (12) of

the support (13).
12
13
F0021140
9- Unscrew and remove the rear retaining bolts (14) of

the support (13) and move the entire assembly
forward so that the fan is clear of the cowling. 14
14
13
13
F0021150
10 - Unscrew and remove the retaining bolts (15) of the fan

(16).
11 - Remove the fan (16) by withdrawing it vertically up-

wards.
16
15
F0017321
REFITTING THE FAN

16

F0017600
30-54
COMPLETE RADIATOR/COOLERS ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL OF THE COMPLETE RADIATOR/COOLERS ASSEMBLY

1 - Remove the side grilles, the lamp assemblies and the
lower cover.
1
2 - Recover the refrigerant from the air conditioning sys-
tem.
(For details, see «MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CON-
DITIONING SYSTEM»).
2
3 - Disconnect pipes (3) and (4) from the condenser (1)
and the receiver-drier (2). 1
4
★ Immediately plug the ends of the pipes and the open
fittings on the condenser and receiver-drier to prevent 3
moisture from getting into the system. F0017431
4 - Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system..
Coolant: 5
Model 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
5 - Remove the bolts and remove the pipe and wiring

guide plate (5).
F0017610
6 - Release the pipes (6), (7) and the wiring from the re-
taining straps.
7 - Label and disconnect the pipes from oil cooler (8) and 6
fuel cooler (9).
★ Immediately plug the ends of the pipes and the 9
open fittings on the coolers to prevent the entry of
contaminants.
8 - Remove the expansion tank. 8
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE EXPANSION
TANK»).
7
F0017620
9 - Disconnect the hoses (10), (11) from the radiator; re-

cover the bulkhead fitting (12). 12 10
11
F0017630
30-55
10 - Remove the hose (13).

11 - Release the wiring (14) from the retaining clamps (15).
18 15
12 - Route the cooler pipes (16), (17) and the wiring to-
wards the rear of the tractor through the aperture in the
frame (18). 14
16 15
17
13
F0017532
13 - Attach a hoist to the complete assembly.
Assembly: 28 kg (61.7 lb.)
18
F0017640
14 - Remove the front retaining bolts (20) and remove the

complete assembly (19).
★ On the 165 CV model, remove also the rear bolts
(21).
19
20
F0017591
Mod. 165 CV
21 21
F0021151
30-56
REFITTING THE RADIATOR/COOLERS ASSEMBLY
1
★ Remove the plugs and immediately connect the
pipes, fully tightening the fittings, to prevent mois-
ture from getting into the system.
★ Check the condition of the seals and renew them if
damaged.
1 - Flush and recharge the air conditioning system.
(For details, see «DISCHARGING, FLUSHING AND
Coolant:
Model 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
30-57
FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING
RENEWAL OF THE FLEXIBLE COUPLING OF THE FRONT PTO

1 - Remove the side grilles (1), and the lower cover (2).
1
1
2
2 F0021712
2 - Remove the front retaining bolts (3) of the radiator

supports (4).
★ On the 165 CV model, remove also the two rear
bolts.
3
4
F0017592
3 - Release the lamp wiring (6) from the retaining straps

(5).
4 - Partially drain the engine cooling system. 5
F0017533
5 - Remove the rear retaining bolt (7) and the washer (8) of
the expansion tank.
7 8
F0017551
30-58
FRONT PTO FLEXIBLE COUPLING
6 - Loosen the hose clamps (9) and slide the hoses (10),
(11) onto the engine connection pipes (12), (13). 11
Push the radiator assembly towards the front of the
tractor.
9
12
9
13
10
F0017650
7 - Fully loosen the flange bolts (14) of the drive shaft (15).
8 - Disengage the drive shaft (15) by pushing the flange
(16) towards the front of the tractor.
14
16
15
15
F0017311
9 - Unscrew and remove the retaining bolts (17) of the

coupling (18) and remove the coupling itself. 1
18
17
REFITTING THE FLEXIBLE

F0018670
COUPLING OF THE FRONT PTO

1
Bolts: Loctite 243
Bolts: 139±10% Nm (102.4±10% lb.ft.)

30-59
TURBOCHARGER
REMOVAL OF THE TURBOCHARGER
1 - Remove the silencer.

(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE SILENCER»).
2 - Loosen the clamp (1) and disconnect the inlet pipe (2)
of the air compressor for the trailer braking system. 3
1
3 - Loosen the clamp (3) and disconnect the oil vapour
pipe (4).
2 4
F0017691
4 - Unplug the connector (5) of the filter clogging sensor

(6).
★ Release the wiring from the strap (7).
5
F0017740
5 - Loosen the clamp (8) securing the filter – turbocharger

(10) connection hose (9); remove the hose (9).
10
6 - Remove the turbocharger (10) following the instruc-
tions in the «ENGINE WORKSHOP MANUAL».
9
8
9 8
F0017750
REFITTING THE TURBOCHARGER

30-60
AIR INLET PIPE
REMOVAL OF THE AIR INLET PIPE
1 - Loosen the hose clamp (1) and disconnect the hose (3)
from the pipe (2). 2
2 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (4).
3
1
F0017660
3 - Remove the nut cover (5) and, while supporting the

pipe (2), remove the upper retaining nut (6) and washer
(7).
2
5 6 7
F0017670
REFITTING THE AIR INLET PIPE

30-61
AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL OF THE AIR CLEANER
1 - Loosen the hose clamp (1) securing the turbocharger

inlet hose (2); disconnect the hose from the air cleaner 3
(3).
2
1
F0017680
2 - Loosen the hose clamp (4) and disconnect the inlet

pipe (5) of the air compressor for trailer braking.
3 - Loosen the hose clamp (6) and disconnect the oil va-
pour pipe (7). 4
6
7
5
F0017690
4 - Loosen the hose clamp (8) and disconnect the inlet

hose (9) from the air cleaner (3).
5 - Unplug the connector of the filter clogging sensor (10).
3
8
9
10
F0017700
6 - Loosen the hose clamp (11) and disconnect from the

air cleaner (3) the connection hose (12) of the dust ex- 3
hauster pipe.
11
12
F0017710
30-62
AIR CLEANER
7 - Slacken off the screw (13) of the air cleaner (3) retai-
ning strap (14). 14
3
13
F0017720
8 - Remove the complete air cleaner assembly (3).

3
F0017730
REFITTING THE AIR CLEANER

★ Check that all the hose clamps are fully tightened.
30-63
EXHAUST PIPE
REMOVAL OF THE EXHAUST PIPE

1
1 - Disconnect the dust exhauster pipe (2) from the ex-
haust pipe (1). 2
F0017200
2 - Unscrew the bolts (3) and move the clamp (4) joining
the exhaust and the silencer.
F0017210
3 - Attach a hoist to the exhaust pipe (1) and put the lifting
sling under slight tension.
Exhaust pipe: 23 kg (50.7 lb.)

4 - Remove the bolts (5), (6) and the nuts (7).
5 - Remove the exhaust pipe (1).
1
REFITTING THE EXHAUST PIPE

5 6
F0017220
30-64
SILENCER
REMOVAL OF THE SILENCER
Remove the key from the ignition switch.

1 - Loosen the bolts (1) and move the clamp (2) joining the
exhaust pipe (3) to the silencer (4).
2
4
3
F0017211
2 - Position supports between the cylinder head and the

silencer.
3 - Unscrew and remove the bolt (5), washer (6) and nut
(7).
7
5 6
F0017230
4 - Remove the nuts (8) securing the silencer to the tur-

bocharger (9) and remove the silencer (4).
9
Silencer: 15 kg (33 lb.) 4
F0017240
5 - Remove the gasket (10). 4

★ Note which way round it is fitted. 4
REFITTING THE SILENCER

10
F0017250
30-65
4WD PROPELLER SHAFT (Version with front suspension)
REMOVAL OF THE 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT

(Version with front suspension)
Before switching off the engine, disengage the front
axle suspension by pressing the relative button in the
cab.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the nega- 1
Discharge the residual pressure from the suspension
system by unscrewing the valve (1) two full turns.
★ Reclose the valve after having discharged the
pressure.
F0017820
1 - While supporting the lower guard (2), remove the nut

(3), the rear washer on the right and the rear bolt (4)on
the left.
3 2
F0017830
2 - Remove the front bolts (5) and remove the lower guard
(2).
5 5
F0017840
3 - Force an adjustable jack "A" under the suspension (6);

it must be possible to lower the jack by approx. 10 cm
(4 in.).
A
F0017850
30-66
4 - Disconnect the pipes (7) of the left-hand suspension

cylinder.
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of
contaminants. 7
Loosen the fittings of the flexible hoses by a few
turns and, before removing them, push them to
detach them from the couplers and thereby dis-
charge any residual pressure from the system.
F0017860
5 - Disconnect the pipes (8) from the right-hand suspen-

sion cylinder.
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on refitting.
★ Plug the pipes and the open fittings to prevent the
entry of contaminants. 8
6 - Remove the bracket (9) and remove the pipes. 9
F0017870
7 - Position a jack ”B” under the shaft (10) and remove the
flange bolts and nuts (11).
1 10
★ In order to remove the upper bolts, lower the jack
positioned in step 3.
11
F0017880
8 - Disconnect the flange, lower the jack “B” and with-

draw the shaft (10) towards the front of the tractor.
2
10
F0017890
30-67
REFITTING THE 4WD PROPELLER SHAFT
1
Nuts: 43.5±10% Nm (32±10% lb.ft.)
★ Tighten the nuts in a cross-wise sequence.
2
Rear coupling: Grease
1 - Start the engine and engage the front suspension by
pressing the relative button in the cab.
2 - Wait a few seconds and then disengage the front su-
spension.
3 - Repeat this operation a number of times to purge the
air from the system.
4 - Stop the engine, check the oil level and top up if nec-
essary.
30-68
BRAKE CYLINDERS
REMOVAL OF THE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS

1 - Remove the console shroud. (For details, see «RE-
MOVAL OF THE CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD) 1
2 - Remove the engine hood side panels. (For details, see
«REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE HOOD AND FRONT
GRILLE»).
3 - Remove the air cleaner. (For details, see «REMOVAL
OF THE AIR CLEANER»).
4 - Remove the screws and remove the insulation panel
(1). F0018740
5 - Unplug the connectors (2) of the brake fluid level warn-

ing light.
6 - Remove the cap (3) and draw off the fluid contained in 2
the brake fluid reservoir (4). 3
F0018750
7 - Disconnect the pipes (5) from the reservoir (4); remove

the hood support (6) complete with the reservoir.
F0018760
8 - Disconnect the feed pipes (7) and the by-pass pipe (8)
between the cylinders (9).
9
8
F0018770
30-69
BRAKE CYLINDERS
9 - Remove the cotter pins (10) and remove the pins (11)
connecting the pedals (12) to the cylinders (9).
14
10 - Unscrew and remove the three bolts (13) with their
washers and remove the cylinders (9).
9
10
11
12 13 F0018780
REFITTING THE BRAKE MASTER

CYLINDERS
1 - Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum level.
2 - Check the positions of the switches.
(For details, see «ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE LI-
GHT SWITCHES»).
3 - Bleed the air from the braking system.
(For details, see «BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS-
TEM»).
30-70
BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYSTEM
1 - Disconnect the two brake pedals (1) by disengaging

the latch pin (2).
2 - Bleed the left rear brake. 1
3 - Bleed the right rear brake.

4 - For tractors with hydraulic or air trailer braking on-
ly: bleed the trailer brake valve before bleeding the
service brake system.
2
F0018791
Brake bleeding procedure

During brake bleeding operations, ensure that the flu- A
id in the brake fluid reservoir is always above the min-
imum level.
1 - Remove the dust cap and attach a transparent bleed
tube “A” to the bleed screw (1) of the cylinder (2).
1
2 - Fully depress the brake pedal corresponding to the
brake to be bled.
3 - Slowly open the bleed screw (1) and allow the fluid and 2
air to flow throughout the entire pedal travel.
F0018820
4 - While holding the pedal fully depressed, tighten the
bleed screw.
5 - Repeat the operation until the fluid flowing from the
bleed screw is entirely free of air bubbles.
6 - Repeat the procedure for the remaining brake cylin-
der.
7 - After bleeding, replace the bleed screw (1) dust caps.
8 - Use the same method also for the service brakes.

Bleed in the order given: the pilot valve, the left
brake and then the right brake.
A
F0021160
30-71
9 - Bleed the braking valve at the bleed screws (1) (pro-

tected by caps) using the method indicated for the A
pumps and choosing from among the following ver-
sions:
1
A - Pneumatic parking brake control valve.

B - Pilot valve.
C - Hydraulic braking valve (CUNA).
D - Hydraulic braking valve (EXPORT).
F0020412
B
1
F0021170
F0021180
1 D
F0021190
30-72
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCHES
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCHES
★ The switch for each pedal is adjusted separately.

1 - Check that the pedal latch pin (1) slides freely to con-
nect and disconnect the two pedals (2). 2
F0018790
2 -Force the pedals (2) upwards and check that the brake
light switches (3) have an extra opening travel of 1±0.2 3
mm (0.04±0.008 in.).
★ This extra travel protects the switches from im-
pacts at the end of travel caused by sudden re-
lease of the pedals.
F0018800
3 - If the switches (3) do not have this extra travel, loosen

the screws (4) so that they just grip the switch; move 3
the switch towards the front of the tractor and tighten 4
down the screws (4) to fix it in position. 4
F0018810
30-73
POWER STEERING
TESTING AND REMOVAL OF THE POWER STEERING UNIT
1. Testing
1 - Disconnect a steering pipe (1) and connect a fitting A
“B” with a 400 bar pressure gauge “A”.
2 - Start the engine and turn the wheel back and forth be-
tween the full lock positions to eliminate all air from the
system.
B
3 - Force the steering to full lock on the side to which the

pressure gauge is connected and read off the maxi-
mum continuous pressure on the gauge “A”.
★ Maximum permissible pressure:
191–198 bar (2270–2871 psi) F0021200
4 - If the pressure reading differs from that specified,

adjust the maximum pressure valve (2) of the power 3
2
steering unit (3). 6 5 4 7
2. Adjustment
1 - Remove the plug (4).
2 - Loosen off the screw (5) using a 4 mm hex socket
wrench.
3 - Turn the screw (6) to adjust the pressure.
• To INCREASE the pressure, turn the screw F0021211
CLOCKWISE.
• To REDUCE the pressure, turn the screw COUN-
TER-CLOCKWISE
4 - Stop the engine and fix the adjuster screw (6) in po-
sition by tightening the lock screw (5).
5 - Refit the plug (4), checking the gasket (7) is in its seat-
ing.
Plug: 20 +0 5 Nm (14.7 +0 3.7 lb.ft.)
3. Removal of the power steering unit

2
1 - Remove the console shroud. (For details, see «RE-
MOVAL OF THE CENTRE CONSOLE AND
SHROUD»). 2
2 - Disconnect the five pipes (2) from the power steering

unit (1). 1
1
F0018830
30-74
POWER STEERING
3 - Unscrew the retaining bolts (3) and washers (4).
3 4
F0018840
4 - Remove the power steering unit (1).

★ If necessary, reposition the plate (5) with the rela-
tive bushes (6). 2
F0018860
REFITTING THE
POWER STEERING UNIT
5
1
Pipe fittings:60 Nm (44.2 lb.ft.) 6
Eye fitting: 29 Nm (21.4 lb.ft.)
2
★ If the power steering fittings have been undone, re-
new the gaskets and tighten the fittings to a torque
of 70 Nm (51.6 lb.ft.). F0018850
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeat-

edly in both directions to eliminate any air from the
power steering system.
2 - Check the fittings for leaks.
30-75
POWER STEERING
REMOVAL AND RENEWAL OF POWER STEERING UNIT SEALS
11
10
F0020600 19
9
8
3 19 7
6
2
16
1
17
4 18
15
12
14
13
D0004350
30-76
POWER STEERING
★ For parts identification, see exploded view of the power steering unit.
1. Disassembly
1 - Hold the body of the power steering unit (1) in a vice 1
with the jaws faced in a soft material (aluminium or soft
steel), with the bolts of the unit uppermost.
★ Do not over-tighten the vice to avoid damaging the
body of the power steering unit.
F0020610
2 - Mark the relative positions of the bolts, the cover (6)

and the metering unit (8). 3 2
Loosen the bolts (2), (3), (4), (5) gradually in a cross- 4 5
wise sequence and remove them.
8
6
F0020620
3 - Remove the cover (6) by sliding it off sideways.

6
F0020630
4 - Using a pair of round-nosed pliers, remove the bush

(7).
7
F0020640
30-77
POWER STEERING
5 - Mark the relative positions of the drive shaft (10) and

the rotor (9). 9
Remove the outer ring (8) and the rotor (9).
★ To remove the assembly, slide it to the side while
simultaneously lifting it. 8
F0020650
6 - Withdraw the drive shaft (10).

10
F0020660
7 - Remove the stop disc (11) by sliding it off sideways.
11
F0020670
8 - Remove the power steering unit (1) from the vice and
position it horizontally on a bench. 1
Rotate the trim pin (12) inserted in the control valve
(13) so that it is horizontal and withdraw the complete
control valve assembly without removing the bearing
(14).
13
F0020680
30-78
POWER STEERING
2. Removal of the seals

1 - The inner seal (15) is to be removed using tool T1
(code. 00239496). E
Insert the ring “C” in the power steering housing (1) fol-
lowed by the expander “E” fully closed.
D
C
T1
1
F0020690
2 - Open the expander “E” by turning the knob while hold-

ing the locknut “D”.
F0020700
3 - Remove the ring “C” and push the expander “E” in-
side the power steering housing (1) to withdraw the
seal (15).
4 - Slacken off the expander and withdraw it.
C
E
1
F0020710
3. Removal of the dust seal

Remove the dust seal using tool T2 (code. 00239497). T2
Insert the ring nut “G” in the housing and, using the extractor
“H” and a hammer, remove the dust seal (16).
★ Take care not to damage the seating.
G H
F0020720
30-79
POWER STEERING
4. Installing the inner seal (15)

1 - Before installing the inner seal, ensure that the seal T3
seating, the inside of the housing and the cover are
completely free of all traces of grease. 15
Fit the seal (15) onto the installer “S” of tool T3 (code
00239498) and insert the installer in the bush “B” of S
the tool.
F0020730
2 - Insert the bush “B”, the installer “S” and the seal (15) in
the housing (1).
1
3 - Push the bush and installer fully in.
★ After removing the tool T3 (code. 00239498) check
that the seal is correctly positioned in its seating.
4 - Lubricate the seal with mineral oil.
T3
F0020740
5. Installing the control valve

1 - Lightly lubricate the control valve assembly (13) with a
little oil.
Check that the bearing (14) is installed with thinner
thrust plate positioned behind the outer bush of the
control valve
14 13
F0020750
2 - Insert the control valve (13) in the housing (1) bearing

(14) side first while keeping the trim pin (12) horizontal.
1
★ The control valve should fit easily into the housing 13
without force.
12
F0020760
30-80
POWER STEERING
6. Final assembly
1 - Hold the power steering unit (1) in a vice as shown in 17
the photo.
Check that the ball (17) (anticavitation valve) is posi- 1
tioned correctly.
F0020770
2 - Lubricate the O-ring (18) with grease and locate it on

the power steering housing (1).
18
F0020780
3 - Install the stop disc (11), aligning the holes with those
in the housing.
11
F0020790
4 - Insert the drive shaft (10), engaging it in the trim pin

(12) of the control valve (13).
10
F0020800
30-81
POWER STEERING
5 - Lubricate the O-ring (19) with grease and locate it on

the outer ring (8).
19
F0020810
6 - Locate the rotor (9) on the drive shaft (10) aligning the
reference marks made on disassembly.
9
7 - Locate the outer ring (8), centering it relative to the
housing (1) and the rotor (9).
8
10
F0020820
8 - Locate the bush (7).
7
8
F0020830
9 - Lubricate the 2nd O-ring (19) with grease and seat it in

the groove in the cover (6).
6
10 - Locate the cover (6) on the metering unit, aligning the
reference marks made on disassembly.
19
F0020840
30-82
POWER STEERING
11 - Insert the screws (2), (3), (4), (5) following the indica-
tions in the exploded view.
★ Screw (3) must be installed in the position in cor-
respondence to the ball valve (17). 4
3
F0020850
12 - Tighten down the cover screws (6) and the metering

unit (8) in a cross-wise sequence.
Screws: 30 +0 3 Nm (22 +0 2 lb.ft.)
6
8
F0020860
13 - Turn the power steering unit over; locate the dust seal
(16) on the housing (1) with seal lip facing upwards.
16
F0020870
14 - Using the tool T4 (code 00239499), and a hammer,

drive the dust seal home without using excessive
force.
T4
F0020880
30-83
FRONT WHEELS
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT WHEELS
On tractors with front suspension, before stopping

the engine to remove the front wheels, disengage
the front axle suspension by pressing the relative
button in the cab.
1 - Apply the parking brake.
For normal front axles

2 - Position under the differential housing a trolley jack
“A” with a minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons and a
maximum lift height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Drive safety wedges between the axle and the axle
support.
For suspended front axles

2 - Position centrally under the pivoting support (1) a trol-
ley jack “A” with a minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons
and maximum lift height of at least 15 cm (6 in.). 1
3 - Raise the front end of the tractor sufficiently to elim- B
B
inate flexure of the tyre walls and to lift the wheels by
approximately 2 cm (0.8 in.).
4 - Position two jacks “B” under the axle; lower the trolley
jack so that the axle is supported on the jacks "B" with
the wheels off the ground and then remove trolley jack A
“A”. F0018360
★ Jack lifting capacity: minimum 2 tons.

5 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (2); remove the wheel
nuts, leaving one (for safety) at the top of the wheel.
1
2 3
6 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last nut
and remove the wheel (3).
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other rear
wheel.
F0018370
REFITTING THE FRONT WHEELS

1
4WD wheel nuts: 350 Nm (258 lb.ft.)
★ Tighten the wheel nuts gradually in a crosswise se-
quence.
30-84
FRONT FENDERS
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT FENDERS
★ Removal of the front fenders is only necessary for ma-

jor repairs and overhauls where additional working
space is required at the side of the tractor and when-
ever the tractor is to be supported on stands.
1 - Remove the front wheels.
(For details, see, «REMOVAL OF THE FRONT
WHEELS»).
2 - Attach a hoist to the fender to be removed (1).
Fender assembly: 19 kg (42 lb.) 1
F0018380
3 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (2) and remove the

fender (1) complete with the mounting bracket (3).
F0018390
REFITTING THE FRONT FENDERS

30-85
REAR WHEELS
REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHEELS
1 - Position under the rear gearbox a trolley jack “A” with

minimum lifting capacity of 5 tons and a maximum lift-
ing height of at least 15 cm (6 in.).
★ Position the trolley jack “A” so that it is nearer to
the wheel to be removed.
2 - Raise the tractor sufficiently to eliminate the flexure of
the tyre wall.
F0018870
3 - Slacken off all the wheel nuts (1); leaving one (for safe-
ty) at the top of the wheel.
1
2
4 - While holding the wheel vertical, remove the last 1
wheel nut and remove the wheel (2).
F0018880
5 - Position under the rear axle an axle stand “B” with lat-
eral retaining wings for safety and lower the trolley jack
until the axle is resting on the axle stand.
★ Axle stand load capacity: 2 tons minimum.
6 - Check that the stand is in exactly the right position and
then remove the trolley jack.
7 - Repeat the above operations to remove the other
wheel.
B
F0018890
REFITTING THE REAR WHEELS

Refitting is the reverse of removal.
1
Wheel nuts:
M18x1.5: 350 Nm± 10% (258 lb.ft. ±10%)
M20x1.5: 500 Nm±10% (369 lb.ft. ±10%)
M22x1.5 (mod. 165CV):
500 Nm±10% (369 lb.ft. ±10%)
★ Tighten the wheel nuts gradually in a crosswise se-
quence.
30-86
LIFT VALVE BLOCK
REMOVAL OF THE LIFT VALVE BLOCK
Fully lower the lift and switch off the engine.

1 - With the control levers (1), (2) in the horizontal position, 1
label the lower pipes (3) and disconnect them from the
valve block (4).
2
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion. 4
F0017940
2 - Disconnect the rigid upper pipes (5), (6).

contaminants. 6 5
F0018680
3 - Unscrew the bolts (7) and remove the valve block (4)
with the rear spacers (8).
7
F0018710
REFITTING THE
LIFT VALVE BLOCK
30-87
FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT CYLINDERS
★ Raise the lift to its full height and switch off the engine.
1 - Remove the lift arms (1) and the pivot pins (2) along
with their retaining chains. 1
2 - Position under the lift assembly (3) a jack ”A” which
can be lowered at least 10 cm (4 in.).
1
3 2
2
A
F0017970
3 - Remove the bolts (4) and remove the upper pins (5) of
the cylinders (6).
5
4 6
6
F0017980
4 - Disconnect the cylinder feed pipes (8), (9) from the

valve block (7).
Loosen the fitting by a few turns, but before fully
disconnecting them, push them to detach them
from the couplers and release any residual pres- 7
sure in the system.
8
tion.
F0017941
5 - Lower the jack ”A” until the cylinders (6) can be tilted
outwards in order to access the connection pipes and
to align the hole provided for removal of the spring
pins securing the lower pivot pins of the cylinders. 6 6
F0017990
30-88
6 - Disconnect the four pipes (10) from the cylinders (6).

tion.
10
10
6 6
F0018000
7 - Using a pin punch, remove the spring pins (11) secu-

ring the lower cylinder pivot pins.
11
F0018010
8 - Withdraw the pivot pins (12) and remove the cylinders

(6).
12
F0018720
REFITTING OF THE
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly raise and lower the lift
to the limit of its travel in order to bleed the system and
check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine, check the gearbox oil level and top
up if necessary.
30-89
FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY
★ Raise the lift arms to the maximum height and stop the
engine.
1 - Disconnect the lower pipes from the valve block (1).
Loosen the fitting by a few turns, but before fully
disconnecting them, push them to detach them
from the couplers and release any residual pres-
sure in the system.
★ Label the pipes to avoid confusion on reconnec- 1
tion.
★ Plug the ends of the pipes and the open fittings on
the valve block to prevent the entry of contami-
nants. F0018020
2 - Remove the lift arms (2) and the pivot pins (3) complete
with their retaining chains.
3 - Remove the shaft end cover (4) and the shield (5). 2
4
2
5
3
3
F0018030
4 - Position under the lift assembly (6) a jack ”A” that can
be lowered by at least 10 cm. (4 in.).
F0017971
5 - Remove the bolts (7) and remove the upper pivot pins
(8) of the cylinders (9). 8
9
9
7
F0017981
30-90
FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY
6 - Lower the jack ”A” so that the cylinders (9) can be tilted
outwards.
7 - Remove the jack ”A” and guide the rocker assembly
(10) to the vertical position. 9 9
10
F0017991
8 - Unscrew and remove the bolts (11) and washers (12)

15
securing the brackets (13); recover the inner brackets 16
(14). 13
9 - Remove the spacer (15) and the lower bushes (16). 11

★ Do not remove the upper bushes yet for safety. 12
14
F0018040
10 - Attach a hoist to the lift assembly (6) and put the lifting
slings under slight tension.
Lift: 80 kg (176 lb.)
F0018050
11 - Unscrew and remove the ten bolts (17) and washers

securing the lift (6) to the front carrier. 6
1
17
F0018060
30-91
FRONT LIFT ASSEMBLY
12 - Remove the upper bushes (16) but leave them in po-

sition for safety.
16
F0018730
13 - Remove the lift assembly (6).

★ If necessary, use a lever to separate the assembly
from the front locating dowels.
F0018070
REFITTING THE LIFT ASSEMBLY

1
Bolts M16: 214 Nm (158 lb.ft.)
Bolts M20: 455 Nm (355 lb.ft.)
1 - Start the engine, repeatedly raise and lower the lift to
its maximum travel to bleed the system and check for
leaks.
up if necessary.
30-92
FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT PTO ASSEMBLY
1 - Remove the front lift assembly.

(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE FRONT LIFT AS-
SEMBLY»)
2
2 - Unplug the connector (1) and release the wiring from
the clip (2).
1
F0018080
3 - Fully unscrew the bolts (3) securing the cardan shaft

(4) to the flexible coupling (5) and detach the flange.
5
3
4
F0017312
4 - Unscrew the four bolts (6) but only remove the two
lower bolts.
★ Leave the two upper bolts in position for safety.
1 6
5 - Fit a non-slip block to a trolley jack; position the non-

slip block under the PTO assembly.
6 - Remove the two upper bolts previously left for safety
and remove the PTO assembly (7) while supporting F0018090
the cardan shaft (4).

★ If neccessary, use a lever to help separate the as-
sembly from the tractor.
7
PTO: 70 kg (154 lb.)
REFITTING THE FRONT PTO

ASSEMBLY
1
Screw: 214 Nm (157.7 lb.ft.) F0018100
30-93
FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS (Where fitted)
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS

(Where fitted)
1 - Before switching off the engine, disengage the
front suspension by pressing the pushbutton in
the cab for at least 20 seconds.
2 - Apply the parking brake. 1

system by unscrewing the valve (1) about two full
turns.
★ Wait a few minutes after discharging the pressure,
then re-close the valve.
1 - Remove the reinforcing side members.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE REINFORCING F0017820
SIDE MEMBERS»).
2 - Position a jack”A” and a non-slip block “B” under the
sump pan.
F0018170
3 - Support the swinging support (2) with a jack that can

be lowered through 10-15 cm.(4-6 in.).
4
4 - Disconnect the pipes (4), (5) from the left cylinder (3).
First loosen the fittings by a few turns, then, be-
fore disconnecting the pipes, push them to de- 3
tach them from the couplers and release any
residual pressure.
5
contaminants.
2
F0018180
5 - Disconnect the pipes (7), (8) from the right cylinder (6).
contaminants. 7
6
F0018190
30-94
6 - Remove the bolts (9) and the plates (10) securing the
upper cylinder pivot pins.
9
10
9
F0018200
7 - Using a slide hammer puller, remove the upper pivot

pins (11).
11
F0018210
8 - Unplug the steering sensor connector (12) and release

the wiring from the straps.
12
9 - Disconnect the steering cylinder pipes (13).
contaminants.
13
F0018220
10 - Lower the support (2) to disengage the upper mount-

ings of the cylinders (3), (6).
3 6
F0018230
30-95
11 - Remove the bolts (9) and the plates (10) of the lower
pivot pins.
10
9
F0018240
12 - Using the slide hammer puller, remove the lower pivot

pins (11) and the cylinders (3), (6).
3 6
11
F0018250
REFITTING THE FRONT

SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeat-
edly to full lock in both directions. Activate and deac-
tivate the suspension a number of times to expel air
from the system and check for leaks.
up if necessary.
30-96
FRONT SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE

1. Disassembly
1 - Relieve the staking on the lock washer located betwe-
en the end cap (1) and the cylinder (2).
F0021870
2 - Using a pin wrench, unscrew the end cap (1)..

1
F0021880
3 - Withdraw the rod (3) complete with end cap (1) and se-
als..
2
1
3
F0021890
4 - Heat the eye of the piston (4) to a temperature of 100–

120 °C (212–248 °F) and unscrew it from the rod (3).
3 4
3
F0021900
30-97
5 - Withdraw the end cap (1) from the rod and remove in
order the rod wiper (5), the seals (6), (7) and the guide
(8). 9
1
2
★ Take care not to damage the seatings of the seals.
6 - Remove the O-ring seal (9).
★ Note which way round the seals are fitted.
5
6 7 8
D0005380
7 - Remove the seal (11) and the guide (12) from the pi-
ston (10).
★ Take care not to damage the seal seating. 12 11
10
D0005390
2. Assembly
• Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.
1
End cap: 320÷370 Nm (236–273 lb.ft.)
2
Seals: Gearbox oil
3
Piston eye: Loctite 638
Piston eye: 50–70 Nm (37–52 lb.ft.)

1 - Stake the lock washer tabs into the notch on the cylin-
der (2) and into one of the notches on the end cap (1).
F0021910
30-98
FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT (Versions with front suspension)
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT AXLE AND SWINGING SUPPORT

(Versions with front suspension)

turns.
F0017820
1 - Remove the front suspension cylinders.

(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SU-
SPENSION CYLINDERS»).
2 - Position a trolley jack under the axle (2) and the swing-
ing support; raise the jack until it supports both the as-
semblies.
Group assembly: 455 kg (1002 lb.)
2
F0018260
3 - Remove the cover and the 4WD shaft .

(For details see «REMOVAL OF THE 4WD PROPEL-
LER SHAFT»).
Disconnect the differential lock pipe (3).
contaminants.
3
F0018270
4 - Remove the support (4) of the position sensor (5) and

unplug the connector (6). 1
4
6
F0018280
30-99
5 - Remove the plates (7) securing the pivot pins (8) of the
swinging axle support (9).
6 - Loosen the screw of the clips for the rigid steering pi-
pes and rotate the plate (7) to the left to release the piv-
ot pin (8).
7
9 8
F0018290
7 - Using a suitable drift made of soft material (aluminium,

copper, etc.,), remove the pivot pins (8).
F0018300
8 - Slowly lower the jack and remove the swinging sup-

port (9) complete with the axle (2).
9
F0018310
9 - Remove the screws (10) and remove the plate (11) se-
curing the axle pivot pin (12).
12
11
10
F0018320
30-100
10 - Attach the swinging support (9) to lifting slings and at-

tach the slings to a hoist; put the slings under slight
tension.
9
11 - Using a suitable drift made of soft material (aluminium,

copper, etc.,), drive out the axle pivot pin (12) and re-
move the swinging support. 2
12
F0018330
REFITTING THE FRONT AXLE

AND SWINGING SUPPORT
1
★ Check the calibration of the position sensor.
(For details, see «REMOVAL AND POSITIONING
OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SEN-
SOR).
2
Pivot pin and plain bearings: grease
1 - On starting the engine, bleed the systems as follows:
a - turn the steering wheel repeatedly to full lock in
both directions;
b - repeatedly activate and deactivate the suspen-
sion;
c - repeatedly engage and disengage the differential
lock.
up if necessary.
3 - Lubricate the axle pivot pin.
30-101
FRONT SUSPENSION VALVES
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION VALVES


turns.
F0017820
1 - Unplug the connectors (2) from the solenoid valves (3).

★ Label the connectors and solenoid valves to avoid
confusion on reconnection.
3
2
F0017950
2 - Disconnect the five connecting pipes (4).

First loosen the fittings by a few turns, then, be- 4
fore disconnecting the pipes, push them to de-
tach them from the couplers and release any
6
residual pressure.
3 - Remove the bolts (5) and remove the assembly (6).
F0017960
REFITTING
THE FRONT SUSPENSION
VALVES
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly activate and deacti-
vate the front suspension in order to expel any air from
the system and check for leaks.
up if necessary.
30-102
FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
REMOVAL AND POSITIONING OF THE FRONT SUSPENSION

POSITION SENSOR
1. Removal
1 - Remove the cover (1).
F0017900
2 - Loosen the rear nut (2).

3 - Unplug the connector (3).
4 - Unscrew and remove the upper retaining bolt (4) of the 4
support (5) and loosen the lower bolt (6); rotate the 7
support (5). 2
5 - Remove the front nut (7) and remove the sensor (8).
3
8
6 5
F0017910
2. Positioning
1 - Start the engine, fully extend the front suspension cyl-
inders and fit the sensor (8) to the support (5) with the
front nut (2) fully unscrewed. 2
5
F0017930
2 - Fix the support (5) and push the sensor (8) in the di-
rection ”X” until the pin (9) is fully retracted.
3 - Keeping the pin in this position, screw in the rear nut (2) 9 7 2 8
right up to the support (5).
4 - Screw the front nut (7) up to the support (5).
5 - Back off the nut (7) by one turn and tighten the nut (2) to
secure the sensor.
★ This adjustment prevents the possibility of the 5
sensor sustaining impact damage at the end of its
travel.
X
Nuts: 30±6 Nm (22.1±4.4 lb.ft.) D0003930
30-103
FRONT SUSPENSION POSITION SENSOR
3. Testing
T5 3
1 - Connect the test lead T5 (code 5.9030.743.1) be-
tween the sensor (8) and the wiring (3); start the engine
and, using a multimeter, check the voltage when the
cylinders are in the mid-stroke position.
★ Voltage with cylinders in mid-stroke position =
3.8V
Fully retract the cylinders and check the voltage.
★ Voltage with cylinders retracted = 1.90÷1.95V
★ The voltage is measured between the terminals of
the brown (earth) and blue (signal) wires
F0022060
NOTE. The same reading can also be taken using the
suspension section of the EDS program.
(For details, see EDS in section 20)
2- Stop the engine, disconnect the lead T5 (code
5.9030.743.1) and reconnect the wiring to the sensor.
3- Refit the cover (1).
30-104
REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS (Versions with front lift only)
REMOVAL OF THE REINFORCING SIDE MEMBERS

(For versions with front lift only)
1 - Remove the front lift valve block.
( For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE VALVE
BLOCK»).
2 - Remove the air reservoir and the battery support.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE AIR RESERVOIR
AND BATTERY SUPPORT»)
3 - Attach a hoist to the side member to be removed and
put the lifting sling under slight tension.
Side member: 45 kg (99 lb.)
F0018140
4 - Right side member (1): Unscrew and remove the

front bolts (2) complete with their washers and recover
the spacers (3). 1 3
F0018150
5 - Left side member (4): Unscrew and remove front bol-

ts (2) as per the right side member and the two rear bol-
ts (5) complete with washers. 1
5
2 4
F0018160
REFITTING THE SIDE MEMBERS

1
Bolts: M16: 214 Nm (158 lb.ft.)
Bolts: M20: 455 Nm (335 lb.ft.)
30-105
FRONT CARRIER (Versions with front suspension)
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT CARRIER

(Versions with front suspension)
Before stopping the engine, deactivate the front su-
spension by pressing the relative button in the cab.
1 - Remove:
• the radiator/coolers assembly;
• the alternator and air conditioning compressor
drivebelts;
• the reinforcing side members;
• the lift assembly;
• the front PTO (if present);
• the front suspension cylinders;
• the front axle and swinging support.
(For details, see the corresponding headings).
2 - Loosen the bolts (1) to eliminate the tightening torque.
1
F0018340
3 - Attach lifting slings to the front carrier (2), attach the

slings to a hoist and put them under slight tension.
4 - Remove the bolts (1) with their washers and remove
the front carrier (2). 2
★ If necessary, use a lever to separate the locating 2
dowels from the engine.
F0018350
REFITTING THE FRONT CARRIER

1
Bolts: 260±10% Nm (191.6±10% lb.ft.)
2
Locating dowels: grease
1 - Start the engine and operate the controls to expel air
from the various systems.
30-106
ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER
RENEWAL AND TESTING OF THE ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER
1. Renewal
1 - Remove the right-hand side panel.
F0021721
2 - Disconnect the tie-rod (2) from the lever (1).

3 - Remove the cotter pin (3) securing the lever (1) to the
potentiometer shaft; remove the lever (1).
★ Renew the cotter pin at each re-assembly.
2
1
F0019330
4 - Unplug the connector (5) from the potentiometer (4).

5 - Remove the screws (6) and remove the potentiometer.
5
F0021220
6 - Fit a new potentiometer and connect it to the lever (1)

with a new cotter pin (3).
7 - Connect the tie-rod (2).
1
F0019330
30-107
ACCELERATOR POTENTIOMETER
2. Potentiometer calibration
Whenever you replace and/or calibrate the ac-
celerator pedal potentiometer, it is also neces-
sary to check the calibration of the hand throttle
potentiometer
To calibrate the potentiometers, use the SERDIA
program. (For details, see SERDIA in section 20).
★ Check with pedal released: 1 +0.05/–0.15V
Check with pedal fully depressed: 4 +0.25V
Check with hand throttle at minimum: 0.9V
Check with hand throttle at maximum: 4V
30-108
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL OF THE FUEL TANK

1 - Remove the left rear wheel.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR
WHEELS»).
2 - Discharge all the compressed air from the cab su-
spension system.
★ On tractors equipped with air trailer braking, dis-
charge all the compressed air from the braking
system..
F0018881
3 - Disconnect the air feed pipe (2) from the left cab su-
spension piston (1).
4 - Unscrew and remove the lock nut and the bolts (3), (4) 5
securing the piston (1) and the damper (5).
★ Recover the shims from the damper.
4
1
3 2
F0020070
5 - Unplug the fuel level sensor connector (6).
F0020080
6 - Label the fuel pick-up and return pipes (7), (8).

Loosen the retaining clamps (9) and disconnect the pi- 7 8
pes.
F0020090
30-109
FUEL TANK
7 - Remove the bolts (10) and remove the locating discs

(11) of the fuel tank (12).
★ Label the discs to avoid confusion on reassembly.
11
10
12
F0018631
8 - Empty the screenwash reservoir.

Label the connectors(13), (14) and disconnect them
from the pumps (15).
9 - Label the feed pipes (16), (17) and disconnect them 13
from the pumps.
14
15
16
17
F0020100
10 - Remove the screws (18) and remove the screenwash

reservoir (19). 18
19
F0020110
11 - Unscrew the four nuts (20) and remove the four retai-
ning bolts (21) of the lower support (22) for the piston
(1) and damper (5).
★ If the delivery pipe to the piston (1) was removed,
5
on refitting, tighten the fitting to the specified tor-
que.
1
21
1
22
20
F0020071
30-110
FUEL TANK
12 - Using suitable lifting equipment, raise the cab so as to

be able to remove the retaining bolts (21) of the sup-
port (22). 21
22
F0020120
13 - Rotate the support (22) through 180° to disengage it

from the fuel tank.
14 - For safety, insert the bolts (21) in the support (22) and
lower the cab.
22
F0020130
15 - Support the fuel tank (23) with lifting equipment and

withdraw it from the guide tubes.
23
F0020140
REFITTING THE FUEL TANK

1
Fittings “A”: 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft.)
F0021920
30-111
TESTING THE AUXILIARY SERVICES PUMPS
★ Test conditions:
• Engine at operating temperature
• Hydraulic fluid: 60–70 °C (140–158 °F)
• Handbrake on
• Gearbox in neutral
1. Flow meter connection (CC version)

To control valve 3
1 - Connect the delivery line (1) to the flow meter (2) to the
upper port of a mechanically-controlled spool valve.
2 - Connect the return line (3) from the flow meter (2) to the
lower port of the same spool.
1
From control valve
F0021931
2. Flow meter connection (LS version)

To control valve
1 - Connect the delivery lines (4) of the flow meter (2) to
the upper ports of two mechanically-controlled spool
valves. 5
2 - Connect the return lines (5) from the flow meter to the
lower ports of the same two spool valves.
4
From control valve
F0021941
3. Measuring the flow rate

CC version
1 - Start the engine and bring the revs up to 1000 rpm. 1
2 - Operate the levers of the control valve/s connected to
the flow meter delivery line/s.
3 - Set the delivery pressure to 50 bar (725 psi) and read
3
off the pump flow rate.
4 - Release the levers and repeat the operation a number
of times.
5 - Repeat the operations in points 2, 3 and 4 at pressures 2
of 100 bar (1450.3 psi) and 150 bar (2175.5 psi).
F0021951
30-112
6 - Take the engine revs up to 2300 rpm and repeat the

operations in points 2, 3, 4 and 5 also in this condition.
LS version 4
7 - Check the readings taken against the values indicated
in the tables below.
CC CIRCUIT 5
Flow rate at Flow rate at
Pressure
1000 rpm 2350 rpm
bar (psi)
/min (US.gpm) /min (US.gpm)
50 (725) 32.0 (8.45) 76.0 (20.08)
100 (1450.3) 31.5 (8.32) 75.0 (19.82)
150 (2175.5) 31.0 (8.19) 73.5 (19.42) F0021961
LS CIRCUIT
Flow rate at Flow rate at
Pressure
1000 rpm 2350 rpm
bar (psi)
/min (US.gpm) /min (US.gpm)
50 (725) 44.5 (11.76) 107 (28.27)
100 (1450.3) 44.0 (11.62) 106 (28.00)
150 (2175.5) 43.5 (11.50) 104 (27.48)
30-113
HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP (Models 106-115 CV) (CC Version)
REMOVAL OF THE HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP

(Models 106-115 CV) (CC Version)
ignition.
★ Remove the right rear wheel.
(For details see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHE- 2
ELS»).
1 - Disconnect the inner control cable (2) from the creeper
engagement lever (1); disconnect also the outer cable 3
(3).
1
F0021230
2 - Disconnect the suction pipe (6) from the pump (4) and
the filter (5); disconnect the delivery pipe (7).
6
7
F0021240

pump (4). 8
8
F0021250
4 - Remove the pump (4) and its gasket.

★ The gasket should be renewed at each re-assem-
bly. 4
F0021260
30-114
HYDRAULIC SERVICES GEAR PUMP (Models 106-115 CV) (CC Version)
5 - Withdraw and check the drive coupling (9).
F0021270
REFITTING THE HYDRAULIC

SERVICES GEAR PUMP
30-115
GEAR PUMP ASSEMBLY (Models 120-165 CV) (CC version)
REMOVAL OF THE GEAR PUMP ASSEMBLY (Models 120-165 CV)

(CC Version)
ignition.
3
★ Remove the right rear wheel. 2
(For details see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHE-
ELS»).
1 - Disconnect the cable (2) from the creeper unit control
lever (1) and detach the outer sheath (3) from the
damping chamber support (4).
4 1
F0020171
2 - Disconnect the inlet (5) and outlet (6) pipes from the
damping chamber (4).
7
4
6
F0020460
3 - Remove the bolts (7) and remove the chamber (4).
F0020470
4 - Disconnect the suction pipe (10) from the pump (8)

and the filter (9). 11 10
5 - Disconnect the pipes (11), (12) and (13) from the
pump.
12 13
F0020480
30-116
GEAR PUMP ASSEMBLY (Models 120-165 CV) (CC version)

pump (8).
14
14
F0020490
7 - Remove the pump (8) and its gasket.

★ The gasket should be renewed at each re-assem-
bly.
8
F0020500
8 - Withdraw the drive coupling (15).
15
F0020510
REFITTING THE GEAR PUMP

30-117
VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP (Models 106-165 CV) (LS version)
REMOVAL OF THE VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP

(Models 106-165 CV) (LS version)
Remove the key from the ignition and apply the
parking brake.
★ Remove the right rear wheel.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHEEL-
SI»). 1
For tractors with air trailer braking only:
discharge the pressure from the air braking system.
2
1 - Partially loosen the fittings (1) and (2) and allow the oil
contained in the suction branch and the lubrication
circuit to drain off.
F0021750
2 - Disconnect the inner control cable (4) from the creeper

engagement lever (3); remove also the outer cable (5)
and position the entire cable to one side.
F0021970
3 - Disconnect the connector (6) of the pressure switch

(7).
6
4 - Unscrew and remove the oil filter (8) complete with the
fitting (9). 7
F0021760
5 - Disconnect the delivery pipe (12) and the suction pipe

(13) from the pump (10) and the priority valve (11) and
remove the lubrication pipe (14).
12 11
14
10
13
F0021770
30-118
6 - Remove the priority valve (11) and the distribution

block (15) complete with the delivery pipe (16).
16
11
15
F0021980
7 - Disconnect the Load Sensing pipe (18) from the pump

(10) and the fitting (17).
18 17
F0021780
8 - For tractors with air trailer braking only: disconnect

and remove the parking brake valve (19) , the regulator 19
(20) (if present) and the support (21).
(For details, see: «REMOVAL OF THE TRAILER AIR
BRAKING VALVES»).
22
9 - Remove also the pipes (22) preventing removal of the
pump.
21
20
F0020921

pump (10) with its O-ring. 1
10 23
F0022000
30-119
11 - Detach the pump (10) from the transmission and

withdraw it upwards.
★ Check the condition of the O-ring.
10
F0021990
12 - Withdraw and examine the drive coupling (24).
24
REFITTING THE VARIABLE DIS-

PLACEMENT PUMP F0021271
1
After connecting the pipes, remove the plug (25) and
fill the body of the pump (10) with oil.
Oil:1 kg (2 lb.)
1 - Check the oil level in the transmission and top up if ne- 25
10
cessary.
2 - For tractors with air trailer braking only: bleed the
air from the braking system.
(For details see «BLEEDING THE BRAKING SY- F0021790
STEM»).
3 - Start the engine and turn the wheel back and forth
between the full lock positions to expel all air from the
steering system, the lubrication circuit and the LS cir-
cuit; check the fittings of all the re-connected pipes for
leaks.
4 - Stop the engine, and re-check the oil level in the tran-
smission.
30-120
POWER STEERING PUMP (Models 106-115 CV) (CC version)
REMOVAL OF THE POWER STEERING PUMP (Models 106-115 CV)

(CC version)
★ The power steering pump may be installed in two dif-
ferent positions depending on the tractor version: A B
A - Version with compressor for air trailer braking with
pump mounted in line with the compressor.
B - Version without air trailer braking with pump
mounted directly on the upper engine power take-
off.
The pump removal procedure is the same for both ver-
sions.
F0021280
1 - Disconnect the suction and delivery pipes (1) and (2)

from the pump. A B
2 2
1 1
F0021290

pump (4) with its gasket.
★ Renew the gasket on refitting.
3
3
F0021300
REFITTING THE POWER

STEERING PUMP
30-121
PRIORITY VALVE (Models 106 - 115 CV)
REMOVAL OF THE PRIORITY VALVE (Models 106 - 115 CV)
1 - Remove the left rear wheel.

(For details see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHE- 2
ELS»). 3
2 - Remove the key from the ignition and thoroughly cle-
an the area around the valve (1).
1
3 - Loosen the fittings (2) and (3) by about three turns.
F0021810
4 - Disconnect, in the order given, the inlet pipe (4), the lu-
brication and hydraulic trailer braking pipe (5), the de-
livery pipe to the power steering (6), the Load Sensing
signal pipe (7) and finally the pilot pipe of the valve (8). 6
★ Plug the ends of the pipes immediately to prevent 8
5
the entry of contaminants. 7
1 4
F0021820
5 - Remove the retaining bolt (9) and remove the valve (1).
9
F0021830
REFITTING THE PRIORITY VALVE

1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeate-
dly to full lock in both directions in order to expel air
from the steering system and check for leaks.
2 - Stop the engine and bleed the hydraulic trailer braking
system.
30-122
PRIORITY VALVE (Models 120-165 CV) (Versions with variable displacement pump)
REMOVAL OF THE PRIORITY VALVE (Modd. 120-165 CV) (................ –>)

(Versions with variable displacement pump)
1 - Remove the right rear wheel.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR WHE-
ELS»). 2
3
2 - Switch off the engine and thoroughly clean the area
around the valve.
3 - Loosen the fittings (1), (2) and remove the pipe (3).
★ Plug the pipes and the open fittings to prevent the
1
entry of contaminants.
F0021310
4 - Disconnect, in the order given, the return pipe (4), the

power steering delivery pipe (5) and the Load Sensing
signal pipe (6). 4
5 - Remove the valve (7).
5
F0021320
REFITTING THE PRIORITY VALVE

1 - Start the engine and turn the steering wheel repeate-
dly to full lock in both directions in order to expel air
from the steering system and check for leaks.
30-123
CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER
REMOVAL OF THE CREEPER ENGAGEMENT LEVER
nition.
4
1 - Disconnect the transmission cable (2) from the lever 2
(1) and detach the outer cable (4) from the damping
chamber (3).
3 1
F0020172
For OC versions only

2 - Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes (5), (6) from the
chamber (3).
3 - Remove the bolts and remove the chamber (3).
★ For models: 6
106 CV .....................–>
110 CV .....................–>
115 CV .....................–>
these operations are not necessary.
3
5
F0020471
4 - Using a pin punch “A” remove the spring pin (7) se-
curing the lever (1); remove the complete lever as-
sembly.
1 7
F0020580
REFITTING THE LEVER

30-124
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (CC version)
REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (CC version)
nition.
★ Only if fitted
Remove the optional linkages “A” of the control valve
flow controls. A
F0021330
1. Right control valve

1 - Disconnect the delivery (1) and return (2) pipes from
the right control valve. 1
2
F0020520
2 - For versions with front lift only:

remove the quick-action couplers (3) of the right con-
trol valve and disconnect the lift connection pipes (4)
and (5). 4 3
F0020530
3 - Disconnect the connection pipe (7) to the right control

valve from the LS signal Tee fitting (6).
6
F0020540
30-125
4 - Disconnect the control cables (8) from the control

valve levers.
★ Label the control cables to avoid confusion on re-
connection. 8 8
F0021340
5 - Remove the support (9) (3 screws) for the trailer brak-

ing couplers (10) and position it to one side. 9
10
F0021350
6 - Remove the bracket (11) fixed to the upper studs (12)

of the control valve and to the control valve support
plate.
11
12
F0022170
7 - Remove the lower nut (13) and remove the control

valve assembly (14).
14
13
F0021360
30-126
2. Left control valve

the control valve.
15
2 - Disconnect the pipes (17) and (18) from the lift control 17
valve.
18
16
F0020541
3 - Disconnect the LS signal pipe (19) from the outer con-

trol valve.
★ Always renew the copper gaskets.
19
F0020550

valve levers.
connection.
20
F0021381
5 - Remove the bracket (21) supporting the external

electrical outlet (22) and, where present, the supple-
mentary hydraulic couplers (23) and position the brac-
ket to one side.
19
★ The bracket (21) is fixed to the upper studs of the
control valve and to the control valve support 22
plate.
23
F0021390
30-127
6 - Unplug the connectors (24 upper and 25 lower) from

the solenoids (26) and (27) of the lift control valve. 26 27
7 - Remove the last rear nut (28) and remove the control 29
valve assembly (29).
1
24 25
28
F0021371
REFITTING THE
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES
1
★ Position the connectors on the solenoids of the lift
control valve spool
DW upper (24)
UP lower (25)
1 - Start the engine and operate the lift to expel air from
the circuits and check for leaks.
30-128
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)
REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)
nition.
★ Only if fitted
Remove the optional linkages “A” of the control valve
flow controls. A
F0021330
1. Right control valve

1 - To remove this valve, refer to the procedure described
in «REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VALVES (CC ver- 2
sion)»,
the only difference being that the LS signal pipe (1)
must also be disconnected and removed from the
control valve (2).
1
F0021840
2. Left control valve

1 - Disconnect the pipes (6), (7) and (8) from the external
pressure coupler (3), the return (4) and the LS (5). 6
3 4 8
5 7
F0022010

the left control valve (9).
3 - Disconnect the pipes (12) and (13) from the lift control 9 10
valve.
12
13 11
F0022020
30-129
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (Versione LS)
3 - Disconnect the LS signal pipes (15) and (16) from the

end plate (13) and the head (14). 13 14
★ Always renew the copper gaskets.
15 16
F0022030

valve levers.
connection.
17
F0021380
5 - Remove the bracket (18) supporting the external

electrical outlet (19) and the supplementary hydraulic 19 18
couplers (3), (4), (5) and position the bracket to one si-
de.
★ The bracket (18) is fixed to the upper studs of the 3 5 4
control valve and to the control valve support
plate.
F0022040
6 - Unplug the connectors (20 upper and 21 lower) from

the solenoids (22) and (23) of the lift control valve. 22 23
7 - Remove the last rear nut (24) and remove the control 9
valve assembly (9).
1
20 21
24
F0021370
30-130
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES (LS version)
REFITTING THE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES
1
★ Position the connectors on the solenoids of the lift
control valve spool
DW upper (20)
UP lower (21)
1 - Start the engine and operate the lift to expel air from
the circuits and check for leaks.
30-131
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE BLOCKS
DISASSEMBLY OF THE AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE BLOCKS

(Description refers to left control valve)
★ The control valves are assembled in stacks and
should only be disassembled in order to renew parts;
any overhaul of the control valves should be carried
out directly by the manufacturer or an authorised ser-
vice centre.
1 - Loosen and remove the quick-action couplers (1) and

the relative seals.
F0021850
2 - Remove the control valve blocks.

(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL VAL- 2
VES»).
3 - Loosen and remove the nuts (2) securing the control
valve spool sections.
★ Loosen the nuts gradually to eliminate the elasti-
city of the seals between the spool sections.
1
F0022050
4 - Remove in order the end cap (3), the first spool section
(4), the spool section piloted by the lift (5), the second
spool section (6) and the end cap (7). 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 - Repeat these operations for the right control valve
block, bearing in mind that this block consists of just 2
manually controlled spool sections separated by a
spacer.
F0021860
30-132
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE BLOCKS
ASSEMBLY OF THE AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE BLOCKS
1
Nut tightening torque: 3 3
30 +0 3 Nm (22 +0 2.2 lb.ft.)
★ Nut tightening sequence: 1-2-3 2 2
(See drawing) 1 1
2
★ Ensure that the O-ring seals are correctly positio-
ned before fitting the sections together.
D0005360
30-133
LIFT CYLINDERS
REMOVAL OF THE LIFT CYLINDERS
nition. 4 3
1 - Remove the pins (1) and lower the lift rods (2) towards
the rear of the tractor.
★ Recover the spacers (3) and washers (4); make a
note of their postions. 1 1
2 2
F0020310
2 - Disconnect the pipes (6) from the cylinders (5).

contaminants. 5
F0020320
3 - Using a pin punch “A”, remove the spring pin (7) se-
curing the upper pivot pin (8).
8
7
F0020330
4 - Remove the screws (9) and remove the bracket (10)

securing the lower pivot pin (11).
11 10
9
F0021400
30-134
LIFT CYLINDERS
5 - Support the cylinder (5) while removing the upper piv-

ot pin (12). 1
12
F0020340
6 - Rotate the cylinder (5) so that it is horizontal and attach

it to a hoist.
Cylinder: approx.55 kg (121.2 lb.)
7 - Remove the lower pivot pin (11) and the cylinder.
11
1 5
F0020350
REFITTING THE LIFT CYLINDERS

1
★ Lubricate the pivot pins.
1 - Start the engine and repeatedly extend the cylinders
to their full extent in order to expel air from the system..
30-135
LIFT CYLINDERS
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE LIFT CYLINDERS
1. Disassembly
1 - Withdraw the piston (1) to the point where the circlip
(2) is visible through the hole of the delivery pipe fitting.
2
2 - Rotate the rod so that the gap in the circlip (2) is visible.
F0009200
3 - Using a screwdriver through the delivery line hole,

push one end of the circlip (2) towards the groove “A”
in the piston (1) while simultaneously rotating the pi-
ston (1) in order to release the circlip (2).
2
4 - Withdraw the complete piston assembly (1).
1
D0000821
5 - Remove in sequence the wiper seal (4), the guide (5),

the seal (6) and the second guide (7).
1 2
★ Note which way round the seal is fitted.
7 6 5 4
D0000830
2. Assembly
1
Seal and guides: Gearbox oil.
2
★ Before inserting the piston, check that the guides
are correctly positioned in the seatings in the cylin-
der.
30-136
LIFT POSITION SENSOR
TESTING THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR
ignition.
1 - Cut the retaining strap and, using a thin blade, discon- 1
nect the connector (2) from the position sensor (1).
F0021410
2 - Connect the test lead T6 (code 5.9030.743.0) betwe-

en the connector (2) and the sensor (1).
3 - Start the engine and with a multimeter check that the
supply voltage and the signal voltages with the lift rai- T6
sed and lowered are within the specified ranges:
★ Supply voltage (red-blue wires): 5.5±1Vdc
2
★ Signal voltage with lift raised (brown-blue wires): 1
equal to or greater than 0.5Vdc
★ Signal voltage with lift lowered (brown-blue wires):
less than or equal to 4.5Vdc
★ If the voltage readings are not within the specified ran- F0022070
ges, renew the sensor.
30-137
RENEWAL OF THE LIFT POSITION SENSOR
ignition.
2
1. Removal of the position sensor
1 - Remove the screws (1) securing the cover (2) and the
sensor. 1
F0020360
2 - Remove the sensor (3) and unplug the connector (4).
F0020370
2. Renewal of the position sensor bush

(only if necessary)
1 - After removing the worn bush, clean and activate the
seating.
Activator: Loctite 7649 A

19 º
2 - Apply sealant to the surfaces of the hole and fit the
new bush, aligning the machined guide surfaces of
19° manteining the protusion “A” of 4.5 --0 0.5 mm.
Sealant: Loctite 648

3 - Allow the sealant to cure for at least 30 minutes before D0004771
fitting the sensor.
3. Refitting the position sensor

★ Before finally tightening the screws, rotate the sen-
sor fully in a counter-clockwise direction; adjust
the position sensor as described in the following
paragraph.
30-138
4. Position sensor adjustment

1 - Detach any mounted implements from the 3-point
linkage. 1
2 - With the engine stopped, raise the lift arms to their ma-
A
ximum height using suitable lifting equipment.
3 - Make reference marks on the lever (1) and on the be-
aring support (2).
2
F0021420
4 - Lower the lift to its maximum depth position.

5 - Start the engine, push the external pushbutton (3) to 3
rise the lift arms up to it stop. Hold the pushbutton (3)
depressed and at the same time rotate the sensor (4)
in clockwise.
F0021430
6 - As the sensor (4) is rotated, the lift will start to rise; top
rotating the sensor and release the pushbutton (3)
when the reference marks made in step 3 are apart a
distance of “D” of 5–6 mm (0.20 - 0.24 in.). D
F0021440
7 - Fix the sensor (4) in position by tightening the screws

(5).
F0020361
30-139
8 - Check the adjustment by first lowering the lift (using

external pushbutton (3)) to an intermediate position 3
and then raising to the maximum height by holding the
pushbutton pressed; the lift arms should stop before
reaching the mechanical limit and thus over-pressu-
rising the hydraulic system, at which point the refe-
rence marks should be the distance apart indicated in
step 6.
If the hydraulic system is maintained at maximum
pressure for more than 30 seconds during the adju-
stment procedure, the system will automatically
switch to neutral and the error code “37” will be si-
gnalled. F0021430
In this case, before repeating the adjustment proce-

dure, first turn the ignition key to the “O” position.
9 - If necessary, alter the position of the sensor by turning
it a few degrees in a counter-clockwise direction.
30-140
LIFT DRAFT SENSOR
REMOVAL OF THE LIFT DRAFT SENSOR
1 - Remove the screws (1) and remove the cover (2) and
the spacers (3).
1
F0020380
2 - Support the lever and remove the bracket (4) and then
the sensor (5).
4
5
F0020390
3 - Release the wiring from the retaining straps and un-

plug the sensor connector (6).
★ The connectors are located under the cab and can 6
be accessed from the left-hand side of the tractor.
F0020400
REFITTING THE
LIFT DRAFT SENSOR
★ Make sure the sensor is installed the right way
round.
F0021450
30-141
DRIVER'S SEAT
REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT

1
1 - Lift the rear floor mat (1) and withdraw the feed wire (2)
for the compressor for the seat.
F0018900
2 - Remove the four nuts (3) and remove the complete

seat assembly (4).
F0018910
REFITTING THE DRIVER'S SEAT

30-142
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT, INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOVAL OF THE STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH

UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
tive battery lead (–.
1
1 - Remove the centre cover (1) and remove the nut (2) 3
with its washer.
2 - Remove the locknut (3) for telescopic adjustment of
the steering wheel.
2
F0018920
3 - Remove the nut (4), the toothed washer (5) and re-
move the steering wheel (6). 1 6
4 5
F0018930
4 - Remove the circlip (7) and remove the steering col-

umn switch unit (8) from the steering column.
8
F0018940
5 - Insert a thin blade “A” under the gasket and prise off
the instrument panel (9).
★ Alternatively, withdraw the right and left switch
groups “B” and push the instrument panel from the 9
inside.
B
F0020060
30-143
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT, INSTRUMENT PANEL
6 - Unplug the connectors (10) and (11) from the in-

strument panel (9); remove the assembly.
10
9
11
F0018950
REFITTING
THE STEERING WHEEL,
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH
UNIT AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
1
Steering wheel nut:
M18x1.5: 40±10% Nm (29.5±10% lb.ft.)
M8: 10 +0 2 Nm (7.4 +0 1.5 lb.ft.)
30-144
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND SHUTTLE CONTROL
RENEWAL OF THE STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND

THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER
tive battery lead (–). 1
1 - Remove the steering wheel (1).
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE STEERING
WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND
INSTRUMENT PANEL»).
F0018960
2 - Remove the lower screws (2) joining the shrouds (3) of

the shuttle control lever (4) and remove the safety bar 4
(5).
F0018970
3 - Unscrew and remove six screws (6) securing the

shrouds of the steering column switch unit (7).
F0018980
4 - Remove the circlip (8) of the steering column switch

unit (7).
7
8
F0018990
30-145
STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND SHUTTLE CONTROL
5 - Lift off the switch unit (7) and place it to one side.
The contacts of the switch unit are protected by 7
adhesive insulation material; recover this insu-
lation as it will have to be repositioned.
F0019000
6 - Unplug the connector (9), remove the screws (10) and

detach the shuttle control lever assembly (11).
10
11
F0019010
7 - Remove the shuttle control lever (11), detaching it

from the cover (12).
11
12
F0019020
ASSEMBLY OF THE STEERING

COLUMN SWITCH UNIT AND
THE SHUTTLE CONTROL LEVER
1 - Turn the ignition key to position “I” and check oper-
ation of the direction indicators, lights and windscreen
wiper.
2 - Start the engine and run it at idle speed ; engage a
gear and check that the shuttle control lever functions
correctly.
30-146
CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD
REMOVAL OF CENTRE CONSOLE AND SHROUD

1 - Remove the seat.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S 1
SEAT»).
2 - Remove the floor mats.
3 - Remove the steering wheel and steering column 1
switch unit.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE STEERING
WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT
AND INSTRUMENT PANEL».) F0019030
4 - Unscrew and remove the screws (1).

5 - Remove the upper centre console (2) by lifting it up-
wards. 2
F0019040
6 - Rotate the console (2) towards the rear of the tractor

and unplug the connectors (3), (4) and (5). 3a
3
★ Note that connectors and pushbuttons all bear
identification marks with the exception of the 2nd
pushbutton “C” from the left. 5
★ The unmarked pushbutton is to be connected to its
4
connector only on models equipped with a front
lift.
★ The connector marked 3a is not to be connected. 2
C
F0019050
7 - Remove cap (6), remove the self-locking nut (7) and its
washer and remove the accelerator pedal (8).
8
7
6
F0019060
30-147
8 - Fully lower the steering column.

Pull outwards the lock handle (9) of the steering tilt ad-
justment; remove the cotter pin (10) and remove the
handle.
★ Renew the cotter pin at each reassembly. 10
F0019070
9 - Unscrew and remove the retaining screws (11) of the

air duct fascia (12).
11
11
12
F0019080
10 - Detach the air duct (14) from the centre shroud (13)
and remove it.
13
14
F0019090
11 - Remove the cable ties (15) to release the wiring from

the guide fixed to the footplate. 15
★ Note that the cable ties are located in grooves. 15
F0019100
30-148
12 - Withdraw the wiring (17) from the right-hand console

(16).
1
17
16
F0019110
13 - Release the wires of the pushbutton connectors from

the cable ties (18).
18
F0019120
14 - Release the vertical wiring (20) from the cable tie (19);
withdraw the complete wiring harness through the ap-
erture exposed by tilting the console forwards.
19
20
F0019130
15 - Rotate the shroud (21) to align the rotation lock key

with the spring (22); remove the shroud (21).
2
16 - Remove the complete console assembly (2).
22
21
F0019140
30-149
17 - Remove the screws (23).
23
F0019150
18 - Lift and tilt the console shroud (13) towards the rear of
the tractor to disengage it from the clutch and brake
pedals.
13
F0019160
REFITTING THE CENTRE

CONSOLE AND SHROUD
1
★ Check the condition of the fascia gasket; renew it if
damaged.
30-150
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
• The right-hand console can be partially opened to in-

spect the wiring and the air conditioning blower and
for removal of the hand throttle assembly.
Remove the battery cover and disconnect the neg-
ative battery lead (–).
1 - Remove the seat. 2
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE DRIVER'S SE-
AT»).
2 - Remove the gaiter (1) and unplug the connector (2). 1
F0019581
3 - In case of removal only: disconnect the control ca-

bles (3) from the auxiliary service control valves.
1
3
F0019641
4 - Disconnect the control cables (6) and (7) from the

speed selector lever (4) or the operating mode lever
(5).
4
6
5
F0019611
5 - Remove the front floor mat and remove the plate (8) of
the cable guide (9) in order to free the control cables (6)
and (7).
6
8
7
F0019571
30-151
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
6 - Drive out the spring pin (10) and remove the creeper
engagement lever (11).
10
11
F0019850
7 - Remove the screw (12) move the support (13).
13
12
F0019860
8 - Unplug the connector (14) of the lever position sensor

5 0+1
(15).
If the sensor (15) has been removed or repla-
ced, on refitting adjust the protrusion to 5 +0 1
mm (0.197 +0 0.04 in.) relative to the tightened
nut. 15
14
F0019870
9 - Withdraw the pin (16) and disconnect the creeper con-

trol cable (17). 1
16
17
F0019880
30-152
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
10 - Unscrew and remove the lower bolt (18) of the console

(19).
19
18
F0020050
11 - Position a hydraulic jack “A” with a non-slip block un-

der the tow hook (20) so that it is inclinded towards the
right-hand wheel; raise the tractor so that the right
wheel is off the ground (21).
20
A 21
F0018871
12 - Position a jack “B” with safety wings under the right

brake assembly; remove the right wheel and lower the
tractor onto the stand.
1
★ Stand load capacity: minimum 2 tons
B
F0019890
13 - In case of console removal only:

Remove the four screws (22) and remove the cover
plate (23).
23
22
F0019900
30-153
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
14 - In case of console removal only: disconnect from

the bulkhead fitting the connectors of the lift line (24)
(TKAB2), the transmission (25) (TKAB1), the front su-
24
spension (26), the feed cable (27), the creeper engage-
28 25
ment indicator cable (28),the cab lights connector (29)
and the feed cable (30).
30
29
26
27
29
F0019910
15 - Disconnect the engine line connector (31) and the

connector (32) from the bulkhead fitting.
31 32
F0020040
16 - Remove the grille (33) and the filter (34) from the right-
hand cab pillar.
34
33
F0019920
30-154
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
17 - Unscrew and remove the trim panel retaining screws

(35). 35
35
F0019930
18 - Insert a thin blade between the cab pillar (36) and the
interior trim (37) and detach the clips (38) from the pil-
lar and the trim.
Remove the trim (37).
38
36
37
F0019940
19 - Unplug the lower connectors (39), (40) and (41) and the
upper connector (42). 39
40
42
41
F0019950
20 - Disconnect the gas spring (43) of the right-hand door

and remove the mounting pin (44).
44
43
F0019960
30-155
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
21 - Remove the bolts, lift the seat support (45) and di-
sconnect the hose (46).
46 45
F0000771
22 - In case of console removal only: unplug the con-

nectors (47) and (48).
48
47
F0019990
23 - Open the rear right cable hatch (49) to access the

screw (50).
50
49
F0019970
24 - Remove the screws (51) and remove the flanged nut

(52) located under the right fender.
51
51
52
F0019980
30-156
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE
25 - Loosen and remove the bolt (53).
53
F0020020
26 - Unscrew and remove the front retaining screws (54).
54
F0020010
27 - Raise the front of the right-hand console (55) and

move it away from the side of the cab; if necessary, re-
move the console.
★ When removing the console, support the electrical 55
wiring and control cables.
F0019631
REFITTING THE RIGHT-HAND

CONSOLE
1
★ Connect the control cables following the opera-
tions described in the heading «REFITTING THE
AUXILIARY VALVE CONTROL CABLES» AND
«REFITTING THE CONTROL CABLES FOR PTO
ENGAGEMENT AND SPEED SELECTION»).
30-157
LEFT-HAND CONSOLE
REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND CONSOLE

1 - Remove the seat. (For details, see «REMOVAL OF 1
THE DRIVER'S SEAT»).
2 - Remove the accelerator pedal (1) and remove the front
floor mat (2).
2
F0019061
3 - Only where fitted.

Remove the passenger seat (3). 3
F0021460
4 - Remove the rear floor mat (4).
F0021470
5 - Remove the parking brake cover (5).

6 - Remove the seat support (6) and remove the strap (7) 8
to disconnect the hose (8).
Remove the screw (9). 5 7
6 9
F0021480
30-158
LEFT-HAND CONSOLE
7 - Remove the interior trim (10) from the cab pillar.

8 - Disconnect the gas spring of the left door and remove
the mounting pin.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND
CONSOLE»).
10
F0021490
9 - Remove the fixing screws and move the left-hand

console (11) away from the side of the cab.
11
F0021500
10 - Unplug the four connectors (12).

13
11 - Disconnect the heating valve control cable (13).
12 - Remove the left-hand console (11). 12
12
12
F0021510
REFITTING THE LEFT-HAND

CONSOLE
30-159
LIFT, FRONT SUSPENSION AND TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
REMOVAL OF THE LIFT, FRONT SUSPENSION AND TRANSMISSION

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
1 - Remove the rear hatch of the right-hand console.
2 - Withdraw the switch assembly (1). 1
3 - Label the switches and the corresponding con-
nectors to avoid confusion on reconnection; unplug
the connectors (2) and remove the switches.
2
2
F0019170
1. Lift ECU
1 - Unplug the connectors (4) and (5) from the ECU (3).
4
5
F0019180
2 - Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (6) of the lift

ECU. 6
F0019190
3 - Withdraw the ECU (3).
F0019200
30-160
2. Front suspension ECU

1 - Remove the lift ECU (see previous paragraph).
2 - Unscrew and remove the ECU fixing screw (7).
F0019210
3 - Unplug the connectors (8) and (9) and withdraw the

ECU (10).
9
8
10
F0019220
3. Transmission ECU
1 - Unscrew and remove the screws (11) and remove the
bracket (12). 12
11
F0019230
13
F0019240
30-161
3 - Remove the fixing screws (14) and withdraw the ECU

(15).
14 15
F0019250
REFITTING THE LIFT, FRONT

SUSPENSION AND
TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNITS
30-162
FUSE AND RELAY BOARD
REMOVAL OF THE FUSE AND RELAY BOARD

1
1 - Remove the ECUs of the lift, the front suspension and
the transmission.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE LIFT, FRONT
SUSPENSION AND TRANSMISSION ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNITS»). 2
2 - Unplug the connectors (1) and (2) from the signal out-
let sockets and the external outlet socket for trailer-
mounted implements.
F0019260
3 - Remove the bracket (3) of the diagnostics outlet (4)

and place it to one side.
F0019270
4 - Disconnect the connectors (P2), (P6), (P3), (P5), (J1),

(J2) and (J3) from the fuse/relay board.
★ The connectors are marked with the same sym- 5
bols as the sockets on the circuit board. 6
5 - Remove the cover and disconnect the earth lead (6).
F0019280
6 - Disconnect the connector (7) (P5), which is accessed

through the ECU compartment.
F0019290
30-163
FUSE AND RELAY BOARD
7 - Remove the relays from the board (5) which prevent its
removal:
RL4 - front windscreen (8) 8
RL14 - direction indicators (9)
F0019300
8 - Disconnect the lead (10) and remove the five fixing

screws (11).
11
10
F0019310
9 - Remove the board (5).
F0019320
REFITTING THE FUSE AND

RELAY BOARD
30-164
ENGINE ECU
REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE ECU

1 - Remove the ventilation and heater control panel.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF CLIMATE CONTROL
PANEL»).
2 - Disconnect the air hose (1) from the outlet vent and
position it to one side.
1
1
F0020000
3 - Loosen the fixing screws (2) and partially withdraw the

ECU (3).
2
3
F0019700
4 - Label and unplug the connectors (4) and (5).

5 - Remove the ECU (3).
F0019710
REFITTING THE ENGINE ECU

1
• The air hose must be routed over the top of the
ECU between the two connectors.
30-165
CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES (Power Shift version)
1. Removal of the potentiometer

1 - Remove the centre console and console shroud.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE CENTRE CON- 2
SOLE AND SHROUD»). 1
2 - Disconnect the tie-rod (2) from the clutch pedal (1).
F0021740

5
4 - Remove the screws (5) and remove the potentiometer
3
complete with the tie-rod.
F0019350
★ If a new potentiometer is to be fitted, disconnect the

tie-rod (2), remove the cotter pin (6) and the lever (7).
★ Renew the cotter pin at each re-assembly. 3 2
6
F0021520
1.1. Refitting the potentiometer.

After refitting the potentiometer, check the po-
sition of the pedal and its travel; check also the
calibration values using the programming/diag-
nostics tester.
(For details, see EDS Programming in section
20).
30-166
2. Renewal of the clutch master cylinder

1 - Remove the engine hood side panels. (For details, see
«REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE HOOD AND FRONT
GRILLE»). 1
2 - Remove the air cleaner. (For details, see «REMOVAL
OF THE AIR CLEANER»).
3 - Remove the screws and remove the insulation panel
(1).
F0018740
4 - Unplug the connectors (2) of the brake fluid level war-

ning light.
5 - Remove the cap (3) and draw off the fluid contained in 2
the brake fluid reservoir (4). 3
F0018750
6 - Disconnect the connector (6), the suction pipe (7) and

the delivery pipe (8) from the clutch master cylinder (5).
★ Plug the ends of the pipes to prevent the entry of 7
contaminants.
6 5
F0021530
7 - Remove the rod (9) and disconnect the clutch master

cylinder from the pedal (10).
8 - Remove the screws (11) and remove the master cylin-
der.
9
10
11
F0021741
30-167
2.1 Refitting the clutch master cylinder

1 - Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum level.
2 - Bleed the air from the clutch control circuit using the
same procedure as for bleeding the braking system.
(For details, see «BLEEDING THE BRAKING SY-
STEM»).
3. Adjustment of the clutch pedal position and

travel
1 - Check that the distance between the top edge of the
clutch pedal and floor is the same as that of the brake
pedals.
If necessary, adjust the pedal height by adjusting the
buffer (12). 1
12
F0019381
2 - Adjust the buffer (13) so that it protrudes 68±1 mm

(2.68±0.04 in.), equivalent to a pedal travel of appro-
ximately 144–145 mm (5.67–5.71 in.).
13
D0004670
30-168
CLUTCH PEDAL AND RELATED DEVICES (Power Shuttle version)
1. Removal of the potentiometer

1 - Remove the centre console and console shroud.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE CENTRE CON-
SOLE AND SHROUD»). 2
2 - Disconnect the tie-rod (2) from the clutch pedal (1).

1
F0019340

5
4 - Remove the screws (5) and remove the potentiometer
3
complete with the tie-rod.
F0019350
★ If a new potentiometer is to be fitted, disconnect the

tie-rod (2), remove the cotter pin (6) and the lever (7).
★ Renew the cotter pin at each re-assembly. 3 2
6
F0021520
1.1.Refitting the potentiometer.

After refitting the potentiometer, check the position of
the pedal and its travel; check also the calibration va-
lues using the programming/diagnostics tester.
NOTE. After adjusting the height of the clutch pedal,
check using the EDS program in section 20
that the output voltage of the potentiometer is
4.3V.
If necessary, adjust the length of the tie-rod (2)
to obtain this value.
30-169
2. Adjustment of the clutch pedal position and

travel
1 - Check that the distance between the top edge of the
clutch pedal (1) and floor is the same as that of the
brake pedals.
If necessary, adjust the pedal height by adjusting the
buffer (8). 1
F0019380
2 - Regolare il tampone (9) fino ad ottenere una corsa del

pedale “A” di 155 +0 5 mm (6.107 +0 0.197 in.)
NOTE. With the EDS program in section 20, check
that the voltage reaches a value of 0.9–1.1V.
A
D0005400
3. Renewal of the proximity sensor

2 - Unscrew the nut (11) sufficiently to disengage it from 10
the sensor (12).
3 - Check that the axial play of the pedal is within the ran-
ge of 0.1–0.6 mm (0.004 – 0.024 in.); if the play exce-
eds the permitted maximum, adjust it before adjusting 12
11
the position sensor (12).
F0019360
4 - Fit the new sensor (12) following the removal proce-

dure in reverse.
Fully depress the clutch pedal.
D
4 - Adjust the position of the sensor relative to the lever by
way of the adjuster nuts (11). 11
★ Distance “D” between the lever and the sensor: 12
0.5–1 mm (0.02 – 0.04 in.)
F0019370
30-170
CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL PANELS AND LEVERS OF

THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO
2
1. Removal of the lift and rear PTO control panel.
1 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (1) of the lift control
panel (2).
F0019400
2 - Lift the assembly (2) and disconnect the PTO selector

control cable (4) from the lever (3). 2
3 - Remove the yoke (5) securing the outer cable (6) and 3
disconnect it.
1
4
5
F0019410
4 - Unplug the connector (7) and remove the assembly

(2). 2
F0019420
5 - Only in the case of testing or renewal of the po-

tentiometers.
Unscrew and remove the screws (8) and remove the 8
lower cover (9).
F0019430
30-171
2. Removal of the auxiliary service valve

control levers
1 - Remove the lift control panel as described in the pre-
vious paragraph.
2 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (10) of the control 11
levers assembly (11).
10
F0019440
3 - Lift the assembly (11) and rotate it through 90°.
11
F0019450
2.1 Removal of the cross-gate control lever

assembly
1 - Remove the yokes (12) securing the outer cables and
disconnect the cables (13) and (14). 1
connection.
13
14
12
F0019460
2 - Unscrew and remove the nuts (15) with their washers;

withdraw the control assembly (16) from the panel
(11).
15
11
16
F0019470
30-172
2.2 Removal of the individual service valve

control levers
18
1 - Remove the yokes (17) securing the outer cables and
disconnect the inner cables (18). 1
★ Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnec-
tion.
17
F0019480
2 - Unscrew and remove bolts(19) with their washers and

remove the levers (20) and the lever pivot supports
(21).
20 19
21
F0019490
2.3 Removal of the PTO control panel

1 - Unscrew and remove the screws (22).
22
F0019500
2 - Lift the control panel (23) and unplug the connectors

(24).
★ Label the connectors to avoid confusion on recon-
nection.
23
24
F0019510
30-173
3 - Remove the yoke (25) securing the outer cable (26),

disconnect the cable (27) and remove the assembly (23). 23
1
27
26
25
F0019540
2.4 Removal of the lift control assembly and the

hand throttle
1 - Unscrew and remove the two outer fixing screws (28)
of the assembly (29).
29
28
F0019520
2 - Release the right-hand console (30) from its fixings

and tilt it towards the centre of the cab in order to re-
move the inner screws (31) and unplug the connectors 30
(32).
★ (For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-
HAND CONSOLE»). 31
3 - Remove the lift control assembly. 2
32
REFITTING THE CONTROL
PANELS AND LEVERS OF THE
AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES F0019530
AND THE PTO

1
★ The slotted bush “A” securing the cable must be
oriented towards the outer end of the fixing pin.
1 - Adjust the length of the control cables.
(For details, see «RENEWAL OF THE AUXILIARY
A
VALVE CONTROL CABLES»).
2
★ If a new hand throttle is fitted, it will have to be ca-
librated. (See the SERDIA program in section 20).
F0019550
30-174
PTO ENGAGEMENT AND SPEED SELECTION CONTROL CABLES
RENEWAL OF THE PTO ENGAGEMENT AND

SELECTION CONTROL CABLES
REMOVAL
(Figures refer to the speed selector)
1 - Remove the lever assembly relative to the cable to be
renewed.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF LEVERS OF THE
AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVES AND THE PTO»).
F0019561
2 - Disconnect the control cable (1) from the control lever

(2) and remove the yoke (3) to remove the outer cable
(4).
4 3
F0019543
3 - Remove the front floor mat and remove the plate (5) of
the cab guide (6) in order to release the outer cable to
be renewed.
F0019570
4 - Loosen the fixing screw (7) of the gear lever gaiter (8).
5 - Raise the gaiter (8), unplug the connector (9) and with-
draw the control cable to be renewed.
7
F0019580
30-175
6 - Disconnect the cable end fitting (10) from the speed

change lever (11) or the operating mode lever (12); re-
move the yoke securing the outer cable and remove 10 (Speed change lever)
the control cable.
12
11 (Operating mode lever)

F0019591
REFITTING
1 - Extend the new cable and engage it in the cable guide
(6).
2 - Connect the end fitting of the inner control cable (2) to 1
the control lever (1) and secure the outer cable (3) with 6
the yoke (4). 2
4
F0022180
3 - Fix the lever assembly (13) to the right-hand console.

4 - Move the lever (14) to the position corresponding to
the position of the lever (10) or (11) mounted on the 10
transmission. 14 13
11
F0019600
5 - Secure the outer cable with the yoke.

6 - Stretch the cable slightly to connect it to the fitting on
the lever (10) or (11), making sure that the lever on the 10
console is still in the correct position.
11
F0019610
30-176
7 - Move the lever (14) or (15) in the cab and check that the
corresponding lever on the transmission moves
through its entire travel and changes the gear. 14
★ Check that the travel of the lever (14) or (15) is cen-
tred relative to the slot in the console.
15
F0019560
8 - Secure the outer cable in the bulkhead fitting (6) by in-

stalling the plate (5).
9 - Reconnect the connector, reposition the gaiter (8) of 8
the gear lever and fix in position with the screw (7) and
its washer. 6
5
F0019620
30-177
AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES
RENEWAL OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

AT»).
2 - Remove the control levers assembly and disconnect
the control cables to be renewed from the levers.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE CONTROL PAN-
ELS AND LEVERS OF THE AUXILIARY SERVICE
VALVES AND THE PTO»).
F0019441
3 - Detach the right-hand console (1) from the cab, but do

not unplug any of the connectors. 1
(For details, see «OPENING AND REMOVAL OF THE
RIGHT-HAND CONSOLE»).
F0019630
4 - Disconnect the outer cables (2) and inner cables (3)

from the control valve assembly.
F0019640
5 - Remove the screws and remove the plate (4) securing

the bulkhead gasket (5).
Release the control cables (6) from the bulkhead fitting
4
and withdraw them towards the rear of the tractor.
F0019650
30-178
AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES
REFITTING THE AUXILIARY SERVICE VALVE CONTROL CABLES

1 - Check that the control cable lever and the corre-
sponding control valve lever are both in neutral.
F0019561
2 - Fix the outer cables with the yokes (1).

3 - Connect the inner cables (2) to the control levers. 2
1
F0020030
4 - With the control lever in neutral position, lift the retai-

ning bush (3) and, while keeping the cable under slight
tension, insert the end in the fitting (4).
3
3
2
F0021540
5 - Lower the retaining bush (3); check that the control

valve spool travels through its full stroke and that the
control lever is positioned centrally in its slot when the
control valve is in neutral.
★ For the cross-gate control lever, check the spool
travel for both side-to-side and vertical move-
ments of the lever.
F0021550
30-179
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
1 - Remove the screws (1) and (2) and remove the shroud
(3).
3
4
2
F0019720
2 - Operate the lever (4) repeatedly to eliminate any play in

the mechanism. 4
3 - With the lever (4) fully lowered, adjust the height of the
microswitch (5) by raising it to its maximum height and
then lowering it to obtain the correct amount of resid-
ual travel. 5
★ Residual travel: 1 mm (0.04 in.)
4 - Replace the shroud (3).
F0019730
30-180
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
REMOVAL OF THE CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

1 - Pull off the air conditioning on/off knob (1).
F0019660
2 - Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (2) of the con-

trol panel (3).
F0019670
3 - Detach the control panel (3) by pressing the spring cli-

ps (4) securing it to the left-hand console.
4
4
F0019680
4 - Lift the panel (3), disconnect the connectors (4) and

(5), the wiring (6), and the heater control cable (7).
7
REFITTING THE CLIMATE 4
CONTROL PANEL
F0019690
30-181
HEATER VALVE
RENEWAL OF THE HEATER VALVE
1. Removal
ignition.
1 - Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system.
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
2 - Disconnect the inner control cable (2) and the outer

cable (3) from the valve (1). 1
1
F0021560
3 - Loosen the retaining straps (4) and remove the valve

(1).
4 4
F0021570
2. Refitting and adjustment of the control cable.

• Refitting is the reverse of removal. MAX.
1
★ Connect the heating valve control cable as follows:
+2
1 - Turn the heater control knob fully to the left (blue

section) and then two notches back to the right
(red section).
D0004730
30-182
HEATER VALVE
2 - Turn the lever (5) of the heater valve (1) up to to the

stop (6). 1
3 - Fix the outer part (7) of the control cable (2) with 5
the spring clip (8) and the inner cable (2) with the
screw (9).
1 - Fill the cooling system.
6
8
Coolant: 7
9
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
2
17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
F0021580
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
2 - Fully open the heater valve.

3 - Start the engine: allow the coolant to circulate and
check for leaks.
4 - Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.
30-183
HEATER MATRIX
REMOVAL OF THE HEATER MATRIX

floor mat (2).
2
F0019061
3 - Remove the rear floor mat (3).
F0021471
4 - Remove the retaining strap (4) and the air hose (5).
F0019081
5 - Remove the bolts and lift the seat support (6).

6 - Remove the bolts and remove the upper cover (7) of 6
the air conditioning assembly.
F0021590
30-184
HEATER MATRIX
7 - Turn the heater control knob to the MAX position (red

section).
Drain the coolant from the engine and the heater ma-
8
trix by disconnecting the pipes (8).
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
★ After draining the system, reconnect the pipes (8).

8 - Remove the evaporator. F0021600
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE AIR CONDI-

TIONING EVAPORATOR»).
9 - Remove the hose clamp (9) and disconnect the ver-
tical return hose (10) from the matrix.
9
10
F0021610
10 - Remove the hose clamp and disconnect the horizon-

tal delivery pipe (11) from the matrix.
11
F0021620
11 - Remove the matrix (12) by lifting the right side verti-

cally and then rotating it towards the rear of the tractor.
12
F0021630
30-185
HEATER MATRIX
REFITTING THE HEATER MATRIX

1 - Fill the cooling system.
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
2 - Start the engine: allow the coolant to circulate and

check for leaks.
3 - Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.
30-186
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR
REMOVAL OF THE AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR

THE DRIVER’S SEAT»).
floor mat (2).
2
F0019061
3 -Remove the rear floor mat (3).
F0021471
4 - Connect the quick-fit couplers of the high (R) and low

(S) pressure pipes to the refrigerant (R134A) charging,
testing and recovery machine.
Set the machine for recovery operation and start it; al-
R
low the machine to run until all the refrigerant has been
recovered, then disconnect it. 1
★ Measure the quantity of oil recovered and conse- S

quently to be reintroduced into the system.
F0021640
5 - Remove the hose clamp (4) and the air hose (5).
F0019081
30-187
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR
6 - Remove the bolts and lift the seat support (6).

7 - Remove the screws and remove the cover (7) of the air 6
conditioning assembly.
F0021590
8 - Disconnect the inlet (8) and outlet (9) pipes from the
evaporator.
2
Immediately seal the ends of the pipes (8) and (9) to
prevent atmospheric moisture from getting into the 8
air conditioning system.
9
9 - Release the rubber diaphragm (10).
10 - Lift up the evaporator (11); remove the temperature
sensor (12) and place it on one side. 3
11 - Remove the evaporator (11).
F0021650
REFITTING THE EVAPORATOR

1
★ Quantity of R134a:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
g 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1950
oz. 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 56.4 68.74
★ After recharging the system, check the seals on F0001062
the pipes (R and S) and throughout the system us-

ing a leak detector.
2 11
High pressure fitting (5/8’ - 18UNF):
13.6 – 20.3 Nm (10 -- 15 lb.ft.)
Low pressure fitting (7/8’ - 14UNF):
35.3 – 42 Nm (26 -- 31 lb.ft.)
12
3
★ Check that the temperature sensor is securely
fixed.
1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover (7).
F0000941
30-188
RIGHT AIR CONDITIONING FAN
REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

1 - Remove the seat. (For details, see «REMOVAL OF
2 - Remove the centre console shroud. (For details, see 2
«REMOVAL OF THE CENTRE CONSOLE AND
SHROUD»).
3 - Remove the fixing screws of the right-hand console.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE RIGHT-HAND
CONSOLE»).
F0021592
4 - Remove the seat support (1) and upper cover (2) of the
air conditioning assembly.
5 - Remove the evaporator. (For details, see «REMOVAL
OF THE EVAPORATOR») 4 3
6 - Remove four bolts (3) securing the fan (4).

7 - Remove the fan (4) and turn it over.
F0001000
8 - Unplug the connectors (5) and (6). 1

7
If a new fan is to be fitted, the support block (7)
should also be renewed. 4
5
6
F0001010
REFITTING THE RIGHT-HAND AIR

CONDITIONING FAN
1
★ Stick the support block on to the fan screw before
positioning the fan
Block: Loctite 401

1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover.
30-189
LEFT AIR CONDITIONING FAN
REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND AIR CONDITIONING FAN

AT»).
2
2 - Remove the left-hand console without disconnecting
the control cable of the heater valve. (For details, see
«REMOVAL OF THE LEFT-HAND CONSOLE»).
3 - Remove the seat support (1) and the upper cover (2) of
the air conditioning assembly
F0021592
4 - Withdraw the evaporator. (For details, see «REMO-
VAL OF THE EVAPORATOR).
5 - Remove the four screws (3) securing the fan (4).
3 4
6 - Remove the fan (4) and turn it over.
F0001020
7 - Unplug the connectors (5) and (6). 1

7
If a new fan is to be fitted, the support block (7)
should also be renewed. 4
6
F0001030
REFITTING THE LEFT-HAND

AIR CONDITIONING FAN
1
★ Stick the block to the fan screw before positioning
the fan.
Block: Loctite 401

1 - Carefully check the seal around the upper cover.
30-190
PARKING BRAKES
ADJUSTMENT OF THE PARKING BRAKES
1 - Before proceeding with the adjustment, operate the

handbrake lever (1) repeatedly in order to eliminate
any play and check that the control cable slides freely.
2 -Apply a dynamometer with a scale of up to 500 Nm to
the handgrip, and raise the handbrake lever to the first
notch; check that the force applied to reach the first
notch is within the normal limits.
★ Normal force: 300 +0 30 N (55 +0 5 lb.)
1
F0021660
3 - If the force is outside these limits, screw out the nut (2)
with the least clearance and screw in the nut (3) with
m m
5 m
m
most clearance.
0, ,5
IN 1
M AX
2
M
4 - Then check that the distances between the nuts (2)
and (3) of the tie-rods (4) are 0.5–1.5 mm (0.02 -- 0.06
in.).
3
5 - Take the tractor to straight section of apshalted road
at least 50 m (97 yard) in length. 4
6 - Engage gear and move off.
7 - With the tractor in motion, depress the clutch pedal
and fully apply the handbrake (1); check that the rear F0021671
wheels lock up simultaneously.

8 - If the rear wheels do not lock up at the same time,
screw in gradually and by just a few degrees the nut
(2) corresponding to the wheel that fails to lock up
and screw out the nut corresponding to the other
wheel.
9 - Repeat the previous operations until both rear wheels
lock up simultaneously when the handbrake is fully
applied.
30-191
CAB DOOR CABLE
RENEWAL OF CAB DOOR CABLE
1 - Unscrew and remove the four screws (1) securing the

two halves of the handle (2).
1 1
F0019740
2 - Remove the two halves of the handle and recover the

bushes (3) and the pin (4).
3
4
2
3
F0019750
3 - Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (5) of the door

lock cover (6).
5
F0019760
4 - Loosen the clamp nut (7) and withdraw the cable (8).
8 F0019770
30-192
CAB DOOR CABLE
5 - Feed the new cable starting from the handle side; en-
gage it with the pin (4) and the clamp nut (7).
With the cable under slight tension, tighten down the
clamp nut.
7
4
8
F0019780
6 - Lubricate the bushes (3) and the slide ways for the
handle; fit the bushes to the pin and refit the handle (2).
Slide ways and bushes: Molikote 3

2
7 - Check that the door opens correctly and complete the
refitting procedure.
F0019790
30-193
TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE
REMOVAL OF THE TRAILER BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

1 - Unscrew and remove fixing screws (1) of the upper
cover (2); remove the cover. 2
1
F0019800
2 - Remove the gauge (3); if a new gauge is to be fitted,

unplug the connectors (4) and (5).
★ Label the connectors (5) to avoid confusion on re-
connection. 3
5
F0019810
3 - To replace the bulb, unplug the connectors (4) and

withdraw the bulb holder (6).
F0019820
REFITTING THE TRAILER

BRAKING AIR PRESSURE GAUGE
30-194
POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS DISPLAY
REMOVAL OF THE POWERSHIFT - POWERSHUTTLE STATUS DISPLAY
Remove the key from the ignition switch.

1 - Insert a thin blade “A” between the cab pillar and the
display unit (1).
2 - Prise off the display (1).
A
F0019830
F0019840
REFITTING THE POWERSHIFT -

POWERSHUTTLE STATUS
DISPLAY
30-195
CAB
REMOVAL OF THE CAB

Discharge any residual pressure from the trailer brak-
ing air reservoir and the cab suspension system. 1
1 - Remove the rear wheels.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE REAR
WHEELS»).
2 - Remove the air cleaner.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE AIR FILTER»).
F0019901
3 - Remove the cover plate (1) and disconnect from the

bulkhead fitting the connectors of the electrical leads
of the transmission (2) (TKAB1), the lift (3) (TKAB2) and
the connector (4) and power supply lead (5) for the
front axle (if present). 2
(3) TKAB2 CAB

SERVICES
3
SUPER-REDUCTION
CONTROL
4
(2) TKAB1
F0021701
(4) FRONT (5)

SUSPENSION
F0019911
4 - Disconnect from the front bulkhead plate the connec-

tor (6) and the connector (7) of the engine wiring. 7 6
5 - Remove the bolts and nuts (8) of the gear lever (9).
8
9
F0020041
30-196
CAB
6 - Remove the gear lever gaiter (10), unplug the connec-

tor (11) and remove the complete lever assembly (12).
12
11
10
F0019583
7 - Disconnect the control cables (13) from the auxiliary

service control valves.
tion. 13
★ Disconnect also the outer cables.
F0020150
8 - Disconnect the control cable (14) from the PTO speed

selector lever (15).
9 - Disconnect the control cable (16) from the PTO oper-
ating mode selector lever (17). 14 15
tion.
★ Disconnect also the outer cables.
17
16
F0020160
10 - Disconnect the control cable (18) from the creeper

control lever (19).
★ Disconnect also the outer cable.
18 19
F0020170
30-197
CAB
11 - Remove the cab access steps (20).

12 - Remove the fuel tank. 20
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE FUEL TANK»).
F0017191
13 - Disconnect the system feed wire from the positive ter-

minal (21) (+) of the battery (22).
21
22
F0017141
14 - Disconnect the earth leads (23) from the engine.

23
F0018531
15 - Draw the fluid out of the brake fluid reservoir (24); dis-
connect the suction pipes (25) and remove the panel
(26).
24
25
26
F0018761
30-198
CAB
16 - Disconnect the delivery pipes (27) of the brake cylin-

ders (28) and remove them by disconnecting the lower 28
coupling.
contaminants.
27
F0020180
17 - Disconnect the five pipes (29) from the power steering

unit (30).
contaminants.
30
18 - Remove the bracket (31) and bend the pipes towards
the front of the tractor. 29
31
F0020190
19 - Drain the engine cooling system.
Coolant:
32
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165
17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
20 - Disconnect the cab heating pipes (32).
F0020200
21 - Disconnect the inlet pipe (33) and the outlet pipe (34)
of the air conditioning compressor.
1
34
33
F0020210
30-199
CAB
22 - Disconnect the control cable (35) from the parking

brake lever (36).
36
★ Disconnect also the outer cable from the support
(37).
37
35
F0020220
23 - Detach the tie-rod (38) from the cab lifting control

valve (39). 2 38
39
F0020230
24 - Remove the exhaust pipe end fitting (40) from the

cab.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE EXHAUST
PIPE»).
40
F0021680
25 - Remove the cover of the rear screen wiper and unplug

the connector (41) and the screen wash pipe (42).
42
41
F0020240
30-200
CAB
26 - Disconnect the gas springs (44) from the rear window

(43); lower the window (43).
43
44
F0020250
27 - While supporting the rear window, remove the hinge

pins (45) with a pin punch. 45 45
28 - Remove the complete rear window assembly (43).
F0020260
29 - Remove the front centre screws fixing the cab to the

vibration damping mountings (46).
46
F0021690
30 - Remove the centre bolts (47) of the rear supports (48)

and the cab fixing bolts (49).
49
47
48
F0020270
30-201
CAB
31 - Remove the nut (50) and the bolt (51); disengage the
stabilizer bar (52) on the right-hand side at the rear. 52
50
51
F0020280
32 - Fold the rearview mirrors (53) against the cab win-

dows.
33 - Attach the cab lifting frame “A” to a hoist.
Attach slings “B” of different length to the cab using
the holes “F” provided on the rear supports and the
supports (54) for the work lights and direction indica-
tors.
53
54
F0020290
30-202
CAB
34 - Slowly raise the cab by about 15 cm and disconnect

the connection pipe (55) to the cab suspension valve
and the pipe (56) from the reservoir (54) from the T fit-
ting.
Complete cab assembly: 780 kg (1718 lb.) 55
35 - Release the wiring from all the clips and remove the
cab while guiding the pipes and control cables.
56
F0020300
REFITTING THE CAB

1
Air conditioning pipes fittings: 39
delivery(5/8” - 18UNF):13.6–20.3 Nm (10–15 lb.ft.)
suction (7/8” - 14UNF): 35.3–42 Nm (26–31 lb.ft.)
2
★ Check the adjustment of the tie-rod (39) to obtain
the correct cab lifting height (without operator).
1 - Fill the engine cooling system. F0020230
Coolant:
Mod. 106 110 115 120 135 150 165

17.5 17.5 17.5 21 21 21 23
US. gall. 4.62 4.62 4.62 5.54 5.54 5.54 6.07
2 - Fully open the cab heater valve.

40
3 - Start the engine and check the hydraulic, pneumatic
and heating systems for leaks.
4 - Turn the steering wheel back and forth between the
full lock positions to expel any air from the power ste-
ering circuit. D0005370
5 - Switch off the engine; check the coolant level and top
up if necessary.
6 - Bleed the hydraulic brake system.
(For details, see «BLEEDING THE BRAKE SYSTEM»).
30-203
ENGINE-TRANSMISSION SEPARATION
SEPARATION OF THE ENGINE -TRANSMISSION
★ This operation does not require the removal of the cab.

Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
★ Remove the following components in order:
• Front wheels
• Fenders
• Radiator – coolers – condenser assembly
• Front lift assembly and relative control pipes com-
plete with support bracket
• Front PTO assembly
• Front axle – swinging axle support
• Front carrier
• Exhaust pipe
• Cab access steps
• Battery support – air reservoir for trailer braking (if
present)
• Air conditioning compressor
• Silencer
• Air cleaner
For detailed instructions, refer to the corresponding
sections in this manual.
1 - Position a jack ”A” with non-slip block under the cen-
tre of the gearbox and raise the jack to support the A
load.
F0018400
2 - Unplug the connectors (1) of the brake fluid level sen-

sor. 1
3 - Draw off the fluid from the brake fluid reservoir (2); dis-
connect the pipes (3) from the reservoir and plug the
open ends. 1 2
4 - Remove the air cleaner mounting plate (4). 3
F0018410
5 - Loosen the clamp (5) securing the inlet manifold (6);

disconnect the manifold from the inlet hose. 6
6 - Remove the bracket screws (7) and remove the com-
plete manifold assembly (8). 7
8
F0018420
30-204
7 - Release the fuel return pipe (9) from the retaining clips
and reposition the pipe so that it is directed towards
the rear of the tractor.
F0018430
8 - Disconnect the delivery pipe (11) from the air com-

pressor (10).
12
9 - Disconnect the suction pipe (12) from the compressor
and remove it.
★ Plug the open fittings on the compressor to pre- 11
vent the entry of contaminants. 10
F0018440
10 - Remove the clamps (13); disconnect the compressor

delivery pipe (11) and remove it.
★ Plug the end of the pipe and the open fitting to pre-
vent the entry of contaminants.
11 13
13
F0018450
11 - Disconnect the suction pipe (14) of the air conditioning

compressor.
14
F0018460
30-205
12 - Remove the fixing screws (15) of the clips of the engine

wiring harness (16) and unplug the connector(17) of
the filter clogging sensor (18). 19
15
13 - Remove the support (19) and bracket (20) of the suc-
tion pipe of the air conditioning compressor.
16
17
15
20 18
F0018470
14 - Unplug the horn connectors (21).

15 - Remove the relay box (22) and disconnect all the con- 21
nectors (23), (24) and the wiring (25). 23
25 24
22
F0018480
16 - Disconnect the wires from the alternator (26) and the

starter motor (27).
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE STARTER MO- 27
TOR – REMOVAL OF THE ALTERNATOR»).
26
F0018490
17 - Disconnect the connectors (28), (29) of the air condi-

tioning compressor pulley engagement and the wiring
for the front PTO.
28
29
F0018500
30-206
18 - Disconnect the earth lead (30) from the cylinder head.

19 - Remove the cover (31).
30
31
F0018510
20 - Remove the nut (32) securing the earth terminals (33)

and slide them off the stud (34).
33 36 35
21 - Remove the nut (35) and remove the earth lead (36)
from the battery.
34
32
F0018520
22 - Remove the screw (37) securing the clamp of the air

conditioning compressor suction pipe (38).
37
38
F0018530
23 - Release the wiring (39) from the straps and unplug the
connector (40) of the engine ECU.
★ Turn the ringnut counter-clockwise.
40
39
F0018540
30-207
24 - Unplug the connector (41) of the coolant temperature

sensor.
★ Release all the wiring from the retaining straps and
arrange it in an orderly fashion towards the rear of
41
the tractor.
F0018550
25 - Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes (43) of the gear-

box oil cooler from the fittings (42).
contaminants.
26 - Remove the clamp (44). 44
42
43
F0018560
27 - Disconnect the flexible hoses (45) from the rigid pipes

(43) and remove them.
★ Lable the hoses to avoid confusion on reconnec- 43 45
tion.
28 - Remove the clamp (46) and remove the pipes (43).
46
F0018570
29 - Remove the insulation panel (47). Unscrew and re-

move the nuts (48) and remove the hood support (49)
complete with the brake fluid reservoir. 47
49
48 F0018580
30-208
30 - Remove the hood support bracket (50) and attach a

lifting bracket ”B” to the same holes.
50
B
F0018590
31 - Disconnect the differential lock pipe (51) and the fuel

suction pipe (52).
52
contaminants.
51
F0018600
32 - Remove the lift control pipes (53) with the relative sup-
port bracket (54).
53
54
F0018181
33 - Disconnect the delivery pipe (55) of the air condition-

ing compressor.
56
34 - Disconnect the cab heater hoses (56).
35 - Disconnect the wiring clip (57).
55
57
F0018610
30-209
36 - Disconnect the steering system hoses (58).

37 - Remove the rigid pipes (59) complete with the retai- 58
ning bracket (60).
60
59
F0018620
38 - Remove the front suspension accumulators assem-

bly.
(For details, see «REMOVAL OF THE FRONT SU-
SPENSION ACCUMULATORS»).
F0017961
39 - Undo the bolt and remove the front flange (61) of the
fuel tank; unscrew the rear flange bolt by about 20
mm.
40 - Move the fuel tank (62) to the side in order to access
the lower bolt and the upper nuts securing the engine.
61
62
F0018630
41 - Attach a hoist to the engine (63) using the front lifting

bracket and the bracket fitted in step 30.
Put the lifting chains or slings under tension.
63
F0018640
30-210
ENGINE-TRANSMISSION RECONNECTION
42 - Unscrew and remove the lower engine (63) mounting

nuts (64), (65) and bolts (66), (67). 2
63
66
64
43 - Separate the engine (63) from the transmission as-

sembly (68) using a lever if necessary. 3
65
67
RECONNECTION OF THE
ENGINE–TRANSMISSION
• Refitting is the reverse of removal. F0018650
1
★ Bleed the braking system.
(For details, see «BLEEDING THE BRAKING SYS- 63
TEM»).
2 68
M12 nuts and bolts:

110±10% Nm (81±10% lb.ft.)
M16 nuts and bolts:

260±10% Nm (191.7±10% lb ft.)
★ Tighten first the nuts and then the bolts gradually in
a cross-wise sequence. F0018660
3
★ Thoroughly clean the surfaces and lubricate the
surfaces and locating dowels.
Locating dowels: Engine oil

1- Fill all the systems with the appropriate fluids. Start the
engine and run for a few minutes to allow the fluids to
circulate, then check for leaks.
2- Bleed the air from the hydraulic circuits by performing
a few manoeuvres.
3- Stop the engine, check all the fluid levels and top up if
necessary.
30-211
CONTENTS
SECTION 40
CONTENTS
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT 1 5. PLANIMETRY, WIRING DIAGRAM AND

CONNECTORS LOCATION 69
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT 2 • INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120-165 CV)...... 71
• INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120–165 CV) ..... 72
1. INTRODUCTION...................................................... 3
• ENGINE WIRING (106–115 CV) (1/2)......................................... 77
• 1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES........................................... 3
• ENGINE WIRING (106–115 CV) (2/2)......................................... 78
• 1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS.............. 4
• ENGINE WIRING (120–165 CV) (1/2)......................................... 79
• 1.3 GENERAL RULES ............................................................... 4
• ENGINE WIRING (120–165 CV) (2/2)......................................... 80
• 1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS ............................................ 6
• CLUTCH SENSOR WIRING ...................................................... 81
• 1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES...................................................... 6
• CLEAN FIX WIRING .................................................................. 93
2. INDICES................................................................... 7 • SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING............ 95
• 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX ................................. 7 • TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) ................................................. 99
• 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX............................................. 12 • TRANSMISSION WIRING (2/2) ............................................... 100
• 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX ........................................................ 16 • HYDRAULIC AND AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING (ITALY).. 111
• AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING ............................................ 112
3. COMPONENTS ..................................................... 27 • FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) WIRING......... 115
• 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS .................................................. 27 • CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING .............................................. 119
• 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA .................................... 32 • CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION WIRING ............................. 125
• 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC • NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING............................................ 129
CONTROL UNITS.............................................................. 36 • NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING............................................ 130
• NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING............................................ 131
4. SYSTEMS .............................................................. 47
• FENDER WIRING .................................................................... 133
• 4.1 GROUND POINTS............................................................. 47
• FENDER WIRING .................................................................... 134
• 4.2 ENGINE START................................................................. 48
• FENDER WIRING .................................................................... 135
• 4.3 PREHEATING.................................................................... 49
• FENDER WIRING .................................................................... 136
• 4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL .................................... 50
• FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2) ............................................ 141
• 4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH ............................. 51
• FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2) ............................................ 142
• 4.6 CAB ACCESSORY ............................................................ 52
• ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR WIRING ............................ 143
• 4.7 WORKING LIGHTS ........................................................... 53
• SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHUTTLE) (1/4) ............... 149
• 4.8 WINDSCREEN WIPER ...................................................... 54
• 4.9 INFOCENTER.................................................................... 55
• 4.10 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY........................................ 56
• 4.11 AUTORADIO - CB ............................................................. 57
• SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHIFT) (1/4) .................... 153
• 4.12 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN............................... 58
• 4.13 BRAKES ............................................................................ 59
• 4.14 TRAILER BRAKES............................................................. 60
• 4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION............................................. 61
• AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB) ....................................... 165
• 4.16 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION................................. 62
• DISPLAY WIRING.................................................................... 171
• 4.17 POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION ...................................... 63
• ROOF WIRING (1/2) ................................................................ 175
• 4.18 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL ........................................... 64
• ROOF WIRING (2/2) ................................................................ 176
• 4.19 REAR LIFTER .................................................................... 65
• WORKLIGHTS WIRING........................................................... 177
• 4.20 FRONT AND REAR PTO ................................................... 66
• ROTATING BEACON WIRING ................................................ 179
• 4.21 CLEANFIX ......................................................................... 67
• ARMREST WIRING ................................................................. 189
• ARMREST WIRING (INTERNAL) ............................................. 191
• CONTROL UNIT - FUSES - RELAYS (1/2).............................. 193
• CONTROL UNIT - FUSES - RELAYS (2/2).............................. 194
40-i
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
1. Introduction
Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for trouble-
shooting and repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.
2. Indices
Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component de-
scription.
3. Components
Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the com-
ponents installed on the tractor,the technical data necessary for functional testing and the pi-
nouts of the electronic control units.
4. Systems
Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractor's systems.
5. Wiring harnesses
Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.
40-1
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

How to consult the table
The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunc-
tion of a component (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all
A B the components in the system in which the component is
incorporated.
2 E In this example, the problem is a malfunction of the start-
er motor, which fails to start the engine.
Start enable switch 1- Look in paragraph “2.1. Component description

0441.6066 11 START 2
(green) index” for the starter motor and identify the system
in which it is incorporated.
Starter motor X47 2 The system is indicated in the column “System
(para 4.xx)” and in this case is “2” (figure A).
2- Consult paragraph “4.2 Starting” (figure B), in
which the electrical diagram indicates all the com-
0443.7847
ponents in the system; these components are ac-
C START
12
companied by numbers that correspond to the key
on the same page.
2 3- Check all the components in the system, starting,
for example, with the switch “2”.
11 START 4- Look in paragraph “2.1. Component description
index” (figure A) for “Starting enabling switch
2 Starter enable switch (green)
(Green)” and check in the column “Technical (para
3.2.xx)” if there is a technical description of the
0443.7847/20
component (in this case it is given at n° 11 of the
paragraph “3.2 Component technical data”) (fig-
D ure C).
Note down also the name of the connector to which
the component is connected (in this case
“START”).
F
Only if the position of the component is not known
0443.7847 5 - Look in paragraph “2.3 Connector index” (figure
START 10 Start enable switch
(green) D) for the name of the connector to which the com-
ponent is connected (in this case “START”) and
G note down the wiring harness in which it is incor-
porated (in this case “0443.7847” or
“0.012.3639.4”) and the type of connector (in this
10 case “10”).
6 - Look for the wiring harness in chapter “5. Layouts,
electrical wiring diagrams, connector posi-
START tions” using the index at the beginning of the chap-
ter.
7 - Look for the name of the connector in the photos at-
tached to the electrical diagrams and determine its
position on the tractor from the drawing (figure E).
NOTE.
In the electrical diagrams (figure F) are indicated
the names of the connectors and the descrip-
tions that are used in all the tables of chapter 2.
8 - Using the data contained in the paragraph “3.2
Component technical data” (figure C) in position
START n° 11, check the operation of the switch.
0443.7847/20 If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in
paragraph “3.1 Connector layouts” (figure G) for
0443.7847/20 the number found in the column “Type” of para-
graph “2.3 Connector index”.
40-2
INTRODUCTION LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES
1. INTRODUCTION
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the
tractor's electrical and electronic systems.
The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information regarding the
tractor's systems and components.
Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line
with our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our
printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document are
subject to modification and as such are not binding.
1.1 LIST OF WIRING HARNESSES

DESCRIPTION CODE
Internal combustion engine wiring 0419.9751
Engine wiring (106–115 CV) 0.012.3639.4/10
Engine wiring (120–165CV) 0443.7847/20
Clutch sensor wiring 0443.7667
Clean fix wiring 0.012.3496.4
Wiring for supplementary air conditioning fan 0443.7871
Transmission wiring 0443.7848
Wiring for hydraulic and air trailer braking (Italy) 0443.7356.4
Wiring for air trailer braking 0443.7355
Wiring for front suspension control unit (cab) 0443.7850
Wiring for cab power supply 0443.7846/10
Wiring for cab line front suspension 0443.7849
0.012.2018.4
Number plate light wiring 0441.4114
0442.9887
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
Fender wiring
0442.9835
0442.9886
Front console wiring 0442.9936.4/20
Accelerator pedal sensor wiring 0443.8666
Side console wiring (Power Shuttle) 0442.9937.4/20
Side console wiring (Power Shift) 0443.7357/20
Air conditioning wiring (cab) 010.2562.2
Display wiring 0443.7875.01
Roof wiring 0443.7851/10
Worklights wiring 0442.4189
Rotating beacon wiring 0441.4780
Armrest wiring 0443.7354.4
Internal armrest wiring 0443.5497
Control unit - fuses - relays 0441.9533
40-3
INTRODUCTION COMPONENT AND SYMBOL DEFINITIONS - GENERAL RULES
1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key
terms used in this unit.
TERM DESCRIPTION
Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch. wiring-
Connector
wiring)
Temperature Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium (air,
sensor water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Pressure Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air,
sensor water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance
Position sensor Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of an
object into a voltage
Pressure Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the
switch operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed
Thermostat Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the
temperature of the medium in which it is immersed.
Switch Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical

contacts.
Solenoid valve Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)
1.3 GENERAL RULES

The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure
that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and
breakdowns.
The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the quality of
repairs.
1.3.1MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR'S

ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the
connection of any non-approved electrical applicances or components.
In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified
without authorisation, the manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle
and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.
1.3.2 MAIN WIRING FAULTS

a. Poor contact between connectors
The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male
into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or
oxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.
b. Defective pin welding or crimping
The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or welded
area, but the wires are subjected to excessive tension, leading to breakage of the
insulation or the wire itself and a poor connection.
c. Disconnecting wiring
If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed
with the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to a heavy impact this could
damage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.
40-4
INTRODUCTION GENERAL PROCEDURES
d. Penetration of water in connectors

The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however,
it is possible that when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water
could penetrate or condense in the connectors.
As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in
will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause shortcircuits across the pins.
For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of
compressed air after washing the tractor.
e. Oil or dirt on connectors

Oil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are non-
conductors) .
Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet of compressed air
and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the contacts.
★ Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them.
★ Use dehydrated not lubricated compressed air.
1.3.3 REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND WIRING
a. Disconnection of connectors
When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves.
For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws,
then pull on the connector.
For connectors that are clipped togther, fully depress the clip then pull the connector
apart.
After disconnecting connectors, cover them in a waterproof material to prevent dirt or
moisture getting into the contacts.
b. Connecting the connectors

Check the condition of the connectors:
• Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
• Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded.
• Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.
★ If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the
casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying any
force.
For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together.
c. Cleaning and drying wiring

When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if
necessary, with water or steam.
If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the
connectorsi; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2.
★ Check that the connector is not short circuited by water by testing the continuity
across the pins.
★ After checking the connector is in good condition, degrease the contacts using a
deoxidising product.
40-5
INTRODUCTION DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS - WIRE COLOUR CODES
d. Renewal of damaged electrical components.

• When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts
supplied by the manufacturer.
• When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 standards
and in particular:
- fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
- bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C
The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will
invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer from
any liability.
• When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards
marked on the original relay.
1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

For the correct diagnosis of any faults in tne tractor's electrical system, the following
instruments are required:
1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:
AC VOLT 0-600
DC VOLT ..... 0-600
OHM............ 0-32M
AC AMP ...... 0-10
DC AMP ...... 0-10
2 - Computer loaded with the “SERDIA” and “EDS (Electronic Diagnosis System)”
software.
1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES

COLOUR CODES COLOUR CODES
A Light blue M Brown
B White N Black
C Orange R Red
G Yellow S Pink
H Grey V Green
L Dark blue Z Purple
40-6
INDICES 2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX
2. INDICES
2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX
Technical System
Description Code Connector
(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx) Notes
4WD control solenoid valve 0443.1661 5 DT 13-15-18
4WD switch 0441.1496.4 8 18
Accelerator control lever 0442.7318 EMR 4
Accelerator pedal position sensor 0443.2708 26 X40 10-13
Actuator 0211.1926 1 Y3 4
Air cleaner clogged sensor 0441.9015 L 9
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 K 12
Air conditioning control switch 010.2532.0 X110 12
Air conditioning fuse F50 (30 A) X79 12
Air conditioning pressure switch 0442.6492 X55 12
Air conditioning thermostat 010.2537.1 X111 12
Alternator X56 2-3-12-20
ASM switch 0441.1498 6 18
Autoradio X34 11
Auxiliary power socket (Earth) 0114.3529 X67-X68
Brake fluid level sensor X45 13
Brake lights fuse F102 (15 A) X82 13
Cab roof worklights switch 0441.1496.4 3 5-7
Camshaft speed sensor 0419.0811 40 B40 4
(PICK-UP)
CB power connector X20 11
Cigar lighter 0441.2338 X91 6
Clean Fix fuse F101 (15 A) X66 21
Clean Fix control compressor X64 21
Clean Fix control solenoid valve 0445.0262 X63 21
Clean Fix control switch X70 21
Clock 0441.2337 X32 6
Clutch pedal depressed 0442.4165 31 X62 16 Powershuttle
proximity sensor
Clutch pedal position sensor 0443.2708 27 X61 16-17
Compressed air pressure gauge 0442.5709 14 X94 14
Compressor for driver's seat 010.2274.1 X87 6
air suspension
Connector for air conditioning X112 12
control panel lighting
Control relay for 1st speed X109 12
and air conditioning power on
Control relay for 3rd speed X102 12
heater fans
Control relay for 4th speed X103 12
heater fans
40-7
Technical System
Control relay for Clean Fix X65 21
Control relay for engine starting X50 2-3
Control relay for front upper X35 7
worklights
Coolant temperature sensor 0419.9260 35 B43 4
Coolant temperature sensor 0419.9260 34 T 9
(For Infocenter)
4-13-15-16-
Diagnostics connector X81 17-19
Diff lock solenoid valve 0441.7555 4 EV DF 18
Diff lock switch 0441.1498 7 18
Direction indicator lights X83 5
control unit (Red)
Door open alarm switch X37 6
Engine boost pressure sensor 0419.9552 33 B41 4
Engine ECU MX1 4-10-16-17
Engine oil pressure switch 0419.0807 17 P 9
Engine speed keypad X42 4
Engine speed sensor 010.2874.2 37 NLSE 16-17
Engine stop coil 0420.6912 2 Y1 4 106-115CV
Engine stop coil 0420.6915 3 Y1 4 120-165CV
Fan speed selector switch 010.2528.1 X108 12
Forward/reverse selector 0441.9670.4 X113 17 Powershift
Forward/reverse selector 0443.7341 X113 16 Powershuttle
Forward/reverse solenoid valves 0441.6685 ADD. EV. V/R 16-17
Front axle suspension control unit 0442.7305 JX3-JX4 10
Front axle suspension 0439.1530 29 X14 15
position sensor
Front left headlamp X58 5
Front left side lights X25 5-7
and direction indicators
Front left worklight X22 5-7
Front PTO control pushbutton 0441.1533 X76 20
(in cab)
Front PTO solenoid valve 0441.7405 8 FRONT PTO 20
Front right headlamp X57 5
Front right side lights X24 5-7
Front right worklight X21 5-7
Front suspension switch 0442.2763 5 15
Front windscreen washer pump 0441.4105 FP 8
Fuel level sensor 0441.1109 24 FUEL 9 106-115CV
Fuel level sensor 0441.1112 23 FUEL 9 120-150CV
Fuel level sensor 0443.8120/10 25 FUEL 9 165CV
40-8
Technical System
Fuse F100 (30 A) 0442.7647 X16 12
Gear change solenoid valves 0441.6685 EV GROUP 16-17
Gear change solenoid valves 0443.6315 EV GROUP 16-17
Gear shift pushbutton panel X74 16-17
Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 0443.8449 42 NLSA 16-17
Glowplug X46 3
Handbrake switch 0439.1395 12 X90 13-14
Hazard lights switch lighting X96 5
Horn 0116.9304 X49 5
3-4-5-9-10-
Infocenter ST1-ST2 13-14-16-
17-18-19-20
Interior roof light 0442.6316 X23 6
ISO4 socket 0442.2323.4 ISO4 10
(Power for external implements)
ISO7 socket 0442.2324.4 ISO7 4-10-20
(Connection for external implements)
Left brake pedal switch 0439.1395 13 X60 13-15-18
Left front loudspeaker 012.1725.0 X29 11
Left heater fan 010.2537.0 X105 12
Left rear loudspeaker 012.1726.0 X30 11
Lift control lever X78 19
Lift control lever EHR 19
LEFT DRAFT
Lift draft sensor 0441.5586.4 32 RIGHT DRAFT 19
Lift lowering solenoid valve 0441.8229 6 EV DW 19

Lift raising solenoid valve 0441.8229 10 EV UP 19
Lights selector switch 0443.8653 AS4 5-8 Powershift
Lights selector switch 0443.8656 AS4 5-8 Powershuttle
Lower worklights switch 0441.1496.4 3A 5-7
Motor for supplementary 0442.6490 X19 12
air conditioning fan
Number plate light X92 5
Preheating control unit 0117.9712 X52 2
Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter 0118.0413 FILTER 16-17
clogging
Pressure switch for supplementary 0442.3185 X18 12
Pressure switch, clutch pedal 0441.3195 18 X101 17 Powershift
depressed
Proportional solenoid valve 0443.4425 7 EV PROP 16
PTO AUTO control switch X98 20
Radar 0443.8654 20 RADAR 19
Radar (UK) 0443.8655 21 RADAR 19
Radar control switch 0441.4584 X73 19
40-9
Technical System
Rear left side lights X4 5-13
Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 0441.2688 19 DW 19
Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton 0441.2688 19 UP 19
Rear lift position sensor 0443.8667 28 POS. SENS. 19
Rear lower left worklights X3 7
Rear lower right worklights X3 7
Rear power lift ECU JX1-JX2 10-19-20
Rear PTO control pushbutton 0441.1533 X77 20
(in cab)
Rear PTO control pushbutton 0441.1533 PTO 20
(on fender)
Rear PTO solenoid valve 0441.7555 9 EV PTO 20
Rear PTO speed sensor 0441.3198 39 PTO SEN 20
Rear right side lights X4 5-13
Rear screen washer pump 0441.4105 RP 8
Rear screen wiper 0441.9283 X69 7-8
Rear screen wiper motor 0441.3192 X27 8
Rear upper left worklights X99 7
Rear upper right worklights X99 7
Rear worklights switch 0441.1496.4 X72 7
Relay - supplementary 0440.2772 X17 12
Resistor - left heater fan 010.2535.1 X104 12
Resistor - right heater fan 010.2535.1 X107 12
Right brake pedal switch 0439.1395 13 X59 13-15-18
Right front loudspeaker 012.1725.0 X28 11
Right heater fan 010.2535.0 X106 12
Right rear loudspeaker 012.1726.0 X31 11
Rotating beacon control switch 0441.1496.4 X71 7
Rotating light X100 7
Side console courtesy light 0441.2616 X36 6
Side lights switch 0441.1497 1 7
Solenoid valve for control
of front axle X15 15
Load Sensing suspension
Solenoid valve for H 15
front axle raising control
Solenoid valve for S 15
front axle lowering control
Solenoid valve for X9 14
trailer parking brake
Speed sensor for odometer 0443.8436 38 NAB 16-17
40-10
Technical System
Start enable switch 0441.6066 11 START 2
(Green)
Starter motor X47 2-3
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X86
Steering angle sensor 0441.5266 X53 18
Steering circuit pressure switch X97 9
Super-reduction 0443.6527 X75 16-17
engagement switch
Trailer braking air pressure sensor 011.9428.0 30 X8 14
Trailer braking low pressure X10 14
switch
Trailer socket 0442.4116 X38 10-13
(For lights and auxiliary power)
Transmission display 0441.9280.4 X93 16-17
Transmission ECU ECU LS 16-17
Transmission neutral sensor 0441.6995 22 NEUTRAL LS 17 Powershift
(red switch)
Transmission oil low 0441.6706 15 PRESS. SWITCH 17 Powershift
pressure switch
Transmission oil low 0443.1690 16 PRESS. SWITCH 16 Powershuttle
pressure switch
Transmission oil temperature sensor 0441.6649 36 TEMP 16-17
Transmission speed sensor 0443.8450 41 NHK 16 Powershuttle
Windscreen wiper motor 0441.3192 X26 8
40-11
INDICES 2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX
2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX
Technical System
Code Description Connector Notes
(para. 3.2.xx) (para. 4.xx)
010.2274.1
Compressor for driver's seat X87 6
air suspension
010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch X108 12
010.2532.0 Air conditioning control switch X110 12
010.2535.0 Right heater fan X106 12
010.2535.1 Resistor - right heater fan X107 12
010.2535.1 Resistor - left heater fan X104 12
010.2537.0 Left heater fan X105 12
010.2537.1 Air conditioning thermostat X111 12
010.2874.2 Engine speed sensor 37 NLSE 16-17
011.9428.0 Trailer braking air pressure sensor 30 X8 14
0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket (Earth) X67
0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket (Positive) X68
0116.9304 Horn X49 5
0117.9712 Preheating control unit X52 2
0118.0413
Pressure switch - hydraulic oil FILTER 16-17
filter clogging
012.1725.0 Right front loudspeaker X28 11
012.1725.0 Left front loudspeaker X29 11
012.1726.0 Right rear loudspeaker X30 11
012.1726.0 Left rear loudspeaker X31 11
0211.1926 Actuator 1 Y3 4
0419.0807 Engine oil pressure switch 17 P 9
0419.0811
Camshaft speed sensor 40 B40 4
(PICK-UP)
0419.9260 Coolant temperature sensor 34 T 9
0419.9333 Coolant temperature sensor 35 B43 4
0419.9552 Engine boost pressure sensor 33 B41 4
0420.6912 Engine stop coil 2 Y1 4 106-115CV

0420.6915 Engine stop coil 3 Y1 4 120-165CV
0439.1395 Handbrake switch 12 X90 13-14
0439.1395 Right brake pedal switch 13 X59 13-15-18
0439.1395 Left brake pedal switch 13 X60 13-15-18
40-12
Code Description Technical Connector System Notes

0439.1530 Front axle suspension position sensor 29 X14 15
0440.2772
Relay - supplementary air conditioning X17 12
fan
0441.1109 Fuel level sensor 24 FUEL 9 106-115CV
0441.1112 Fuel level sensor 23 FUEL 9 120-150CV
0441.1496.4 Rotating beacon control switch X71 7
0441.1496.4 Rear worklights switch X72 7
0441.1496.4 4WD switch 8 18
0441.1496.4 Lower worklights switch 3A 5-7
0441.1496.4 Cab roof worklights switch 3 5-7
0441.1497 Side lights switch 1 7
0441.1498 ASM switch 6 18
0441.1498 Diff lock switch 7 18
0441.1512.4 Starter switch X86
0441.1533
Front PTO control pushbutton X76 20
(in cab)
0441.1533
Rear PTO control pushbutton X77 20
(in cab)
0441.1533
Rear PTO control pushbutton PTO 20
(on fender)
0441.2337 Clock X32 6
0441.2338 Cigar lighter X91 6
0441.2616 Side console courtesy light X36 6
0441.2688 Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 19 DW 19
0441.2688 Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton 19 UP 19
0441.3192 Windscreen wiper motor X26 8
0441.3192 Rear screen wiper motor X27 8
Pressure switch, clutch pedal

0441.3195
depressed
18 X101 17 Powershift
0441.3198 Rear PTO speed sensor 39 PTO SEN 20
0441.4105 Front windscreen washer pump FP 8
0441.4105 Rear screen washer pump RP 8
0441.4584 Radar control switch X73 19
0441.5266 Steering angle sensor X53 18
RIGHT DRAFT
0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor 32 LEFT DRAFT 19
40-13

0441.6066 Start enable switch (Green) 11 START 2
0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature sensor 36 TEMP 16-17
0441.6685 Forward/reverse solenoid valves ADD. EV. V/R 16-17
0441.6685 Gear change solenoid valves EV GROUP 16-17
0441.6706 Transmission oil low pressure switch 15 PRESS. SWITCH 17 Powershift
Transmission neutral sensor

0441.6995
(red switch)
22 NEUTRAL LS 17 Powershift
0441.7405 Front PTO solenoid valve 8 FRONT PTO 20
0441.7555 Diff lock solenoid valve 4 EV DF 18
0441.7555 Rear PTO solenoid valve 9 EV PTO 20
0441.8229 Lift lowering solenoid valve 6 EV DW 19
0441.8229 Lift raising solenoid valve 10 EV UP 19
0441.9015 Air cleaner clogged sensor L 9
0441.9280.4 Transmission display X93 16-17
0441.9283 Rear screen wiper X69 7-8
0441.9670.4 Forward/reverse selector X113 17 Powershift
0442.2323.4
ISO4 socket ISO4 10
0442.2324.4
ISO7 socket ISO7 4-10-20
0442.2763 Front suspension switch 5 15
0442.3185
Pressure switch for supplementary air X18 12
conditioning fan
0442.4116
Trailer socket X38
Clutch pedal depressed

0442.4165 31 X62 16 Powershuttle
proximity sensor
0442.5709 Compressed air pressure gauge 14 X94 14
0442.6316 Interior roof light X23 6
0442.6490
Motor for supplementary X19 12
0442.6492 Air conditioning pressure switch X55 12
0442.7305 Front axle suspension control unit JX4 10
0442.7318 Engine speed keypad X42 4
0442.7647 Fuse F100 (30 A) X16 12
0443.1661 4WD control solenoid valve 5 DT 13-15-18
0443.1690 Transmission oil low pressure switch 16 PRESS. SWITCH 16 Powershuttle
40-14
INDICES 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

0443.2708 Accelerator pedal position sensor 26 X40 10-13
0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor 27 X61 16-17
0443.4425 Proportional solenoid valve 7 EV PROP 16
0443.6315 Gear change solenoid valves EV GROUP 16-17
0443.6527 Super-reduction engagement switch X75 16-17
0443.7338 Air conditioning compressor K 12
0443.7341 Forward/reverse selector X113 16 Powershuttle

0443.8120/10 Fuel level sensor 25 FUEL 9 165CV
0443.8436 Speed sensor for odometer 38 NAB 16-17
0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor 42 NLSA 16-17
0443.8450 Transmission speed sensor 41 NHK 16 Powershuttle

0443.8653 Lights selector switch AS4 5-8 Powershift
0443.8654 Radar 20 RADAR 19
0443.8655 Radar (UK) 21 RADAR 19
0443.8656 Lights selector switch AS4 5-8 Powershuttle

0443.8667 Rear lift position sensor 28 POS. SENS. 19
0445.0262 Clean Fix control solenoid valve X63 21
40-15
INDICES 2. CONNECTOR INDEX
2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX
Connection wiring or
Connector Type Wiring code component code Component description
1 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1497 Side lights switch
3 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1496.4 Cab roof worklights switch
3A 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1496.4 Lower worklights switch
5 25 0442.9936.4 0442.2763 Front suspension switch
6 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1498 ASM switch
7 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1498 Diff lock switch
8 25 0442.9936.4 0441.1496.4 4WD switch
ADD. EV. V/R 9 0443.7848 0441.6685 Forward/reverse solenoid valves
0443.7357
AS1 26 0442.9936.4
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
AS2 27 0442.9936.4
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
AS3 17 0442.9936.4
0442.9937.4
0443.7357 0443.8656 Lights selector switch (Powershuttle)

AS4 26
0442.9937.4 0443.8653 Lights selector switch (Powershift)
0443.7357
AS5 18 0443.7875
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
AS6 16 0442.9936.4
0442.9937.4
B40 0419.9751 Camshaft speed sensor (Pick-Up)
B41 0419.9751 Engine boost pressure sensor
B43 0419.9751 0419.9260 Coolant temperature sensor
0443.7357
DS1 16 0443.7851
0442.9937.4
DT 9 0443.7848 0443.1661 4WD control solenoid valve
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
DW 9 0441.2688 Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton
0442.9835
0442.9886
40-16
36 0443.7357
Transmission control unit
(Powershift)
ECU LS
37 0442.9937.4
Transmission control unit
(Powershuttle)
0443.7357
0443.7354.4
0442.9937.4
EHR 9
0443.7357 Lift control lever
0442.9937.4 Lift control lever
0443.7357
0443.7354.4
0442.9937.4
EMR 9
0443.7357 0442.7318 Throttle lever
0442.9937.4 0442.7318 Throttle lever
EV DF 6 0443.7848 0441.7555 Diff lock solenoid valve
EV DW 6 0443.7848 Lift lowering solenoid valve
0441.6685
EV GROUP 13 0443.7848 Gear change solenoid valves
0443.6315
EV PROP 6 0443.7848 0443.4425 Proportional solenoid valve
EV PTO 6 0443.7848 0441.7555 Rear PTO solenoid valve
EV UP 6 0443.7848 Lift raising solenoid valve
0443.7357
FE1 0443.7850
0442.9937.4
0443.7849
FE2
0443.7850
FILTER 0443.7848 0118.0413

Pressure switch - hydraulic oil
filter clogging
FP 10 0443.7848 0441.4105 Front windscreen washer pump
0443.7847 Front PTO solenoid valve

FRONT PTO
0.012.3639.4 Front PTO solenoid valve
0441.1112
FUEL 10 0443.7848 Fuel level sensor
0443.8120/10
H 6 0443.7849 Solenoid valve for raising front axle
40-17
0443.7357
ISO4 0442.2323.4
ISO4 socket
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
ISO7 0442.2324.4
ISO7 socket
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
J1 22
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
J2 22
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
J3 22
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
JX1 30 Rear lift control unit
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
JX2 30 Rear lift control unit
0442.9937.4
JX3 30 0443.7850 0442.7305 Front axle suspension control unit
JX4 30 0443.7850 0442.7305 Front axle suspension control unit
0443.7847
K 29 0443.7338 Air conditioning compressor
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847 0441.9015 Air cleaner clogged sensor

L
0.012.3639.4 0441.9015 Air cleaner clogged sensor
LEFT DRAFT 12 0443.7848 0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor (left)
LS 10 0443.7848 Configuration connector (LS)
LS/PS 10 0443.7848 Configuration connector (LS/PS)
0443.7847 0442.9937.4
MS1 34
0.012.3639.4 0443.7357
0443.7847
MS2 0442.9936.4
0.012.3639.4
0443.7357
MX1 38 Engine control unit
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
MX2 38 Engine control unit
0442.9937.4
40-18
NAB 9 0443.7848 0443.8436 Speed sensor for odometer
NEUTRAL LS 10 0443.7848 0441.6995

Transmission neutral sensor
(red switch)
NHK 9 0443.7848 0443.8450 Transmission speed sensor
NLSA 9 0443.7848 0443.8449 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor
NLSE 9 0443.7848 010.2874.2 Engine speed sensor
0443.7847
P 6 Engine oil pressure switch
0.012.3639.4
0443.7357
P1
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
P2 18
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
P3 20
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
P4
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
P5 20
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
P6 21
0442.9937.4
POS. SENS. 9 0443.7848 0443.8667 Rear lift position sensor
0441.6706
PRESS. SWITCH 10 0443.7848 Transmission oil low pressure switch
0443.1690
PS 10 0443.7848 Configuration connector (PS)
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
PTO 9 0441.1533
Rear PTO control pushbutton
(on fender)
0442.9835
0442.9886
PTO SEN 9 0443.7848 Rear PTO speed sensor
0443.8654
RADAR 0443.7848 Radar
0443.8655
RIGHT DRAFT 12 0443.7848 0441.5586.4 Lift draft sensor (left)
40-19
RP 10 0443.7848 0441.4105 Rear screen washer pump
S 6 0443.7849 Solenoid valve for lowering front axle
ST1 32 0442.9936.4 Infocenter (1)
ST2 33 0442.9936.4 Infocenter (2)
0443.7847
START 10 0441.6066 Start enable switch (Green)
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
T 6 Coolant temperature sensor
0.012.3639.4
TEMP 6 0443.7848 0441.6649 Transmission oil temperature sensor
0443.7357
TKAB1 35 0443.7848
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
TKAB2 34 0443.7848
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
TKAB3 0443.7846
0442.9937.4
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
UP 9 0441.2688 Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton
0442.9835
0442.9886
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
X1 0443.7846
0442.9835
0442.9886
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
X2 0443.7846
0442.9835
0442.9886
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
X3 Rear lower worklights
0442.9835
0442.9886
40-20
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
X4 0113.5950
Rear sidelights and
direction indicators
0442.9835
0442.9886
0.012.2010.4
0.012.2018.4 0.012.4420.4
X5 0441.4114
0442.9887 0442.9835
0442.9886
0.012.3639.4
X6 10 0443.7667
0443.7847
0443.7355.4
X7 3 0443.7848
0443.7356.4
0443.7355.4
X8 31 011.9428.0 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
0443.7356.4
X9 0443.7356.4 Solenoid valve for trailer parking brake
X10 0443.7356.4 Trailer braking low pressure switch
X11 0442.4189 0443.7851
X12 0442.4189 0443.7851
X13 0441.4780 0443.7851
X14 9 0443.7849 0439.1530 Front axle suspension position sensor
X15 6 0443.7849
Solenoid valve for Load Sensing
front axle suspension
X16 0443.7871 0442.7647 Fuse F100 (30 A)
X17 0443.7871 0440.2772

Relay - supplementary air conditioning
fan
X18 0443.7871 0442.3185

Pressure switch for supplementary air
conditioning fan
X19 0443.7871 0442.6490

Motor for supplementary
X20 0443.7851 CB power connector
X21 0443.7851 Front right worklight
X22 0443.7851 Front left worklight
X23 0443.7851 0442.6316 Interior roof light
40-21
X24 0443.7851 0112.1407

Front right sidelight and
direction indicator
X25 0443.7851 0112.1407

Front left sidelight and
direction indicator
X26 5 0443.7851 0441.3192 Windscreen wiper motor
X27 4 0443.7851 0441.3192 Rear screen wiper motor
X28 1 0443.7851 012.1725.0 Right front loudspeaker
X29 1 0443.7851 012.1725.0 Left front loudspeaker
X30 0443.7851 012.1726.0 Right rear loudspeaker
X31 0443.7851 012.1726.0 Left rear loudspeaker
X32 15 0443.7851 0441.2337 Clock
X33 14 0443.7851 Radio (brown)
X34 14 0443.7851 Radio (grey)
X35 0443.7851 Relay - upper front worklights
X36 0443.7851 0441.2616 Side console courtesy light
X37 0443.7851 Door open warning signal switch
X38 11 0443.7848 0442.4116

Trailer socket
X39 9 0443.8666.4 0442.9936.4
X40 0443.8666.4 0443.2708 Accelerator pedal position sensor
X41 0443.5497 0443.7354.4
0442.9937.4
X42 0442.7318 Engine speed keypad
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X43 0443.7354.4
0443.7357
0.012.3639.4
X44 0419.9751
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X45 Brake fluid level sensor
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X46 Glowplug
0443.7847
40-22
0.012.3639.4
X47 Starter motor
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X48 Starter motor
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X49 0116.9304 Horn
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X50 7 Relay - engine starting
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X51 0117.9712 Preheating control unit
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X52 8 0117.9712 Preheating control unit
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X53 3 Steering angle sensor
0443.7847
0.012.3496.4
X54 9 0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X55 10 0442.6492 Air conditioning pressure switch
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X56 Alternator
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X57 2 0443.5915 Front right headlamp
0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X58 2 0443.5913.4 Front left headlamp
0443.7847
X59 5 0442.9936.4 0439.1395 Right brake pedal switch
X60 5 0442.9936.4 0439.1395 Left brake pedal switch
X61 0442.9936.4 0443.2708 Clutch pedal position sensor
X62 9 0442.9936.4 0442.4165

Clutch pedal depressed
proximity sensor
X63 0.012.3496.4 0445.0262 Clean Fix control solenoid valve
X64 0.012.3496.4 Clean Fix control compressor
X65 0.012.3496.4 Relay - Clean Fix control
40-23
X66 0.012.3496.4 Fuse F101 (15 A)
0442.9937.4
X67 0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket (Earth)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X68 0114.3529 Auxiliary power socket (Positive)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X69 25 0441.9283 Rear screen wiper switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X70 25 Clean Fix control switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X71 25 0441.1496.4 Rotating beacon control switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X72 25 0441.1496.4 Rear worklights switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X73 0441.4584 Radar control switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X74 28 Gearshift control pushbutton panel
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X75 0443.6527 Super-reduction engagement switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X76 9 0441.1533
Front PTO control pushbutton
(in cab)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X77 9 0441.1533
Rear PTO control pushbutton
(in cab)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X78 24 Lift control lever
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X79 Fuse F50 (30 A)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X80 Supplementary power
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X81 23 Diagnostics connector
0443.7357
40-24
0442.9937.4
X82 Fuse (15 A)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X83
Direction indicators flasher unit
(Red)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X84
Direction indicators flasher unit
(Black)
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X85 Direction indicators flasher unit
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X86 19 0441.1512.4 Starter switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X87 1 010.2274.1
Compressor for driver's seat
air suspension
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X88 010.2562.2
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X89 010.2562.2
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X90 0439.1395 Handbrake switch
0443.7357
0442.9937.4
X91 1 0441.2338 Cigar lighter
0443.7357
0.012.2018.4
X92 0441.4114 0441.4115 Number plate light
0442.9887
X93 0443.7875 0441.9280.4 Transmission display
X94 0443.7875 0442.5709 Compressed air pressure gauge
X95 0443.7875 Compressed air pressure gauge light
X96 0442.9936.4 Hazard switch light (+58)
0.012.3639.4
X97 Steering system pressure switch
0443.7847
0442.9937.4
X98 PTO AUTO switch
0443.7357
40-25
COMPONENTS 2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX
X99 0442.4189 Rear upper worklights
X100 0441.4780 Rotating beacon
X101 10 0443.7667 0441.3195

Pressure switch, clutch pedal
depressed
X102 010.2562.2 Relay - 3rd heater fan speed
X103 010.2562.2 Relay - 4th heater fan speed
X104 010.2562.2 010.2535.1 Resistor - left heater fan
X105 010.2562.2 010.2537.0 Left heater fan
X106 010.2562.2 010.2535.0 Right heater fan
X107 010.2562.2 010.2535.1 Resistor - right heater fan
X108 010.2562.2 010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch
X109 010.2562.2
Relay -1st heater fan and
air conditioning on
X110 010.2562.2 010.2532.0 Air conditioning control switch
X111 010.2562.2 010.2537.1 Air conditioning thermostat
X112 010.2562.2
Connector for air conditioning
control panel lights
0443.8656 0443.7341
Forward/reverse
selector (Powershuttle)
X113
0443.8653 0441.9670.4 Forward/reverse selector (Powershift)
0443.8656
X114 Hazard warning lights switch
0443.8653
XB 0443.7871
Power for supplementary
Y1 0419.9751 0420.6915 Engine stop coil
Y3 0419.9751 Actuator
40-26
COMPONENTS 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS
3. COMPONENTS
This chapter contains:
1 - Connectors table: the shapes and pinouts of the connectors
2 - Components table: technical and functional description of the components
3 - Pinouts of the electronic control units
3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS
1 2 3 2
1
1 56B
2 31 3 4
56A
4 3 2 1
4 4 1 5 6
3 4
3 2
1 4
1 2
1 2
2 3
8 5
7 9 8 9
1
2
7 6
1 3
2
3 1 5
40-27
10 11 54
12
58R L
58L
1 2 R
54 1
31 2 3
13 B
14 15
C
A
D 13
1
E F
16
1 3 5
4
8 12
16 17 18
8 14 13 13 14 6 5
7 8
7
2 1
2 1 1 2 6
5
1 2 1 2
2 1
19 20 21
X
14
15 1
10 9 9 10
S 50 1 2
25 13 2 1
P
30
40-28
22 2
23 24
3 1 3 1
7 4 1
6
6 4
5 12
11 8 7
9 8 7
14 12
25 26 27
2 21 22
1 22 21 18 17 18
17
7
8
1 1 2
2 2 1
9 2 1
10
28 29 30
2
1 8 1
3 23 16
B A
31 32 33
6 12
13 26
1 7 1 14
40-29
34
31 19
9 20 6 30 8
21 19 31 20 9
3 7 21
10
18 7 30 3
29 18 10
22 2
17 29 22
11
1
2
4
5
6
28 17 6 15 4 11
23 16 28 23
12 16 12
27 27 25
25
13 24 14 26 15 15 26 14 24 13
35
K J X W X K
V J
B H W L
L H B
M U V
U M
C G C
G
N A T A
D T F N
O S S O
PEQ R F R D
E Q P
36 1
28
G
55 88 56
29
37 2 22
45
24
68
46
40-30
38 1 13
14 25
40-31
COMPONENTS 3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
N° Description Code Characteristics Notes Connector
Measured across pin 3 and pin 4:

Resistance: 8 Ohm
Inductance with engine stopped: 27
mH
Inductance with engine at max speed:
6mH
1 Actuator 0211.1926
Y3
Resistance: 8 Ohm
Inductance: 12 mH
Resistance: 8 Ohm
Inductance: 8 mH
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = 12V power
2 Engine stop coil 0420.6912
Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 4 106-115 CV
Y1
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = 12V power
3 Engine stop coil 0420.6915 120-165 CV Y1
Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 4
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
4
Diff lock 0441.7555
Pin2 = power EV DF
solenoid valve Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 8
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
5
4WD control 0443.1661
Pin2 = power 4WD
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
6
Lift lowering 0441.8229
Pin2 = power EV DW
solenoid valve Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:
1.56-1.66 Ohm
Pin1 = earth
7
Proportional 0443.4425
Pin2 = power EV PROP
approx. 5 Ohm
Pin1 = power
8
Front PTO 0441.7405
Pin2 = earth FRONT PTO
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
9
Rear PTO 0441.7555
Pin2 = power EV PTO
Ohm
Pin1 = earth
10
Lift raising 0441.8229
Pin2 = power EV UP
1.56-1.66 Ohm
Normally closed switch (NC)

11
Start enable 0441.6066 resistance with contact closed 3.9 Green START
switch
Ohm
40-32
Across Pin 1 and Pin 2:

resistance with contact closed 3.9
Ohm
12 Handbrake switch 0439.1395 X90
Normally open switch (NO)
Ohm

Brake Ohm X59
13 0439.1395
pedal switch Across Pin 3 and Pin 4: X60
Ohm
Compressed air Pin G = input from sensor

14
pressure gauge
0442.5709 Pin + = 12V power X94
Pin - = earth
15
Low transmission 0441.6706
Normally closed (NC) pressure switch Green PRESS. SWITCH
oil pressure switch Opening pressure 12 bar
Low transmission Normally open (NO) pressure switch

16 0443.1690 Red PRESS. SWITCH
oil pressure switch Closing pressure 18 bar
17
Engine oil 0419.0807
Normally closed (NC) pressure switch P
pressure switch Opening pressure 0.5 bar
Pressure switch, Normally closed (NC) pressure switch

18 clutch pedal 0441.3195 resistance with contact closed 3.9 Dark blue X101
depressed Ohm
Rear lift control DW

19 0441.2688 Normally open switch (NO)
pushbutton UP
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = square wave signal
20 Radar 0443.8654
(100 pulses per metre)
RADAR
Pin3 = 12V power
Pin1 = earth
21 Radar (UK) 0443.8655
(100 pulses per metre)
RADAR
Pin3 = 12V power

22
Transmission 0441.6995
resistance with contact closed 120 Red NEUTRAL LS
neutral sensor Ohm
resistance with contact open 510 Ohm
Resistance with tank empty: 0-3 Ohm

23 Fuel level sensor 0441.1112 Resistance with tank full: 120-150CV FUEL
178-192 Ohm
Resistance with tank empty: 0-3 Ohm

24 Fuel level sensor 0441.1109 Resistance with tank full: 106-115CV FUEL
178-192 Ohm
Resistance with tank empty:

4.2-5.8 Ohm
25 Fuel level sensor 0443.8120/10
Resistance with tank full:
165CV FUEL
165-195 Ohm
40-33
COMPONENTS 3.3 ECU PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS
Pin1 = 5.0V DC power

Pin2 = earth
Pin4 = analogue signal
26
Accelerator pedal 0443.2708 0.5V DC output X40
position sensor (Pedal fully released)
4.5V DC output
(Pedal fully depressed)
Pin1 = 5.0V DC power

Pin2 = earth
Clutch pedal
27 0443.2708 0.5V DC output X61
position sensor (Pedal fully released)
4.5V DC output
(Pedal fully depressed)
Pin1 = earth
Pin2 = 4.5-6.5V DC power
(Nominal 5.5V)
28
Rear lift position 0443.8667
Pin3 = analogue signal POS. SENS.
sensor 0.6V DC output
(Lift fully raised)
4.5V DC output
(Lift fully lowered)
Pin1 = earth
Front axle Pin2 = analogue signal
29 suspension 0439.1530 Pin3 = 8V DC power X14
position sensor 1.8 +0.1V output
(with cylinders fully retracted)
12V DC power
30
Trailer braking air 011.9428.0 Resistance at 0 bar 10-13 Ohm X8
pressure sensor
Resistance at 6 bar 119-129 Ohm
Normally closed sensor (NC)

Clutch pedal
Pin1 = earth
31 depressed 0442.4165 Powershuttle X62
proximity sensor Pin3 = 12V power
Pin1 = earth
RIGHT DRAFT
32 Lift draft sensor 0441.5586.4 Pin3 = 8V power LEFT DRAFT
Signal without implement attached:
4V ± 0.2 V
Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~58 kOhm
Resistance between pin1 and pin 3:
~13 kOhm
33
Engine boost 0419.9552 Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: B41
sensor
~58 kOhm
Supply voltage: 5V DC
Output voltage at 1083 mbar:
~ 1.083 V
Coolant
Resistance at 20 °C 1138±140 Ohm
34 temperature 0419.9260 B43
sensor Resistance at 90 °C 83.3±7 Ohm
Coolant
35 temperature 0419.9333 Resistance at 21.5 °C: ~2.3 kOhm B43
sensor
Transmission oil 5V DC power

36 temperature 0441.6649 Output at 0 °C approx. 2.8V TEMP
sensor Output at 100 °C approx. 1.8V
40-34
Pin1 = earth
Engine speed
37 010.2874.2 Pin3 = 12V power NLSE
sensor High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Low level: 0.6-1.2 V
Pin1 = earth
Speed sensor
38 0443.8436 Pin3 = 12V power NAB
for odometer High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Pin1 = earth
Rear PTO speed
39 0441.3198 Pin3 = 12V power PTO SEN
Camshaft speed Resistance: 310 Ohm

40 sensor 0419.0811 Inductance: 140mH B40
(Pick-Up) Peak voltage: 40mV
Pin1 = earth
41
Transmission 0443.8450 Pin3 = 12V power NHK
speed sensor High level: 3.5-4.3 V
Pin1 = earth
Gearbox output Pin2 = square wave signal
42 shaft speed 0443.8449 Pin3 = 12V power NLSA
40-35
COMPONENTS 3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
3.3.1 ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR MX1
1 13
14 25
Pin Volts Code Description

1 Not utilised
2 Digital output, stop magnet
3 Not utilised
4 Not utilised
5 Not utilised
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pin 9
9 Analogue input, coolant temperature sensor
11 Digital input, speed 2 (crankshaft) (optional)
13 Digital input, speed 1 (camshaft)
14 STG- PWM output, signal for electromagnet of actuator
15 STG+ PWM output, signal for electromagnet of actuator
16 Shielding of control rack position sensor (for pins 17, 18 and 19)
17 RF- Common connection for measurement and reference coils
18 RF REF Analogue input, measurement signal from reference coil
19 RF MESS Analogue input, measurement signal from reference coil
20 0V Reference voltage for signal on pin 21
21 Analogue input, signal from engine oil pressure sensor
22 +5V +5V power engine oil pressure sensor pin 21
24
Analogue input, signal from boost pressure sensor
25 +5V +5V LDA +5V reference voltage for signal on pin 24 (max 15mA)
40-36
CONNECTOR MX2
1 13
14 25
1 0V -31 Battery negative

2 Not utilised
3 Not utilised
4 Fault signalling lamp
5 Not utilised
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 Not utilised
9 Not utilised
10 L ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
11 K ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
12 Not utilised
13 Not utilised
14 +12V 15+ Battery positive
15 Engine memory LED
16 Engine speed output
17 0V GND Reference voltage for signal on pins 18, 19, 20
18 “MAX” key signal
19 “HOLD” key signal
20 Hand throttle signal
21 “MIN” key signal
22 Not utilised
24 Analogue input, signal from accelerator pedal sensor (SWG)
25 +5V +5V REF +5V reference voltage for signal on pin 24 (max 15mA)
40-37
3.3.2 POWERSHUTTLE TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT

ECU CONNECTOR (LS)
2 22
45
24
68
46

1 0V VM1 Battery negative
3 0V VMG1 Reference voltage for signal on pins 16, 17, 40 and 62
4 0V VMG2 Reference voltage for signal on pin 44
5 ADM4 Output for fault warning light
6 Not utilised
7 Not utilised
8 VPS2 Power (+) common solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5
9 Not utilised
10 Not utilised
11 ADM6 Power - solenoid valve Y2
12 Common for solenoid valves Y6 and Y7
13 +12V VPS1 Power (+) proportional solenoid valve
14 SD1 Display control signal
15 SDDK Diagnostics connector
16 EF5 Digital input, main clutch revs sensor (NHK)
17 EF7 Digital input, input revs sensor (nMot. nLse)
18 Not utilised
19 Not utilised
20 ED3 Analogue input, reverse travel command signal
21 ED10 Battery positive (15+)
22 ED7 Digital signal - range downshift pushbutton
23 VPE1 Battery positive (30+)
24 VMGA1
Power (-) clutch pedal angular position sensor and temperature sensor
25 Not utilised
26 Not utilised
27 Not utilised
28 Not utilised
29 ED11 Analogue input, low transmission oil pressure signal
30 ED12 Input for signal from direction change enable button
40-38

31 +12V EDM1 Engine start signal (+50)
32 AIP3 Power - solenoid valve Y6
35 Not utilised
36 SD4 Vehicle speed output
37 AU Power (+) clutch pedal angular position sensor
38 EU1 Analogue input, angular position of clutch pedal sensor signal
39 ER1 Analogue input, temperature sensor signal
40 EF6 Digital input, output revs sensor (nLsa)
41 Not utilised
42 Not utilised
43 Not utilised
44 ED8 Digital input, clutch pedal travel limit sensor
45 VPI Battery positive (15+)
46 Not utilised
47 Not utilised
48 Not utilised
49 Not utilised
51 Not utilised
52 Not utilised
53 Not utilised
54 Not utilised
56 0V AIP1 Power (-) proportional solenoid valve
57 +12V ADM5 Power - solenoid valve Y1
58 Not utilised
59 Not utilised
60 Not utilised
61 Not utilised
62 EF4 Digital input, revs sensor (nAb)
63 ED1 Analogue input, forward travel command signal
64 Not utilised
65 ED2 Analogue input, neutral command signal
66 Not utilised
67 ED6 Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton
68 +12V VPE2 Battery positive (30+)
40-39
3.3.3 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
ECU CONNECTOR (LS)
1
28
G
55 88 56
29
1 Not utilised
2 AD4 Power - solenoid valves Y4
3 VPS Power (+) common solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7
4 Not utilised
5 AD7 Not utilised
7 EAM3 Analogue input, temperature sensor signal
8 +12V ED6 Battery positive
9 ED4 Analogue input, forward travel
10 ED1 Analogue/digital signal - shift up
11 +5V Uref +5V reference voltage for signal on pins 7 and 22
12 Not utilised
13 EDM2 Input, clutch engaged signal
14 Not utilised
15 Not utilised
16 EF2 Digital input, powershift revs sensor
17 AD1 Power - solenoid valve Y1
18 EDM1 Analogue input, low transmission oil pressure signal
19 DIAG Diagnosis of powershift speed sensor
20 Not utilised
21 0V VMA Reference voltage for signal on pin 22
22 EAM2 Analogue input, angular position of clutch pedal sensor signal
23 Not utilised
25 AD2 Power - solenoid valve Y2
28 0V VMG1 Reference voltage for signal on pins 16, 35, 42 and 71
40-40

29 AD9 Analogue output, low oil pressure warning light
31 +12V VP1 Battery positive (15+)
35 EAM1 Analogue input, gearbox in neutral
36 Not utilised
37 ED3 Analogue input, reverse travel
38 Not utilised
39 Not utilised
40 Not utilised
41 Not utilised
42 EF1 Digital input, powershift input revs sensor (engine)
43 Not utilised
44 Not utilised
45 ED2 Analogue/digital signal - shift down
46 Not utilised
47 DIAG Diagnosis of powershift output speed sensor
48 Not utilised
50 SDDI Diagnostics interface
51 SD1 Analogue/digital signal - display
52 VPS
Power (+) common solenoid valves Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, forward/reverse
indicator lamp
53 Not utilised
56÷88 Not utilised
40-41
3.3.4 INFOCENTER 2 AND 3
ST1 6 12 ST2
13 26
1 14
1 7
CONNECTOR ST1
1 TXD Diagnostics interface transmission
2 +12V KL15-ST +15 key
3 KL31 Lamps earth
4 +12V KL58 +58 lights
5 GROUT Actual vehicle speed output (radar)
6 RPOUT Rear PTO speed output
7 GETOEL Transmission oil pressure
8 HANDBR Handbrake on warning light
9 0V KL30-ST Vehicle earth
10 RXD Diagnostic interface reception
11 VHOUT Theoretical vehicle speed output (wheels)
12 0V KL31E Electronics earth
CONNECTOR ST2
1 DIFF Diff lock indicator lamp
2 BLINK2 2nd trailer flasher warning light
3 BLINK1 1st trailer flasher warning light
4 BLINK Tractor flasher warning light
5 FELD FIELD indication
6 STRAS ROAD indication
7 LADEK Battery charging indicator light
8 LUFTF Air cleaner clogged
9 MOTOEL Engine oil pressure warning light
10 FRONTZ Front PTO indicator light
11 HECKZ Rear PTO indicator light
12 MOTOR Engine rpm
13 TANK Fuel gauge
14 ALLRAD 4WD indicator lamp
15 KUEHLT Engine coolant temperature
40-42

16 FERNL Main beam warning light
17 HYDRA Hydraulic system oil filter clogged
18 OELDRU Engine oil level (Infocenter 3 only)
19 VORGL Glowplugs test
20 RPTO Rear PTO rpm
21 GROUND Input, actual ground speed (radar)
22 WHEEL Input, theoretical vehicle speed
23 TRAILER Input, trailer braking indicator light
24 BRAKENIV Input, brake fluid level
25 EMR Input, engine indicator light
26 Not utilised
40-43
3.3.5 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR JX1 (RED)
8 1
23 16

1 Raising solenoid valve
2 Lowering solenoid valve
3 8V Power for draft sensors
4 12V Control unit power (F34)
5 12V Control unit power (F34)
6 Control lever: Transport 5.5 V
Brake lights: 3.8 V
Test: 2.1 V
Float: 1.7 V
7 0.3-8.0V Depth potentiometer
8 0.3-8.0V Lowering speed potentiometer
9 Manual UP key
10 0-8.0V Input, left draft sensor
11 PTO speed output
12 ISO 9141 K line
13 Output, status indicator LED
14 0.3-8.0V Maximum height potentiometer
15 5.0 V Power for position sensor
16 Manual DOWN key
17 0-8.0V Input, right draft sensor
18 0V Earth for potentiometer panel
19 0.3-8.0V Mix potentiometer
20 0V Control unit earth
21 0V Sensors earth
22 8V Power for panel and lever
Lift position sensor:
23 high position: 0.6V (± 0.1V)
low position: 4.5V (± 0.1V)
40-44
CONNECTOR JX2 (BLACK)
8 1
23 16

1 D_AUX3 (Not utilised)
2 Differential output
3 Input, radar (130 pulses per metre)
4 CAN_H (Not utilised)
5 CAN_L (Not utilised)
6 CAN_RES (Not utilised)
8 4WD output
9 8V Power for external sensor (ISO4 socket)
10 8V Power for steering sensors
11 Input, ASM AUTO
12 Input, wheelslip control
13 Input, differential
14 Input, external sensor (ISO4 socket)
15 ISO9141 K Line
16 Input, steering sensor 1
17 0V Earth for external sensor (ISO4 socket)
18 Input, steering sensor 2
19 Input, wheel speed (130 pulses per metre)
20 Input, brakes
22 ISO9141 L Line
23 0V Earth for steering sensors
40-45
3.3.6 FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT
8 1
23 16
CONNECTOR JX3 (BLACK)

1 Output, raising solenoid valve
2 Output, lowering solenoid valve
3 Not utilised
4 +12 V +12 V
5 +12 V +12 V
6÷19 Not utilised
20 0V Control unit earth
21÷23 Not utilised
CONNECTOR JX4 (WHITE)
1 Not utilised
2 Output, load sensing solenoid valve
3÷ 7 Not utilised
8 Control light output
9 Power for external sensor
10 Not utilised
11 Input, 4WD status
12 Input, control button
13 Input, brakes switches
14 Input, position sensor
15 ISO 9141 K diagnostic line
16 Not utilised
17 0V Earth for external sensor
18 Not utilised
19 Input, wheel speed
20 Not utilised
21 Not utilised
22 ISO 9141 L diagnostic line
23 Not utilised
40-46
4.1 GROUND POINTS
4. SYSTEMS
4.1 GROUND POINTS
GND5
P4
F0024530 F0025360
GND1
GND4
F0025400
F0025370
GND2
GND4
GND3
F0025390
F0025380 F0024280
D0005780 40-47
4.2 ENGINE START
4.2 ENGINE START
1
0 1 2
0442.9937.4
0443.7357 50 15 X 30 +30
X86 P1
TKAB3 MS1
1 20
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
0443.7846
X47 X48 X56 X52 X50 START
D+ B+ 8 9 5 4 3 2 1 3 1 2 5 2 1
+
GND2
M G
- 2
6
5 4 3
+ -
BATTERY
1 Starter switch
2 Start enable switch (Green)
3 Control relay for engine starting
4 Preheating control unit
5 Alternator
6 Starter motor
D0005800 40-48
4.3 PREHEATING
4.3 PREHEATING
0441.9533
RL1(40A)
30 85 86 87
F27
F16
F30
F1
0 1 2
100A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
0442.9936.4 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 7
X86 P1 J2 P4 J3 J1
ST2
PRE HEATING 19
AS3
+15 2 9
8 +30 9 5
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
GND 3 21
GND 12 AS1
ST1
4 18 1
MS2 MS1 TKAB3
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
X47 X48 X56 X46 X51 X52 X50
D+ B+ 8 9 5 4 3 2 1 3 1 2 5
+
GND2
M
G
-
6
3 2
5
+ - 4
BATTERY
1 Starter switch
2 Control relay for engine starting
4 Glowplug
5 Alternator
6 Starter motor
7 Infocenter
D0005810 40-49
4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL
4.4 ELECTRICAL ENGINE CONTROL
RL1 (40A) 1 Starter switch
0441.9533
2 Engine ECU
30 85 86 87
3 Accelerator pedal position sensor

1 4 Infocenter
F27
F16
F30
F1
0 1 2 5 ISO7 socket (Connection for external implements)
100A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
GND2 0.012.3639.4 0442.9937.4 6 Engine speed keypad
0419.9751 0443.7847 0443.7357
50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 7 7 Accelerator control lever
X86 P1 J2 P4 J3 J1
8 Diagnostics connector
9 Engine boost pressure sensor
Y1 X44
13 1 2 10 Actuator
2 3 + -
BATTERY
11 Camshaft speed sensor (PICK-UP)
MS1 MX1 12 Coolant temperature sensor
21 2
B43
12
t°
1 8 22 8 13 Engine stop coil
2 9 24 9
4 14
15
1
B40 12 16 12
11 2 13 28 13
14
15 6 15
1
Y3 16
2 17 10 17
10 3
4
18 19
11
18
19
19
5 25 11
29 24
27 25
p 1
B41 23 17 23
9 2 24
3 25 MX2 2
1
2
3
GND4
X81
3 10
8 4 11
21
19
18
17
15
14
4
EMR 16
2 20
7 1 23
3 25
24
X42 ISO7 AS3 AS1 AS2 AS6
5 2 4 3 1 6 3 9 5 4 21 4 10 11 9 10
0442.9936.4
5
6 ST1 ST2 X39

2 9 11 3 12 25 12 1 2 3
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT
EMR ALARM
ENGINR RPM
+15
+30
GND
GND
0443.8666.4
-
+
4 X40
2 1 4
D0005880 40-50
4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH
4.5 LIGHTS - LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH
0441.9533
1 Starter switch
RL 11 RL 6
FULL BEAM RL 10 RL 5 HALF BEAM RL 7 RL 14
2 Infocenter
F9
RL 1
TOP FULL BEAM POSITION (40A) TOP HALF BEAM HAZARD
7.5A
1 2 1 2 1 2 85 86 1 2 1 2
G
3 Hazard lights switch lighting
4 5
D9
1N4007
3 4 5
D8
1N4007
3 4 5 3
1N4007
D1
D2
30 87 4 5
D4
1N4007
3 4 5
D5
1N4007
3 C3 C2 C1 49A 49 31
4 Cab roof worklights switch
1N4007
5 Lower worklights switch
1 6 Front right headlamp
F33
F24
F25
F20
F26
F23
F15
F16
F12
F31
F32
F21
F22
F23
F1
7 Front left headlamp
100A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
0 1 2
15A
30A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
3A
0442.9937.4 8 Horn
0443.7851 0443.7357 P5 P4 P5
X86
50 15 X 30 3
J1 P6
2 25
P5 P5
12 7 3 9
P6 J1 P6 J1
1 8 23
P5
10 9 13 6
P1
+30 -31
J3
7 3 6 17
J1
2 1 5 1
P2 P5 J3
22 2 1 4
P5
11 8
P4 J2
8 9
9 Rear right side lights
1
2 and direction indicators
17 3
4 10 Rear left side lights
X25
2
16 3 11 Number plate light
4
X24 12 Direction indicator lights
1 DS1
2 20 control unit (Red)
15 3 16
4 13 13 Lights selector switch
X22 12
1
2
11
6
14 Front right worklight
14 3 5
15 Front left worklight
4
see 40-57
X21
0 16 Front right side lights
r
+ - and direction indicators
1
BATTERY 17 Front left side lights

H
15/1 and direction indicators
AS4
17
12
11
10
9
0
SX 8
1 7
1 6
DX 5
0
4
L 3
13 2
49a 1
R
49
0 1
31
15
56a
56b
56
X83
X84
X85
30
GND4 TKAB3 MS1 AS1 AS3 AS2
49b RE LE 49 31 49a RA LA 3 4 5 6 12 9 8 7 26 22 20 19 18 17 16 21 5 9 8 2 1 18
0442.9936.4
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847.7
0443.7846
X2
4 1 5 4 1 5
X1 0.012.2010.4
12 0.012.4420.4
0442.9835 1 3 X96 ST1 ST2
X5 X4 X4 0442.9886 X49 X58 X57 2 1 10 9 3 8 1 10 9 5 12 3 4 9 2 2 3 4
TRAILER 2
TRAILER 1
DIRECTIONS LIGHT
GND
GND
+58
+30
+15
1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3
GND2
0442.9887 X92
1 2 10 9 8 7 6 2
3 1
4
11
D0006450 40-51
4.6 CAB ACCESSORY
4.6 CAB ACCESSORY
0441.9533
RL 5 RL 1
POSITION (40A)
5A
1 2 85 86
F8
4 5 3 30 87
D3
1N4007
3 5 7
F24
F20
F18
F28
1 2 4 6
F1
F7
0 1 2
100A
7.5A
30A
30A
15A
20A
30 58
15
- GND2
- 30 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 50 15 X 30 7 3 4 +30 -31 7 21 6 3
0443.7851
0442.9937.4
X37 X23 X32 X36 X87 X91 X86 P5 P6 P3 P1 P4 J3 P3 P2
0443.7357
+ -
GND 5
BATTERY
DS1
13
21
18
1 Door open alarm switch

2 Interior roof light
3 Clock
4 Side console courtesy light
5 Compressor for driver's seat air suspension
6 Cigar lighter
7 Starter switch
D0005830 40-52
4.7 WORKING LIGHTS
4.7 WORKING LIGHTS
9 10
1 Rotating light
1 2 3 2 Rear upper left worklights
3 Rear upper right worklights
GND 2 1 2 1
4 Front right side lights
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
1 2 1 2 1 2 X3 X3
0442.9835
0442.9866
0441.4780
0442.4189
X100 X99 X99
5 Front left side lights
4 5 7 8
6 Control relay for front upper worklights
0441.9533
GND5 7 Front left worklight
2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 2 4 1 3 1 3 3 2 3 2
RL 2 RL 3 RL 1 RL 10 RL 11
8 Front right worklight
0443.7851
0443.7846
X13 X12 X11 X24 X25 X35 X22 X21 X2 X1 (40A) (40A) (40A) FULL BEAM FULL BEAM TOP
F20
9
F6
F4
86 86 86
Rear lower left worklights
85 85 85 1 2 1 2
30A
30A
30A
87 30 87 30 30 87 4 5
D8
3 4 5
D7
3 10 Rear lower right worklights
1N4007 1N4007
11 Starter switch
GND3 12 Rear worklights switch
F33
11
F10
F14
F1
F9
F2
13 Rotating beacon control switch
15A
100A
7.5A
7.5A
30A
15A
0 1 2
14 Rear screen wiper
15 Side lights switch
7 8 9 10 12 17 19 2 50 15 X 30 5 6 9 4 2 +30 -31 7 9 18 14 12 25 2 6
DS1 TKAB3 X86 J1 J3 P2 P1 P4 J3 P5 P6 P3 16 Cab roof worklights switch
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
+ - 17 Lower worklights switch
BATTERY
AS1 X69 X71 X72

15 21 5 14 17 19 2 7 10 9 5 4 1 10 9 5 1 10 9 5
GND4
0442.9936.4
0
1
2
13 12
3A 3 1 14
1 10 9 5 1 10 9 5 2 1 10 9 3 8
17 16
15
D0005940 40-53
4.8 WINDSCREEN WIPER
4.8 WINDSCREEN WIPER
RL4
0441.9533
1 2 FRONT GLASS W.
RL1
(40A)
31b
53a
31b
53a
31
53
31
53
GND5 85 86
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
0443.7851
30 87
X27 X26 2 5 8 4 1 6
F10
F12
F1
F2
2
1
100A
3
30A
15A
7.5A
0
0 1 2
GND4
4 3 2 1 15 14 50 15 X 30 4 5 9 10 7 2 +30 -31 6 5 18 16 9 10 4 7 5 8
DS1 X86 X69 P1 P4 P3 P5 P6 J3
+ -
BATTERY
0443.8656
31b
53
7
7 7 16
15
15/1 14
H
53c 13
AS4
1
r
0
26 27
TKAB2 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
0443.7848
F.P. R.P.
1 2 2 1
M
GND2 M
6 5
1 Rear screen wiper motor

2 Windscreen wiper motor
3 Starter switch
4 Rear screen wiper
5 Rear screen washer pump
6 Front windscreen washer pump
7 Lights selector switch
D0005950 40-54
4.9 INFOCENTER
4.9 INFOCENTER
0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
1
STEERING PRESS. CURCUIT

30 85 86 87
ENGINE PRESSURE
F27
F16
F1
ENGINE TEMP.
0 1 2
AIR FILTER
100A
7.5A
3A
FUEL
GND
GND
+15
+30
2 9 3 12 15 24 8 9 13 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6
0442.9937.4
0442.9936.4
ST1 ST2 X86 P1 J2 P4 J3
0443.7357
9 + -
13
AS2 BATTERY
5
9
AS3
21
AS1
2 5 10 3 14 8
MS2 MS1 TKAB2
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
T X97 L P FUEL
1 2 14 1 2 1 2 1 2
GND
6 P P
7 5 4 3
1 Infocenter
2 Starter switch
3 Fuel level sensor
4 Engine oil pressure switch
5 Air cleaner clogged sensor
6 Steering circuit pressure switch
7 Coolant temperature sensor
D0005860 40-55
4.10 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
4.10 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
2 3
0441.9533
0442.9936.4 0443.7848 RL1
19 2 1 (40A)
0443.7850
JX4 X38 GND
ST1
GND 12
30 85 86 87
GND 3
+30 9
1 4
8
F18
F19
+15 2
F27
F16
F1
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT 11 0 1 2
100A
7.5A
RPM PTO OUTPUT 6
30A
30A
3A
RADAR OUTPUT 5
GND4
7 6 4 9 5 21 11 5 - + 30 31 50 15 X 30 3 4 1 2 +30 9 -31 7 6
0442.9937.4
AS3 AS1 MX1 FE1 X67 X68 TKAB1 X86 P3 P1 J2 P4 J3
0443.7357
ISO7
6
2
4
7 3
5
1
ISO4 + +-
1
2
6 3 BATTERY
4
JX1 JX2
11 9 14 17 19
1 Engine ECU
2 Front axle suspension control unit
3 Trailer socket
4 Starter switch
5 Rear power lift ECU
6 ISO4 socket
7 ISO7 socket
8 Infocenter
D0005890 40-56
4.11 AUTORADIO - CB
4.11 AUTORADIO - CB
0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
30 85 86 87
F1
F7
F8
100A
20A
5A
0 1 2
0443.7851 50 15 X 30 +30 -31 7 6 3

X86 P1 P4 J3 P2
-
X30
7 +
X29
+ -
1
6 2 BATTERY
X20 DS1
30 3 18
5 15 2
- 1
21
GND5
X34
- 16
30 14
15 12
58 15 see 40-51
4 - rechts 6
+ rechts 2
- links 7
+ links 3
X33
0442.9937.4
+
3 - 0443.7357
X31
2
2 1
X28
1 Starter switch
2 Right front loudspeaker
3 Right rear loudspeaker
4 Autoradio
5 CB power connector
6 Left front loudspeaker
7 Left rear loudspeaker
D0005850 40-57
4.12 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN
4.12 AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING FAN
3
1 2 70A 4 1 Fuse F100 (30 A)
F100 2 Motor for supplementary
30A M
1 2 1 2 5 2 1 3 1 2
3 Relay - supplementary
0443.7871
X16 X19 X17 X18
4 Pressure switch for supplementary
0441.9533 air conditioning fan
RL5 RL1
XB GND2
(POSITION) (40A)
5 Alternator
1 2
30 85 86 87
6 Air conditioning fuse F50 (30 A)
D+ B+ X56
4 5 3
7 Control relay for 4th speed
F1
F3
D7
heater fans
F24
+ 1N4007
- 20
100A
+
30A
8 Fan speed selector switch
7.5A
G
-
BATTERY 0 1 2 F20
30A
9 Right heater fan
5 10 Left heater fan
50 15 X 30 7 +30 -31 7 15 14
11 Resistor - left heater fan
0442.9937.4
X86 P5 P1 P4 J3 P3
0443.7357
12 Resistor - right heater fan

13 Control relay for 1st speed
and air conditioning power on
+ - 14 Control relay for 3rd speed heater fans
K
BATTERY 15 Air conditioning control switch
19 16 Air conditioning thermostat
18
2
1 5
17 Connector for air conditioning
X55 MS1 control panel lighting
18 Air conditioning pressure switch
0.012.3639.4
19 Air conditioning compressor

0443.7847
20 Starter switch
X88 X89 X79

4 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 1 2
GND4
30A
F50
6
0.010.2562.2
X112 X111 X110 X102 X109 X107 X104 X105 X106 X108 X103
2 1 A B C 2 1 87b 87 86 85 30 30 85 86 87 87b 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 1 30 85 86 87 87b
1 2 3 4 C
M M
16 15 14 12 11 10 9 7
17 8
13
D0005920 40-58
4.13 BRAKES
4.13 BRAKES
3 4 5 1 Left brake pedal switch

2 Right brake pedal switch
3 Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power)
54
4 Rear left side lights and direction indicators
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
X38 X4 X4
0442.9835
0442.9886
5 Rear right side lights and direction indicators
6 Brake lights fuse F102 (15 A)
0441.9533
RL1 RL 8 RL 9
(40A) (STOP) (DT/BRAKE)
7 Handbrake switch
X2 X1
1 2 1 2 8 Starter switch
30 85 86 87
9
4 5 3 4 5 3
1 6 1 6 D6 D7
4WD control solenoid valve
0443.7846
1N4007 1N4007
1 2 10 Diagnostics connector
F16
F11
F1
F27
GND3 11 Brake fluid level sensor
8
7
100A
7.5A
20A
3A
6 0 1 2
12 Infocenter
50A
GND4
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 25 7 1 2 2 4 3 1 50 15 X 30 -31 +30 7 6 4 20 24 17 19 8 9
0442.9936.4
0442.9937.4
X60 X59 TKAB1 TKAB3 X82 X90 X86 P1 P4 J3 J1 P5 P3 J2
0443.7357
see 40-60
+ -
BATTERY
AS3
11
ST1 10
+15 2 9
+30 9 5
12 HAND BRAKE OIL LEVEL 8 1

GND 3 21
GND 12
AS1
MS2 JX2 TKAB2

1 20 8 14
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
0443.7848
2 10
11 1
X45
DT
GND2 2 1
GND2
D0005790 40-59
4.14 TRAILER BRAKES
4.14 TRAILER BRAKES

5
4 6
P
p
2 1 2 1
0443.7356.4
X10 X9 X8
3
1
ITA TRAILER BRAKE
0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
GND
GND
+30
+15
1 + G 0442.9936.4 85 86
0443.7875.01
9 2 12 3 23 1 3 4 2
X94 30 87
ST1 ST2 X7
0443.7848
7
2
F27
F16
F28
F1
0 1 2
100A
7.5A
15A
3A
1 3 4 2 4 3 1 5 9 21 2 30 28 5 29 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 21
0442.9937.4
AS5 X90 AS3 AS1 TKAB2 X86 P1 J2 P4 J3 P3
0443.7357
see 40-59
see 40-59
see 40-59
+ -
BATTERY
0443.7356.4
X8
3
1
ITA TRAILER BRAKE
0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
GND
GND
+30
+15
1 + G 0442.9936.4 85 86
0443.7875.01
9 2 12 3 23 1 3 4 2
X94 30 87
ST1 ST2 X7
0443.7848
7
2
F27
F16
F28
F1
0 1 2
100A
7.5A
15A
3A
1 3 4 2 4 3 1 5 9 21 2 30 28 5 29 50 15 X 30 +30 9 -31 7 6 21
0442.9937.4
AS5 X90 AS3 AS1 TKAB2 X86 P1 J2 P4 J3 P3
0443.7357
see 40-59
see 40-59
see 40-59
+ -
BATTERY
1 Compressed air pressure gauge

2 Handbrake switch
3 Infocenter
4 Trailer braking low pressure switch
5 Solenoid valve for trailer parking brake
6 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
7 Starter switch
D0005900 40-60
4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
4.15 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
1 Left brake pedal switch
0441.9533
RL1 RL8 RL9
(40A) (STOP) (D/T BRAKE) 2 Right brake pedal switch
1 2 1 2 3 Rear power lift ECU
30 87
4
85 86
4 5
D6
3 4 5
D7
3
Starter switch
1N4007 1N4007
5 4WD control solenoid valve
F11
1 2
4 6 Front axle suspension position sensor
20A
F1
3 7 Solenoid valve for control of front axle
F17
100A
0 1 2
Load Sensing suspension
7.5A
0443.7848 8 Solenoid valve for front axle lowering control
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 8 50 15 X 30 +30 -31 7 4 20 24 17 19 8 7
9
0442.9936.4
X60 X59 JX2 X86 P1 P4 J3 J1 P5 P3 J2 Solenoid valve for front axle raising control
10 Front axle suspension control unit
GND2 11 Diagnostics connector
TKAB2 1
12 Front suspension switch
AS3
7
14 2
5
11 DT
3
+ - 3
S
AS1
3
2 6
U
1
12 10 BATTERY
21 9 FE2 X14
8 7
7 6
6 5
5 4
4 3 X15
3 2 1
2 1 2 7
1
FE1 S
1
2 8
H
1
2 9
5 X81 JX4 JX3

1 10 9 5 14 13 12 8 19 22 11 2 15 3 9 14 7 5 4 20 2 1
0442.9937.4 0443.7850 0443.7849
0443.7357
12
11 10
13
D0005840 40-61
4.16 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
4.16 POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
1 2
1 Transmission ECU
0443.7341 3 2 Starter switch
0 0 1 2
1
Avanti 21 E.C.U. (LS) 3 Super-reduction engagement switch
1
Indietro 0443.8656 0442.9937.4 65 63 20 30 1 2 8 50 33 34 11 57 29 5 14 39 15 16 3 40 17 55 32 21 45 36 13 56 62 4 44 24 37 38 67 22 43 64 49 66 68 23 31 50 15 X 30 1 2
0441.9533 4 Gear shift pushbutton panel
4
0
AS4 X86 X75 RL1
(40A)
N 4 21
V 1 18 6 Engine ECU
R 2 19
5 22
30 85 86 87
7 Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging
3 20
F30
F27
F16
8
F1
X113 Speed sensor for odometer
100A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
9 Proportional solenoid valve
0443.7875.01
3 1 3 6 9 +30 -31 7 6 10 Forward/reverse solenoid valves
P5 J2 P1 P4 J3
11 Engine speed sensor
12 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor
12V 1 + -
13 Transmission speed sensor
4
20 3
AS5
BATTERY 14 Transmission oil temperature sensor
Sig 5
Light 6 1 15 Transmission oil low pressure switch
M 2 5
X93 16 Gear change solenoid valves
17 Infocenter
18 Clutch pedal position sensor
0442.9936.4 19 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
20 Transmission display
X62 AS6
1 8 21 Forward/reverse selector
19 2 4
3 3
2
1
X61 6
4 5
18 1
2
ST1 AS3
+15
2 9
GEAR BOX PRESSURE 7 5
+30 9
17 GND 3 21
GND 12
AS1
ST2
WHEEL INPUT 22 AS2
HYDRAULIC FILTER 17 6 TKAB1 TKAB2 MX1 MX2 X81 X74 X43 X74b MS1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 21 14 2 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 31
To engine
wiring
6 5 4
0443.7848
PRESS. SWITCH
NEUTRAL LS
ADD. EV V/R
EV GROUP
EV. PROP.
FILTER
TEMP.
LS/PS
NLSA
NLSE
NAB
NHK
PS
LS
F A E D C B 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
fN fN f U
P
HK
lsa lse N Prop
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
D0005410 40-62
4.17 POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION
4.17 POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION
1 2
3
1 Transmission ECU
0 1 2 2 Starter switch
E.C.U. (LS) 3 Super-reduction engagement switch
0441.9670.4 0443.8656 0443.7357 9 37 13 49 2 6 34 35 3 52 26 24 32 27 17 8 29 51 7 50 25 3 16 42 33 30 8 31 67 19 47 71 21 11 22 10 45 36 55 50 15 X 30 1 2 4 Gear shift pushbutton panel
RL1
20 X86 X75
REVERSE
AS4 (40A)
FORWARD
1
2
18
19 30 85 86 87
6 Engine ECU
3 20
7 Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging
F30
F27
F16
X113
F1
8 Speed sensor for odometer
100A
7.5A
7.5A
3A
0443.7875.01
9 Forward/reverse solenoid valves

3 1 3 6 9 +30 -31 7 6
P5 J2 P1 P4 J3 10 Engine speed sensor
11 Gearbox output shaft speed sensor
12 Transmission oil temperature sensor
12V 1
+ - 13 Transmission neutral sensor (red switch)
4
3
BATTERY
14 Transmission oil low pressure switch
19 5 AS5
15
Sig
Light 6 1 Gear change solenoid valves

M 2 5
X93 16 Pressure switch, clutch pedal depressed
17 Infocenter
0442.9936.4
18 Clutch pedal position sensor

19 Transmission display
20 Forward/reverse selector
AS6
3
X61 2
4 1
18 1 6
2 5
ST1 AS3
2+15 9
GEAR BOX PRESSURE 7 5
+30 9
17 GND 3
GND 12
ST2
WHEEL INPUT 22 AS2
HYDRAULIC FILTER 17 6
8
MS2 AS1
X43
X74
X81
0443.7847
8
2 21 TKAB1 TKAB2 MX1 MX2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 21 14 2 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4
1 2
X6
0443.7667
0443.7848
PRESS. SWITCH
NEUTRAL LS
ADD. EV V/R
EV GROUP
EV. PROP.
FILTER
LS/PS
TEMP.
NLSA
NLSE
NAB
NHK
X101
PS
LS
2 1 F A E D C B 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
f f
N
P P
HK
lse N
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
D0006460 40-63
4.18 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL
4.18 ASM - 4WD - DIFFERENTIAL
0441.9533
RL9 RL8
RL1 (DT/BRAKE) (STOP)
(40A)
F10
F13
F11
1 2 1 2
30 85 86 87 4 5 3 4 5 3
7.5A
20A
15A
1 2 D7
1N4007
D7
1N4007
F27
F1
0 1 2
100A
7.9A
0442.9937.4
0442.9936.4 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1
0443.7357 50 15 X 30 +30 9 6 7 8 19 17 -31 24 20 18 1 4
DF 1
ST2 X60 X59 X86 P1 J2 J3 J2 P3 P4 P5
12 DT 14
+15 2
+30 9
GND 3 AS3
GND 12 9
5
10
8
1 + -
1
11
0
10
BATTERY
9 AS2
5 5
7
1
10
0
10
9
6
5
AS1
6 21
1 11
7 9
2 10
8 8
1
9
0
10
9 5
6 6
5 7 MS1 JX2 TKAB2
1 2 3 30 18 23 10 16 20 11 2 13 8 13 14
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847
0443.7848
6
X53 EV DF DT
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
GND2
5 4
8 7
1 Left brake pedal switch

2 Right brake pedal switch
3 Starter switch
4 4WD control solenoid valve
5 Diff lock solenoid valve
7 Steering angle sensor 2
8 Steering angle sensor 1
9 ASM switch
10 Diff lock switch
11 4WD switch
12 Infocenter
D0005910 40-64
4.19 REAR LIFTER
4.19 REAR LIFTER

0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
0442.9835 1 Left rear lift "lower" control pushbutton
0442.9886
2 Left rear lift "raise" control pushbutton
0443.7846
4
1
2 X1
3 Right rear lift "lower" control pushbutton
1
7
8
4 Right rear lift "raise" control pushbutton
3 2 9 5 Starter switch
0441.9533
1 RL1
6 Radar control switch
2 2 X2
(40A)
7 85 86
1
1
2
8
9
30 87
8 Lift control lever
5
F27
F16
F1
0.012.2010.4 10 Lift control lever
0.012.4420.4
100A
7.5A
0 1 2
3A
0442.9835 F34 11 Lift draft sensor
0442.9886 7.5A
12 Lift draft sensor

13 12 11 50 15 X 30 3 5 2 9 1 +30 -31 7 6
TKAB3 X86 P5 J2 P1 P4 J3 13 Rear lift position sensor
14 Lift raising solenoid valve
15 Lift lowering solenoid valve
16 Radar
ST1 AS1
GND 3 21 GND4 17 Infocenter
GND 12
+30 9 5
AS3
3
+15 2 9
RADAR OUTPUT 5 7 2 6
1
WHEEL RPM OUTPUT 11 4
17 1
0
21 2
AS2 X73
RADAR INPUT + -
ST2
BATTERY
X81
9
10
7
0442.9936.4
3
2
1
EHR
TKAB2 X78 JX1 JX2
10 1 21 22 24 25 23 17 19 20 11 3 9 7 8 4 1 6 10 5 12 1 2 3 21 15 23 10 17 14 22 8 18 13 7 19 16 9 4 20 5 6 3 12 15 22 19
0442.9937.4
470R
470R
0443.7357
4K7
4K7
4K7
4K7
220R
220R
220R
220R
0443.7848
10
RADAR
DRAFT
DRAFT
EV DW
RIGHT
EV UP
LEFT
POS.
SEN.
9
2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
GND2 U U U
S F F
15 14
16 12 11
13
D0005870 40-65
4.20 FRONT AND REAR PTO
4.20 FRONT AND REAR PTO
0.012.2010.4
0.012.4420.4
0442.9835 1 PTO AUTO control switch
0442.9886 2 Front PTO control pushbutton (in cab)
X1
0443.7846
PTO DX
3 12
0441.9533 3 Rear PTO control pushbutton (in cab)
5 2 11
1 10
RL1(40A)
4 Rear PTO control pushbutton (left)
X2 5 Rear PTO control pushbutton (right)
F29
PTO SX
3 12
4 2 11
30 85 86 87
6 Starter switch
7.5A
1 10
7 ISO7 socket (Connection for external implements)
0.012.2010.4 PTO MODULE 8 Rear PTO speed sensor
0.012.4420.4
0442.9835
D12
9 Rear PTO solenoid valve
F10
F16
0442.9886 6A100R
10 Alternator
F27
F16
F1
7.5A
3A
1
6 IC1
+
3 IC2
+
3
11 Front PTO solenoid valve
100A
7.5A
4 4
3A
DIA DIA
2 3 5
OUT H
IN
2
5
OUT V
IN
2
0 1 2 GND GND 6V 2 6H 5 7V 3V7H 3H 1 10W 2V 2H
1 1
13 Infocenter
1 10 9 5 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 9 10 50 15 X 30 -31 +30 9 7 6 24 12 13 8 10 11 23 25 9 18 1
X98 X76 X77 TKAB3 X86 P4 P1 J2 J3 P3 P5 J2
- +
BATTERY
0442.9936.4
ST1 GND4
+15 2 9
+30 9 5
13
GND 3
GND 12 21 ISO7
5 7
AS1
PTO RPM INPUT 20 3
ST2 AS2 JX1 MS1 TKAB2
11 13 23 12 9 1
0442.9937.4 0.012.3639.4
0443.7357 0443.7847
0443.7848
FRONT PTO
12
PTO SENS
EV PTO
X56
1 2 D+ B+ 1 2 1 2 3
GND2 + GND2
G
9 8
11 10
D0005770 40-66
4.21 CLEANFIX
4.21 CLEANFIX
0441.9533
RL1
(40A)
85 86
1 30 87
F10
F28
F1
0 1 2
100A
7.5A
15A
0.012.3639.4
0443.7847 0442.9936.4 GND4
1 10 9 5 50 15 X 30 +30 -31 7 18 21
X51 X70 X86 P1 P4 J3 P5 P3
8
7
+ -
BATTERY
0442.9937.4
0443.7357
GND2
6 14
X54 MS2 AS2
3 2 1
0.012.3496.4
X66 X65 X63 X64

3 1 2 5 3 2 1 2 1
F101
15A M
6 70A 3
5 4
1 Clean Fix control switch

2 Starter switch
3 Clean Fix control compressor
4 Clean Fix control solenoid valve
5 Control relay for Clean Fix
6 Clean Fix fuse F101 (15 A)
D0005820 40-67
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
PLANIMETRY, WIRING DIAGRAM AND CONNECTORS LOCATION
5. PLANIMETRY, WIRING DIAGRAM AND CONNECTORS LOCATION

WIRING CODE PAGE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR 0443.8666 40-143
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB) 010.2562.2 40-165
AIR TRAILER BRAKING 0443.7355 40-112
ARMREST 0443.7354.4 40-189
ARMREST (INTERNAL) 0443.5497 40191
CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION 0443.7849 40-125
CAB POWER SUPPLY 0443.7846/10 40-119
CLEAN FIX 0.012.3496.4 40-93
CLUTCH SENSOR 0443.7667 40-81
CONTROL UNIT - FUSES - RELAYS 0441.9533 40-193
DISPLAY 0443.7875.01 40-171
ENGINE (106–115 CV) 0.012.3639.4/10 40-77
ENGINE (120–165CV) 0443.7847/20 40-79
0.012.2010.4 40-133
0.012.4420.4 40-134
FENDER
0442.9835 40-135
0442.9886 40-136
FRONT CONSOLE 0442.9936.4/20 40-141
FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) 0443.7850 40-115
HYDRAULIC AND AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY) 0443.7356.4 40-111
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 0419.9751 40-71
0.012.2018.4 40-129
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT 0441.4114 40-130
0442.9887 40-131
ROOF 0443.7851/10 40-175
ROTATING BEACON 0441.4780 40-179
SIDE CONSOLE (POWER SHIFT) 0443.7357/20 40-153
SIDE CONSOLE (POWER SHUTTLE) 0442.9937.4/20 40-149
SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN 0443.7871 40-95
TRANSMISSION 0443.7848 40-99
WORKLIGHTS 0442.4189 40-177
40-69
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (1/2) 0419.9751
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120-165 CV)
B41 B40 B1
3 2 1 2 1 2 1
X44
Y3
TO 0.012.36394
0443.7847
2
B43
1
1 2 3
1 2
Y1 B6
B1 Not used
B40 Camshaft speed sensor (Pick-Up)
B41 Engine boost pressure sensor
B43 Coolant temperature sensor
B6 Not used
X44 To engine wiring
Y1 Engine stop coil
Y3 Actuator
0419.9751
D0003640 40-71
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (2/2) 0419.9751
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120–165 CV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
X44
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3
Y1 B43 B1 B40 Y3 B6 B41
0419.9751
D0003650 40-72
CONNECTORS LOCATION INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE CONNECTORS LOCATION
Y1
F0024710
Y3
F0024650
3
X44
F0024690
40-73
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120-165CV)
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WIRING (120-165 CV)
4 2
3
1
B41
4
F0024670
5
5
6
B43
F0024680
6
B40
F0024700
0419.9751
40-75
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ENGINE WIRING (106–115 CV) (1/2) 0.012.3639.4/10
ENGINE WIRING (106–115 CV) (1/2)
FRONT PTO K P T
X44
2 1
TO 0442.9938
2 1
GND2
X55
X58 X46
AMP
X97
2 1
MS2
DEUTSCH
DT06-12S
IPD-USA
2 1
TO 0442.9936.4
HZW
X57
MS1
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
S
L
3 2 1
X45
2 1
L
X54
TO 0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
START
1
2
X53 X6
1
3
TO 0443.7667
4
X56 X48
X47
X51
5 4 3 2 1
X52
X50
X49
FRONT PTOFront PTO solenoid valve X44 To internal combustion engine wiring X53 Steering angle sensor
K Air conditioning compressor X45 Brake fluid level sensor X54 To Clean Fix wiring
L Air cleaner clogged sensor X46 Glowplug X55 Air conditioning pressure switch
MS1 To front console wiring X47 Starter motor X56 Alternator
MS2 To front console wiring X48 Starter motor X57 Front right headlamp
P Engine oil pressure switch X49 Horn X58 Front left headlamp
STARTStart enable switch (Green) X50 Relay - engine starting X97 Steering system pressure switch
T Coolant temperature sensor X51 Preheating control unit
X6 To clutch sensor wiring X52 Preheating control unit
0.012.3639.4/10
D0003640 40-77
D0003650
V 1.5
1
M 1.5 FRONT PTO
GN 1 2
2
M 1.5
1
X49
2
AG 1
P
1
RV 1 RV 1 M 1.5
1 1 2
MN 1 MN 1 HV 1.5
2 2 3
RV 1.5 RV 1.5 CB 1
3 3 8
X53
LR 1 HL 1 HN 1
4 4 9
HR 1.5 BN 1
5 12
RG 1 CN 1
6 13
GR 1.5 LR 1
7 14
X44
G 1.5 RG 1
8 15
B 1.5 B1
9 17
10 B1 V1 18
M 1 M1
11 19
GN 1.5 VN 1
12 23
V 1.5 H1
13 24
AG 1 Z1
14 25
15
BN 1
16
M 1.5
VN 1 M 1.5 1
17
MS1
BR 1.5 B 1.5 2
18
X58
19 V1 GR 1.5 3
NZ 1
20
HV 1.5
21
22 CB 1 M 1.5 1
L1 CB 1.5
23 2
X57
HN 1 G 1.5 3
24
25
CB 1.5
26
Z1
27
28 CN 1 R 10 30
X48
H1
X55
29
HR 1.5
HL 1 1
30
H 1.5 RN 4
ZB 1.5 2 50
31
X47
H 1.5
1
1 RN 1
K
R 10
M1 B+
40-78
2 R6
3 MB 1
X56
4 GH 1
L1
5 A1
MS2
7
R4
8 SN 1 3
NZ 1
9 H1 2
ZB 1
C1
X50
10 1
RN 4
5
M 1.5
1
2
BR 1.5
3
X52
GND2
RN 1.5 4
GH 1
5
R4
H1 M1 R6
1 1 B+
R 1.5 RN 1 R6
2 2
X45
X54
M 1.5
X51
3 L6 50
SN 1
2
M1
X6
1
C1
1
X97
L6
X46
A1 ZB 1
2 2
T
M1 1 M1
1
START
M1
L
MB 1
0.012.3639.4/10
0.012.3639.4/10
ENGINE WIRING (120–165CV) (1/2) 0443.7847/20
X45 T X44 P
TO 0442.9938
L
X46 GND2
2 1
X97
2 1
DEUTSCH
DT06-12S
MS2
IPD-USA
TO 0442.9936.4
X6
1
2
TO 0443.7667
MS1
TO 0443.7357
S
X49
X47 X48 HZW
1 2
2 1
1
X53 FRONT PTO
2
3 4
K
START
X51 K
1
X55
2
5 4 3 2 1
X52
X50
3 2 1
X56
X58 X57
X54
TO 0.012.3496.4
FRONT PTOFront PTO solenoid valve X44 To internal combustion engine wiring X53 Steering angle sensor
K Air conditioning compressor X45 Brake fluid level sensor X54 To Clean Fix wiring
L Air cleaner clogged sensor X46 Glowplug X55 Air conditioning pressure switch
MS1 To front console wiring X47 Starter motor X56 Alternator
MS2 To front console wiring X48 Starter motor X57 Front right headlamp
P Engine oil pressure switch X49 Horn X58 Front left headlamp
START Start enable switch (Green) X50 Relay - engine starting X97 Steering system pressure switch
T Coolant temperature sensor X51 Preheating control unit
X6 To clutch sensor wiring X52 Preheating control unit
0443.7847/20
D0004130 40-79
D0004120
RV 1
1
MN 1
2
RV 1.5
X53
GND2
HL 1
TWIST CABLE
4
30 ROUND/METER
RV 1
1
MN 1
2
RV 1.5
3
ENGINE WIRING (120–165CV) (2/2)
LR 1
4
HR 1.5
5
RG 1
6
M 1.5
B 1.5 GR 1.5
7
1 2 3
GR 1.5
X58
G 1.5
8
M 1.5
CB 1.5
1 2 3
G 1.5
X57
B 1.5
9
1
H R1.5
B Sch.
10
2
H 1.5
X55
H 1.5
K
1
V 1.5
M 1.5
2
FRONT PTO
M Sch.
11
1
M 1.5
2
GN 1 G N 1.5
12
X49
MB 1 V 1.5
13
P
M1
L
1
AG 1 AG 1
14
P
2
P
1
M1
2
A1
T
15
BN 1
16
VN 1
2
17
H 1.5
3
HV 1.5
MS1
BN 1
12 13
CN 1
LR 1
GR 1 BR 1.5
18
B Sch.
V Sch.
V Sch.
1415 171918
M Sch.
19
X44
CB 1 NZ 1
8
20
9
HN 1
VN 1
H1
Z1
23 2425
HV 1.5
21
R4
3 1
70A
ZB 1
NZ 1
X50
2 5
RN 4
40-80
Kl.50
RN 4
R 10
CB 1
Kl.30
22
X47 X48
M
L1 L1
D+
23
Kl.61
B+
R 10
R6 HN 1
X56
24
G
Kl. W
CB 1.5
Z1
CN 1
R6 H1
8
HL 1
R 1.5
9
L6
GH 1 ZB 1.5
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
RN 1.5
BR 1.5
54 3 2 1
M 1.5
X51 X52
X46
RN 1 RN 1
1
M1 M1
2
X45
MB 1
3
GH 1
4
M 1.5
A1
5
ZB 1
6
START
7
2
MS2
SN 1 SN 1
8
M1
X6
9
C1
M 1.5
10 11 12
R 1.5
3 2 1
M1
X54
1
C1
X97
0443.7847/20
0443.7847/20
CLUTCH SENSOR WIRING 0443.7667
CLUTCH SENSOR WIRING
2
X6
TO 0443.7848 X101
1
0.012.3639.4
2
M1 M1
2
2
LN 1 LN 1
1
1
X6 To engine wiring
X101 Pressure switch, clutch pedaldepressed
0443.7667
D0004030 40-81
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE
ENGINE CONNECTORS LOCATION
1
X58-X57
F0024750
2
X54
ONLY FOR
POWER SHIFT VERSION F0024760
X55
F0024770
40-83
FRONT PTO
HZW
F0025410
F0024800
6
X46
F0024840
40-84
7 X44
F0024870
8 X45
F0024970
9 X6
F0024900
40-85
10 L
F0024920
11 MS1
MS2
F0025470
12
START
F0024910
40-86
13 T
F0024880
14 X48
X47
F0024890
15
X50
X51
X52
F0024860
40-87
16
X49
F0024850
17
X56
F0024820
18
GND2
F0024830
40-88
19
F0024810
20
X53
F0024780
40-89
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ENGINE WIRING
ENGINE WIRING
8
21 9 22
7 11
10
6
X97
HZW1 5
4
F0024620
22 2
3
12
13
1
14
15
16
1 17
18
X101
19
20
ONLY FOR
21
0.012.3639.4/10
0443.7847
0443.7667
40-91
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CLEAN FIX WIRING 0.012.3496.4
CLEAN FIX WIRING
3
AMP
X63
2
70A
F101
15A
X66 X65 5 2 1 3
X63 1 2 3 2 1
X64
V1
M1
M1
V1
M 1.5
B1
R 1.5
V 1.5
R 1.5
R 1.5
AMP
2
X64
1
X65
M 1.5
R 1.5
B1
1 2 3 X54
X66
M
1 2 3
AMP
X54
TO 0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X54 To side console wiring

X63 Clean Fix control solenoid valve
X64 Clean Fix control compressor
X65 Relay - Clean Fix control
X66 Fuse F101 (15 A)
0.012.3496.4
D0005490 40-93
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING 0443.7871
SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING
X19
X16
GND2
X17
XB
2
X18
1 70A
5 2 1 3 X17
B1
RN 1
V4
RN 4
M X16
X19 X18
30A
F100
B1
M1
M4
V4
M4
R4
GND2 XB
X16 Fuse F100 (30 A)
X17 Relay
X18 Pressure switch
X19 Fan
XB Power (+)
0443.7871
D0004240 40-95
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING
CONNECTORS LOCATION SUPPLEMENTARY AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING
XB
GND
2
F0025420
X16 1
X18 X17
F0024950
3 3
X19
F0024940
0443.7871
40-97
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2) 0443.7848
TRANSMISSION WIRING (1/2)

X7 ADD. EV V/R
NAB TO 0443.7355.4 LS
0443.7356.4 PRESS.SWITCH
1 2 3
1 2
NAB
1
LS
2
RIGHT
DRAFT NLSE
NHK
NEUTRAL LS
1 2 3
123
32 1
NHK 3 2 1
2
12 34
1 2
TEMP
NLSE
FILTER TEMP
FILTER
PS
2 1
PS
1 2
TKAB2 DT
DT
LS/PS
2 1
LS/PS
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
NLSA
1 2 3
NLSA
LEFT
1 23
TKAB1
DRAFT
1 2
EV PROP
1 2 3
PTO SEN EV GROUP
FUEL
1 2
FUEL
O
PT
EV UP
DF
1 2
EV UP
3
RADAR
1
2
2
1 23
EV PTO 1 2
POS. GND2 RADAR
SEN.
EV DF
1 2
EV DW
F.P.
2 1
F.P.
X38
R.P.
2 1
R.P.
ADD. EV. V/RForward/reverse solenoid valves FILTER Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging NLSA Gearbox output shaft speed sensor TEMP Transmission oil temperature sensor
DT 4WD control solenoid valve FP Front windscreen washer pump NLSE Engine speed sensor TKAB1To side console wiring
EV DF Diff lock solenoid valve FUEL Fuel level sensor POS. SENS.Rear lift position sensor TKAB2To side console wiring
EV DW Lift lowering solenoid valve LEFT DRAFTLift draft sensor (left) PRESS. SWITCHTransmission oil low pressure switch X7 To trailer braking wiring
EV GROUPGear change solenoid valves LS Configuration connector (Power shift) PS Configuration connector Power Shuttle X38 Trailer socket
EV GROUPGear change solenoid valves LS/PS Configuration connector Power Shift/Power Shuttle PTO SENRear PTO speed sensor
EV PROP Proportional solenoid valve NAB Speed sensor for odometer RADAR Radar
EV PTO Rear PTO solenoid valve NEUTRAL LSTransmission neutral sensor (red switch) RIGHT DRAFTLift draft sensor (right)
EV UP Lift raising solenoid valve NHK Transmission speed sensor RP Rear screen washer pump
0443.7848
D0004260 40-99
D0004140
C 1.5
F
A
AG 1.5
Y5
E
G 1.5
Y4
D
HG 1.5
EV GROUP Y3
C
L 1.5 C 1.5
1
Y2
AG 1.5
B
2
AN 1.5
Y1
G 1.5
3
HG 1.5
P
4
2
MN 1
L 1.5
5
PRESS. SWITCH
1
BN 1.5
AN 1.5
2
6
CM 1
NEUTRA LS
1
MB 1 MN 1
7
M 1.5
2
8
RN 1
TEMP CM 1
1
VG 1
9
RN 1
3
GN 1
10
f
2
V1 GN 1.5
N
NHK
1
MB 1
Kl. 15
HK
V1 11 12
3
GN 1 MB 1.5
f
2
CN 1
NLSA CN 1
1
MB 1
NIsa
RG 1
GN 1
3
Z1
NLSE
N
RG 1
Ise
f 2 1
MB 1 ZB 1
GN 1.5
3
2
HN 1 Z1
1
ADD.EV V/R ZB 1
VG 1
2
CN 1.5 CN 1.5
U
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
EV PROP
1
LR 1.5 LR 1.5
Prop
TKAB1
22 23
HN 1
2
LS/PS BN 1.5
1
C 1.5
2
LS M 1.5
1
CN 1
2
PS GN 1
1
BN 1.5 G 1.5
L
G 1.5 RN 1.5
54A
M 1.5 HN 1.5
31
VN 1.5 HR 1.5
HR 1.5 BN 1.5
24 25 26 27 28
X38 RN 1.5
R 58R 54
HN 1.5
58L
VN 1.5
29
M 2.5 R 1.5
1
30
R 1.5
2
31
GH 1
3 2 1
NAB VB 1
M 1.5
MV 1
FILTER
HG 1.5
1
VB 1
2
ZB 1
3
FUEL
2 1
MV 1
4
M1
GH 1 Z1
5
3 2 1
M 1.5
6
PTO SEN GN 1
M1
7
GH 1
ZB 1
8
32 1
RADAR ZB 1.5
M1
GN 1
2
9
L 1.5
40-100
EV PTO ZB 1.5
1
M1
2
CA 1.5
L 1.5
1
EV DF M1
CA 1.5
2
MN 1.5 MN 1.5
1
DT M1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
M 2.5
M 2.5
GND2 M 1.5
MB 1.5
EV DW
GN 1.5
EV UP MB 1.5
NZ 1.5 NZ 1.5
17 18 19 20
M 1.5
TKAB2
HR 1.5
RV 1 ZG 1.5
ZG 1.5 RV 1
21 22 23
POS. SENS.
HR 1
GN 1
HN 1 HN 1
LEFT DRAFT
24
HR 1
GN 1
HV 1 HV 1
25
RIGHT DRAFT
HR 1
Z 1.5
V 1.5
M 1.5 HV 1.5
2
F.P. HN 1.5
Z 1.5
1
AN 1.5
26 27 28 29 30
M 1.5
2
R.P. V 1.5
1
Z1
4 3
HV 1.5
2
X7 HN 1.5
1
AN 1.5
0443.7848
0443.7848
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION CONNECTORS LOCATION
1 GND2
F0025180
2 ADD. EV. V/R
F0025460
3 RADAR
OPTIONAL F0025170
40-101
4 NLSE
F0025190
5 EV PROP
F0025240
6 X7
F0025330
40-102
POS. SEN.
F0025290
8
TKAB1
TKAB2
F0025350
EV DW
F0025300
40-103
10
X38
F0025280
11
EV UP
F0025320
12
R.P.
F.P.
F0025310
40-104
13
EV PTO
F0025250
14
EV DF
F0025210
15
PTO SEN
F0025230
40-105
16
RIGHT
DRAFT
LEFT
DRAFT
F0025220
17 18 TEMP
DT
NEUTRAL
LS
F0025270 F0025120
40-106
19
FILTER
F0025200
20
FUEL
F0025110
21
NHK NAB
F0025260
40-107
22
NLSA
F0025130
23
LS
LS/PS
PS
LS/PS
POWER SHUTTLE VERSION F0025160
40-108
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRANSMISSION WIRING
TRANSMISSION WIRING
9
24 4
5 8
10
PRESS. 7
SWITCH
3
11
2 6
1
12
13
14
F0025100
15
25
EV GROUP 16
17
19
20
21
18
22
23
24
F0025140
25
0443.7848
40-109
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
HYDRAULIC AND AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING (ITALY) 0443.7356.4
HYDRAULIC AND AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING (ITALY)
X8
1
2
2
X7 3
TO 0443.7848 X9
3
4
1
X7
1 2 3 4
AN 1
HN 1.5
Z 1.5
HV 1.5
X10
AN 1
HN 1 HN 1.5
Z 1.5
HN 1.5
HV 1.5
X10
X8
1 2
X9
X7 To transmission wiring
X8 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
X9 Solenoid valve for trailer parking brake
X10 Trailer braking low pressure switch
0443.7356.4
D0003990 40-111
AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING 0443.7355
AIR TRAILER BRAKING WIRING
1
2
X7 X8
TO 0443.7848
3
4
Z1
4 X8
X7
2
X7 To transmission wiring
X8 Trailer braking air pressure sensor
0443.7355.4
D0003850 40-112
CONNECTORS LOCATION TRAILER BRAKING WIRING
TRAILER BRAKING CONNECTORS LOCATION TRAILER BRAKING WIRING

AIR TRAILER BRAKING
1 X7
X8
F0024980
HYDRAULIC AND AIR TRAILER BRAKING (ITALY)
X9
X8
X10
X7
0443.7356.4
0443.7355.4
40-113
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) WIRING 0443.7850
FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) WIRING
FE1
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
FE2
TO 0443.7849
JX3 JX4
4 5 20 1 2 11 13 22 15 2 17 14 9 19 8 12
GN 1.5
MN 1.5
M 1.5
G 1.5
CN 1.5
V 1.5
V 1.5
BL 1
AG 1
L1
VN 1.5
B1
Z1
HV 1.5
H1
R 1.5
JX3 JX4
TO 0442.7305 TO 0442.7305
G 1.5
1
MN 1.5 2
V 1.5
3
4
HV 1.5
5
AG 1 FE1
6
BL 1 7
M 1.5
8
H1
GN 1.5
CN 1.5
VN 1.5
9
M 1.5
L1
B1
Z1
R 1.5
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FE2
FE1 To side console wiring

FE2 To front suspension wiring
JX3 To front suspension wiring
JX4 To front suspension wiring
0443.7850
D0004190 40-115
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) WIRING
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT SUSPENSION CONTROL UNIT (CAB) WIRING
1
FE2
F0024400
2 3
1 2
JX3
JX4 F0024390
3
FE1
F0024380
0443.7850
40-117
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING 0443.7846/10
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING TO 0.012.4420.4

0.012.2010.4
0442.9866
0442.9835
X1 X2
GND3
TKAB3
TO 0442.9937.4 +12BATTERY (30)
0443.7357
GND4 GND2
R 16 R 16
1 +12BATTERY (30)
GV 2.5
2
BN 1.5
3
HN 1
4
VN 1.5
5
HR 1
6
RN 1.5
7
TKAB3 8
BL 1
LR 1
9
RG 1
10
L1 M6
11 GND2
H1
12
BR 1
13
14
M6
M 1.5 M6
GND3
M6
GND4
RG 0.5
RG 0.5
GV 1.5
BN 1.5
RN 1.5
BR 0.5
GV 1.5
RN 1.5
BR 0.5
VN 1.5
LR 0.5
LR 0.5
BL 0.5
BL 0.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
H 0.5
H 0.5
HN 1
HR 1
L 0.5
L 0.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X2 X1
TKAB3 To side console wiring

X1 To fender wiring
X2 To fender wiring
0443.7846/10
D0004090 40-119
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION CAB POWER SUPPLY
CAB POWER SUPPLY CONNECTORS LOCATION
X1
F0024260
2
GND4
TKAB3
F0024270
X2
F0024300
40-121
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING
CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING
2
4
1
GND3
3
F0024280
5
GND2
F0024830
5
+12 BATTERY
F0024290
0443.7846/10
40-123
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION WIRING 0443.7849
CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION WIRING
2
S
1
H
FE2
DEUTSCH
DT06-12S
IPD-USA
2
TO 0443.7850 H
1
2
X15
1
FE2
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GN 1.5
B1
CN 1.5
VN 1.5
Z1
L1
M 1.5
X14
GN 1.5
CN 1.5
VN 1.5
B1
Z1
L1
2 2 2 1 2 3
H S X15
1 1 1
M1
M1
M1
X14
FE2 To front suspension ECU wiring

H Solenoid valve for raising front axle
S Solenoid valve for lowering front axle
X14 Front axle suspension position sensor
X15 Solenoid valve for Load Sensing front axle suspension
0443.7849
D0004170 40-125
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION WIRING
CONNECTORS LOCATION CAB LINE FRONT SUSPENSION WIRING
1 1
FE2
F0025000
2
S
X15 3
H
F0025010
X14
F0024990
0443.7849
40-127
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING 0.012.2018.4
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING
X5
X92 TO 0.012.4420.4
0.012.2010.4
1
M1
X92 X5
2
H1
X5 To fender wiring
X92 Number plate light
0.012.2018.4
D0003630 40-129
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING 0441.4114
X5
X92
TO 0442.9835
1
M1
X92 2
X5
HN 1
X5 To fender wiring
0441.4114
D0003800 40-130
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRING 0442.9887
X5
X92
TO 0442.9886
1
M1
X92 X5
HN 1 2
X5 To fender wiring
0442.9887
D0003670 40-131
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FENDER WIRING 0.012.2010.4
FENDER WIRING
X4 X3 X5 PTO UP DOWN
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2
AB 1
H1
LR 1
M1
M1
HN 1
LN 1
LN 1
BR 1
GR 1
HV 1
BN 1.5
RN 1.5
HN 1.5
M 1.5
X1-X2
M 1.5 1
M1
2
HV 1
3
BN 1.5
4
HN 1.5
5
RN 1.5
6
LN 1
7
H1
8
BR 1
9 X4
AB 1
10
LR 1
11 X3
GR 1
12
X5
TO 0.012.2018.4
DOWN UP PTO
AMP
AMP
AMP
AMP
1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
DW
PTO
UP
X1-X2
TO 0443.7846
DW Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton

PTO Rear PTO control pushbutton
UP Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton
X1 To cab power supply wiring (R.H. line)
X2 To cab power supply wiring (L.H. line)
X4 Rear sidelights and direction indicators
X5 To number plate light wiring
0.012.2010.4
D0003620 40-133
FENDER WIRING 0.012.4420.4
FENDER WIRING
X4 X3 X5 PTO UP DOWN
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2
AB 1
H1
LR 1
M1
M1
HN 1
BR 1
GR 1
LN 1
LN 1
HV 1
BN 1.5
RN 1.5
HN 1.5
M 1.5
X1-X2
M 1.5
1
M1
2
HV 1
3
BN 1.5
4
HN 1.5
5
RN 1.5
6
LN 1
7
H1
8
BR 1
9
AB 1
10
LR 1
11
GR 1
12
X3
X4
X5
TO 0.012.2018.4
DOWN UP PTO
AMP
AMP
AMP
1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
DW
PTO
UP
X1-X2
TO 0443.7846

0.012.4420.4
D0005420 40-134
FENDER WIRING 0442.9835
FENDER WIRING
X3
X4
1
PTO
2
3
TO 0441.4114
X5
SEN
X4 X3 X5 PTO UP DW
2
1
1
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2
DW
2
3
VG 1
H1
LR 1
BL 1
L1
L1
M1
HN 1
HN 1
BR 1
BN 1.5
RG 1
RN 1.5
M 1.5
M1
HEB
1
UP
2
3
X1-X2
M 1.5
1
M1
X1-X2 2
VG 1
TO 0443.7846 3
BN 1.5
4
HN 1
5
RN 1.5
6
L1
7
H1
8
BR 1
9
BL 1
10
LR 1
11
RG 1
12

0442.9835
D0003760 40-135
FENDER WIRING 0442.9886
FENDER WIRING
PTO
1
HZW
2
3
HEB
1
UP
2
3
SEN
1
2
3
DW
X3
X4
1 2
X5
TO 0442.9887 X4 X3 X5 PTO UP DW
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2
VG 1
H1
LR 1
BL 1
L1
L1
M1
M1
HN 1
HN 1
BR 1
BN 1.5
RG 1
RN 1.5
M 1.5
X1-X2
TO 0443.7846
X1-X2
M 1.5
1
M1
2
VG 1
3
BN 1.5
4
HN 1
5
RN 1.5
6
L1
7
H1
8
BR 1
9
BL 1
10
LR 1
11
RG 1
12

X5 To number plate light wiring 0442.9886
D0003780 40-136
CONNECTORS LOCATION FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT
FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT CONNECTORS LOCATION
1 X3
F0024330
2 UP DW
X5
PTO
F0024360
3 DW UP
X5
PTO
F0024350
40-137
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRINGS
FENDER AND NUMBER PLATE LIGHT WIRINGS
1 1
4
X1-X2
3
F0024340
5 X4
6
4
5
4 2
F0024320
6
X92
FENDER PLATE LIGHT

0.012.2010.4 0.012.2018.4
0.012.4420.4 0441.4114
0442.9835 0442.9887
F0024200
0442.9886
40-139
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2) 0442.9936.4/20
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (1/2)
ST1
AS3 X39
TO 0443.8666.4
ST2
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357 X62
1 2 3
1 2 3
X59
AS6 3A 4
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
X61
3
X96
MS2
TO 0443.7847
0.012.3639.4
X60
1
AS1
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357 8
AS2
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357
7
1 Side lights switch AS1 To side console wiring X59 Right brake pedal switch
3 Cab roof worklights switch AS2 To side console wiring X60 Left brake pedal switch
3A Lower worklights switch AS3 To side console wiring X61 Clutch pedal position sensor
4 Worklights switch 50S (not used) AS6 To side console wiring X62 Clutch pedal depressed proximity sensor
5 Front suspension switch MS2 To engine wiring X96 Hazard switch light (+58)
6 ASM switch ST1 INFOCENTER 1
7 Diff lock switch ST2 NFOCENTER 2
8 4WD switch X39 To accelerator pedal sensor wiring
0442.9936.4/20
D0004270 40-141
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2) 0442.9936.4/20
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING (2/2)

X60 X59 X61 X62 X39
M1 2 2 Z1 2 11
1
3 3 NZ 1 3 44
4 2 1 4 1 2 3
2 1 4 1 2 3 2 1 3
AR 0.5
LB 0.5
H 0.5
N 0.5
GH 1
LR 1
MN 1
HR 1
MB 1
GV 0.5
LN 0.5
HL 1
HL 1
11
LR 1 10
GH 1 9
AR 0.5 8
AS 6
7
G 0.5 6
AB 0.5
5
LN 0.5 4
H 0.5 3
GV 0.5 2
LB 0.5
1
14
GV 0.5
13
V 0.5
12
MN 1 11
Senden serielle
1 V 0.5 MB 1 10
2 N 0.5 N 0.5
Klemme 15 - Stromversorgung 9
Masse - Lampen
3 M 0.5
Instrumenten-Beleuchtung
4 H 0.5 H 0.5
8
5 HR 0.5 HR 0.5
Ausgang tats. Fahrgeschw.(Radar) 7
Ausgang Heckzapfwellendrehzahl
6 SG 0.5 SG 0.5
6
7 G 0.5
ST1 Getriebeoeldruck
Handbremskontrolle
8
9 R 0.5
RN 0.5
R 0.5
Klemme 30 5
10 GV 0.5
Empfangen serielle Schnittstelle
11 HV 0.5 HV 0.5
Ausgang theor. Fahrgeschwindigkeit 4
Masse - Elektronik
12 M 0.5
AS 3
1
RN 1
2
M1
3
MB 0.5
4
HG 0.5
5
A 0.5
6
ZB 1
MS2 7
RV 1
SN 1
8
B1
9
10
C 0.5
11
12
A1
3
Differentialsperre 1 LN 0.5
Blinkkontrolle 2.-Anhaenger
2 VN 0.5 VN 0.5 2
Blinkkontrolle 1.-Anhaenger
3 LB 0.5 LB 0.5 1
Blinkkontrolle Fahrzeug
4 HV 0.5 HV 0.5
18
5 HN 1.5 HN 0.5
Gruppenanzeige Acker 17
Gruppenanzeige Strasse
6 HB 0.5 HB 0.5 16
Lichtmaschine Ladekontrolle
7 L 0.5 LO 0.5 15
Luftfilterverschmutzung
8 MB 0.5 B1 14
Motoroeldruck
9 AG 0.5 AG 0.5
13
Frontzapfwelle
10 V 0.5 V 0.5
12
11 LR 0.5 LR 0.5
Heckzapfwelle 11
AS 2
12 CB 0.5 CB 0.5
Motordrehzahl 10
Tankanzeige
13 ZB 0.5 ZB 0.5 9
Allrad
14 RV 0.5
A 0.5 SN 1
ST2 Motortemperatur
Fernlicht
15
16 B 0.5 B 0.5
8
7
17 HR 0.5 HR 0.5
Hydr. Filterueberwachung 6
frei
18 NZ 1
5
19 HG 0.5
Vorgluehkontrolle 4
20 GN 0.5 GN 0.5
Eingang Heckzapfwellendrehzahl 3
21 Z 0.5 Z 0.5
Eingang tats. Fahrgeschw.(Radar) 2
Eingang theor. Fahrgeschwindigkeit
22 AB 0.5 1
Ital. ünhüngerbremse
23 AN 0.5
Bremsflüssigkeitsniveau
24 C 0.5 CN 0.5 4
EMR Stü rung
25 CN 0.5 V 1.5 3
frei
26 AN 0.5 2
RN 0.5 1
MV 1 22
M 2.5 21
VN 1 20
HN 1 19
N1 18
GH 1 17
AS 1
BN 1 16
V 2.5 15
VN 2.5 14
ZB 1 13
R 1.5 12
VG 1 11
GN 1 10
LN 1 9
RV 1 8
VB 1 7
HR 1 6
RG 1 5
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
M1
RG1
10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9 10 F 9
VN 2.5
S S 10 9 S S S S
V 1.5
S 8
BN 1
RV 1
R 1.5
3 HN 1 5
5 8 7 5 RV 1 6 6 NZ 1 5 NZ 1
BN 1 GH 1 1 V 2.5 GN 1 2 HR 1 2 HR 1 1
1
1
6 5
MV 1 2 8 N1 LN 1 5 5
4 3 VG 1 1 VB 1 1 NZ 1
ZB 1
BN 1
2 1
1 3 3a RG 1
5 6 7 8
H 0.5
X96
0442.9936.4/20
D0003830 40-142
ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR WIRING 0443.8666
ACCELERATOR PEDAL SENSOR WIRING
X39
TO 0442.9936.4
- +
1 2
X40 X39 2 1 X40
3 4
X39 To front console wiring

X40 Accelerator pedal position sensor
0443.8666
D0004230 40-143
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE
FRONT CONSOLE CONNECTORS LOCATION
X62
X61
F0025430
2 3A
X96
1
F0025050
ST2
ST1
F0025020
40-145
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE
4 5
8
6
7
A0025060
MS2
A0025080
AS1
AS3
AS6 AS2
A0025090
40-146
CONNECTORS LOCATION FRONT CONSOLE WIRING
FRONT CONSOLE WIRING
7 4
3
X39 2
1
X40
F0025440
8 X60
X59
8 7 5
6
A0025070
0442.9936.4/20
0443.8666
40-147
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHUTTLE) (1/4) 0442.9937.4/20
X85 X42 J1 X79
X83 With arm rest X80 X81 TO 0441.9533
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHUTTLE) (1/4) to 0443.7354.4
ISO4 TO 0442.7307 FE1

6 5 4 3 2 1
TO 0443.7354.4
JX1 JX2
E.C.U.(LS) X84
P5
YELLOW
TO 0441.9533
ISO7
X67 X43
X68 With arm rest
to 0443.7354.4 P6 P1 POS.
TO 0441.9533 TO 0441.9533 P3
BLACK
P4 X74b TO 0441.9533
TO 0441.9533 DS1 ROOF
TO 0443.7851
J3 X74 X75
X86
TO 0441.9533
1 2 P2
X82 EHR TO 0441.9533
1
3
X76
2
2
X91
3
1
J2 With arm rest X88
TO 0441.9533 to 0443.7354.4 EMR TO 010.2562.2
1
3
X77 TKAB2
2
2
SCHEDA
3
TO 0443.7848 X90
X87 X89
TO 010.2562.2
X69
X73
TKAB3
GND TO 0443.7846
X78
TO 0442.9936.4
X71 TKAB1
X72 TO 0443.7848
AS6 AS1 MX2
X70 TO ENGINE
E.C.U
MX1
TO ENGINE
AS5 E.C.U.
TO 0443.7875 MS1
X98 0443.7847
AS3 0.012.3639.4
TO 442.9936.4
AS4 AS2
TO LIGHT COMAND TO 0442.9936.4
AS1 To front console wiring J1 To fuses plate P6 To fuses plate X74 Gearshift control pushbutton panel X86 Starter switch
AS2 To front console wiring J2 To fuses plate TKAB1To transmission wiring X74bGearshift control pushbutton panel (not used) X87 Compressor for driver's seat air suspension
AS3 To front console wiring J3 To fuses plate TKAB2To transmission wiring X75 Super-reduction engagement switch X88 To air conditioner wiring (Cab)
AS4 Lights selector switch JX1 Rear lift control unit TKAB3To cab power supply wiring X76 Front PTO control pushbutton X89 To air conditioner wiring (Cab)
AS5 To display wiring JX2 Rear lift control unit X42 Engine speed keypad X77 Rear PTO control pushbutton X90 Handbrake switch
AS6 To front console wiring MS1 To engine wiring X43 To armrest wiring X78 Lift control lever X91 Cigar lighter
DS1 To roof wiring MX1 Engine control unit X67 Auxiliary power socket (Earth) X79 Fuse F50 (30 A) X98 PTO AUTO switch
ECU LSTransmission control unit MX2 Engine control unit X68 Auxiliary power socket (Positive) X80 Supplementary power
EHR Lift control lever P1 To fuses plate X69 Rear screen wiper switch X81 Diagnostics connector
EMR Throttle lever P2 To fuses plate X70 Clean Fix control switch X82 Fuse (15 A)
FE1 To cab front suspension ECU P3 To fuses plate X71 Rotating beacon control switch X83 Direction indicators flasher unit
ISO4Socket (Power for external implements) P4 To fuses plate X72 Rear worklights switch X84 Direction indicators flasher unit 0442.9937.4/20
ISO7Socket (Connection for external implements) P5 To fuses plate X73 Radar control switch X85 Direction indicators flasher unit
D0003970 40-149
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHUTTLE) (2/4)
X70 X83 X84 X85 X69 X71 X72 X76 X77 P6 P2 DS1
01 - X87
GND
02- X87
X91
X68
X67
01 - X91
02 - X91
X98
P4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 9 10 1 5 9 10 X86 VF 49b RE LE 31 P1 P2 49 LA RA 49a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 5 9 10 1 2 3 1 2 3 TKAB1 TKAB3 X82
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
11
- +
O 0.5
B 1.5
GR 1.5
BR 1
AG 1.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
B1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
VB 1
BL 1
BL 1
RG 0.5
RG 0.5
B 2.5
VN 1.5
ZB 1
V 1.5
Z1
ZB 1
BR 1
BN 1.5
M 1.5
H 2.5
RN 1.5
RN 2.5
RN 4
M4
M4
M6
M1
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N 2.5
H 2.5
B 1.5
V 2.5
G 1.5
HN 2.5
H1
HR 2.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
GV 1.5
VN 1.5
HV 1.5
50 15 X 30
RN 1.5
HR 1.5
R 1.5
HR 2.5
VN 1.5
MB 1.5
R 1.5
N 2.5
H 2.5
BR 1.5
L 1.5
RN 1.5
BN 1.5
M 0.5
R 16
VN 1.5
LR 1.5
R 0.5
RG 1
HN 1
BN 1.5
LR 1.5
GN 1.5
VN 1.5
BR 1
R 1.5
MB 1.5
GV 1.5
Z1
BN 1.5
GN 1.5
P3 - 05 RV 1.5
M 2.5
M 0.5
A 2.5
HV 1.5
M1
M1
M 1.5
GR 1.5
AG 1.5
R4
V1
M1
See sheet 2
NZ 1
RN 2.5
H 1.5
GR 1.5
BL 1
HR 1.5
HN 1.5
GV 2.5
R 1.5
HN 1.5
BN 1.5
P3 - 25
P3 - 08
P3 - 23
CN 1
R 2.5
R 16
P1
RN 2.5
04 - J1
P3 - 06
P5 - 11
HN 1.5
J3 - 07
P5 - 03
P5 - 03
09 - J1
HR 1.5 08 - J1
GV 1.5
GV 1.5
05 - J1
GV 1.5
06
See sheet 2 GV 1.5
05 06 - J1
CB 1.5
AS5
04
N1
03
H1 BL 1 24 - P3
02
M1 RN 1.5 01 - P3
01
RN 1.5 02 - P3
See sheet 2 B 1.5
22 03 - J1
See sheet 2 L 1.5
21 05 - J2
See sheet 2 C 1.5
20 14 - P3
See sheet 2 C 1.5
19 15 - P3
See sheet 2 RG 1
18
GN 1.5 RG 1
17 18 - P5
MB 1.5 16 - P5 R 2.5
16 03 - P3
G 1.5 R 2.5
15 04 - P3
RN 1.5
14 05 - J3
Z1
Z1 H1
13 08 - J3 07 - P5
AS4
12
N 2.5 17 - P5 GND
B1
ZE
B1 GND
11 12 - P5
10 G1 22 - P5
BN 1 GND
09 N1
N1 GND
08
07 M1
H 2.5 RG 1
06
05
L 1.5 03 - J3
RG 1 10 - P3
R 2.5 LR 1.5
04 06 - P5
03 BN 1.5 LR 1.5 09 - P3
02 VN 1.5 L1
B 2.5 L1 11 - P3
01
H 2,5
08 - P5
V1
V1 13 - P3
See sheet 2 N1
13 - P5
LR 1.5
AS6
LR 1.5 12 - P3
See sheet 2 HN 2.5 21 - P3
RV 1
02 - J2
RV 1
See sheet 3
13
CB 1 M1 GND4
V1 RV 1 1
12
VN 1.5
11
MN 1
MB 1.5
20 - P5
M1
2 X73
10 3
N1
N1 M1
09 06 - J3 1
H1 See sheet 2
08 2
HR 1 See sheet 3
AS3
3
HR 1 See sheet 3
07 4
06 SG 1 5
R1
05 09 - J2 6
04 HV 1 7
See sheet 2
8
X81
See sheet 2 BN 1
03 9
02
VN 1 02 - J3 S1
10
BL 1 01 - J3
V1
01 11
HV 1 04 - J3 CB 1 12
18
HN 1
17 19 - P5 13
HB 1
16 15 - P5 14
15
L1
14
B1
13
AG 1.5
V1 BL 1
12 1
LR 1 VN 1
2
11
10
See sheet 3 B1
3
ISO4
09 ZB 1.5 4
AS2
08
B 0.5 M1
07 1
06 MV 1 RG 1
2 X80
05 NZ 1 01 - P5
M1
04 1
GN 1 HR 1
03 2
Z 1.5 HV 1
02 3
01
SG 1
4 ISO7
C1
5
6
See sheet 3 11 - MX1

See sheet 2
05 - FE1
MV 1 23 - P5
22
M 2.5 H 1.5
21 4
VN 1 10 - P5
20 M1
HN 1 3
19 09 - P5
18
N1 RN 1
2
X90
17
GH 1 25 - P5
BN 1 M1
6 1
15
V 2.5
14
VN 2.5 14 - P5
13
ZB 1 21 - P5
AS1
See sheet 2
12 C 2.5
11
VG 1 C
GN 1 M4
10
09 LN 9 B
X89
RV 1 R4
08 24 - P5 A
07
06
05 RG 1 R4
See sheet 3
04
03
See sheet 2 R4 X79
02 AN 1
RN 1
22 - P3
18 - P3
01 - J2
01
6
5
H1
4
02 - J1
01 - J1
07 - J1
08 - J2
HR 1.5
X88
See sheet 3
3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 2
See sheet 2
See sheet 2
MN 1.5
N 0.5
MN 0.5
MN 0.5
GR 0.5
GR 0.5
AR 0.5
MN 1.5
MB 1.5
HN 1.5
BR 1.5
LB 0.5
LR 0.5
VN 1.5
ZB 1.5
HN 1.5
ZG 1.5
V 1.5
G 1.5
NZ 1.5
MV 1
GN 1
2
M 1.5
L 1.5
G 0.5
R 0.5
MB 1
V 0.5
V 0.5
L 1.5
L 1.5
VN 1
RV 1
H 1.5
HL 1
AN 1
S1
Z1
N 0.5
1
GN 1.5
AG 1.5
BR 1.5
GR 1.5
HG 1.5
GN 1.5
GN 1.5
MB 0.5
HR 1.5
AB 1.5
HR 1.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
AR 0.5
AR 0.5
ZB 1.5
HV 1.5
ZG 1.5
HV 1.5
RV 1.5
RV 1.5
RV 1.5
NZ 1.5
LB 0.5
RV 1.5
NZ 0.5
LR 0.5
LR 1.5
M 1.5
B 1.5
G 1.5
B 1.5
MB 1
H 1.5
G 0.5
Z 1.5
V 1.5
Z 0.5
GN 1
L 1.5
L 0.5
NZ 1
HL 1
Z 0.5
HR 1
VG 1
BN 1
RV 1
RV 1
L 0.5
HV 1
BL 1
C1
B1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MS1 TKAB2 JX1 RED EHR JX2 BLACK

X78
0442.9937.4/20
D0004060 40-150

E.C.U. (LS)
08 50 33 34 11 57 29 39 16 03 40 17 55 32 21 66 13 56 15 01 02 23 68 31
MV 1
MN 1
MB 1
AG 1
HG 1
RG 1
C1
G1
L1
V1
Z1
M 1.5
M 1.5
C1
AN 1
RN 1
CN 1
HN 1
C 1.5
SN 1
VN 1
ZB 1
LB 1
See sheet 3
See sheet 1
MB 1.5
MN 1.5
MN 1.5
MB 1.5
MN 1.5
GN 1.5
VB 1.5
MN 1
AG 1
HG 1
GN 1
RG 1
M 1.5
AN 1
RN 1
CN 1
HN 1
G 1.5
G 1.5
SN 1
VN 1
R 1.5
R 1.5
ZB 1
LB 1
BL 1
V 1.5
AG 1
GN 1
MV 1
AG 1
HV 1
BL 1
BL 1
G1
C1
V1
M6
Z1
L1
G1
C1
A1
A1
V1
V1
Masse
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 12 3 2 8 13 14
an
PS-Box 3 6 7 17 19 2 6 14 7
d= 6
TKAB1 FE1 AS1 AS3 X81 P4 J2 P3 TKAB2
04 62 05 36 44 24 37 38 14 63 20 45 65 30 67 22 43 64 49
GN 1
RV 1
RL 1
V1
AB 1
LN 1
GV 1
CN 1
BN 1
H1
BL 1
B1
L1
VN 1
LN 1
LR 1
VB 1.5
G 0.5
GN 1
BL 1
VB 1.5
See sheet 3
GN 1.5
LR 1.5
GN 1
GN 1
CN 1
BN 1
VB 1
VB 1
VN 1
RV 1
LN 1
LR 1
LN 1
BL 1
RL 1
AB 1
LN 1
GV 1
H1
BL 1
G 0.5
B 1.
V1
L1
MABR
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 01 02 03 05 18 19 20 21 22 Vtheo
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
AS6 AS5 AS4 X74 X43 X74b
0442.9937.4/20
D0003900 40-151
D0003930
pro Meter
verdrillt mit
30 Umdrehungen
See sheet 2
1
1
See sheet 2 HV 1.5
2
2
See sheet 2
3
3
LR 1.5
4
4
See sheet 1
5
5
GV 1.5
6
6
See sheet 1
7
7
See sheet 1 CB 1
8
8
See sheet 1 HN 1.5
9
9
M 1.5
10
10
LN 1
11
11
See sheet 1 BN 1.5
12
12
See sheet 1 CN 1.5
13
13
See sheet 1 LR 1.5

MX1
14
14
RN 1 GV 1.5
15
15
BN 1.5
16
16
MS1
VN 1
17
17
BR 1.5
18
18
19
19
See sheet 1
20
20
HV 1.5 MV 1
21
21
CB 1
22
22
See sheet 1 VN 1
23
23
HN 1.5 H 1.5
24
24
M 1.5 Z 1.5
25
25
See sheet 1
26
Z 1.5
27
CN 1.5
28
H 1.5
29
See sheet 1
30
GN 1 See sheet 2
31
M1
X75
MV 1
2 M 1.5
1
See sheet 1 M 1.5

2
40-152
RN 1
3
CN 0.5
4
5
See sheet 1 AS3-04

6
7
8
9
A1 A1
3
10
VB 1
X81
VB 1
4
11
12
BR 1
7
MX2
J1
13
BR 1.5
14
G1 G1
1
15
HN 1 CB 1.5
2
16
H1 H1
3
17
X42
RG 1 RG 1
4
18
L1 HN 1
5
19
BR 1 B1
6
20
L1
21
22
HL 1 HL 1
1
23
B1 LR 1.5
2
24
EMR
HG 1 HG 1
3
25
HL 1
CB 1
LR 1.5
HG 1
CN 0.5
11
4
10
10
bis
8
1
AS1
AS2
AS6
0442.9937.4/20
0442.9937.4/20
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHIFT) (1/4) 0443.7357/20
X85 X42 J1 X79
X83 X80 X81 TO 0441.9533
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHIFT) (1/4) With arm rest
to 0443.7354.4
ISO4 TO 0442.7307 FE1
6 5 4 3 2 1
TO 0443.7354.4
JX1 JX2
E.C.U.(LS) X84
P5
YELLOW
TO 0441.9533
ISO7
X67 X43
X68 With arm rest
to 0443.7354.4 P6
TO 0441.9533 P1 POS.
TO 0441.9533
P3
BLACK
P4 TO 0441.9533
TO 0441.9533 DS1 ROOF
X74 TO 0443.7851
J3 X75
TO 0441.9533 X86
1 2
P2
EHR TO 0441.9533
X82
1
3
X76 X91
2
2
J2
3
1
With arm rest X88
TO 0441.9533 to 0443.7354.4 EMR
TO 010.2562.2
1
3
X77 TKAB2
2
1
3
TO 0443.7848 X87 X90 SCHEDA
X89
X69 TO 010.2562.2
X73
TKAB3
GND TO 0443.7846
X78
TO 0442.9936.4
X71 X72 TKAB1
AS6 AS1 TO 0443.7848
MX2
X70 TO ENGINE
E.C.U
MX1
TO ENGINE
AS5 E.C.U.
TO 0443.7875 MS1
X98 0443.7847
AS3 0.012.3639.4
TO 442.9936.4
AS4 AS2
TO LIGHT COMAND TO 0442.9936.4
AS1 To front console wiring J1 To fuses plate P6 To fuses plate X74 Gearshift control pushbutton panel X87 Compressor for driver's seat air suspension
AS2 To front console wiring J2 To fuses plate TKAB1To transmission wiring X75 Super-reduction engagement switch X88 To air conditioner wiring (Cab)
AS3 To front console wiring J3 To fuses plate TKAB2To transmission wiring X76 Front PTO control pushbutton X89 To air conditioner wiring (Cab)
AS4 Lights selector switch JX1 Rear lift control unit TKAB3To cab power supply wiring X77 Rear PTO control pushbutton X90 Handbrake switch
AS5 To display wiring JX2 Rear lift control unit X42 Engine speed keypad X78 Lift control lever X91 Cigar lighter
AS6 To front console wiring MS1 To engine wiring X43 To armrest wiring X79 Fuse F50 (30 A) X98 PTO AUTO switch
DS1 To roof wiring MX1 Engine control unit X67 Auxiliary power socket (Earth) X80 Supplementary power
ECU LSTransmission control unit MX2 Engine control unit X68 Auxiliary power socket (Positive) X81 Diagnostics connector
EHR Lift control lever P1 To fuses plate X69 Rear screen wiper switch X82 Fuse (15 A)
EMR Throttle lever P2 To fuses plate X70 Clean Fix control switch X83 Direction indicators flasher unit
FE1 To cab front suspension ECU P3 To fuses plate X71 Rotating beacon control switch X84 Direction indicators flasher unit
ISO4Socket (Power for external implements) P4 To fuses plate X72 Rear worklights switch X85 Direction indicators flasher unit 0443.7357/20
ISO7Socket (Connection for external implements) P5 To fuses plate X73 Radar control switch X86 Starter switch
D0004050 40-153
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING (POWER SHIFT) (2/4)
X70 X83 X84 X85 X69 X71 X72 X76 X77 P6 P2
01 - X87
X98
X91
01 - X91
02 - X91
02- X87
X68
X67
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DS1
GND
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 5 9 10 1 5 9 10 X86 VF 49b RE LE 31 P1 P2 49 LA RA 49a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 5 9 10 1 2 3 1 2 3 TKAB1 TKAB3
P4
X82
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
G 1.5 01
11
- +
GR 1.5
BR 1
AG 1.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
N 2.5
H 2.5
B 1.5
V 2.5
HR 2.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
GV 1.5
VN 1.5
HV 1.5
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RN 1.5
RN 2.5
O 0.5
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
B 1.5
B1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
RG 1
VB 1
BL 1
BL 1
RG 0.5
RG 0.5
B 2.5
VN 1.5
ZB 1
V 1.5
Z1
ZB 1
BR 1
BN 1.5
M 1.5
H 2.5
50 15 X 30
RN 4
M4
M4
M6
M1
HN 2.5
H1
RN 1.5
HR 1.5
R 1.5
BR 1
R 1.5
MB 1.5
GV 1.5
Z1
BN 1.5
GN 1.5
RV 1.5
GR 1.5
AG 1.5
VN 1.5
BR 1.5
L 1.5
RN 1.5
BN 1.5
R 16
VN 1.5
LR 1.5
MB 1.5
R 1.5
HR 2.5
N 2.5
H 2.5
M 1.5
M 0.5
P3 - 23 R 0.5
RG 1
HN 1
BN 1.5
LR 1.5
GN 1.5
VN 1.5
M 2.5
M 0.5
A 2.5
HV 1.5
M1
M1
R4
P3 - 25 V 1
See sheet 2
NZ 1
RN 2.5
M1
P5 - 03
H 1.5
GR 1.5
BL 1
HR 1.5
HN 1.5
GV 2.5
P3 - 08
R 1.5
HN 1.5
BN 1.5
P3 - 05
J3 - 07 GN 1
R 2.5
R 16
P1
RN 2.5
04 - J1
P3 - 06
P5 - 11
P5 - 03
HN 1.5
09 - J1
HR 1.5 08 - J1
GV 1.5
GV 1.5
05 - J1
GV 1.5
06
See sheet 2 GV 1.5
05 06 - J1
CB 1.5
AS5
04
03 N1
H1 BL 1 24 - P3
02
M1 RN 1.5 01 - P3
01
RN 1.5 02 - P3
See sheet 2 B 1.5
22 03 - J1
See sheet 2 L 1.5
21 05 - J2
See sheet 2 C 1.5
20 14 - P3
See sheet 2 C 1.5
19 15 - P3
18
See sheet 2 RG 1
GN 1.5 RG 1
17 18 - P5
MB 1.5 16 - P5
R 2.5
16 03 - P3
G 1.5 R 2.5
15 04 - P3
RN 1.5
14 Z1 05 - J3
H1
13 Z1 08 - J3 07 - P5
AS4
N 2.5 17 - P5 GND
12 B1
B1 GND
11 12 - P5
ZE
10 G1 22 - P5
BN 1 GND
09 N1
N1 GND
08
07 M1
H 2.5 RG 1
06
05
L 1.5 03 - J3 RG 1 10 - P3
R 2.5 LR 1.5
04 06 - P5
BN 1.5 LR 1.5
03 09 - P3
02 VN 1.5 L1
01
B 2.5 L1 11 - P3
H 2,5
08 - P5
V1
V1
13 - P3
See sheet 2 N1
13 - P5
LR 1.5
AS6
LR 1.5
12 - P3
See sheet 2 HN 2.5
21 - P3
RV 1
02 - J2
RV 1
See sheet 3
13
CB 1 M1 GND4
V1 RV 1
12 1
MN 1 VN 1.5
11
MB 1.5
20 - P5
M1
2 X73
10 3
N1
M1
09 06 - J3 1
H1 See sheet 2
08 2
See sheet 3
AS3
3
HR 1 See sheet 3
4
SG 1
06 5
R1
05 09 - J2 6
HV 1
04 7
See sheet 2
8
X81
See sheet 2 BN 1
03 9
02 VN 1 02 - J3 S1
10
BL 1 01 - J3
V1
01 11
HV 1 CB 1
18 04 - J3 12
HN 1 See sheet 2
17 19 - P5 13
HB 1 See sheet 2
16 15 - P5 14
15 L1
14 B1
13 AG 1.5
V1 BL 1
12 1
LR 1 VN 1
11 2
10
B1
3
ISO4
09 ZB 1.5 4
AS2
08
B 0.5 M1
07 1
06
MV 1 RG 1
2 X80
05 NZ 1 01 - P5
M1
04 1
GN 1 HR 1 2
03
Z 1.5 HV 1
02 3
01
SG 1
4 ISO7
C1
5
6
See sheet 3 11 - MX1

See sheet 2
05 - FE1
MV 1 23 - P5
22 H 1.5
M 2.5 4
21
VN 1 10 - P5 M1
20
HN 1 3
19 09 - P5
18
N1 RN 1
2
X90
GH 1 25 - P5
17 M1
07
BN 1 1
15
V 2.5
14
VN 2.5 14 - P5
13
ZB 1 21 - P5
AS1
See sheet 2
12 C 2.5
11
VG 1 C
GN 1
10 M4
09
LN 1 B
X89
RV 1 R4
08 24 - P5 A
07
06
RG 1 R4
05
See sheet 3
04
03
See sheet 2 R4 X79
AN 1
02
22 - P3
18 - P3
RN 1
01 - J2
01
6
5
H1 4
08 - J2
02 - J1
01 - J1
07 - J1
HR 1.5
X88
See sheet 3
3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 3
See sheet 2
See sheet 2
See sheet 2
MN 1.5
N 0.5
MN 0.5
MN 0.5
GR 0.5
GR 0.5
MN 1.5
MB 1.5
AR 0.5
HN 1.5
BR 1.5
LB 0.5
LR 0.5
VN 1.5
ZB 1.5
V 1.5
G 1.5
HN 1.5
ZG 1.5
NZ 1.5
MV 1
2
GN 1
M 1.5
L 1.5
G 0.5
R 0.5
MB 1
V 0.5
V 0.5
L 1.5
L 1.5
VN 1
RV 1
H 1.5
HL 1
AN 1
S1
Z1
N 0.5 1
GN 1.5
AG 1.5
BR 1.5
GR 1.5
HR 1.5
HG 1.5
GN 1.5
GN 1.5
RV 1.5
MB 0.5
CB 1.5
AB 1.5
HR 1.5
HN 1.5
HR 1.5
AR 0.5
ZB 1.5
HV 1.5
ZG 1.5
HV 1.5
RV 1.5
RV 1.5
NZ 1.5
LB 0.5
RV 1.5
NZ 0.5
LR 0.5
LR 1.5
B 1.5
B 1.5
M 1.5
G 1.5
MB 1
H 1.5
R 0.5
L 1.5
NZ 1
Z 1.5
G 0.5
HL 1
V 1.5
RV 1
Z 0.5
GN 1
L 0.5
HR 1
VG 1
BN 1
RV 1
Z 0.5
L 0.5
HV 1
BL 1
C1
B1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MS1 TKAB2 JX1 RED EHR JX2 BLACK

X78
0443.7357/20
D0004080 40-154
E.C.U. (LS)
03 52 26 02 24 49 32 25 27 17 18 35 07 19 28 16 42 33 30 08 36 50 34 06 55 47 71
MB 1
RN 1
MN 1
CM 1
HG 1
HG 1
G1
G1
RG 1
L1
L1
Z1
ZB 1
MV 1
SN 1
VN 1
AN 1
CN 1
CN 1
AG 1
C1
C1
M 1.5
M 1.5
VB 1.5
VB 1.5
C 1.5
See sheet 1
MB 1.5
MB 1.5
MN 1.5
MN 1.5
MN 1.5
GN 1.5
VB 1.5
MN 1
AG 1
HG 1
GN 1
RG 1
M 1.5
AN 1
RN 1
RN 1
CN 1
VG 1
G 1.5
G 1.5
SN 1
VN 1
R 1.5
R 1.5
C 1.5
ZB 1
V 1.5
AG 1
GN 1
MV 1
AG 1
V 1.5
HV 1
BL 1
BL 1
M1
G1
C1
G1
M6
Z1
L1
A1
A1
V1
Masse
an
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 12 3 2 8 13 14 PS-Box
3 6 7 17 19 2 6 14 7
d= 6
FE1 AS1 AS3 X81 P4 J2 P3 TKAB2

TKAB1
29 67 13 21 11 22 51 09 37 31 54 10 45
AB 1
VG 1
SN 1
H1
B1
GN 1
GN 1
V1
BL 1
G 0.5
VB 1
LN 1
LR 1
GN 1
VG 1
See sheet 3
GN 1.5
LR 1.5
LR 1.5
G 0.5
GN 1
GN 1
HG 1
AB 1
VG 1
VB 1
SN 1
LN 1
LR 1
LN 1
HL 1
BL 1
M6
H1
B1
V1
MABR
Vtheo
11 10 09 07 06 05 01 02 03 05 18 19 20 08 1 2 3 3 4 5 6
P4 AS6 AS6 AS5 AS4 AS2 X74 X43
0443.7357/20
D0004010 40-155
D0003960
pro Meter
verdrillt mit
30 Umdrehungen
See sheet 2
1
1
See sheet 2 HV 1.5
2
2
See sheet 2
3
3
LR 1.5
4
4
See sheet 1
5
5
GV 1.5
6
6
See sheet 1
7
7
See sheet 1 CB 1
8
8
See sheet 1 HN 1.5
9
9
M 1.5
10
10
LN 1
11
11
See sheet 1 BN 1.5
12
12
See sheet 1 CN 1.5
13
13
See sheet 1 LR 1.5

MX1
14
14
RN 1 GV 1.5
15
15
BN 1.5
16
16
MS1
VN 1
17
17
BR 1.5
18
18
19
19
See sheet 1
20
20
HV 1.5 MV 1
21
21
CB 1
22
22
See sheet 1 VN 1
23
23
HN 1.5 H 1.5
24
24
M1 Z 1.5
25
25
See sheet 1
26
Z 1.5
27
CN 1.5
28
H 1.5
29
See sheet 1
30
GN 1
31
M1
X75
MV 1
2
M 1.5
1
See sheet 1 M 1.5

2
40-156
RN 1
3
CN 0.5
4
5
See sheet 1 AS3-04

6
7
8
9
A1 A1
3
10
VB 1 VB 1
4
11
X81
12
BR 1
7
MX2
13
J1
BR 1.5
14
G1 G1
1
15
HN 1 CB 1.5
2
16
H1 H1
3
17
X42
RG 1 RG 1
4
18
L1 HN 1
5
19
BR 1 B1
6
20
L1
21
22
HL 1 HL 1
1
23
B1 LR 1.5
2
24
EMR
HG 1 HG 1
3
25
HL 1
CB 1
LR 1.5
HG 1
CN 0.5
11
4
10
10
bis
8
1
AS1
AS2
AS6
0443.7357/20
0443.7357/20
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLLE
SIDE CONSOLLE CONNECTORS LOCATION
1
MX2 MX1
F0022190
2
X91
F0022200
3
X90
F0022210
40-157
X87
F0022220
5
X88
X89
F0022230
6
TKAB2
TKAB1
TKAB3
GND
F0022240
40-158
7
X75
F0022250
8 X83
X84
X85
X80
FE1
X82
F0022260
9
E.C.U. (LS)
PHOTO SHOWS
THE POWER SHUTTLE
VERSION F0022270
40-159
10 11
X67
X42
X68
X86
ISO7
ISO4
F0022280 F0022290
12 13
MS1
DS1
F0022300 F0022310
40-160
14
X71 X69 X72 X70 X98
F0022320
15 P2 P6
X79
P1
J1
P3
J2
X81
P4
P5 J3
F0025450
16
JX2
JX1
F0022340
40-161
17 X76
X77
F0022350
18 X78
F0022360
19
EMR EHR
X43
X73
F0022370
40-162
CONNECTORS LOCATION SIDE CONSOLE WIRING
SIDE CONSOLE WIRING
20 12
X74 11
17 15
✽X74b 19 18
9
20
16
21
2 14
X74b: NOT USED F0022380
10
21 6 8
13
AS5 7
AS4
AS6 AS2
1
AS1 AS3 5
3 4
F0022390
0442.9937.4/20
0443.7357/20
40-163
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB) 010.2562.2
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (CAB)
M
87b 87 86 85 30 X103 87b 87 86 85 30 X102
X89
X104
AR
S
R
R
N
A
BR
N
GL
TO 0442.9937.4
X105 0442.7357
BR
BR
GL
V
N
LR
3 2 1
R
N
C
X88
TO 0442.9937.4
0442.7357
6
GN
4
CB
3
V
2
B
1
VN
LN
B
AR
CB
VN
LR
LR
GN
X111
A
S
N
V
C
C
V
N
R
N
C
C B A
2 3 4 5 1
X110
X106 X108 1 2 3 4 5
X112
X107 X109 30 85 86 87 87b
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 C
1 2
X88 To side console wiring X107 Resistor - right heater fan

X89 To side console wiring X108 Fan speed selector switch
X102 Relay - 3rd heater fan speed X109 Relay -1st heater fan and air conditioning on
X103 Relay - 4th heater fan speed X110 Air conditioning control switch
X104 Resistor - left heater fan X111 Air conditioning thermostat
X105 Left heater fan X112 Connector for air conditioning control panel lights
X106 Right heater fan
010.2562.2
D0005680 40-165
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONING CONNECTORS LOCATION
X107
X106
F0024240
2
X103
X88
X109 X89
X102
F0024210
X105
X104
F0024250
40-167
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION AIR CONDITIONING WIRING
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING
X111
F0024230
5 X108 5
2
4 3
X110
X112
F0024220
010.2562.2
40-169
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
DISPLAY WIRING 0443.7875.01
DISPLAY WIRING
X95
AS5
TO 0442.9937.4 X94
0443.7357
X95 X94 X93

Light
Light
+ G 12V M Sig Light

01 02 03 04 05 06
M1
M1
M 0.5
M 0.5
H1
H1
N1
N1
N 0.5
CB 1
B 0.5
H 0.5
X93
06
B 0.5 05
CB 1 04
N1
03 AS5
H1 02
M1
01
AS5 To side console wiring

X93 Display
X94 Compressed air pressure gauge
X95 Compressed air pressure gauge light
0443.7875.01
D0005500 40-171
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION DISPLAY WIRING
CONNECTORS LOCATION DISPLAY WIRING
1
1
2
X95
X94
F0024460
2
X93
F0024470
3
AS5
F0024450
0443.7875.01
40-173
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ROOF WIRING (1/2) 0443.7851/10
ROOF WIRING (1/2)
X27
X30
DS1
TO 0442.9937.4
0443.7357 X31
X11
TO 0442.4189 GND5
X12
TO 0442.4189
X37
2 1 X20
M
AR
4 3
X33
RO
I T 85 8
6 5
NE
AL 7
AM
8 7
EC 8 7 a
12
86
V
X23
36
X35
2 1
G
4 3
X34
RI
G
IO
6 5
8 7
X36 X13
X29
TO 0441.4780
1
2
3 X32 GND
4
5
X28
X22
X21 X26
GND
GND X24
X25
DS1 To side console wiring X24 Front right sidelight and direction indicator X32 Clock
X11 To worklights wiring X25 Front left sidelight and direction indicator X33 Radio (brown)
X12 To worklights wiring X26 Windscreen wiper motor X34 Radio (grey)
X13 To roof wiring X27 Rear screen wiper motor X35 Relay - upper front worklights
X20 CB connector X28 Right front loudspeaker X36 Side console courtesy light
X21 Front right worklight X29 Left front loudspeaker X37 Door open warning signal switch
X22 Front left worklight X30 Right rear loudspeaker
X23 Interior roof light X31 Left rear loudspeaker 0443.7851/10
D0004250 40-175
ROOF WIRING (1/2) 0443.7851/10
ROOF WIRING (2/2)
X33-X34
X37 X23 X36 X32 X20 X27 X26
X12 X11 X13
+ right
- right
+ left
- left
31b
53a
31b
53a
X29 X31 X28 X30
58
X22
30
X21
15
53
53
31
31
-
1 2 1 2 1 2
X25 X24 - 30 58 15 30 - - 15 30
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 6 7 12 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
GND GND GND GND
MB 1
MB 1
Z1
HN 1
HR 1
BR 1
BR 1
BR 1
M1
HN 1
M1
M1
M1
HG 1.5
GR 1.5
M 2.5
GR 1.5
M1.5
M1.5
MB 1.5
HR 2.5
HN 1.5
BN 1.5
MB 1.5
G 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
N1
GV 1.5
GV 1.5
HG 1.5
AG 1.5
HN 1
N 2.5
AG 1.5
HR 1
GN 1.5
HV 1.5
B 1.5
R 1.5
RV 1.5
NV 1.5
H 2.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
M 2.5
M 2.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
GND5
M 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
R 1.5
DS 14
B 1.5
DS 15
MB 2.5
DS 12
AG 1.5
DS 16
H 2.5
DS 17
GR 1.5
DS 20
HR 2.5
DS 19
HN 1
DS 13
N 2.5
DS 21
BR 1
DS 18
HR 1
DS 11
DIS1
G 1.5
DS 01
RV 1.5
DS 02
HV 1.5
DS 03
GN 1.5
DS 04
Low work light
VN 1.5
DS 05
BN 1.5
DS 06
V 2.5
DS 07
Z1
DS 08
GV 1.5
DS 09
GV 1.5
DS 10
4
MB 2.5
HG 2.5 3
3 V1
5 5
2 4 1
M1 V 2.5
1 2
HIGH BEAM LIGHTS/LOW WORK LIGHTS SWITCH OVER (AS)

X35
0443.7851/10
D0004200 40-176
WORKLIGHTS WIRING 0442.4189
WORKLIGHTS WIRING
X11/X12
X99
TO 0443.7851
VG 1
2 2
X99 M1
X11/X12
1 1
X11 To roof wiring

X12 To roof wiring
X99 Rear upper worklights
0442.4189
D0003750 40-177
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ROTATING BEACON WIRING 0441.4780
ROTATING BEACON WIRING
X100
X13
GND
Z1
2
X13 X100
M1
X13 To roof wiring

X100 Rotating beacon
0441.4780
D0003690 40-179
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF
ROOF CONNECTORS LOCATION
1
X22
F0024500
2 X28-X29
X23
F0024560
3 X37
X30-X31
F0024540
40-181
4 X20
X11-X12
F0024570
5 X21
X26
F0024550
X36
F0024580
40-182
7 X34
X33
X35
F0024510
8 GND5
F0024530
9 DS1
F0024480
40-183
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION ROOF WIRING
ROOF WIRING
3 4 5 2 5
10 1
2
6 7
3
4
X13
12
X100
X32
X24
8
F0024490
X25
11
X27
3 10
4 11
12
F0024520
12
X99
0443.7851/10
F0025490 0442.4189
0441.4780
40-185
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONNECTORS LOCATION LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING
CONNECTORS LOCATION LIGHTS SELECTOR SWITCH WIRING
1 X96
1
2
X114
F0025480
X113
F0024420
3
AS4
AS4 Lights selector switch
X96 Hazard switch light (+58)
X113Forward/reverse selector
X114Hazard warning lights switch
F0024430 POWER SHUTTLE: 0443.8656

POWER SHIFT: 0443.8653
40-187
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ARMREST WIRING 0443.7354.4
ARMREST WIRING
X41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 bis 42
AR 1
R1
BN 1
RV 1
LR 1
V1
B1
VB 1
HL 1
RG 1
HR 1
G1
LR 1
LN 1
BR 1
L1
H1
GH 1 / HG 1
1
X42
2
3
TO 0442.9937.4
4
0443.7357
5
6
X43
EHR
1
2
X41 TO 0442.9937.4
3
To 0443.5497 0443.7357
GH 1 / HG 1
VB 1
BN 1
RV 1
LR 1
LN 1
AR 1
HR 1
RG 1
G1
EMR
BR 1
HL 1
L1
R1
H1
V1
B1
1
TO 0442.9937.4
2
0443.7357
3
1 2 3 1 2 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
EHR EMR X43 X42
EHR Lift control lever

EMR Throttle lever
X41 To armrest wiring
0443.7354.4
D0003870 40-189
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
ARMREST WIRING (INTERNAL) 0443.5497
ARMREST WIRING (INTERNAL)

X43b
12V
X42a
X43a
EHR1 EMR1
P A
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 4 5 1 2 3 5 4 6
S
L
M/G 0.75
R/A 0.5
N/A 0.5
V/A 0.5
R/V 0.5
B/N 0.5
M/A 0.5
H/A 0.75
R 0.5
V 0.5
R 0.5
B 0.5
5 3 6 2
S
1 4
H/R 1.0
G/R 1.0
G 1.0
C 1.0
C 1.0
H 1.0
M/G 0.75
H/A 0.75
M/A 0.5
B/N 0.5
R/A 0.5
N/A 0.5
R/V 0.5
G/R 1.0
H/R 1.0
V/A 0.5
R 0.5
B 0.5
R 0.5
C 1.0
C 1.0
V 0.5
G 1.0
H 1.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 42
X41
TO 0443.7354.4
EHR1 Lift control lever

EMR1 Throttle lever
X41 To armrest wiring
X42a Keypad connector
X43a Change gear connector
X43b Change gear connector
0443.5497
D0005460 40-191
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
CONTROL UNIT - FUSES - RELAYS (1/2) 0441.9533
CONTROL UNIT - FUSES - RELAYS (1/2)
FUSES
F1 Main fuse (100A) F21 Upper left high light (see F23 - F9 too) (7.5A)
F2 Rotating beacon - Rear screen wiper (30A) F22 Upper right high light (see F23 - F9 too) (7.5A)
P1
RL1 RL2 RL3
F3 Fan - Air conditioning system (30A) F23 High lights (15A)
+ F4 Rear worklights (see F10 too) (30A) F24 Left lower beam - light - Rear left side lights -
Trailer socket terminal 58L - Left number plate light
F5 Not used
P2 (7.5A)
P6 F6 Front worklights (see F10 too) (30A)
F1 F7 Radio - CB - terminal +15 (20A) F25 Right lower beam - Right number plate light - Rear ri-
ght side lights - railer socket terminal 58 right
100A
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17
F8 Radio - clock - CB - courtesy light - terminal +15 (5A)
F26 Emergency lights (15A)
F9 Lower beam - lower beam including lights switch
3A
F27 Power Shift - Infocenter (7.5A)
15A
15A
15A
30A
30A
15A
7.5A
10A
20A
7.5A
30A
5A
30A
20A
(see F21 - F22 - F23 too) (7.5A)
R LAP F10 Computer - lights switch lighting (7.5A) F28 Operator’s seat(15A)
C F
TOP CHE
HPSA
RAD
CLO STO SEN F11 Stop lights - 4WD (15A) F29 PTO control - PTO keypad (7.5A)
CAB F12 Front screen wiper - Horn (15A) F30 Electronic control engine speed (7A)
F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30
F13 4WD - diff. locking (15A) F31 Left lower beam (see F23 too) (7.5A)
30A
30A
30A
RL4
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
15A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
F14 Front worklights on the flashing pilot lamp (15A) F32 Right lower beam (see F23 too) (7.5A)
+12 F33 Lower and upper lower beam (15A)
DIN F15 Direction indicators lights (15A)
J1 F34 Agronotric h - hD (7.5A)
RIGHT LEFT CHECK PTO F F16 INFOCENTER - Transmission speed sensor - Rear
F18 F19 F20
TOP PTO - Transmission display - air compressed gene- F35 Power Shift terminal 15 (7.5A)
rator - Radar sensor - Switchs pilot lamp (3A)
15A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
F17 Front axle suspension (see F11 too) (7.5A)
RL5 RL6 RL7 F18 Cigar lighter - Connection socket (30A)
J2 F19 Electric socket (30A)
F31 F32 F33 F34 F35
F20 Lower beam including lights switch - High lights
TOP
(see F24 - F25 too) (30A)
RL8 RL9
STOP
P3
STOP
RL10 RL11
TOP
RELAYS
RL12 P4 RL1 Terminal 15 (40A) RL9 4WD solenoid valve (10A)
GND
LIGHT RL2 Rear worklights (40A) RL10 High lights
RL14 RL3 Front worklights (40A) RL11 High lights(10A)
RL13
RL4 Front screen wiper (10A) RL12 Field/road indicator (10A)
RL5 Lights (10A) RL13 4WD solenoid valve (10A)
RL15
PTO EV J3 RL6 Upper and lower lower beacon (10A) RL14 Direction indicators - emergency lights (10A)
E.C.U. RL7 Lower beacon (10A) RL15 High lights commutator (10A)
RL8 Stop lights - 4WD (10A)
P5 CONNECTORS
J1 To side console wiring P3 To side console wiring
P1 To side console wiring P6 To side console wiring
P2 To side console wiring
0441.9533
D0005450 40-193
D0005690
P4 (-31)
P5 - 7 SWITCH LIGHT (LF)
P6 - 3 ROOF POSITION F24

7.5A
2
J1 - 9 SOCKET/FENDER POSITION
5
3
4
P6 - 1 ROOF POSITION (RH) F25
1
7.5A
J1 - 8 SOCKET/FENDER POSITION
4
5
1
D8
FULL BEAM
F1
1N4007
100A
RL10
P1 (+30)
2
FULL BEAM LIGHT COMAND P5 - 12
3
P2 - 3 30 ROOF(clock-cb-radio-light) F8
5A
D2
1N4007
4
P5 - 6 HAZARD/LIGHTS COMAND F26
5
15A
D3
POSITION
1N4007 J2 - 9 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1N4007
SWITCH LIGHT FR.CONSOLE
RL5
P5 - 10
D1 J2 - 6 30 TRANSMISSION F27
2
POS.SWITCH LIGHT P5 - 23 7.5A
3
POSITION P5 - 13
REAR WORK LIGHT POSITION LIGHT F20
J1 - 5 30A
87
85
REAR WORK LIGHT J1 - 6
P3 - 4 LIGHER
REAR WORK L.
P3 - 3 TRAILER SOCKET POWER SUPPLY F18
RL2(40A)
30A
WORK LIGHT COMAND J3 - 9
86
30
P3 - 1 25A SOCKET
ROOF FRONT WORK LIGHT P2 - 2 P3 - 2 25A SOCKET F19

30A
87
85
ROOF FRONT WORK LIGHT P2 - 4
REAR WORK LIGHT F4
RL3(40A)
30A
FRONT WORK L.
FRONT WORK LIGHT COMAND P5 - 21
86
30
ROFF FRONT WORK LIGHT F6

30A
EV F/S P3 - 22
4
5
P3 - 7 HALF-BEAM F23
EV F/S
F/S LEVER SWITCH 15A
D11
1N4007
30
RL13
85
3
CLEAN FIX/LIGHTER P3 - 21
RL1(40A)
J3 - 7 STARTING SWITCH (15)

86
FIELD LIGHT P5 - 19
87
4
STREET LIGHT P5 - 15
5
F/S GEAR BOX SWITCH P3 - 18
D10
SWITCH S/F
1N4007
P5 - 9 HALH/FULL BEAM SWITCH F9
RL12
7.5A
3
STREET/FIELD/CLEAN FIX
F28
15A
4
STOP LIGHT (15A EXT.FUSE) J1 - 4
5
P5 - 20 STOP
F11
STOP COMAND (PEDAL) 20A
D6
1N4007
RL8
STOP
2
FRONT GLASS WIPER/HORN
F12
15A
3
P3 - 5 REAR WINDSCREEN (53a)
EV DT P3 - 17
4
P3 - 6 FLASHER/REAR WINDSCREEN F2
30A
5
1
D7
P3 - 15 HEATING GROUP
1N4007
DT x ASM P5 - 24
RL9
P3 - 14 HEATING GROUP F3
DT/BRAKE
30A
2
DT LIFT INPUT J2 - 8
3
TRAILER BRAKE EV/FRONT AXLE P3 - 19

NOT USED P6 - 9 F10
P5 - 18 COMPUTER/LIGHT SWITCH CONSOLE
ZERO SETTING 7.5A
P5 - 16
2
31b FRONT WINDSCREEN P6 - 10

5
J1 - 7 ENGINE/COLD START E.C.U.

F30
7.5A
RL4
INTERMITTANCE
J3 - 5
FRONT GLASS W.
P5 - 14 LOW FRONT LIGHT

F14
FRONT WIPER POUMP
4 1 6
J3 - 8 15A
HORN/FRONT GLASS WIPER P5 - 17
P5 - 4 NOT USED
53a WINDSCREEN P6 - 4
P5 - 1 DT SWITCH/DISTRIBUTOR
F13
NOT USED P6 - 6 15A
P3 - 12
5
BACK EV PTO J3 - 3 15 HAZARD/LIGHTS COMAND F15

15A
IC1
OUT
+
1
3
GND
PTO MODULE
J2 - 7 FRONT AXLE F17

7.5A
40-194
DIA
IN
INFOCENTER/DISPLAY/ON-OFF CLUTCH SENSOR

2
4
J3 - 6
J2 - 4 NOT USED F16
3A
J2 - 1 REAR PTO/RADAR/WHEEL SENSOR/ARMREST
P3 - 13
5
FRONT EV PTO
P3 - 16 HPSA F7
20A
IC2
OUT
6A100R P2 - 6 15 ROOF(CLOCK-CB-RADIO)
V
+
1
3
GND
D12 F29
7.5A
DIA
IN
P3 - 24 REAR/FRONT PTO E.C.U.

2
4
P5 - 2
FRONT PTO LED P3 - 8 6V

P3 - 20 NOT USED
2
REAR PTO LED P3 - 10 6H
D+ P3 - 11 5
7V
3V
7H
3H
J2 - 2 NOT USED
1
PTO AUTO P3 - 23 IOW LIFT CONTROL/RADAR F34
P3 - 25 J2 - 5
FRONT PTO COMAND 2V 7.5A
REAR PTO COMAND P3 - 9 2H
J2 - 3 15 TRANSMISSION F35 P5 - 3
7.5A
FULL BEAM
J1 - 3
4
FULL BEAM TOP P6 - 2

5
1
D9
1N4007
FULL-BEAM TOP
RL11
TOP SWITCH P5 - 25
3
FULL-BEAM F33
15A
4
5
1
D4
1N4007
RL6
HALF-BEAM TOP
J1 - 2 HALF-BEAM F31
4
7.5A
5
1
D5
1N4007
F32
RL7
J1 - 1 HALF BEAM
7.5A
2
LIGHT COMAND P5 - 22
HALF-BEAM
P2 - 1 HALF-BEAM F22
7.5A
J3 - 2
2 TRAILER
C3
J3 - 1
1 TRAILER F21
P2 - 5 HALF-BEAM
C2
7.5A
J3 - 4
DIR.LIGHT
C1
P5 - 11
TEMP HAZARD ECU 49a
RL14(HAZARD)
49A
TEMP HAZARD ECU 49 P5 - 8

49
G
31
0441.9533
0441.9533

Agrotron - 106-110-115-120-135-150-165 MK3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agrotron - 106-110-115-120-135-150-165 MK3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agrotron - 106-110-115-120-135-150-165 MK3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the general safety rules outlined in the document?

What are the general safety rules outlined in the document?

What components are listed under the connectors section?

What components are listed under the connectors section?

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

AGROTRON 106 MK3

GENERAL SAFETY RULES

HOW THE MANUAL IS STRUCTURED

Section 10 Contains technical descriptions and information regarding the mechan-

Section 40 Contains information and diagrams regarding the machine's electrical

HOW TO CONSULT THE MANUAL

1. Removal and refitting of assembled units

1 :.......................................................................Technique to be applied during refitting

3. List of special tools

HOW TO USE AND UPDATE THE MANUAL

1. UPDATING THE MANUAL

Consecutive page number

20-5-2 Existing page

3. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL

Symbol Meaning Notes Symbol Meaning Notes

Weight of main assemblies.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS

1. Precautions for removal operations

2. Precautions for refitting operations

3. Precautions to be taken on completion of removal/refitting operations

indicated with the symbol

WIRE ROPES - SLINGS

WIRE ROPES POLYESTER SLINGS

8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

NOTE. Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

30° 60° 90° 120° 150°

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NUTS AND

BOLT SIZE 8.8 10.9 12.9

THREADLOCKERS, ADHESIVES, SEALANTS AND

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

ucts; after drying, promotes uniform curing of threadlockers.

FUNCTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

Silastic 738 One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, ready for use.

One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.

Loctite 601 Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive.

Loctite 986/AVX Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.

SYMBOL CODE DESCRIPTION NOTES

T1 00239496 Tool for removal of steering unit inner gasket

T2 00239497 Tool for removal of steering unit dust seal

T3 00239498 Tool for mounting of steering unit inner gasket

T4 00239499 Tool for mounting of steering unit dust seal

T5 5.9030.743.1 Test lead for checking sensors with multimeter

T6 5.9030.743.0 Test lead for checking sensors with multimeter

T7 5.9030.740.0 SERDIA installation disc

T8 5.9030.741.0 Adapter cable

T9 5.9030.740.2 Interface level III

T10 5.9030.742.0 EDS software pack

1. TRANSMISSION................................................................. 1 3. HYDRAULIC FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION..................... 48

• The transmission can be divided into the following three sections:

1.1 TRANSMISSION (Power Shift version)

1.1.1 MAIN COMPONENTS

18. Left brake cylinder

24. Left axle casing

1.1.2 TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM